Capilano College 1990-1991 CALENDAR How To Find Us CAPL IANO COLLEGE KEY Parking Lot 4 A BUILDING Information and Reception, Registrar's Office, Extension Programs and Services, Art Studios and Offices, Administration Offices, Purchasing and Receiving, Personnel. B BUILDING Library, Achievement Resource Centre, Cafeteria, Media Resources Labs and Offices. ( Purcell Way ") H BUILDING Music/Typing/Microcomputer/Science Labs, Faculty Offices for: Humanities, Social Sciences, Natural Sciences, Office Administration, Music, Business Management, Labour Studies, Writing Centre. NORTH I BUILDING Revised 8/89 Art Studios, Faculty Offices. Handicapped Paiking P a r k i n g Lot 1 * Call 984-4945 for a map indicating access for the disabled. N BUILDING Cafeteria, Student Society Offices, Student Lounge. Capilano College 1990-1991 LYNNMOUR CAMPUS and Administrative Offices 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver B.C. V7J 3H5 Telephone (604) 986-1911 TDD (for deaf) 980-9921 FAX (604) 984-4985 Capilano College is a smoke-free environment. SECHELT CAMPUS 5627 Inlet Avenue P.O. Box 1609 Sechelt, B.C. VON 3A0 Telephone (604) 885-9310 Toll free from Vancouver: 987-1535 FAX (604) 987-1535 SQUAMISH CAMPUS 37827 Second Avenue P.O. Box 1538 Squamish, B.C. VON 3G0 Telephone (604) 892-5322 Toll free from Vancouver: 986-3515 FAX (604) 986-3515 Table of Contents Welcome to Capilano College 3 Academic Schedule 4 Admission 5 Who is Eligible 5 When to Apply 5 How to Apply 5 Registration 6 How to Register 7 When to Register 7 Changing Registration Status 8 Fees 8 General Course Information 10 Academic Policies 11 Services 14 Academic Advising 14 Achievement Resource Centre ...14 Athletics 15 Bookstore 15 Counselling 15 Disabled Student Services 16 Distance Education 16 Fitness Centre 16 Food and Beverage Services 16 Health Services 16 International Education 17 Library 18 Lost and Found 18 Parking 18 Student Employment Centre 19 Student Newspaper 19 Student Society 20 Student Store 20 Writing Centre 20 Financial Aid and Awards 21 PREPARATORY PROGRAMS Pre-College Level Courses 28 Achievement Resource Centre ...29 Adult Basic Education 30 Alternative Career Training 33 English as a Second Language ...34 ACADEMIC STUDIES/UNIVERSITY TRANSFER PROGRAMS 35 Anthropology 39 Art History 40 Biology 42 Chemistry 45 Chinese 46 Commerce 47 Computing 48 Economics 50 English 51 French 54 Geography 56 Geology German History Japanese Labour Studies Mathematics Music Philosophy Physics Political Studies Psychology Sociology Spanish Thai Theatre Women's Studies 58 58 59 60 61 63 66 67 70 71 73 74 76 77 77 80 CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS.81 Applied InfoTech 82 Aquaculture 87 Art Programs 89 Studio Art 90 Art Institute 94 Clay and Textile Arts 95 Crafts Instructor Training 98 Graphic Design & Illustration ....99 Business Management 104 Administrative Management ...105 Financial Management 106 Marketing Management 106 Computer Systems Management 107 International Business 107 Accelerated Business Management 108 Part-Time Evening Certificate Programs 109 R.I.A., C.G.A. and C A . Transfer 110 Communications 120 Early Childhood Education 122 Health and Human Services 126 Long Term Care Aide 126 Food Service Worker 127 Working with the Mentally Fragile : 127 Landscape Horticulture 128 Legal Assistant 130 Media Resources 134 Merchandising Management 138 Music 141 Commercial Music 142 Bachelor of Music Transfer 143 Music Therapy 145 Office Administration 152 Office Technology 152 Accelerated Office Training 154 Information Processing 155 Legal Secretarial 157 Medical Office Assistant 160 Outdoor Recreation Management 162 Wilderness Leadership 163 Tourism Management 167 Tourism Management Co-op ...167 Tourism Supervisory Cert 168 SPECIAL PROGRAMS Asia Pacific Management Co-operative Program 170 NON-CREDIT PROGRAMS AND COURSES Extension Programs and Services .172 Achievement Resource Centre 172 TRANSFER GUIDE 173 Index 191 Governance and Administration Inside Back Cover Frequently Called Number Inside Back Cover Since the Calendar is published well in advance of the academic year, Capilano College reserves the right to make such changes as necessary, including the cancellation or adjustment of programs or courses, and changes in fee structure or other regulations or services. A l though every effort is made to ensure accuracy at the time of printing, the statements in this Calendar are not to be regarded as an irrevocable contract between the student and the College. Capilano Welcomes You Welcome to Capilano College Over the last twenty-one years, Capilano College has experienced a great deal of growth, but two elements have remained constant: commitment to the student and to quality education. The successes of our Academic Studies students transferring to university and our Career/ Vocational students entering the work force have contributed to our excellent reputation. To meet the needs of a changing society and to prepare students for the future, we are continually updating our wide array of programs and courses with the assistance of key decision-makers drawn from business and industry. Because the College is committed to its students and the life-long process of learning, it has become the first choice for many students. Emphasis on Excellence Capilano College both encourages and rewards student excellence through its awards and recognition programs: • Academic scholarships to outstanding high school graduates enrolling at Capilano • Dean's List for full-time students with a 3.5 grade point average or higher • Merit List for part-time students with a 3.7 grade point average or higher when they have successfully completed a minimum of 30 or 60 term hours at Capilano College • President's Award to the Career and Academic Studies graduates achieving exceptional academic excellence • Science and Music scholarship programs • Scholarships for academic excellence for returning students • Priority registration for high school graduates with a 2.5 grade point average or better who are enrolling in Academic Studies programs • An Outstanding Student program that recognizes current students for their high academic standings or significant contributions to the College or community • Book Awards • Club Optima, an academic competition open to top Grade 12 students. Douglas K. Jardine, President About Capilano College Since September 1968, when Capilano College first opened its doors to just over 700 students, it has grown steadily to become one of British Columbia's most outstanding Colleges, with over 5,000 students. The College directly serves North and West Vancouver, Howe Sound and the Sunshine Coast, with the core of the College located at the Lynnmour campus in North Vancouver and campuses in Sechelt and Squamish. Approximately 33 per cent of student enrollment now comes from outside these regions. Capilano College offers a variety of programs which include: • Academic Studies: Students take the first two years of an Arts or Science degree, or a professional program and then transfer to university or enter the work force. • Career/Vocational Programs: Certificate and diploma programs give students practical skills and knowledge to prepare them for employment or transfer to other post-secondary institutions. • Preparatory Programs: After upgrading or refreshing their skills, students can gain employment or continue on to Career/Vocational or Academic Studies programs. • Extension Programs and Services: Short courses, seminars, workshops, and lectures are offered on a non-credit basis. Our programs have gained an excellent reputation, which we believe is largely attributable to our highly qualified, dedicated faculty, and our success in attracting many outstanding students. Capilano College is more than a classroom. It plays a key role in the civic and cultural life of the three regions it serves and will continue to be a dynamic source of leadership within its communities. 3 1990-1991 Academic Schedule 1990 FALL TERM 1991 SPRING TERM JULY 30 - AUGUST 10 - Early Registration AUGUST 6 (Monday): B.C. Day. College closed. AUGUST 27 (Monday): Career and Vocational Program Registration, (see Fall 1990 Timetable for details) Faculty Advisors present. JANUARY 2 (Tuesday): Career and Vocational Program Registration, (see Spring 1991 Timetable for details). Faculty Advisors present. AUGUST 27,28, 29,30,31, (Monday - Friday): Academic Program Registration, (see Fall 1990 Timetable for details). Faculty Advisors present. JANUARY 9 (Wednesday): Classes commence for all Divisions. SEPTEMBER 3 (Monday): Labour Day. College closed. SEPTEMBER 4 (Tuesday): Classes commence for all Divisions. JANUARY 2,3,4, 7, 8: Academic Program Registration, (see Spring 1991 Timetable for details). Faculty Advisors present. JANUARY 22 (Tuesday): Last day to ADD a course, or change status from AUDIT to CREDIT or withdraw from a course and not be invoiced for the balance of tuition fees owing. SEPTEMBER 17 (Monday): Last day to ADD a course or change status from AUDIT to CREDIT or withdraw from a course and not be invoiced for the balance of tuition fees owing. FEBRUARY 14-15 (Thursday, Friday): Reading break. No classes scheduled. OCTOBER 8 (Monday): Thanksgiving Day. College closed. MARCH 18 (Friday): Last day to WITHDRAW from a course, or change status from CREDIT to AUDIT, or change sections. OCTOBER 18 (Thursday): Final Date for payment of Balance of Tuition Fees. NOVEMBER 8 (Thursday): Last day to withdraw from a course, or change status from CREDIT to AUDIT, or change sections. NOVEMBER 12 (Monday): Remembrance Day. College closed. FEBRUARY 21 (Thursday): Final Date for payment of Balance of Tuition Fees. MARCH 29: Good Friday. College closed. APRIL 1: Easter Monday. College closed. APRIL 17-30: Examination Period. MAY 20 (Monday): Victoria Day. College closed. MAY 25 (Saturday): Spring Graduation. NOVEMBER 16 (Friday): Fall Graduation. NOVEMBER 26 - DECEMBER 7: Early Registration for Spring Term for Career and Vocational Students. DECEMBER 3-14 (Wednesday - Saturday): Examination Period. DECEMBER 24 - 26 - Christmas Break. College closed. 1990 1991 July 1990 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 August 1990 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 January 1991 5 M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8C3TTB 11 12 13 14 15 T6"l7 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 February 1991 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 September 1990 S M T W T F S 1 2 >,4 5 6 7 8 October 1990 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 March 1991 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 April 1991 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18,19 20 21 22 23 24 25^6)27 28 29 30 December 1990 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 May 9/noJ: 12 13 14 15 16M718 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 November 1990 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Introduction — Academic Schedule 1991 M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 S June 1991 S M T W T F S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Admission Who is Eligible for Admission should be accompanied by a $75 (Can.) application fee. Canadian citizens and Landed Immigrants are eligible for admission if they are in at least one of the following categories: See page 17 for information on International Students. 1. Persons who have a B.C. Secondary School graduation certificate or equivalent educational record. 2. Persons 18 years of age or older who do not have a B.C. Secondary School graduation certificate or equivalent. 3. Persons who are secondary school students attending a school in the College Region and have the written recommendation of their school principal. 4. Persons at least 16 years of age who can satisfy a College counsellor that they possess an interest in, and an aptitude for, a vocation for which the College provides instruction, may be eligible to enter the related College Vocational program. International Student Information Capilano College welcomes applications for admission from well-qualified students who are normally resident in countries outside Canada. Generally, to be considered for admission, applicants should possess the equivalent of Secondary School graduation (Grade 12) in the Province of British Columbia. Students wishing assessment of their academic credentials should contact the Registrar of the College. Students whose primary language is not English must demonstrate the competency in English required to be successful in their studies. In some instances, the English Language Assessment Test (ELAT) or the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) may be required. Based on the College's assessment of the applicant's facility, students may be required to successfully complete a prescribed course of study in English to a level deemed sufficient for academic success. In certain programs, enrollment limitations are in effect both for international students and for Canadian citizens and residents. Entry to these programs is competitive and is based on academic standing and other published criteria. In accord with Provincial Government policy, international students are subject to higher tuition fees than Canadian students. In addition to courses offered in English as a Second Language (ESL) programs, admission of international students is also open to all courses in the Academic (University Transfer) and Career/Vocational Divisions. The attention of interested students is directed to closing dates for applications for Fall and Spring Terms in an earlier section of this Calendar. Applications for admission from international students When to Apply for Admission Generally, applications for Admission to the College may be made at any time during the year. However, for Canadian citizens and landed immigrants, early application deadlines have been established in relation to the formal In-Person registration period for each term. For international students, no application received for admission to the Academic Division less than six weeks prior to the commencement of a term can be guaranteed consideration in time for admission in that term; no application for admission to the Career Division less than five months prior to the commencement of a term can be guaranteed consideration in time for admission in that term. A. For Academic Studies Programs and Courses Persons applying for Academic Studies by the deadlines listed below will, if they are accepted, be registered on the date and time listed on their Permit to Register. Acceptance notices and permits to register will be mailed to each successful applicant within one month of the application deadline. Persons who apply after the deadline, but before the formal in-person registration periods, will be able to register only at a later sequence in the registration period. Term Application Deadline Dates Acceptance Mailed Fall '90 Spring '91 Summer '91 May 31/90 Oct. 31/90 March 30/91 June 30/90 Nov. 30/90 as processed B. For Career and Vocational Programs and Courses Most Career and Vocational programs have earlier application deadlines than those listed above. For details please refer to the specific program in this Calendar. Generally, applications for the next Fall Term should be received before March 1. How to Apply for Admission A. Lynnmour Campus 1. Obtain an "Application for Admission Form" from the Registrar's Office. Persons wishing to enter full-time programs of study or who need assistance in completing this form are advised to arrange a meeting with a College Academic Advisor by calling the Advising Office at 9844990. Introduction — Admission 5 Canadian citizens, landed immigrants, and international students already in Canada on a student visa wishing admittance to the College to enter a Career program must arrange an interview with the Career Program Coordinator prior to being admitted. International students not yet in Canada wishing admittance to a Career program must have the Career Program Coordinator's recommendation for admission before being admitted. Individuals who are not admitted to a particular Career program may still be eligible for admission to the College to enter an Academic Studies or General Studies program. If in doubt please contact the Registrar's Office. 2. Complete the Application Form and bring or mail it to the Registrar's Office. Include with your Application Form Official High School Transcripts, Official Transcripts from other post-secondary institutions, and English Placement Test scores. 3. Once your application for Admission and supporting documents have been received, the application will be processed and you will receive a Letter of Acceptance and a "Permit to Register" from the Registrar's Office by mail. (See page 4 for Registration dates and procedures.) * B. Howe Sound and Sunshine Coast Each term Capilano College offers a number of courses in Howe Sound and the Sunshine Coast. Students who wish to be admitted to the College in order to register for these courses should contact the Squamish Campus (37827 2nd Avenue, 892-5322 or toll free from North Van. 9863515) or the Sechelt Campus (5627 Inlet Avenue, 885-9310 or 987-1535) for forms and details of course offerings. Counselling services are available at both centres and the application procedures are as outlined above. Student Number - Identification Card When a student has been accepted and is first admitted to the College s/he is assigned a permanent student number. This number controls the Student's Record, Statement of Grades and Student Identification Card. Student Identification Cards are issued at the beginning of the term for which a student is registered. These cards will be available from the Registrar's Office within two weeks after the beginning of classes. If the card is lost, a duplicate may be obtained from the Registrar's Office for $3.00. To use the Library services of the College, to sign out audio-visual materials or to vote in Student Society elections, a student must have a Student Identification Card. Registration Academic Studies Once you have received your Letter of Acceptance and/ or Permit to Register, you may select the courses in which you wish to register. Registration is done in a priority sequence each term and will be determined by a system of student number coupled with Grade Point Average (GPA). Please go to the Advising Centre or the Registrar's Office for details. Applicants with international Baccalaureate* An applicant who has completed the International Baccalaureate Diploma will receive advanced placement or advanced credit as appropriate in those subjects where a grade of 6 or better was achieved. Advanced Placement Program* An applicant who has passed an Advanced Placement examination administered by the College Entrance Examination Board with a grade of 4 or better, will receive advanced placement or granted advanced credit in the subject(s) as appropriate. * Students currently enrolled in Grade 12 should ensure that the Office of the Registrar at Capilano College receives a copy of their Advanced Placement or International Baccalaureate results if they wish to be considered for advanced placement and/or advanced credit. Introduction — Registration 6 YOU SHOULD REMEMBER THAT, BECAUSE OF THE LARGE NUMBER OF STUDENTS ENROLLING, THE COLLEGE IS NOT ABLE TO GUARANTEE REGISTRATION IN SPECIFIC PROGRAMS OR COURSES EVEN IF YOU HAVE BEEN GRANTED ADMISSION. REGISTRATION IS ALSO DEPENDENT UPON HAVING THE PREREQUISITES OF INDIVIDUAL PROGRAMS OR COURSES. YOUR 'PERMIT TO REGISTER' WILL INFORM YOU OF THE DAY AND TIME YOU WILL BE ABLE TO REGISTER FOR YOUR COURSES. (For example, a student whose G.P.A. is 3.0 or greater would receive an earlier registration date than students with a lesser G.P.A.) How to Register When to Register 1. For Academic Programs and Courses at Lynnmour: 1. Academic Studies Programs and Courses a. Obtain a registration form and timetable from the Registrar's Office or the Squamish or Sechelt Campus. Timetables giving the times of course offerings, room numbers and instructors are available approximately three weeks prior to each registration period. Academic students will register at the time and on the date as indicated on their Permit to Register. 2. Career and Vocational Programs and Courses b. Select the courses and sections you wish to take and complete the registration form. The DATE and TIME for you to register will be on your Permit to Register. All registration will take place In Person and payment of fees is required at that time. Career and Vocational students who have not preregistered through their Coordinator may register as follows: FALL 1990 Term: August 27,1990 SPRING 1991 Term: January 2,1991 2. For Career and Vocational Programs and Courses Student Responsibility a. Obtain a registration form and timetable from the Registrar's Office or the Squamish or Sechelt Campus. It is the responsibility of the student to ensure that his/ her registration is accurate and complete, and that tuition fees are paid at the appropriate time. Failure to do so may result in no credit granted for work done or immediate de-registration for non-payment of tuition fees. b. Complete and submit registration forms and fees payable to the appropriate coordinator for approval. For new full-time students this will normally involve an interview and counselling. Part-time Career and Vocational students may either mail in or bring in their registration form and appropriate fees at any time. c. Registration can often be completed prior to the registration period; however, new registrants who have been accepted and returning students who have not completed their registration must submit approved registration forms and fees payable to the Registrar's Office during Registration for Career students. 3. For Courses in Howe Sound and the Sunshine Coast a. Obtain a registration form and timetable from the Registrar's Office on the Lynnmour Campus or from the Squamish or Sechelt Campus. Right to Register A student who has not maintained a satisfactory standing in a program in any term may be denied permission to register in that program in a subsequent term. Change of Name and/or Address It is the responsibility of the student to inform the Registrar's Office of any changes in his/her name, address or phone number. Documentation must be provided to support a change of name request. Course Overload b. Complete and return the registration form, with payment attached, to the appropriate centre. A course overload is a registration for more than 16 credit hours of academic courses or more than the full requirements specified for a Career program. 4. For Courses on More than One Campus Students may register at their discretion for a course overload up to a total of 21 credit hours as long as they have discussed their need or wish for an overload with a counsellor. Science students, however, are automatically allowed to register for more than 16 credit hours, as long as the total credit hours does not exceed 21 credit hours and does not arise from registration in more than five courses. a. Obtain a registration form and timetable from the Registrar's Office on the Lynnmour Campus or from the Squamish and Sechelt Campus. b. Complete and return the registration form, with payment attached, to the Lynnmour Campus. 5. For Extension Courses and Activities See page 172 of the Calendar. Students may not register for a course overload until after the Registration period. Introduction — Registration 7 Changing Registration Status English Proficiency Withdrawing from a Course or Changing from Applicants are required to be functional i n the English language. The College reserves the right to assess the competence of applicants i n the English language prior to granting admission. Credit to Audit Status Those students w h o w i s h to enroll i n English must submit the results of the Language Proficiency Index Test w i t h their registration forms or must take the Capilano College English Diagnostic Test before registering for any of these courses. Schedules of English Diagnostic Tests w i l l be available i n the Registrar's Office - 984-4913; Squamish Learning Centre - 892-5322 (986-3515); Sechelt Learning "Centre - 885-9310 (987-1535); the Humanities D i v i s i o n 984-4957, or the A d v i s i n g Centre - 984-4990. Wait Lists Students w h o register but are unable to get into a course because it is full w i l l automatically be i n c l u d e d o n a chronological wait list. Students must attend the first class of that course to either be accepted into the class or have their names remain o n the wait list. Students m a y w i t h d r a w from a course or change from credit to audit status after the last d a y of the In-Person Registration period but before the final date to w i t h d r a w from a course. This must be done o n a Course Change F o r m signed b y the instructor involved and submitted to the Registrar's Office. Requests after the final date to w i t h d r a w from a course require the approval of the Instructor, Coordinator and Registrar. A p p r o v a l w i l l not n o r m a l l y be granted unless the records of the College are incorrect as the result of an error b y the College, or the student is s i m p l y requesting a change from one section to another of the same course, or is transferring to a lower level at the request of the instructor, or the student is unable to meet the deadline date because of illness or emergency circumstances. * N O T E : Approval for late adds and/or late drops will not be granted simply because the student was unaware of, or neglected to comply with, the College's registration policies and procedures. Course Verification F o l l o w i n g the last d a y to add a course the Registrar's Office w i l l issue Course Verification forms to each student. IT IS T H E S T U D E N T ' S R E S P O N S I B I L I T Y T O C H E C K H I S / H E R LIST O F C O U R S E S . If a student believes that there is an error in h i s / h e r registration, s / h e must correct the errors with a Course Change Form before the final w i t h d r a w a l date. Failure to correct the error may result i n an T* grade o n the student's transcript (or no credit being granted for w o r k done). Adding or Changing a Course A student may enroll i n a course, change sections, or change from audit to credit status (see A c a d e m i c Schedule, page 4) after the registration period but before the final date to add a course. This must be done o n a Course Change form, be signed b y the instructors i n v o l v e d a n d submitted to the Registrar's Office. The addition of a course or change from audit to credit status after the final date to add a course m a y only be done in exceptional circumstances and with the approval of the Instructor, Coordinator and Registrar. Requests for such changes after the final date to add a course should be directed first to the Registrar. Introduction — Changing Registration Status 8 Fees Tuition Fees The new tuition fees for the 1990/91 instructional year w i l l be announced i n the Fall Timetable w h i c h w i l l be available at least one month prior to the beginning of the Fall '90 term. It is likely that they w i l l be higher than i n 1989/1990. For details of payment of fees consult the Timetable. A s a general guideline, the basic tuition fees for 1989/90 were: • $25.50 per credit hour of w h i c h $15.50 is refundable if the course is dropped within the first t w o weeks of the term. • $32.50 non-refundable registration fee. • $2.25 per credit hour Student Society M e m b e r s h i p Fee to a term m a x i m u m of $37.50. (This fee is optional for courses i n H o w e Sound and on the Sunshine Coast.) • $0.25 per credit hour Capilano Courier Newspaper Fee, to a m a x i m u m of $7.50 • $5.00 Recreational Facility L e v y for students o n the L y n n m o u r campus registered i n 1.5 credits or more. • $3 per credit hour or a m i n i m u m of $25 late payment penalty for students w h o have not settled their tuition fees account b y the end of the fifth week of the term. Fees International Student Fees* • $150.00 per credit hour. • $32.50 non-refundable registration fee. • $2.25 per credit hour Student Society Membership Fee per term to a maximum of $37.50. • $5.00 Recreational Facility Levy for students on the Lynnmour campus. • $0.25 per credit hour Capilano Courier Newspaper Fee, to a maximum of $7.50 • International Student Fees are payable in full at the time of registration and are non-refundable. Conditions of Registration a. A l l cheques and money orders are to be made payable to "Capilano College" and accompanied by a completed Registration Form. b. Underpaid registrations will not be processed. c. A charge of $10.00 will be levied for costs of handling cheques returned by the bank for insufficient funds. The College reserves the right to take only money orders, certified cheques, or cash from students whose cheques are returned by the bank for insufficient funds. d. Post-dated cheques will not be accepted. e. Students whose fees are to be paid by agencies, other than Government Scholarships, are required to present a letter to this effect at registration. f. Students with outstanding debts to the College will not be allowed to register until their debts are cleared. Special Fee Waivers for Senior Citizens Any person 60 years of age or over is entitled to free tuition, and is not required to pay student activity fees or the capital levy. Applicants for this special senior citizen fee waiver need only produce appropriate identification such as the Courtesy Card for senior citizens or Pharmacare card at the time of registration. Senior citizens must pay the $32.50 registration fee. Fees Policy • Extension Programs and Services Department Tuition fees charged for Extension Programs and Services are based on the principle of recovering the cost of instructional and related expenses. Refunds: The College reserves the right to cancel any course for which registration does not reach the required minimum, and to withdraw, postpone, or combine classes or to change instructors. Fees are payable at time of registration. Fees paid for courses or workshops cancelled by the College will be refunded in full. Applications for withdrawal and refund will not be accepted after the second session of a course has been held and in the case of workshops of short duration (up to three consecutive days) withdrawal applications will be accepted no later than the day before the workshop commences. Refunds are subject to a 20% administration charge. Refunds on discounted and package fees will be subject to the 20% administration charge against the full course fee. Any departure from the foregoing policy will be stated in the course or workshop description. Under no circumstances will refunds be given after the end of a course of workshop. Transfers: In specified courses a student may transfer from one course to another if space is available. Fees are not transferable from one term to another. Fee Waiver for Senior Citizens: People age 60 and over are eligible for a 10% discount on fees for most courses. Some co-sponsored and certain other courses are excluded from this policy. At time of registration senior citizens are asked to provide proof of age, such as a Pharmacare card or senior citizens' courtesy card. Also, see "Limit of Responsibility", page 13. For cost-recoverable courses such as Art Institute and private music instruction, seniors must pay full fees. Non-registration Returning students with debts to the College (e.g. lost materials, lost equipment, tuition fees not paid) will be refused registration until such debts are erased. Refunds Students withdrawing from a course within the first two weeks of a term will be refunded a portion of the tuition fees if they have paid more than the non-refundable deposit. In 1989/90 the non-refundable portion was $10 per credit hour and the $32.50 registration fee. Students withdrawing from a course after the end of the second week of a term receive no refund. Introduction — Fees 9 General Course Information The Instructional Year The instructional year is divided into two four month terms, Fall and Spring, and an equivalent Summer Session of two months (May and June). Course Credits A student will receive credit only for the courses in which s/he is officially registered according to the records in the Registrar's Office. A credit hour normally represents one hour per week of classroom work per term. Most courses offered are three credit hour courses. As such, they normally require three class hours per week and may, in addition, require laboratories, seminars and tutorials. Credit Status A student may attend all classes, seminars, labs, etc. of the course and pays the normal tuition fee. S/he is required to submit assignments and sit examinations. (See Attendance.) NOTE: Credit for courses successfully challenged will apply towards a Certificate or Diploma from Capilano College; however, some other institutions may not grant credit for some courses challenged. Attendance A student is expected to attend all classes in which s/he is registered, since evaluation of progress in any course is cumulative, based on class assignments, participation and examinations. If illness, injury, or death in the family prevents a student from completing an assignment or examination, s/he must notify the instructor immediately. If completing the assignment or examination is feasible and acceptable within the program, the student shall submit reasons and/or documentation to the satisfaction of the instructor within 7 days of the due date of the assignment or examination. Faculty members are authorized to dismiss from a class a student who is disruptive to the learning process. Visitors Audit Status A student may attend all meetings of a credit class without receiving credit. The audit student attends all classes, seminars, labs, etc. of the class and pays the normal tuition fee. S/he is not required to sit examinations or submit assignments. The status of audit will be denied by an instructor if the student has not met the attendance requirements for that class. This denial may be appealed through the grade appeal process. Audit students will be accepted on a space available basis, and are only permitted to register after the last day of InPerson Registration. Credit-Free Status (Extension Programs and Services) A student who has paid the appropriate fee is registered for a credit-free course or activity. Course Challenge Procedure The College has a policy which allows registered College students to request examination for achievement in certain courses. By this procedure, a student may receive credit for a course without taking the course. Interested students should consult a counsellor for current information on the challenge procedure. There are certain courses which may not be challenged. A student challenging a course will be required to pay the normal tuition fee for that course. Courses challenged successfully will be indicated on the student's transcript. Introduction — General Course Information 10 A person may attend a class session as a visitor for a limited period of time, provided s/he has permission from the instructor in advance. This privilege does not extend to science and language labs or courses requiring the use of machinery or materials. A visitor is not registered, does not sit examinations, does not receive credit and attends not more than three weeks during the term. Examination Week For students enrolled in academic courses, the last week of the instructional term is designated as an examination week. If there is to be an examination in a course near the end of a term, it is during this week that the examination will be given. Such examinations will be up to three hours in duration. Faculty will be accessible during the examination week to meet with students to review their assignments and final letter grade and/or engage in other instruction-related activities. For students enrolled in Career/Vocational programs, the last week of the instructional term will include having regularly scheduled class sessions during which time an examination may be administered, or in some program areas a special examination schedule may be set. Students should consult with their instructors for detailed information regarding examination schedules. Academic Policies Grading System Capilano College uses the following categories of grading: Letter Grade Point Value A+ A AB+ B BC+ C CD CR F NC 41/3 4 3 2/3 31/3 3 2 2/3 21/3 2 1 2/3 1 I W NA AUD 0 0 - Classification Excellent Upon the completion of the required assignments by the specified time, the instructor will record the final grade based on the completed work. Students are cautioned that other institutions may include "I" grades in the GPA calculation. A student who registers for a course, does not attend and does not officially withdraw may be assigned a grade designation of "NA" at the discretion of the individual instructor. NA grades are assigned as of the final Drop date for the term registered in. Good Satisfactory Minimal Pass Credit Granted* Fail No Credit Granted*+ Incomplete* Withdrawn*+ Not Attend ing*+ Audit* * not calculated in Grade Point Average + not shown on transcript Repeating a Course A course may be repeated for the purpose of improving a grade. The grade for each attempt will be recorded with the higher grade used in the computation of the Grade Point Average. Students are cautioned that other institutions may include both grades in the GPA computation. Grade Point Average (GPA) GPAs are reported on each Permanent Student Record. The GPA is the sum of the grade point hours earned in the term, divided by the number of credit hours applicable to the Grade Point Computation. Interpretation of Grades "I" Grades are given at the end of a term when, in the judgement of the instructor, the student would have a reasonable expectation of passing the course but has not completed the work required. An "I" grade is only awarded where the instructor and student have arranged for the work to be completed by a specified date, which is noted in the class list with grades. A student granted an "I" grade must complete the necessary assignments on the date specified by the instructor on the grade sheet or s/he will automatically receive a predetermined grade which reflects the work not completed. STUDENTS WHO HAVE APPLIED FOR STUDENT LOANS SHOULD NOTE THAT N / A GRADES DO NOT CARRY CREDIT AND ARE TREATED AS COURSE WITHDRAWALS. N / A GRADES REDUCE YOUR CREDIT LOAD AND MAY CANCEL YOUR ELIGIBILITY FOR FUTURE STUDENT LOANS AND REQUIRE EARLY REPAYMENT OF EXISTING STUDENT LOANS. All "F" grades are recorded on the student's transcript. These grades are assigned a value of zero in the calculation of a student's Cumulative Grade Point Average. Students are cautioned that other institutions may not grant transfer credit for courses completed with a "D" grade. Registering as an audit student does not guarantee that a student will receive audit status. Based on attendance and participation requirements of the instructor, an instructor will confirm or deny the "audit" status of a student in their course. A denial ruling is open to appeal by the student. The grades "CR" or "NC" are assigned to courses in which a level of mastery is required for successful completion. When a course is graded in this manner, the course outline must state the necessary requirements to achieve the grade of CR. Official Transcript/Statement of Grades A statement of grades is either mailed or distributed from the Registrar's Office. Official transcripts are issued only at the request of the student. The student must complete a Transcript Order Form and pay $5.00 for the first copy and $2.00 for each additional copy. Appeal of Final Grades It is essential that a student take immediate action if s/he wishes to appeal a grade. To do so s/he must contact a counsellor not later than two weeks after receipt of grades or Change of Grade Notification. The counsellor will discuss the grade and appeal procedure with the student and attempt to arrange a meeting with the instructor. The General Information —Academic Policies 11 counsellor will provide the student with a "Final Grade Appeal" form. If the student wishes to pursue the appeal, the student must do so within fourteen calendar days of the date on which the counsellor's report is mailed. Failure to meet this timeline will be grounds for dismissal of the appeal. To continue the appeal, the student completes the "Final Grade Appeal" form and submits it to the Secretary of the Appeals Committee with a fee of $20 for each course to be appealed. Appeals are considered by an Appeals Committee chaired by one of the College Deans. The Committee consists of representatives from faculty, students, and a counsellor. During the Appeal process all term grades, including the final examination mark, are taken into consideration. In all cases the student is informed in writing of the Committee's decision. Should the mark be changed, the $20 fee is refunded. A B Biology Chemistry Computing Science Geography Geology Mathematics Physics Anthropology Art Art History Chinese Commerce Economics English French German History Japanese Music Philosophy Political Studies Psychology Sociology Spanish Thai Theatre Women's Studies 2. For a Career Studies Diploma (by program) a. Completed the program requirements, fifty percent of which must be completed at Capilano College. b. Obtained a 2.00 Grade Point Average or better. 3. For a General Studies Diploma Only those appeals that follow the above process will be considered. a. Completed 60 credit hours at least 30 of which must be completed at Capilano College. Human errors and omissions in the Statement of Grades will be corrected as soon as identified without appeal or cost to the student. b. Obtained a 2.00 Grade Point Average or better. Diploma and Certificate Requirements Students who complete their programs fill out a "Request for Diploma or Certificate" form at the Registrar's Office one month before the end of the term in which the program is to be completed. Students who complete courses which are not part of a program may also apply to the Registrar's Office for a Certificate. To be eligible for an Associate in Arts and Science Diploma, a student must have: To be eligible for a Certificate, a student must have successfully completed the requirements of a course or program of studies of fewer than four terms in duration, at least fifty percent of which must be completed at Capilano College, and they must have obtained at least a 2.0 G P A (where calculated) in the last term. There is a $10 fee for diploma replacement. Academic Difficulties Students who are experiencing difficulties in their course work during a term may be referred by an instructor to a Counsellor. The student is encouraged to consult with his/her instructor and Counsellor to evolve a satisfactory plan which will remedy these difficulties. 1. For an Academic Studies Diploma a. Completed 60 credit hours, of which at least 30 must be completed at Capilano College. b. Obtained a 2.00 Grade Point Average or better. c. Obtained at least 45 credit hours from the following subject areas, including at least 6 credit hours in English (100 level or higher), at least 6 credit hours from subjects listed in A below, and at least 15 credit hours from 200 level courses. Disruptive Students In the case where the behaviour of a student or group of students is such as to disrupt the activity of a class, an instructional group, service area or study facility, a member of the faculty or staff may ask the student(s) to modify their behaviour. Should the student(s) fail to follow this request, the student(s) will be asked to leave. If the student(s) refuses to leave, the faculty or staff is advised to cancel the activity or insist on an alternate place for the student(s) to carry out the activity. Some time between the cancelled activity and the next meeting of the group, or use of the facility, the student(s) will be requested to meet with the personnel involved and the appropriate faculty coordinator. The purpose of the meeting is to have a commitment from the student(s) to General Information — Academic Policies 12 more reasonable behaviour in the future. In light of this and at the discretion of the coordinator, other faculty and/or the Dean may be invited to the meeting or subsequent meetings. Should the behaviour of the student(s) continue to be disruptive, the coordinator may recommend to the Dean that the student(s) be required to withdraw. Cheating and Plagiarism A l l forms of cheating, including plagiarism, are serious offences and will normally result in a grade of zero on the examination or assignment, or, at the instructor's discretion, a grade of "F" for the course. Plagiarism is the presentation of another person's words or ideas as if they were one's own. Intentional plagiarism is both dishonest and a rejection of the principles of scholarship. Students in doubt about the need for and practices of acknowledgement of sources should familiarize themselves with proper scholarly procedures. A document explaining these procedures is available from the Media Centre or the Achievement Resource Centre. Student Records All official student records are kept in the Registrar's Office. The information on file for a student is always available to that student for examination. No information on file is divulged to any agency or person other than the student without the student's permission except for institutional research projects approved by the College. Students are cautioned that student loan applications and other similar applications have such consent written in the document. Limit of Responsibility The College accepts no responsibility for the cancellation or discontinuance of any course or program or class of instruction that may be necessary as a result of an Act of God, fire, labour problems, lack of funds, or other similar causes. The College accepts no responsibility for any injury, loss or expense sustained, arising out of or in any way connected with a student's participation in any course or program. Copyright Policy A copy of the College Policy and Procedures regarding Canadian Copyright Law is available in the Library and in all departments. This policy applies to all College departments, employees and students. A shortened version with specific application for students is available in the Library and the Student Society office. Misuse of Computer System The misuse of a computer system (such as unauthorized access to other computer accounts or unauthorized use of system software) is not only unfair to other students but can result, at the instructor's discretion, in suspension of the offender's computer access in a course, which may result in an "F" grade. Repeated offences may result in a permanent revoking of all computer privileges. Sexual Harassment The College makes every effort to ensure that no student or employee is subjected to sexual harassment. Sexual harassment is seen to be any uninvited sexual advances, requests for sexual favours, and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature when submission to or rejection of such conduct by an individual is used as a basis for decisions affecting employment, admission to the College or registration in college courses, a student's marks or grades, participation in a club, society or organization; or, when such conduct creates an intimidating, hostile or offensive working/teaching/ learning environment. General Information — Academic Policies 13 Services Academic Advising and Educational Planning Personnel Jeri K R O G S E T H , B . A . (UBC) B . C . Teacher's Cert. Advisor Drena M c C O R M A C K - A d v i s i n g Receptionist K e r r y M U R T A G H , B . A . (SFU), B . C . Teacher's Cert. Educational P l a n n i n g / A d v i s i n g Assistant Greg S H A R P E , H e a d of A d v i s i n g and Student E m p l o y ment Suzanne S T E W A R T , B . A . (SFU) - E d . P l a n n i n g / A d v i s o r M y l a W A T E R M A N , Educational P l a n n i n g / A d v i s i n g Assistant 'Prospective students may contact the A d v i s i n g Centre for information on all College programs and courses. A d m i s sions appointments can be made with an A d v i s o r throughout the year for assistance with educational p l a n n i n g and program development. A d v i s o r s visit all secondary schools i n the College region each Fall and S p r i n g to speak to student groups about opportunities at C a p i l a n o College. H i g h school students planning to enter the College may take advantage of early admission interviews at their school b y contacting their school counsellor for appropriate dates. A p p o i n t m e n t s to see an A d v i s o r may be made at the reception desk i n M B u i l d i n g or by calling 984-4990. D r o p - i n a d v i s i n g is also available. The A d v i s i n g Centre is open 8:30 a.m. - 8 p . m . M o n d a y - Thursday, and Friday 8:30 a.m. - 4 p . m . Achievement Resource Centre Faculty John B R O O K S , B . A . (SFU) Ruth D ' H O L L A N D E R , B . C . Teaching Cert., B.Ed. (McGill), M . E d . (McGill), C . A . S . (Harvard) Bev H I L L , B.Ed. (UBC) Paul J O N E S , B . A . (Hons.) (UBC), B.C. Teaching Cert., M . A . , M . E d . (UBC) W e n d y L Y N N , B.Sc. (Carleton), M.Sc. (Waterloo) Dennis W R I G H T , B.Sc. (Idaho), M.Sc. (Brigham Young), Ph.D. ( A r i z o n a State) Lynne H A M I L T O N , D i v i s i o n a l Assistant Achievement Resource Centre - Lynnmour The Achievement Resource Centre ( A R C ) , accessed through the L i b r a r y i n B B u i l d i n g , invites y o u to use its services and facilities. A R C faculty and staff are qualified to assist y o u increase y o u r learning efficiency. If y o u have specific learning difficulties, talk over your concerns with A R C faculty. A t present the Achievement Resource Centre offers y o u the following services: Introduction — Services 14 a. Scheduled workshops on study skills to help y o u succeed at college: (See page 29). b. Personal assistance if y o u are d o i n g well but want to do better, or if y o u require personal attention w i t h learning problems. c. Professional assessment of y o u r learning difficulties. d. Assistance i n using computer resources available i n the Centre. Resources available to y o u are: 1) H a r d w a r e - A p p i e II,MacIntosh, I B M Computers, 2 typewriters. 2) Software - w o r d processing,spelling, vocabulary and keyboarding. 3) Self-paced learning programs on cassette to i m p r o v e y o u r study and learning skills: listening and concentration, time management, logical and critical thinking, research, English language (grammar, punctuation, etc.), and more. In the A R C y o u can also pick up written study tips on such topics as listening, note-taking, memorization, and test-taking strategies. For more information, call 984-4945 or d r o p b y the Achievement Resource Centre, B u i l d i n g " B " - R o o m 107 accessed through the Library. The Mathematics Learning Centre The Achievement Resource Centre and the Mathematics Department provide the facilities and services of the Mathematics Learning Centre ( M L C ) for all students at the College. The Centre is located at the south end of the first floor of J B u i l d i n g Q107). D u r i n g scheduled hours throughout the week, students may obtain i n d i v i d u a l assistance w i t h math problems from the Lab Supervisor or Mathematics instructor on duty. The M L C has two study areas, one for quiet, i n d i v i d u a l study and the other for group study. A library of math reference texts is located i n the quiet study area. The Mathematics Department's self-paced learning courses i n arithmetic, algebra, precalculus and calculus are offered i n the M a t h Learning Centre. A math video room is equipped w i t h four V C R s and has tapes on topics i n algebra, precalculus, calculus and statistics. The M L C is equipped w i t h four microcomputers and has some mathematical software available for student use. Special Needs Services Special Needs Services, a component of the Achievement Resource Centre, provides the support services necessary for students w i t h physical disabilities to take part i n College programs. Some of these services are: advanced timetable scheduling, provision of taped texts and technical aids (Visualteks, talking calculators, etc.), and specialized exam arrangements. Information and advice is available on access (to buildings, washrooms, etc.), financial assistance, transportation, parking, and advocacy. In order to obtain required services, contact Paul Jones, Special Needs Advisor, at 984-4945 as far in advance of each registration as possible. A campus map indicating wheelchair -accessible paths and washrooms is available. Achievement Resource Centre - Squamish and Sechelt A R C programs and services are also offered in these locations. Contact the local College receptionist for more information: in Squamish 986-3515 (toll free from North Vancouver) or 892-5322 (local); in Sechelt 987-1535 (toll free) or 885-9310 (local). Writing Centre See page 20. Adult Special Education Resources Capilano College enhances educational opportunities for adults with disabilities in its community through Adult Special Education programs and services. To best serve your needs please call the Adult Special Education Contact Line at 984-1701 and you will be referred to the appropriate person. A complete listing of the resources is available as well as a campus map indicating wheelchair accessible paths and washrooms. Athletics Faculty Neil CHESTER, B.A.P.E., B.Ed., (U. of Sask.), M.P.E. (UBC) Joe IACOBELLIS, B.P.E., M.P.E. (UBC) Capilano is a full member of the British Columbia Colleges Athletic Association, which is the governing body for all inter-college athletics in British Columbia. Provincial champions are determined annually with winners advancing to a national final. This affords our College's highly skilled student athletes the opportunity to meet with and compete against the best College athletes in Canada. Inter-collegiately, Capilano College competes in Soccer, Basketball, Volleyball and Golf. In the 1990-91 academic year, the College will be opening the "Sportsplex", an athletic and physical recreation facility, which will provide a home base for "Blue" teams and house the College's intramural and recreational programs. The facilty will seat approximately 2000 people. Each year, our many exceptional athletes, working with the experienced Blues coaching staff, have combined to produce several B C C A A championship teams. Capilano College is proud of the accomplishments of its student athletes and of its growing reputation for athletic excellence. Opportunities to take part in intramural activities are also provided by the College. Activities offered vary from year to year with expressed interests, but usually include such activities as badminton, volleyball, basketball, soccer, touch football, and physical fitness. The Athletic Department annually sponsors several programs directed toward both the student body and the community. Programs vary with demand but in the past have included Pre-Ski Fitness, Beginner and Intermediate Tennis, and the B.C. Coaching Certification Program. Bookstore The Bookstore, located in R building offers required and recommended texts, stationery, and some sundry items. A postage stamp machine is located in the Bookstore. Canada Post boxes are located on both North and South campuses. Counselling Faculty Robert BAGSHAW, B.Comm., M.A. (UBC), M.A. (Colorado) (on leave) Rob HENDERSON, B.A. M.A. (SFU) David JONES, B.A., M.A. (Dalhousie) Yvonne M C C O L L , B.A. (Simmons), M.Ed. (Harvard) Ethelyn MCINNES-RANKIN, B.A., M.A. (UBC) Susan MITCHELL, B.S.Ed. (N. Illinois), M.A. (UVic) Gary SIEGRIST, M.B.A. (SFU) Marie T O O M P U U , B.A., M.S.W. (Western) General Information The services of trained counsellors are available to all students in the College. Counsellors assist students in educational planning and provide information and consultation in the solution of academic problems. Counsellors are often helpful in dealing with personal problems and have a real interest and expertise in this area of student life. The College counselling objective is to facilitate the activities of students moving toward selfdirection in decision-making and planning. Counsellors can also assist with career planning, and vocational testing is available for students by appointment. Other services available to students are workshops in such areas as career planning, stress management, assertive communication skills, understanding intimate relationships, procrastination and a computer assisted career choice system. Introduction — Services 15 Open Learning In British Columbia Appointments to see a counsellor may be made through the front desk located in the M building or by calling 9844990. Drop-in counselling is also available every day from 9 am - 4 pm. As well, appointment time is available four evenings each week to 8 p.m. In addition to the courses offered by the Open Learning Agency, there are many more open learning courses offered by British Columbia's colleges and universities. The Open Learning Agency can advise which courses are available, but specific enquiries should be directed to the sponsoring institution. Those living in the Pemberton-Howe Sound Region requiring the assistance of a counsellor should contact the Squamish Campus. Appointments may be arranged by calling 892-5322. Fitness Centre Sunshine Coast Region residents should call the Sechelt Campus, 885-9310, for information. Career Resource Centre The College assists students considering career options by providing information and reference materials on a wide variety of occupations. The Centre is located in the M building and houses a collection of self-help books, vocational literature, calendars from Canadian and foreign universities and colleges, and brochures and free information on campus and community resources. For assistance in the Centre, contact the Advising Centre/ Counselling receptionist in the M building. Disabled Student Services Students with disabilities wishing information and support services to enrol in College programs are invited to contact the Special Education Coordinator for Transition: Jolene Bordewick at 986-1911, local 2586 or 984-1701. Further Special Needs Services are available through Paul Jones, Special Needs Advisor in the Achievement Resource Centre, see page 14 or Adult Special Education Services page 15. Open Learning Agency Open College and Open University The Open College and Open University, two components of the Open Learning Agency, offer a wide variety of credit and non-credit courses through open learning methods. Courses and programs can lead to one of several college diplomas or certificates or to a university degree. For information on course offerings and transfer credit, visit or write to the Open Learning Agency's Student Services office at 7671 Alderbridge Way, Richmond, B.C. V6X1Z9, or call 660-2221 (toll free 1-800663-9711). 1 The third component of the Open Learning Agency, the Knowledge Network also offers a wide range of credit and non-credit courses. For further information, call 6602000 (toll-free 1-800-663-1678). Introduction — Services 16 Food and Beverage Service The main cafeteria, located in building N, offers full hot meal service during the Fall and Spring terms from approximately 8:00 a.m. through 8:30 p.m. daily except Fridays when it closes at 3:30 p.m. (The grill closes at 1:30 p.m.) For special events, catering services are available. Contact the Food Services Director, North Campus Cafeteria. The smaller cafeteria, located in building B, offers limited hot foods and snack items from approximately 8 a.m. through 8:30 p.m. Monday through Thursday; Friday 8 a.m. through 3:30 p.m. (The grill closes at 2 p.m.) Vending service offering limited food, beverage and confectionery items is available in Building N (North Campus), B (South Campus), and H Building. Distance Education Knowledge Network The Fitness Centre is located in the west corner of the south parking lot. The facility contains showers, locker rooms, saunas, an equipment room and an exercise area, complete with weight training and fitness testing facilities. Scheduled fitness sessions are intermingled with large blocks of open facility time. The Fitness Centre's professional staff will provide personal consultation and testing services related to health, physical fitness, and weight control on an appointment basis. For more information call 986-1911, local 2281. Limited dining space (seating and circulation) does not allow for the use of either cafeteria for special functions during the period the food service is in operation, unless the function is designated by the College's administration. Health Services and First Aid Personnel Dr. Thais H A L L , B.A. (UBC), M.D. (UBC) Dr. Bill MACKIE, M.D. (UBC), CCFP Donna S A V A G E , R.N., B.Sc.N. (UBC), Ind. First Aid Brenda JARVIS, R.N., Ind. First Aid Located in the M building on the North Campus, the Health Services and First Aid Department is concerned with maintaining the good general health of all individuals on campus, and with providing a safe and healthy atmosphere in which to work and study. Emphasis is directed toward prevention of disease and injury and attainment of a healthy lifestyle. A Community Health Nurse and physicians are available to provide the following services: 1. First Aid - come to M103 or phone local 2964. If no answer, call the College switchboard "0". 2. Health Counselling - offered on nutrition, weight control, immunization, birth control and other health related matters. 3. Physical Health Care - such as vision check, hearing tests, blood pressure check, pregnancy tests. 4. Diagnosis and Treatment of Illness—appointments with College Physician may be made in person at M103, or by phoning 984-4964. 5. Pamphlets and Teaching Aids on various topics are available in the reception area of Health Services. 6. Regular meetings of the Health and Safety Committee are held. Complaints or suggestions regarding hazards or potential hazards can be submitted in writing via the Student Representatives. 7. Referrals to outside agencies or individuals can be made through the Health Service. International Office and International Education Personnel Marjorie CROFT, International Administrative Assistant Linda CURRY, I.O. and Associate Dean's Secretary Jon L. JESSIMAN, Associate Dean and Head David JONES, International Student Advisor Louise K R O H N , Contract Services Coordinator Ethelyn MCINNES-RANKIN, International Student Advisor Edwin W O N G , C A N A S E A N Project Manager Telephone: (604) 984-4975 Telex: 04-54247 Fax: (604) 984-1705 Office: A 209, South Campus The International Office has responsibility for international education, programs and initiatives at Capilano, operating within the Division of Student and Instructional Services, assisted by the International Education Advisory Committee, a campus-wide representative committee which meets monthly to provide direction to and coordination of Capilano projects. 1. International Student Information The College welcomes Applications for Admission from well-qualified students who are normally resident in countries outside Canada. In 1989, there were approximately 125 international students studying regular courses at Capilano. The majority of them are enrolled in university transfer programs in the Academic Studies Division, while others are taking specialized courses in the Career/Vocational Division. Normally, to be considered for admission, applicants should possess the equivalent of Secondary School graduation (Grade 12) in the Province of British Columbia. Students wishing assessment of their academic credentials should contact the Office of the Registrar. In certain programs, enrollment limitations are in effect both for international students and for Canadian citizens and residents. Entry to these programs is competitive and is based on academic standing and other published criteria. In accord with provincial government policy, international students are subject to higher tuition fees than Canadian students. See page 5 for detailed application information. The International Student Liaison Advisors on campus give help to international students both prior to and after their admission to the College and will provide assistance to applicants with student visa requirements, location of home accomodation, social and special programs, educational counselling and orientation. They are located in the M Building on the north campus. All other student services at the Lynmour Campus are also available to international students. Interested students should note closing dates for applications for Fall, Spring, and Summer terms in an earlier section of this Calendar. All applications for admission should be directed to the Office of the Registrar and should be accompanied by a $75 (Can.) application fee. 2. International Programs In the 1990-1991 academic year, the following programs will be undertaken: A. Asia Pacific Management Co-op Program (formerly International Studies Co-op Program) This program, unique in Canada, enrolled its first class in 1987 and was an immediate success. A two year diploma program in Asia Pacific studies, it is open to students who normally have completed an undergraduate degree from a recognized university or those who are sponsored by their employer. Combining an examination of culture, history, language, business, politics, and economics of Pacific Rim regions over the course of a full time, nine-month intensive period at the College, and followed by a co-operative work experience of four to twelve months, usually overseas, graduates become immediately involved in working with industry in development and trade-related business. See page 170 in this Calendar for details. B. CANASEAN Project C A N A S E A N is another unique program at this College, Introduction — Services 17 specifically designed to meet the needs of businessmen and women in Canada and from countries forming part of the Association of South East Asian Nations (ASEAN). Begun in the mid-1980s as a seminar/workshop series, it now has two separate phases: in the Fall term, A S E A N managers take part in a six month intensive training/ placement program working on campus and with local enterprises, and in the Spring term, a further group of A S E A N executives meet with Canadian counterparts in similar industries. This project is wholly funded by ministries of the federal and provincial governments. Interested applicants should contact the Project Manager. C. International Business Program New in 1990, the College offers a one year certificate program in International Business through its Business Management Department as one attempt to meet the increasing need in Canada to better equip men and women for global enterprise and trade. Particular focus is provided in areas of Canadian/U.S. A trade and Southeast Asian business. Students normally would have some post-secondary education at the college or university level and interested applicants should see page 107 of the Calendar for further detailed program information. D. Other Programs From time to time, the College offers specific programs designed to meet the needs of particular groups, industries, governments or agencies. In 1990-1991, these will include the Chengdu Instructors' Program, among others. These are normally arranged through the International Office and the Contract Services Department. 3. Other International Courses A number of individual programs offered in the Academic and Career Divisions have specific courses providing international content. Some of them are optional, while others are an integral part of the curriculum leading to a college diploma or certificate. Examples of these will be found in the relevant sections of this Calendar in Business (Marketing Management), Labour Studies, Geography and History. The Modern Languages Department currently schedules first and second year university level courses in French, German, Japanese,Mandarin, Chinese and Spanish as well as first year level in Bahasa Indonesian and Thai. English as a Second Language courses provide foreign and new immigrant students a variety of intermediate and advanced courses to help improve competency in English for work, daily life, and post-secondary study. Introduction — Services 18 English Language training is also offered in the summer; these home-stay programs are designed for groups only. 4. International Exchanges The College has been active for a number of years in promoting exchanges with colleges, universities and other agencies outside Canada. Currently, exchanges involve students from Capilano and Aichi Gakusen in Japan and faculty and students from China Management Training Centre in Chengdu, in the People's Republic of China. Capilano College and Aichi Gakusen College of Toyota City, Japan established a special relationship in 1983 which provides for the exchange of students between the two colleges. Up to three Capilano female students study and work at Aichi Gakusen from late September until mid-winter. Each student is provided with a scholarship of Y750,000 (approx. Cdn. $7,500), a Vancouver-Tokyo-Nagoya round trip ticket and free tuition in a special program of studies specifically tailored to the individual student. The total value of the scholarship is approximately Cdn. $20,000 for each student. Formal agreements have been signed with other postsecondary educational institutions in China, Malaysia and other countries of the Pacific Rim which will continue to enhance opportunities for exchange. As a member of a number of international education training associations in Canada and the United States, the College is able to provide a variety of opportunities for students and faculty to study, travel, or work overseas. 5. International Projects and Initiatives With a particular focus on Pacific Rim endeavours, Capilano College is involved in development activities in Malaysia, the Philippines, Thailand, Japan, and the People's Republic of China. Current examples include graduate training of management instructors from the China Management Training Centre, the establishment of a pilot centre for enterprise development in Kuala Lumpur, a marketing research project related to CanadaChina trade and a tourism development initiative in Thailand and Malaysia. For further information on any of these international activities or other international education opportunities, contact the Head of the International Office as indicated. Library P. BIGGINS, B.A. (Hons.) (Manchester), A.L.A., B.L.S., M.L.S. (Toronto) K. H A L L , B.A. M.L.S'. (UBC) J. INOUYE, B.A., B.L.S., M.L.S. (UBC) D. LAMBERT, B.A. (U of A), M.L.S. (UBC) G. MODENESI, Journalistic Studies (Peru), B.A., M.L.S., (UBC) Reference Services Parking All students receive a library orientation class during the first year English, Psychology, or Communications course. Other courses often include a class in the use of library materials specific to the subject area. Individual research assistance and electronic search services are also available. Ask at the reference desk. Parking is available to all students in parking lots 1,2,3, and 4 only. For exact locations consult the map on the inside cover. Circulation Services a. No restrictions apply to Open Parking areas on the North and South campuses. b. No parking is permitted in a Fire Zone. c. Vehicles may park in a Loading Zone for up to 30 minutes while loading or unloading. Vehicles parked in excess of this time period are subject to the College towing policy (see f below). d. Reserved parking permits may be made available to handicapped students so that they may park closer to their classes. Requisitions for handicapped parking permits may be obtained from the College Nurse or the Special Needs Advisor. e. All traffic and parking signs must be observed. f. Vehicles parking in unauthorized areas will be towed away at the owner's risk and expense. Students are required to present current I.D. to borrow library materials. Loan periods are: Books: Reference books: Periodicals: Newspapers: Reserve materials: Films & Videos: Audio tapes: A V equipment: two weeks in-library use only one week; selected titles for inlibrary use only in-library use only vary from 3 hours to 1 week overnight; book in advance 1 week (except reserve cassettes) varies; book in advance Note: Overdue fines of $1.00 per hour charged on reserve materials; $1.00 per day on recalled books and other materials. Audio-visual Equipment & Media Production Services A wide range of equipment including film projectors, cassette recorders, video players, and slide projectors are available for use in the library or may be booked for classroom presentations. Photocopiers, microform reader/printers, and computers are also available for student use. Media materials are produced for students at the cost of production materials. Assistance in the design and production of A V materials is provided for self help clientele. Ask at the Media Production Services. Sechelt & Squamish A small collection of reference and information materials to support courses and programs offered is housed at each regional campus. Access to the entire college library collection is provided by a microfiche catalogue of holdings. Inter-campus loans, telephone reference, and facsimile transmission services are provided. Lost and Found Students may inquire about lost or found items in the Student Society office, located in N building, or the Library, located in B building. The following parking regulations, which have been designed to meet the Fire Marshal's instructions, are in effect: Student Employment Centre Personnel Lesley E L C H U K , Student Employment Advisor Greg SHARPE, Head of Advising and Student Employment The Student Employment Centre operates an active recruitment program for employers of our college graduates. It also assists students in locating part-time, fulltime, summer and career employment. Assistance is available to students requesting volunteer or work experience situations. In addition, the Centre provides help with a variety of job search techniques such as resume writing and interview preparation, and houses a lending library of resource materials. Students wishing to take advantage of these services should drop in and register at the Centre in M building or contact the Advisor, 984-4965. Student Newspaper The student newspaper at Capilano College is the Capilano Courier, published every other week. The Courier is run by an independent staff of student volunteers, and is totally autonomous from the student society and College administration. It is a full member of Canadian University Press, a co-operative news and support resource organization of more than sixty campus papers from across Canada. Since the Courier is written, organized, and laid out on campus, there is always a need for help. Students are Introduction — Services 19 encouraged to take part in news and feature writing, reporting, editing, layout, photography, artwork, desktop publishing, graphic design, and advertising. The newspaper is not a "class project" and therefore offers the chance for all students to participate in the democratically run collective staff. The Student Society General Office is located in N building next to the Students' Lounge and is open from 9:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday to Friday. For further information call 986-1813 or 984-4969. The Courier welcomes input from the entire College community. Classified ads (which are free to students, staff, and faculty), letters to the collective, and other contributions can be submitted to their offices in C-4. There is a store located in the lobby of B building, in student society space run by the Merchandising Management students. Student Society Every student who registers for credit courses at Capilano College must pay Student Society fees, thus becoming a member of the Student Society. Included in this fee is membership within the Canadian Federation of Students, Canada's national representative student organization. The Student Society is a registered non-profit society, incorporated under the Societies Act of British Columbia, and is coordinated by an elected board of student directors. Main goals of the Student Society are: 1. To organize students on a democratic, cooperative basis in order to provide a framework within which students can communicate, exchange information, and share experience, skills, and ideas for advancing students' interests. 2. To facilitate cooperation among students in organizing events which supplement the learning experience, provide for human needs, and develop a sense of community in British Columbia, Canada, and the world. 3. To bring students to discuss and cooperatively achieve necessary educational, administrative, and legislative change in order to achieve the goal of a post-secondary education system which is rationally planned, high quality, and accessible to all. Through general meetings of the entire student body and a structure of committees open to all students, the direction of the Society is decided and its' goals met. Student Society affairs run from charity fundraisers to educational forums to social events to student workstudy jobs. Daily operations are handled by the full time staff collective and the executive committee of elected students. Elections occur on campus each semester and all students may participate. In addition, the Student Society maintains a number of services to aid students day-to-day. Inexpensive photocopies, a free student phone, a used textbook sale, a laser printer/binding/resume service, a housing registry and a student saver consumer discount program, are some of the services offered. Introduction - Services 20 Student Store — Cap Corner This small shop serves as a laboratory for the Merchandising students to practise the skills learned in the program. The store sells items such as stationery, gifts, clothing, candy, and bus passes. Capilano College sweats are a popular item. Writing Centre Located in H470, the English Department Writing Centre provides: 1) a drop-in centre where you can work on your writing assignments 2) a set of writing tools: dictionaries, grammar texts, information sheets, exercises, and software 3) an English instructor available to answer any specific writing questions you might have on such topics as researching, grammar, and analysis 4) a tutorial service where you can look at your EDT results and discuss, in detail, grammatical concerns or graded assignments with an English instructor 5) a computer room where you can do grammatical exercises and word processing Financial Aid and Awards Personnel Connie GIBBS, B.A., M.Ed. (UBC), Department Head Zulekha PIRANI Sheila ROSEN, Financial Aid Advisor Valerie KENDRICK The Financial Aid Office, located in the M building (North Campus) may be contacted for information and assistance regarding the B.C. Student Assistance Program, Bursaries, Scholarships, and Loans. Applications for financial aid administered by the Financial Aid Office arc available. For complete information on Financial Aid Awards please obtain the "Awards & Financial Aid Guide" from the Office. The Financial Aid Advisor is available to discuss financial assistance and provide financial advising. The office sponsors workshops on personal money management and distributes a free brochure called Student Money Management. Please check our office hours which are posted in the M building, phone 984-4966. Capilano College Foundation The Capilano College Foundation is an independent volunteer community organization, established under the Societies Act to encourage community interest in the college, to raise and administer donations primarily to aid worthy students who require financial assistance. Membership in the Foundation is open to all contributors. Contributions should be sent to The Treasurer, Capilano College Foundation, c/o O'Neill, Goldstone & Co., Suite 6 -144 West 15th Street, North Vancouver, B.C. Student Assistance The B.C. Student Assistance Program The following information is subject to change. This program is the major source of student financial assistance and is a combination of Federal Canada Student Loan and B.C. Provincial Government Loan. Equalization grants are available to students who meet special criteria. The amount of aid awarded is based on a standard means test. The maximum Canada Student Loan is set at $105 per week or $3,570 for a standard 34 week (two term) school year. The maximum B.C. Student Loan for single students is $3230 for two terms while married students with dependent children or single parents can qualify for a maximum loan of $6630. These amounts are subject to change. The Canada Student Loan and B.C. Student Loan are interest-free while a full-time student and for six months after completion of full-time studies. At the end of six months a student must begin repayment of the loan, with interest, to the bank. Eligible applicants are Canadian citizens or landed immigrants who qualify as B.C. residents. Students who fail to make satisfactory scholastic progress may be ineligible for student loans and grants. Students who are dissatisfied with their award are entitled to an appeal. Please make an appointment with the Financial Aid Advisor. A detailed brochure and applications are available at the Financial Aid Office. Applications should be made by the early deadline date of July 1 as delays are common. Students who have applied for student loans should note that N/A grades do not carry credit and are treated as course withdrawals. N/A grades reduce total credit load and may cancel eligibility for future student loans and require early repayment of existing loans. Work-Study Program The Work-Study Program, a part of the British Columbia Student Assistance Program, is designed to provide oncampus work experience for students requiring financial assistance while attending college. A limited number of part-time on-campus jobs, averaging five to ten hours per week, may be available. The program is open only to students demonstrating financial need under the terms of the B.C. Student Assistance Program. For further details contact the Financial Aid Office. B.C. Loan Remission Program Loan remission will reduce debt to ceiling limit of $12,000 for a first diploma. Check with the Financial Aid Office for eligibility details. Students whose debt load is less than $12,000, may be eligible for loan remission of 25% of B.C. student loans negotiated between April 1,1984 and August 1,1987. Interest Relief Plan The Government of Canada will pay the interest on fulltime and part-time Canada Student Loans on behalf of debtors who are experiencing financial hardship due to inability to find employment or to temporary disability. Additional information is available from: Student Assistance Directorate Department of Secretary of State P.O. Box 2090, Station D Ottawa, Ontario K1P6C6 Tel: (819) 994-1844 or 1-800-567-9602 A detailed brochure and applications are available at the Financial Aid Office. B.C. Youth Foundation Interest-free loans are available to full-time students who Introduction — Financial Aid and Awards 21 are B.C. residents and under 30 years of age. Students are requested to apply first to the Canada Guaranteed Student Loan Plan (B.C. Student Assistance Program.) A suitable adult guarantor is required. Loans may be for fees, books and/or a monthly allowance for living costs. Deadline: Open Adult Basic Education Grants Students registered in ABE, ESL and A C T programs may be eligible for non-repayable grants to cover fees, books, and transportation. Contact Financial Aid for details. Deadline: Open BURSARIES N.B. - Bursaries are non-repayable grants based on need and satisfactory standing. The following bursaries are administered by the Financial Aid Office. Applications forms are available and should be submitted before the deadlines. Unless otherwise noted, deadline dates are October 31 (Fall term) and January 31 (Spring term). Capilano College Faculty Association A bursary of $300 will be awarded in each of the Fall and Spring terms. Financial need is the main criterion. Credit Union Foundation Bursary The Credit Union Foundation of British Columbia annually offers bursaries totalling $500 to academic, technical or vocational students. Students who might otherwise have difficulty completing their studies by reason of financial hardship are elgible to apply for these bursaries. The recipients are to be Canadians residing in British Columbia and in attendance at Capilano College. Credit Union Foundation: Sid Butterfield Bursary This trust fund was established by the North Shore Community Credit Union in honour of Sid Butterfield for his active leadership in every facet of the Credit Union. Interest from this fund will be disbursed annually to provide educational and vocational bursaries to assist young people who exhibit leadership qualities and dedication to their fellow man. Credit Union Foundation: Birks Family Foundation Bursary A bursary of $250 will be awarded in the Spring term. Satisfactory scholastic standing is a requirement. Rosalind Brossard Memorial Bursary This bursary is provided to assist a student with financial need in the Long Term Care Aid program. Rosalind Brossard, a former student at Capilano College had an outstanding talent in the Long Term Care Aid field. The bursary is provided by her family and friends in memory of her. Margaret Campbell Bursary This $400 bursary is made possible by the North Shore Business and Professional Women's Club in recognition of Alderman Margaret Campbell's outstanding contribution to the North Vancouver Community and as past president of the Canadian Federation of Business and Professional Women's Club. The bursary is open to women students enrolled at Capilano College in at least three courses. Canadian Federation of University Women of North Vancouver The recipient of the $200 award is to be a mature female student who is either a resident of North Vancouver or a graduate of a North Vancouver Secondary School (School District #44). Introduction — Financial Aid and Awards 22 Tom Dearlove Memorial Bursary This memorial fund was established to honour Tom Dearlove, the first treasurer of the North Short Community Credit Union. Bursaries will be awarded to students who reflect Tom Dearlove's special interest in good citizenship and community work. Credit Union Foundation Vocational Bursary The Credit Union Foundation of British Columbia through the Credit Union Pioneers' Memorial Fund, offers bursaries annually totalling $300 to a student or students in trades training programs. Students who might otherwise have difficulty completing their studies by reason of financial hardship are eligible to apply for these bursaries. The recipients are to be Canadian residing in British Columbia and in attendance at Capilano College. Delta Kappa Gamma International Alpha Province Bursary The Delta Kappa Gamma Society International is an honour society of women educators whose goals are to assist women in all areas of education. The society offers a bursary to a female student with financial need. Delta Kappa Gamma International Society of Women Educators, Kappa Chapter Bursaries Three bursaries of $300 each will be awarded during the college year to female single parents residing in B.C. and studying full or part-time in any program. Candidates will have achieved a satisfactory academic standing and will have demonstrated financial need. Landscape Horticulture Award An award of $500 will be granted to a worthy horticulture student on the basis of financial need, scholastic standing and program participation. Howard/Yano Award The Howard/Yano architectural firm is a long-standing company with a reputation as one of the top post-secondary architectural firms in the province. They designed the " H " building at the College and have been selected as the architects for the new recreational facility. This $250 award will be given to a student in an academic program. Howard/Yano prefers that the candidate have an interest is architecture but such interest would not necessarily be a prerequisite. I.O.D.E. Lions Gate Chapter Bursary Founded in 1900 in Canada, the IODE is a national women's organization with over 600 chapters in every province and both territories. The Lions Gate chapter has established a bursary for Music Therapy students who combine scholastic excellence and financial need. John "Stein" Kramer Memorial Bursary This memorial bursary fund has been established in remembrance of John "Stein" Kramer. "Stein" was an Outdoor Recreation student in the graduating class of 1985 who was killed in a helicopter crash in June 1987. The bursary will be awarded to an Outdoor Recreation Management student registered in the second year of the program. Selection will be based on financial need, academic achievement, and demonstrated leadership capabilities. Stephen Leskard Bursary Fund In 1985 Stephen Leskard retired after a long and distinguished teaching career at Capilano College. A founding member of the College's Art department, his efforts and professional work contributed greatly to the development of all three Art programs. Bursaries from this fund will be allocated to students in the Foundations of Visual Communications and first year Graphic Design and Illustration programs. Candidates will be judged on their artistic abilities. Financial need of the candidates is paramount. Mary Neil Memorial Bursary This $400 award is presented by the West Vancouver University Women's Club in memory of Mary Neil, a former president and active member. She was a much loved and respected member of the club and had a lifelong interest in education. The bursary is presented each year to a mature woman student studying full-time or part-time who has satisfactory academic standing, demonstrated financial need and who is registered in the academic program. North Shore Community Credit Union Awards Each Spring a $200 bursary is granted to a student with financial need who exhibits leadership, citizenship and good scholastic standing. Eligible candidates are residents of North Vancouver City or District who have completed one year at Capilano College. Office and Technical Employees Union Bursaries A bursary of $300 will be awarded on the basis of financial need to a full-time student in each of the Fall and Spring terms. Operation Link Bursary Fund These bursaries are awarded to Business Management students. Funds for Operation Link are provided by voluntary contributions of employers participating in Business Management's work practicum program. Apply to the Financial Aid Office by Oct. 31. Maureen Piekaar Bursary This bursary was established in memory of Maureen Piekaar, a teacher in the Medical Office Assistant Program. A bursary of $250 to $300 will be awarded to an M O A student who is in financial need and has a satisfactory standing of 70% or better in the first term of the M O A program. George Raven Wood Fund A large number of bursaries will be awarded in both Fall and Spring terms. A minimum G P A of 2.3 (C+) is required. A limited number of first term students may be considered in exceptional cases but must provide a letter of recommendation from an instructor. Bursaries are available to part-time and full-time students. Royal Canadian Legion Bursary, West Vancouver Branch #60 A $500 bursary will be available. Details of criteria unavailable at press time. Caroline Smith Memorial Award One $150 award will be granted annually in memory of Caroline Smith. Student Society Bursaries The Student Society provides several bursaries annually to full-time and part-time students. Financial need is the main requirement. Introduction — Financial Aid and Awards 23 Vancouver Foundation Bursaries For more than twenty years the Vancouver Foundation has been providing financial assistance to students enrolled in past-secondary institutions in British Columbia. Under the block grant scheme, lump sums are provided to 23 post-secondary institutions for disbursal by respective financial aid personnel to deserving students. These grants, administered through the institution's financial aid office, are to assist full-time students who have identified vocational or academic objectives, demonstrated ability to reach those objectives, and who, along with their families when possible, are contributing towards their educational costs, but still require and merit further financial assistance. Weldwood of Canada Bursary A $500 bursary will be awarded to a needy 2nd year student in the Business Management Program. individual student. The total value of the scholarship is approximately $20,000 for each student. Contact Nick Collins, Chairman of the Japan Exchange Committee through the ESL department. B.C. Council of Garden Clubs Award A n award of $500 will be presented to a student in Landscape Horticulture. The recipient must be a Canadian student who has demonstrated interest and ability in the field of horticulture. Contact the Coordinator of the Landscape Horticulture Program for application details. B.C. Telephone Company Awards for Returning Students Two awards of $625 will be awarded in the Spring term. Students completing first year who intend to continue second year at Capilano and who have an outstanding scholastic record may be selected for these awards. Canadian Daughters Scholarship John Percy Williamson Memorial Fund Bursaries will be awarded in the Spring term. A minimum G P A of 2.3 (C+) is required. Deadline: January 31 An award of $200 will be offered to a student with a high GPA and performance potential in the 2nd year of the Music Transfer Program. SCHOLARSHIPS Campney & Murphy Scholarship - Legal Secretarial Program Scholarships are generally administered by the Registrar's Office unless otherwise noted. Please direct inquiries to 984-4912. The Registrar's office is located on the first floor of A building. This Scholarship will be available to a second term student based on scholastic achievement, financial need and career potential. Apply to the Program Coordinator. Capilano College Canadian Information Processing Society Scholarship The College offers a number of scholarships to students with a demonstrated record of scholastic excellence at Capilano College. Many of these scholarships are for specific programs. There are also some significant scholarships for students entering the College. A $300 scholarship is available to a computer student with: 1) a G.P.A. of at least 3.0 2) active interest in student and community life 3) above average communication skills. Apply to B. Campbell, Business Management. Adult Basic Education Association of B.C. Achievement Award Capilano College Athletic Scholarships This $100 award will be granted to a student registered in the Adult Basic Education program. Adult Basic Education faculty shall select the recipient. Aichi Scholarship Capilano College and Aichi Gakusen College of Toyota City, Japan established a special relationship in 1983 which provides for the exchange of students between the two colleges. Up to three female students are able to study and work at Aichi Gakusen from late September till the following March. Each student isprovided with a scholarship worth approximately $7000, a VancouverToyota-Nagoya round trip ticket and free tuition in a special program of studies specifically tailored to the Introduction — Financial Aid and Awards 24 Several athletic scholarships have been established by contributions from the following donors: Vancouver Safeway Employees Union Keith Plumbing Time Out Sports Arrow Transport Carling O'Keefe Breweries Quadra Athletic Budget Rent-a-Car Confratellanza Italo-Canadesse Scholarships are awarded on the following criteria: 1. Above average academic standing 2. Leadership and character 3. Demonstrated exceptional athletic ability In addition, preference is given to students who attend Capilano College for their second year of studies. Apply to: Joseph Iacobellis, Dept. of Fitness & Athletics. Capilano College Board Entrance Scholarships These scholarships - sixteen in total - are awarded to outstanding high school graduates who enroll at Capilano College. One scholarship in the form of a tuition fee waiver for two consecutive academic terms in a program of study of the student's choice is made available through each of the 16 high schools in the College region. Each high school chooses the Capilano College Board Entrance Scholarship recipient based on criteria of demonstrated superior scholastic achievement in Grades 11 and 12 in courses of study relevant to the program of studies the student wishes to pursue at this College. Capilano College Fee Waiver Scholarships for Returning Students Several scholarships will be awarded to outstanding returning full-time students who have completed one year at Capilano College. The scholarships will be in the form of fee waivers for second year. Candidates will be automatically selected by Grade Point Average. Capilano College Foundation Scholarships for Highest Academic and Career Students Four $600 scholarships will be awarded annually to the highest achieving full-time students in the Academic and Career programs as determined by Grade Point Average. Selection is automatic. Scholarships are limited to returning students and are intended to help defray tuition fee and book costs. Capilano'Suspension Bridge Scholarships Two $600 scholarships will be awarded annually in the third term of the Tourism Management Program to students achieving the highest G P A in the first term. Michael Carr Memorial Award for Second Term Students This $250 award will be given annually to a student enrolled in the second term of any first year program at Capilano College. The award will go to a student who has combined hard work and perseverance in scholastics and athletics and who has shown involvement in the community. Students who are pursuing studies in spite of handicaps are encouraged to apply. Letters of reference from an instructor and an athletic coach may be requested to supplement the application. Deadline: Open Certified General Accountants Association of B.C. for Accounting/Business Students The Certified General Accountants Association of B.C. offers two scholarships equivalent to the first year's tuition (approximately $600) to students graduating from an accounting/business program who has been admitted to the C G A program from Capilano College. Apply to the Business Management Program Coordinator. Davis and Co. Legal Secretarial Scholarships A $300 scholarship will be awarded to an outstanding student entering the second term of the Legal Secretarial Program. English Academic Scholarships All Grade 12,1990 graduates from any secondary school in North Vancouver, West Vancouver,Howe Sund, Sunshine Coast, Burnaby and Vancouver School Districts who are registered in the first year Academic Studies at Capilano College are eligible to apply. Scholarships will be awarded on the basis of an essay competition. Essays must be submitted no later than April 21st to the Scholarship Committee Department of English. Scholarships will be announced no later than 30 May 1990. Contact English Department for details. A second series of scholarships will be available to students enrolled at Capilano in 4 or more Academic Division courses including at least one 2nd year English course each term. The scholarships are in the form of tuition fee waivers. Lucille Fisher Memorial Scholarship • English and Communications This scholarship, donated by the West Vancouver Memorial Library and West Vancouver Municipal Employees Association, will be awarded to a student in a Fall Term course which emphasizes the development of a student's creative skills and abilities in the use of the English language. Faculty in English and Communications will determine the winner of this scholarship. Contact the Coordinators in the Communications or English departments. The Paul Gallagher Scholarship for Excellence Dr. Paul Gallagher, former Principal of Capilano College, was noted for his scholastic achievement, qualities of leadership, enthusiastic approach to work and leisure, warmth and compassion towards others and his belief in the innate goodness of people. In his honour the College Board has established the Paul Gallagher Scholarship for Excellence. The recipient of this Scholarship will exemplify the universal qualities of excellence espoused by Dr. Gallagher. Applicants must be Canadian citizens or landed immigrants and must have completed at least 15 credit hours of course work at Capilano College prior to taking up the Scholarship. The value of the Scholarship consists of a direct payment Introduction — Financial Aid and Awards 25 to the College of tuition fees and other set charges and an allowance of $250 per term towards the cost of books and other educational expenses. The Scholarship may be held for a maximum of two terms. Application forms are available from the Financial Aid Office and must be submitted to the Financial Aid Officer no later than December 31. $400 scholarship in recognition of the generous support received from the Estate of the late Donald Anderson MacGregor. The purpose of the scholarship is to recognize the increasing importance of the study of Canadian affairs in post-secondary institutions. To be eligible to apply, a student must have achieved an excellent standing in the study of Social Science, particularly in relation to Canadian affairs. Kathleen Herauf Memorial Scholarship - Legal Assistant Program Music Scholarship Fund This award is granted on the basis of scholastic excellence and financial need to a student in the Legal Assistant Program in the Spring term. Apply to the Legal Assistant Program Coordinator. Scholarships for students in Music Transfer, Music Therapy, and Commercial Music will be awarded to students who demonstrate academic achievement. Apply to the Coordinator of Music Programs. Humanities Scholarship for Excellence North Vancouver Community Arts Council Scholarship A $500 award is offered to students entering a full-time Humanities course load at Capilano College direct from high school. Applicants must have completed a full Grade 12 curriculum, including courses in English 12 and one or more scholarships. The North Vancouver Community Arts Council Scholarships for tuition fees are available to up to two outstanding full-time students for one term each per academic year. Eligible candidates must have studied at Capilano College in the two preceding terms. Institute of Chartered Accountants of British Columbia The North Vancouver Women's Liberal Commission Award A $300 scholarship is available to a full-time student at Capilano College completing the first year of the University Transfer program, who is proceeding to second year or to a university in the commerce option, has a good record in the accounting classes completed, has maintained a second class standing overall, has financial need and is interested in becoming a Chartered Accountant. Rita Johnson Memorial Award for Mature Women Students This award was established in honour of Rita Johnson, who worked in the Women's Access Centre at Capilano College. She was working towards a Master's degree in Counselling at UBC. Rita began post-secondary studies in her middle years after raising four children, and the Memorial Award was established to assist mature women students enrolled in either part-time or full-time studies in any field of post-secondary study. Preference will be given to mature women who have an interest in academic studies and who have a demonstrated interest in and awareness of women's issues. Applicants may be (or plan to be) part-time or full-time students. Student applicants will hopefully have at least a 'B' average. Prospective student applicants will hopefully demonstrate an active interest in returning to school and/or paid employment. Applications are available at the Financial Aid Office in M Building and can be submitted at any time. Constance MacGregor Memorial Scholarship • Social Sciences/Canadian Studies The Capilano College Foundation has established this Introduction — Financial Aid and Awards 26 A tuition fee waiver scholarship is available to any student in any program who has enrolled in at least one Women's Studies course. Candidates must have financial need. Candidates must submit a 500 word essay on "How Equality can be Achieved". The scholarship will normally be available for one term but can be renewed upon reapplication provided the applicants' academic standing is satisfactory. Applications are available at the Women's Studies Department, the Financial Aid Department and the North Shore Women's Liberal Commission. The Deadlines are August 15 and December 15. Science Faculty Scholarships This scholarship fund, raised by the Natural Sciences faculty, will be used to provide two $500 scholarships to outstanding students entering a full-time first year science program in the Fall term. Students who wish to apply for these awards and who expect to graduate from high school with high marks should obtain an application form at the Natural Sciences Division office. Deadline for submission of applications is May 1st. Science Textbook Publishers' Awards Each Fall term, several textbook publishers donate Science textbooks to be awarded to qualified students entering a first year science program. Students wishing to apply for these awards should obtain an application form at the Natural Sciences Division office and return it to that office before the end of the registration period. Science Tuition Scholarships The purpose of this award is to recognize and encourage scholastic excellence, to reflect the College's reputation as an excellent institution, and to encourage outstanding high school graduates from within the College's region to continue their studies at Capilano College. The value of each scholarship is the complete waiver of tuition fees for the Fall term. Any Science student registered in the Fall term who meets the following criteria will receive this scholarship: 1. The student must have graduated in the previous Spring term from a secondary school in School District 44, 45,46 or 48. 2. The student must have a G.P.A. of at least 3.5 in four grade 12 courses, including: Algebra 12 and English 12 plus any two of: Biology 12 Geology 12 Chemistry 12 Geometry 12 Computing Science 12 Physics 12 3. The student must be registered in the Fall term at Capilano College for at least 16.5 credits which must include Math 110 and at least two of: Biology 110 Geology 110 Chemistry 110 Physics 110 or 114 Computing Science 103 Students who think they qualify should request the Registrar to adjudicate their credentials at the time of registration. The Society of Management Accountants of British Columbia Scholarship - Cost and Managerial Accounting college in the community. This award is maintained by Gerry's friends at Capilano College who continue to remember her good humour, gentle demeanor and even disposition. The Gerry Turner Award is granted on the basis of scholastic excellence and financial need to a student in the Office Administration Program in the Spring term. Apply to the Office Administration Coordinator. Scholastic Awards Dean's List Special recognition will be accorded full-time students with a term and cumulative grade point average of 3.5 or higher at the end of a term. For the purposes of the Dean's List, a student with 15 or more credits in a term, or taking a full course load as outlined in the calendar for their program, shall be considered full time. Merit List Special recognition will be accorded part-time students with a cumulative grade point average of 3.7 or higher upon completion of 30 or 60 credits. For the purposes of the Merit List, a student registered in fewer than 15 credits in a term shall be considered part time. Governor-General's Academic Medal This award is presented to a Diploma graduate from a program of two year's duration who has achieved the highest cumulative grade point average, and who has attained this grade point average on a minimum of 15 credit hours per term, or full program load as outlined in the Calendar, during attendance at Capilano College. The Society provides an award of $500 towards remission of the Registered Industrial Accountants fees. This award is available to the graduating student attaining the highest mark in Cost and Management Accounting. Contact the Coordinator, Business Management. Awarded for academic excellence and contribution to the College and community to a graduate in a Vocational or Career program of less than two year's duration. T. Buck Suzuki Memorial Scholarship - Science President's Citizenship Award Two $500 scholarships will be awarded for excellence to full-time Science students; one first year student and one second year student. Students who are in the process of completing first or second year Sciences must apply for the award through the Natural Sciences Division by the middle of April. This award is given in recognition of the student who has made the greatest contributions to College life. Gerry Turner Memorial Award • Office Administration Gerry Turner worked for the College for many years. She was Secretary to the Principal, and also worked in the Deans' offices, the Bursar's office, Purchasing, Community Education, Placement, and Accounting. Wherever she was, Gerry gave her best, and her aim was always to promote excellence, and to improve the image of the Lieutenant-Governor's Medal President's Award The President's Award is presented to one Diploma graduate in Academic Studies and one Diploma graduate in a Career Program who have achieved exceptional academic excellence. Harold Kirchner Scholarship Two graduating scholarships of $100 each will be presented annually. One scholarship will go to the top scholastic Career Program graduate, and one to the top scholastic Vocational Program graduate. Introduction — Financial Aid and Awards Preparatory Programs Many students who enter Capilano College require precollege level courses to meet entry level requirements for a particular college program, or to upgrade their academic skills from basic literacy to the Provincial Level (grade twelve equivalent standing Diploma). Students who have been out of school for a number of years and want to ease back into their education often find that the Adult Basic Education program best meets their needs. Most courses in the program are self-paced. Students attend classes in which they work up to five hours a day in the classroom with college instructors. In addition, some courses require independent study outside of class. The level of courses in the Adult Basic Education program ranges from Basic Literacy to Provincial (grade twelve) level. Many of the upper-level courses, taken alone or as part of a larger program of studies, will meet entry requirements for Academic Studies and Career/ Programs. The pre-college level courses which are offered by a number of Academic departments at the College are designed to upgrade students who lack course prerequisites for Academic Studies and Career/Vocational programs. Many of these courses are taught in two hour classes that meet twice a week for an academic term (16 weeks). In addition, considerable independent study is required outside of the formal instruction period. There are also (like Adult Basic Education) some flexible selfstudy courses available in Math and Chemistry. Either the Adult Basic Education Program or the preparatory courses offered in the Academic Studies departments may satisfy your upgrading needs. Students should contact the Coordinator of Adult Basic Education for more information on that program, or the Advising Centre for information on other preparatory courses. This section contains information on: • Pre-College Level Courses • Achievement Resource Centre Credit Courses • Adult Basic Education • Alternative Career Training Program • English as a Second Language Chemistry 030 Prerequisite: none This course is designed for those students who have had no previous chemistry and wish to go on in science. English 010 Prerequisite: none An intensive course in basic language skills to enable the student to proceed without difficulty through an academic college program. Curriculum will evolve from the assessed needs of the students. Math 009/010/011/012 Prerequisite: none These courses are offered in the Math Learning Centre on a self-paced format. Students are placed in the courses based on diagnostic tests. This group of courses includes: arithmetic, introductory algebra, intermediate algebra and functions, trigonometry. Math 099 Prerequisite: permission of Mathematics instructor This course begins with a review of introductory algebra and continues with the development of intermediate algebra with emphasis on functions. It is meant primarily for students who require an Math 11 equivalent and who anticipate taking pre-calculus (Math 105 or 107). Math 103 Prequisite: Math 11 with at least a "C" grade, or Math 010 or BMTH 045 with at least a "C" grade, or Math 099 with at least a "C-" grade. A brief review of introductory Algebra, plus intermediate Algebra and Pre-calculus, with a focus on functions, mathematical models, graphs, trigonometry, logarithms, and exponential functions. (Students will be brought to the same level as those completing Math 105 by the end of the term). Primarily for students who anticipate taking calculus course or who require a Math 12 equivalent course. PRE-COLLEGE LEVEL COURSES Math 105 For students who do not have some of the course prerequisites for Academic Studies or Career programs, the College offers upgrading and flexible self-study courses. For complete course descriptions, refer to specific sections of Academic Studies. Prerequisite: Math 099 with at least a "B-" grade, or Math 010 or B M T H 045 or Math 11 at least with a "B" grade. Preparatory Programs - Pre-College level courses 28 A review of algebra and a discussion of functions, graphs mathematical models, trigonometry, logarithms and exponential functions. Primarily for students who anticipate taking calculus courses who require a Math 12 equivalent course. Math 107 ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE Prerequisite: M a t h 11 or M a t h 010 or B M T H 045 w i t h at least a " C " or M a t h 099 with at least a "C-". CREDIT COURSES A precalculus course deisgned for business/commerce students. The mathematical models/applications i n this course w i l l be m a i n l y business/finance oriented. Linear and quadratic equations and inequalities, absolute value, systems of linear equations, functions and graphs, inverse functions, mathematical modelling, exponential and logarithm functions, circular and trigonometic functions, right-triangle trigonometry, arithmetic and geometric progressions, c o m p o u n d interest and annuities, summation notation, b i n o m i a l theorem. N o duplicate credit for M a t h 103/105/107. Contact: 984-4945 The Achievement Resource Centre offers t w o 1.5 credit courses. A l s o see section on Non-credit Programs and Courses. ARC 010 Learning and Study Skills (F,S) (1.5) A 15 hour course to develop strategies for time management and effective study. ARC 201 Reading Dynamics (F,S) (1.5) A 15 hour course i n w h i c h participants learn and practice flexible reading skills. Strategies for developing reading comprehension are also i n c l u d e d . For further information, call 984-4945 or come to the Achievement Resource Centre (accessed through the Library). Preparatory Programs - Achievement Resource Centre ADULT BASIC EDUCATION/ FOUNDATIONS PROGRAM Contact: (Lynnmour Campus) 984-4971, Room P209 (Sechelt Campus) 885-9310 (Toll Free: 987-1535) (Squamish Campus) 892-5322 (Toll Free: 986-3515) M. RAWSTHORNE, M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. J. ROSE, B.A. (Western), B.C. Teacher's Cert. J. SOUTHERST, B.A., B.Ed. (UBC), B.C. Teacher's Cert. A . G . T H O M L I N S O N , B.A., M.Sc. (UBC), B.C. Teacher's Cert. R. WEDEL, B.A. (SFU), B.C. Teacher's Certl. D. E. Y O U N G , B.A. (SFU), S.R.N. (London), S.C.M. (Scotland), Dip.. T.N. (London), M.F.A. (UBC) Instructional Faculty D.J. A T H A I D E , B.Sc., (Hons.) (McGill), M.Sc. (UBC), B.C. Teacher's Cert. P. BROCK, B.A. (UBC), M.A. (SFU) M.C. CAIRNS, B.Sc. (Math) (Calgary), Alta. Teach. Cert. M. DEKKER, B.Sc. (Hons.) (U of A), ING. (Amsterdam) Dip. Computer Management (Cap. Coll.) E. F U T T E R M A N , B.Sc. (California, Berkeley) J. HIND, B.A. (1st Class Hons.) (SFU), M.A. (UBC) P. H O D G S O N , B.A. (Hons), B.Ed. (Queen's) M.Ed. (UBC) R.F. IRVINE, Teacher's Cert., Sask. & B.C., B.A. (SFU) C.B. M A C L E A N , B.Ed. (SFU) B. NICHOL, B.Sc. (Brock) J. PASS, B.A. (UBC), B.C. Teacher's Cert. P. PI, B.Sc. (McGill), M.Sc. (U. of Man.), B.C. Teacher's Certificate F. RAMSAY, B.Sc. (McGill) Courses Fundamental General Information The Adult Basic Education/Foundations (ABE) Program enables you to upgrade your knowledge of English, Mathematics, Biology, Chemistry, Physics, Social Studies/ History and Computers. You may select from one to five subjects, depending upon your educational and occupational goals. You can pursue any of the following goals: -personal desire to upgrade or refresh your mastery of a subject -secondary school qualifications demanded by employers -vocational training (including apprencticeships) -career training -technical training - academic studies (including college and university programs) Intermediate Provincial Level Advanced 042* 031* 040 or 041* 032* 040 031 or 032* 041 or 042 or 045* 046 BCHM 041 042 BPHY 041 BENG 021* BSCI BMTH 021* BBIO 041 or 042 BSOC BCMP 031* 021 041 042 Choose 2 041 and 042 BHST 042 031 * Required for Certificate or Diploma Advanced math is a prerequisite for Provincial Level For further details please arrange an interview with a department advisor by phoning 984-4971. Preparatory Programs - Adult Basic Education/Foundations 30 1 Choose 3 It is common for students to enrol in A.B.E. courses while concurrently registered in another academic or career/ vocational program at the College. used for transfer credit towards a B.C. Adult Senior Secondary School Graduation Certificate. The program operates year-round, offering students selfpaced instruction in two hour classes. Tutorial time is available. Course Descriptions Most students can complete each course within a four month term if they regularly attend three two-hour classes per week. Students who attend regularly but need more than four months to complete a course may reregister for the following term. Students who finish a course before the end of the term may immediately register for the next higher course in the given subject. Class times are as follows: Morning classes 8:30 a.m. & 10:30 a.m. Afternoon classes 1:30 p.m. (except Tuesdays, when classes start at 2:30 p.m.) Evening classes 7:00 p.m. Admission Requirements English BENG 021 An introductory Fundamental course in reading, writing and spelling. BENG 031 Prepares students for written work in ABE advanced courses and provides practical communication skills with a vocational orientation: an ABE intermediate course. BENG 040 An ABE course in writing various types of reports and differentiating between a report and an essay. BENG 041 Students should be at least 18 years old and have been out of the public school system for a minimum of one year. Exceptions will only be made with departmental approval. An ABE advanced course. Students will prepare outlines, summarize various kinds of writing, write different types of reports, differentiate between reports and essays, and give a researched oral report. Registration BENG 042 Students are interviewed before registration in the program in order to plan the program which best meets their educational goals. This is an ABE Provincial course which prepares the student for written work in post-secondary courses and helps to prepare the student for comprehension and analysis of college-level written material. ABE Certificates & Diploma The ABE/Foundations Programs offers courses at four levels as outlined in the table below: The Provincial Diploma, issued by the Ministry of A d vanced Education & Job Training, provides an alternate route for adults who have not achieved a grade twelve standing at high school and is recognized for admission purposes by post secondary institutions in B.C. Intermediate & Advanced certificates are issued by Capilano College and provide prerequisites for career and vocational programs throughout the province. Instruction at the Fundamental level provides basic reading & writing skills and number skills. ABE Certificates also satisfy most employers' requirements. Certain high school courses may qualify as transfer credit toward ABE certificates and the Provincial Diploma. The program also offers instruction for students preparing for the General Education Development (Grade 12 Equivalency) tests. Advanced and Provincial level A.B.E. courses may also be Social Studies BSOC 031 An introduction to the fundamental principles of Economics, Canadian history, government legal system and the development of analytical and interpretive skills. This is an ABE Intermediate level course. BSOC 041 A study of major historical, geographic, economic, political and sociological events in Canada and globally. Students will learn basic skills of social analysis that will enhance their ability to participate in the economic, political and social concerns that are part of their daily lives. This is an ABE Advanced level course. BHST 042 A survey of 20th Century History including major issues in present day Geopolitics. This is an ABE Provincial level course. Preparatory Programs - Adult Basic Education/Foundations 31 Computer Studies BCMP 021 A n introduction to microcomputers for students enrolled in the ABE program. The course is designed to overcome the fears of computers, and offers instruction in the terminology and some hands-on experience. BCMP 031 A continuation of BCMP 021 with more practise in programming, word processing and spreadsheets, plus introduction of integrated software. Mathematics BMTH 021 Whole number decimals, fractions, and percentage. This is an ABE fundamental course. BMTH 031 A continuation of 021 with simple geometry and algebra. This is an ABE intermediate course. BMTH 032 This ABE intermediate course gives students the opportunity to master practical mathematics at the Intermediate Certificate level. BMTH 041 graphing rational functions; exponential and logarithmic functions; trigonometric functions; analytic trigonometry; series and sequences; complex numbers; conic sections revisited. This is an ABE Provincial Certificate course. Sciences BBIO 041 Preparation for studies in biology at college, university or other post secondary courses. Students may select topics that provide appropriate preparation for specific vocational or career programs. This is an ABE advanced certificate course. BBIO 042 A n intensive, self-paced course in biology for students who are planning to go on to college, university or other post-secondary courses. This is an ABE advanced certificate course. NOTE: Completion of BBIO 041 and BBIO 042 gives credit for the ABE Provincial Biology course. Equivalent in scope or level of difficulty to biology offered in senior secondary schools. BSCI032 Basic scientific principles needed to progress to higher level science courses. A n ABE intermediate course. Business math, interpretation of graphs and formulas used in business and industry, calculation of simple and compound interest, payroll, taxes, and investment. This is an ABE Advanced Certificate course. Chemistry, physics, and earth science for students who plan a non-technical career or vocation. BMTH 042 BCHM 041 A review of basic algebra, quadratic equations, and the use of geometry and trigonometry in the solution of applied mathematical problems. This is an ABE A d vanced Certificate course. An introduction to the principles of chemistry. Students may select topics that provide appropriate preparation for specific training. A n ABE advanced course. BMTH 045 Introduction to principles of chemistry and laboratory skills in measurement, recording, and treatment of data. Equivalent in scope and level of difficulty to chemistry offered in senior secondary schools. Designed to prepare students for further studies in chemistry. A n ABE Provincial course. Craphing linear equations; systems of linear equations in 2 and 3 variables; inequalities and sets; factoring polynomial expressions, advanced fractional expressions; concept of function; quadratic, logarithmic, and exponential functions; quadratic equations, roots, maxima and minima; conic sections. This is an ABE Advanced Certificate course. BMTH 046 BSCI 040 BCHM 042 BPHY 041 A n introduction to the principles of physics. Students may select topics that provide appropriate preparation for specific training. An ABE advanced course. Solving linear, absolute value, quadratic, and rational inequalities; analyzing, manipulating and graphing functions; approximating the roots of a polynomial; Preparatory Programs - Adult Basic Education/Foundations 32 BPHY 042 Introduction to the principles of physics and laboratory skills in measurement, recording and treatment of data. Equivalent in scope and level of difficulty to physics offered in senior secondary school. Designed to prepare students for further studies in physics. An ABE Provincial course. ALTERNATIVE CAREER TRAINING PROGRAM Contact Person: D. Kirkby, Coordinator, Room P203, Phone 986-1911, local 2579 Instructional Faculty J. BORDEWICK, B.Sc. (Ed.) (Idaho), M. Ed. (UBC) P.D.P. Faculty Associate (SFU) D. KIRKBY, B.Ed. (Winnipeg) L. SPENCER, B.A., P.D.P. (SFU) General Information The Alternative Career Training Program is an employment exploration program with a unique focus and approach. The program is based on a developmental perspective and is committed to working with adults with special learning needs. Students are educated to accept the responsibilities of independent living as young adults, as well as the demands of competitive entry-level employment, and will be able to address any social or emotional issues which could act as barriers to employment. The A C T Program combines in-class instruction with practical work experience, emphasizing the development or maintenance of skills which may be used in employment situations. Students meet with faculty to discuss an individual course plan that best fits their needs. Personal goals will be set and monitored throughout the year. Student Profile Students who will find the A C T Program beneficial are learning or developmentally delayed. In addition, they may present any or all of the following characteristics: a) difficulty grasping academic information (for example, mathematical problem solving, reading print, writing) b) a lower than chronological age maturity level c) low self-esteem d) physically handicapped (for example, neurologically impaired; blind or visually impaired; wheelchair dependent) Students who will obtain the most benefit from the A C T Program are those who have reached a moderate level of independence (i.e. they are responsible for self-care; they travel independently locally; they have had some work or volunteer experience; they can articulate several areas of interest or a willingness to try various work sites). Admission Requirements The program is in session for eight months (two terms), and classes are held three days per week, with each Thursday and Friday being spent "on site", gaining work experience. Students are accepted in September and must pay a registration fee for each term. Entry is by referral and interview. Candidates must be at least 19 years of age. Students have the option of returning for an additional year of the program. Each candidate is interviewed by the instructional staff. Classes admit a maximum of twelve students. Appointments for interviews may be made by contacting the coordinator of the Alternative Career Training Program, Capilano College, 986-1911, loc. 2579. Course Descriptions ACTP 001 Job Search Techniques This course offers the student an opportunity to explore methods and techniques which will enhance the job search. It focuses on appropriate behaviours in the marketplace and also includes opportunities for growth in the areas of self-awareness and independence as they relate to making lifestyle decisions. Computer-assisted learning will be offered to complement this course. ACTP 002 Practical Field Experiences Students are provided with the opportunity to explore a variety of field placements which are college-supervised. Included are six practicum periods for a total ten weeks of field work. ACTP 003 Communications & Math for Everyday Living This course has been designed with three components: consumer mathematics, communications and cashier training. It provides opportunities to maintain and develop specific skill areas, with integration of these skills into employment situations being the desired goal. Electives Students will have the opportunity to participate in a variety of options designed to expand their interests and experiences. These options, scheduled on Tuesday of each week, include field trips, mobility training, counselling, fitness centre activities and computer training. In consultation with faculty, students will choose options which complement their individual program plans. Preparatory Programs - Alternative Career Training 33 ENGLISH AS A SECOND LANGUAGE ESL 041 Intermediate Conversation II Contact Person: Nicholas Collins, ESL Co-ordinator, Office P214, Phone 984-1703 A continuation of ESL 040. Instructional Faculty J. ACOSTA, BA. (Calif.), E.S.L. Cert. (San Francisco State) N. COLLINS, B.A. (London), M.A. Advanced Professional Teaching Cert. (UBC) R. KUBICEK, B.A. (Sir George Williams), M.A. (SFU) English as a Second Language (ESL) courses offer international and permanent resident students a variety of Intermediate and Advanced courses to help them improve their competency in English for work, daily life, and postsecondary study. Courses cover reading, writing, and speaking. ESL courses are offered in three categories — part-time evening, part-time day, and Academic Preparatory. Admission Requirements Students who wish to enrol in the Academic Preparatory program must obtain the instructor's permission by interview before enrolling. Interviews are held in August and December and in the week before classes start each term. Courses are not transferable to university. Special Fees and Expenses Potential students who are not landed immigrants or Canadian citizens may study in these courses on payment of the International Student Fee. Contact the Registrar's Office for information on fees. The College's Financial Aid office can provide help for students who cannot afford tuition fees. Details are available at registration time. ESL 050 Advanced Conversation I (F,S) (3,0) A course in the speaking skills needed for regular college study. Students improve their understanding of lecture material and spoken reports, and study advanced grammar. ESL 051 Advanced Conversation II (F,S) (3,0) A continuation of ESL 050. ESL 090 Intermediate Reading and Writing I (F,S) (3,0) Development of speaking and writing skills in English for students who wish to study at the college level. Stress is on English sentence structure, grammar, and short writing assignments. Reading and oral comprehension are included, as well as conversation. ESL 091 Intermediate Reading and Writing II (F,S) (3,0) A continuation of ESL 090. ESL 098 Advanced Reading and Writing I (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Written permission of the instructor Stress in the course is on writing, discussion and expression of ideas using correct English grammar, spelling and punctuation. Students submit a weekly written assignment. Students who successfully complete this course with first-class standing should be able to take and pass English 100. Course Descriptions ESL 099 Advanced Reading and Writing II (F,S) (3,0) ESL 031 Beginner Level II (F,S) (3,0) A continuation of ESL 098. 90/91 subject to funding) Continuation of ESL 030. ESL 040 Intermediate Conversation I (F,S) (3,0) This course enables Intermediate students to improve their speaking skills up to the Advanced level, using both written and oral exercises. Students practice idioms and conversational forms. Preparatory Programs - English as a Second Language 34 Please note that prospective E.S.L. students do NOT have to take a test as a requirement of entry to the above courses, (i.e. EDT Test) Academic Studies/University Transfer Academic transfer courses at Capilano College provide students with a variety of options. Students can select a full program of study equivalent to the first two years of university (see note on Course Selection and Advising), and can enrol on a full-time or part-time basis. Courses in Academic Studies are of interest both to students who plan to transfer to a university and to students who do not intend to continue to upper-level studies. For those students who need extra help in basic skills, the Academic Studies Division offers some preparatory courses and some academic support services (see notes on the Writing Centre and the Math Learning Centre). Students interested in special fields of study such as Canadian Studies, Women's Studies, or Labour Studies can select from innovative programs in these areas (as offered from year to year). Academic instruction at Capilano College is both disciplinary and inter-disciplinary and is of a high intellectual calibre. The College carefully reviews the content and the delivery methods of its academic courses to ensure that those courses are current and that they continue to meet university standards. Students in academic transfer courses should expect to work at least two to three hours outside of class for every hour of class time. The College offers a basic library collection and full media and reference services to complement the courses of study. The Academic Studies Division offers a range of courses in various disciplines which are grouped in three areas as follows: Humanities: Art History, Chinese, English, French, German, Japanese, Philosophy, Spanish, Thai, Theatre Social Sciences: Anthropology, Commerce, Economics, Geography (Human), History, Political Studies, Psychology, Sociology, Women's Studies Natural Sciences: Biology, Chemistry, Computing Science, Geography (Physical), Geology, Mathematics, Physics Transfer courses in Music and Art are also offered (see listings under Career Programs). Associate in Arts and Science Diploma Students who have completed the requirements of any four-term College program may receive an Associate in Arts and Science Diploma, provided they have fulfilled the following conditions as outlined under Diploma and Certificate Requirements (see page 12). Transfer To and From Other Institutions The Academic Studies Division maintains transferability of its courses with other post-secondary institutions. The College's representatives meet regularly with those of other institutions to ensure that Capilano's program of first and second year courses are fully transferable as university courses. There is agreement among all public B.C. colleges to accept each other's credits upon transfer, if applicable to a program given in the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. Capilano College reserves the right to review individual course credit. Transfer credits are granted to students on admission for acceptable work done at other institutions; the transfer credits reduce the total number of credits which are required at Capilano College for a certificate or diploma. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. All approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student Record. Full information on transfer of specific courses is available from an Advisor, Counsellor, and in the pertinent instructional division. Transfer information accurate to the time of printing is to be found in the Transfer Guide section at the back of the Calendar. Students are urged to read this section when establishing their programs of study. Academic Course Descriptions Full descriptions of all academic courses can be found in the alphabetical listings following. Students are urged to read the general discipline information included in each section carefully. It is the student's responsibility to be familiar with the special information needed to select academic courses. Please note that university transferable courses for Art and Music appear under their respective program headings in the Career/Vocational section. Course Description Code: On the right hand side of each course description there is a series of code letters and numbers, for example: English 0 1 0 Language Skills (F,S) (3,0) The first letter(s) indicate the term in which the class is usually offered. Example: F-Fall, S-Spring, SU-Summer. Thus, English 010 is offered in the Fall and Spring term. Check the Timetable to confirm the term offered as this may change after the Calendar is printed. The first number indicates the number of credit hours granted for the course (most courses, however, involve 4 instructional hours per week), and the second number denotes the number of lab and conversational hours per week. Thus, English 010 is offered three hours a week for three credit hours with no lab time. Academic — General Information 35 Course Selection and Advising Math Learning Centre (J107) Advisors or counsellors assist students in selecting the best program of studies. The final responsibility for course selection, however, rests with the student. All academic students are advised to see an Advisor or a Counsellor to plan their courses of study. Students should consult the University Transfer Guide in this Calendar. This centre is equipped with math learning aids, video tapes, diagnostic tests, calculators, microcomputers and reference textbooks. Students taking math courses are encouraged to make use of this centre to study math, and to seek assistance from the faculty member or supervisor on duty. Self-study programs are available for students wishing to refresh or improve their mathematical skills through the Algebra 12 level. Refer to the course descriptions of Math 009,010,011, and 012 and consult with a math instructor for further information. English Entrance Requirements Students who wish to enroll in English courses must, BEFORE REGISTERING IN A N Y ENGLISH COURSE, write either the Language Proficiency Index (administered by EMRG) or the English Diagnostic Test (EDT) given by the English Department of Capilano College. English Diagnostic Test EDTs are given prior to and during the registration week at Capilano College. These tests are administered by the English Department and may be used for admission to English courses offered at Capilano College only. Preregistration is required at the Registrar's Office and a fee of $20 is charged. Schedules for these tests are published in the term timetable and are also available by contacting the Humanities Division office. Students who, because of exceptional circumstances, cannot attend any scheduled sittings of the test may write the test on an individual basis. Every effort must be made to attend the scheduled sittings, however, and permission to have a personal sitting will be granted only in extraordinary cases. Students wishing to write the EDT should pay in advance at the Registrar's office. Writing Centre (H406) The English Department Writing Centre provides: 1) a drop-in centre where you can work on your writing assignments. 2) a set of writing tools: dictionaries, grammar texts, information sheets, exercises and software. 3) an English instructor available to answer any specific writing questions you might have on such topics as research, grammar, analysis, and essay structure. 4) a tutorial service where you can look at your EDT results, and discuss, in detail, grammatical concerns or graded assignments with an English instructor. 5) a computer room where you can do grammatical exercises and word processing. Academic — General Information 36 Self-Study Courses In keeping with the College's policy for the development of alternative instructional modes, it is possible for the student to pursue studies in first-year Chemistry on a selfstudy term format. Refresher courses in Math through the Pre-calculus level are also available in this self-study format. These packaged courses, prepared for home study with the aid of cassette tapes, manuals, slides, video tapes and film loops, are designed to offer students who are unable to maintain regular attendance at the Lynnmour Campus or a satellite centre the opportunity to pursue college courses. They are also available to students who are attending any Capilano College campus, providing these students with a viable alternative to the usual lecture/ tutorial instructional format. (Students should note however that attendance on campus for Chemistry labs is necessary.) Registration Priority In some courses with high demand, registration priority will be given to students who have not attempted the course previously at Capilano College. Any student who has attempted the course within the last year will not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. Lab/Course Relationship Many courses require that students complete a lab and/or tutorial. Students should ensure that they are aware of lab/tutorial requirements and the timetable for these components. Students should note that it is necessary to pass both labs and lectures. The cost of the labs are included in the tuition fee, except for lab manuals and some field trip costs. Special Programs SCIENCE: GENERAL INFORMATION Women's Studies Program A. Non-Science Students A Women's Studies Program, consisting of a variety of transfer credit, college credit and credit-free courses, has been developed at Capilano College. In addition to the Women's Studies College credit and transfer credit courses, there are career and academic courses in other disciplines of special interest to women. Canadian Studies Specialty Students who wish to concentrate their studies on Canadian content courses can choose courses from the list below. All courses hold full transfer credit and transfer into the Canadian Studies Program at SFU. To qualify for a Canadian Studies Specialty, complete a College diploma with at least 24 credits from the following list. Choose these credits from courses in at least three different departments. Of the 24 credits you choose, at least six must be numbered 200 or above. For a Canadian Studies Specialty to be applied to a General Studies Diploma, an English or Communications course is required. Fall 1990 Anthropology 204 Anthropology 206 Economics f 01 English 202 French 130,190,290 Geography 106,108 History 110, 205, 111 Labour Studies 100,110, 111, 115,117,119,142,170,181, 182, 210 Political Studies 104 Sociology 200, 201 Spring 1991 Anthropology 208 Biology 105 English 203 French 131,191,291 Geography 108 Geology 111 History 111, 208,110 Students planning to continue studies at a university are advised to consider the following courses to fulfill their Science requirement: Biology 104,105 or 113. (Note: Transfer credit for these Biology courses is limited to non-science students.) Chemistry 104,105 Computing Science 100,104 Geology 110, 111 Geography 112,114 Math 101,102,103,105,108,109 Physics 104 Please check the prerequisites given in the individual course descriptions. Note: Biology 104 and Chemistry 030 fulfill Biology and Chemistry requirements for the Nursing Program at BCIT. B. Science Students Capilano College Natural Sciences Division offers a complete first and second-year university transfer program in Biology, Chemistry, Computing Science, Math and Physics. In addition, the Sciences Division offers science transfer requirements in the following: preMedicine, pre-Dentistry, Engineering, Geology, Geophysics and other earth sciences, Forestry, Agriculture, Pharmacy, Home Economics, Rehabilitation Medicine, and Dental Hygiene. Students wishing specific course requirements for a particular program should contact the Sciences Division. Note that Physical Geography courses are offered in the Social Sciences Division. For first-year and second-year transfer programs, select courses from those listed below: i) Biological Sciences (including Biochemistry) Labour Studies 101,110, 111, 116,131,140,181 Political Studies 104 FIRST YEAR Biology 108 or 110/111 Chemistry 110/111 or 108/109 Physics 110/111 or 108/111 or 114/115 Math 110/111 English (six credits) Course descriptions appear under the appropriate discipline. SECOND YEAR APPLY T O T H E REGISTRAR to have the Specialty added to your Diploma at the time of graduation. A complete selection of second-year courses which are transferable to all three B.C. universities is available. Consult the Biology Department for the specific requirements to transfer into third year at the university of your choice. Academic — General Information 37 ii) Chemistry v) Mathematics FIRST YEAR Chemistry 110/111 or 108/109 Physics 114/115 or 110/111 or 108/111 Math 110/111 English (six credits) Elective (six credits) FIRST YEAR Math 110/111 Physics 114/115 or 110/111 or 108/111 (UBC) Chemistry 110/111 or 108/109 (UBC) English (six credits) (UBC) Computing Science 103/105 (UBC) * Computing Science may be delayed until the second year. SFU - bound students should consult the SFU calendar for electives. SECOND YEAR Students planning to pursue a major or honours course in Chemistry should consult a faculty member as requirements differ with different universities. Chemistry 200/201 and 204/205 (Transfer to UBC. Consult a faculty member) Physics 200/201 and 210/211 or 220/221 and 210/211 Math 200 and 230, and 235 depending upon university (consult a faculty member) Elective Science Elective from Math or Physics iii) Computing Science FIRST YEAR Computing Science 103/104/105 Chemistry 110/111 or 108/109 (UBC) Math 110/111 Physics 110/111 or 114/115 or 108/111 English (6 credits) (UBC) English (3 credits) or Philosophy 110 (SFU) SECOND YEAR FOR TRANSFER T O UBC: Computing Science 222/223 Math 200/205/230 Art Electives (6 credits) Electives (6 credits) FOR TRANSFER T O SFU: Computing Science 130/131/222/223/226 Math 205 Electives (15 credits) Consult SFU calendar for prerequisites to upper division courses. iv) Geological Sciences (including Geophysics, Geochemistry and other earth sciences) FIRST YEAR O N L Y Geology 110/111 Physics 108/111 or 110/111 or 114/115 Chemistry 108/109 or 110/111 Math 110/111 English (six credits) (Geography 112/114 also transfers as university lab science courses to the universities - see Geography listings) Academic —General Information 38 SECOND YEAR Math 200,205 or 215,230,231,235 Computing Science 103/105 Non Science Elective (six credits) Electives vi) Physics FIRST YEAR Physics 114/115 or 110/111 or 108/111 Chemistry 110/111 or 108/109 Math 110/111 English (six credits) Non-science Elective or Geology, Biology or Computing Science (six credits) SECOND YEAR Physics 200/201, 210/211,220/221 Math 200, 230,235 Non-science Elective (six credits) Science Elective (six credits) Students interested in honours Physics should consult Physics instructors. vii) Other Programs or Combinations of Programs Consult Sciences Division for course selection, particularly with regard to second-year choices. Anthropology Instructional Faculty B. BERDICHEWSKY, B.A. (U. of Chile), Ph.D. (Madrid) K. LIND, B.A., M.A. (UBC) R. M U C K L E , B.A., M.A. (SFU) General Information Students who intend to major or minor in Anthropology should take both Anthropology 120 and 121 if they will be attending UBC, SFU or the University of Victoria. Women's Studies 122, Women in Anthropology, may be substituted for Anthropology 120 or 121, minor/major program at SFU and UVic. Women's Studies 122 also receives 200-level credit in Women's Studies at SFU and UVic. University Transfer Credit All Anthropology courses at Capilano transfer to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions Anthropology 120 Introduction to Anthropology (F) (3,0) A survey of the discipline to include an introduction to human evolution and our place among the primates; structure and organization of society, and the individual and society. Emphasis will be placed on the comparative study of social institutions of non-Western cultures such as economics, family patterns, social control in small communities, religion and magic. Anthropology 121 Introduction to Social Anthropology (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Anthropology 120, Women's Studies 122, or written permission of the instructor. A n examination of Anthropological concepts and theories of culture, as well as the analysis of cultural patterns such as kinship, religion, politics, belief systems, language, and the role of Anthropology in a changing world. Anthropology 123 Introduction to Archaeology and the Prehistoric Past (F) (3,0) An introduction to the theoretical foundations and methods of Archaeology, including the techniques used to discover, reconstruct, and interpret the past. Examples will be drawn from archaeological research around the world. Anthropology 124 Archaeology and Human Origins (S) (3,0) A n introductrion to the theoretical foundations and evidence for human origins as presented by Archaeology and Physical Anthropology. The biological and cultural evolution of humankind as indicated through a study of evolutionary theory, primate behaviour, skeletal remains, and archaeological discoveries. Anthropology 200 Intermediate Social Anthropology (S) (3,0) A study of the social structure and organization of various cultures of the world. Emphasis on the dynamics of culture, the cross-cultural approach, the theoretical issues in Anthropology. Focus: Multiculturalism. Anthropology 202 Introduction to Cultural Ecology (F) (3,0) The study of people, culture and environment. Themes will include ecology and archaeology of early civilizations in Mexico; adaptive strategies of hunting-gathering people, pastoralists such as reindeer, cattle and camel herders, peasant groups around the world; environmental concerns from anthropology's perspective. Focus: Ecology of Health and Disease. Medical Anthropology. Anthropology 204 Ethnic Relations (F) (3,0) A study of the relations between ethnic groups including multiculturalism and an examination of how ethnic groups come to be defined, how they are maintained, stereotyping, and how these processes interrelate with other social variables such as economics, education, violence and the family. The focus will usually be on B.C. Students will be engaged in some primary research. Anthropology 206 Native Peoples of British Columbia (F) (3,0) A n introduction to Native Indian Peoples of B.C. to include the archaeological past, social organization of different peoples, and current issues. Anthropology 208 Native Peoples of North America (S) (3,0) A survey of the cultural history and social organization of native peoples of the North American continent including Canada, the United States and Mexico. An examination of traditional lifestyles including family, political, religious and ecological patterns; and current issues. Academic—Anthropology 39 Art History Anthropology 241 Archaeology Field School (SU) (6,0) A course in archaeological methods, techniques and theories dealing with excavation, recovery, analysis and interpretation of archaeological material. This is a practical field course, participants acquiring such skills as mapping, surveying, photography, computer applications, preparation of reports and interpretation. This course usually will be in cooperation with other colleges as a joint endeavour. Women's Studies 122 Women in Anthropology (S) (3,0) The anthropological perspective applied to women in different cultures of the world; their role in economic, political, religious, kinship and expressive systems. Exploration of the work of women anthropologists and the effect of theory on understanding women. What is women's experience in cultures and areas such as the Eskimo, Amazon, Israeli kibbutz, Greece, Afghanistan, India, Mexico and Africa. Anthropology or Women's Studies credit is available for this course. Please see Women's Studies for further information. Instructional Faculty A. BURGESS, B.A., M.A. (UBC) J. JUNGIC B.A., M.A. (UBC) D. N E A V E , B.A. (Manchester), M.A. (U.Vic.) General Information Art history courses are designed to enrich and broaden the student's knowledge of culture past and present, stimulate visual awareness and provide analytical tools with which to decode visual images. A major in art history can lead to careers in: architecture, interior design, commercial art, art gallery curatorial work, museum work, art dealing, teaching, art restoration, arts administration, art criticism, etc. University Transfer Credit All Art History courses offered at Capilano College are transferable to UBC, SFU, and U.Vic. Please check the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar for further information. Course Descriptions Art History 100 The History of Art I (F) (3,0) This course studies the history of art beginning with the pyramids and tombs of Egypt and concluding with the Gothic Cathedrals and Italian fresco paintings of the High Middle Ages in Europe. A n understanding and appreciation of art are the aims of the course and through lectures and class discussion students will develop an 'eye' for seeing, and appropriate terms to describe the works shown. Our involvement with the art of the past clearly reveals how changing styles in architecture, painting, and sculpture are influenced by the historical context and the political, social, and religious thought of each period. Art History 101 The History of Art II (S) (3,0) Beginning with the art of the Italian Renaissance, this course studies the history of painting, sculpture, and architecture to the present day. Individual artists including Leonardo, Michelangelo, Rembrandt, Goya, Van Gogh and Picasso are studied in addition to the larger period styles. Because works of art so perfectly reflect their age, the economic, social, and religious ideas of each period will be closely considered. Art History 104 Introduction to Visual Literacy I (F) (3,0) This course is designed to encourage students to become visually literate and confident in the analysis/interpreta- Academic — Art History 40 Hon of all aspects of the visual arts. Confrontation with a wide range of ideas, images and media will stimulate discussion and provide a deeper understanding of the creative process. The purposes of art will be discussed and the relationships between art and society explored. The interdisciplinary nature of art will be examined as well as the achievements of Canadian artists. Art History 105 Introduction to Visual Literacy il (S) (3,0) Art History 221 High Renaissance and Mannerist Art in Italy (S) (3,0) This course studies the art of the High Renaissance and the emerging view of the artist as sovereign genius. The work of Leonardo, Michelangelo and Raphael is examined in depth. Focus is then given to the artists of the Mannerist School, whose highly subjective and artificial style dominates the latter part of the sixteenth century. The contributions of the Venetians as well as the architecture of Palladio will also be considered. A continuation of A . H . 104. The material will include the art of the past as well as the current art scene. Topics such as magic and ritual in art, the landscape and the nude in art, the artist as observer, art and advertising, women and art, aspects of photography and recent trends will be explored. Canadian content will be stressed. As in A . H . 104 the emphasis will be on developing visual literacy. Art History 210 History of Modern Art (19th Century) (F) (3,0) This course studies the mainstreams of modern art beginning with the paintings of Jacques Louis David produced during the French Revolution and concluding with the art of Cezanne. Emphasis is given to individual artists, and works by Goya, Delacroix, Monet, Van Gogh, Gauguin and others are studied in depth. Aesthetic revolutions and counter-revolutions are explored in conjunction with the social and political upheavals of the 19thc. Art History 211 History of Modern Art (20th Century) (S) (3,0) This history of 20th century art begins with the work of Picasso and Matisse and studies the impact of revolutionary movements of art such as Futurism, Constructivism, Dada, and Surrealism. America's post war contribution: Abstract Expressionism, Pop, Minimalism, Conceptual and Earth Art is studied as well as new directions in the art of the '80s. The aim of this course is to demystify modern art by studying the underlying concepts and theories, which will reveal how closely art expresses the ethos of contemporary life. Art History 220 Early Renaissance Art in Italy (F) (3,0) This course traces the origins of the Early Renaissance in Italy, beginning with the art of Giotto and focusing attention on the creators of the new style, the architects, sculptors and painters of Florence, Arezzo, Mantua and Venice. The intellectual, religious and political climate of the fifteenth century, linked to the expression in this new art, will also be considered, as will be the emerging importance of private patronage. Academic — Art History 41 Biology Instructional Faculty University Transfer Credit R.G. CAMFIELD, B.Sc. (Hons.) (Monash), Ph.D. (UBC) D. HARPER, B.Sc. (UBC) M. FITZ-EARLE, B.Sc. (Nottingham), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Toronto), Coordinator of Biology N.A. RICKER, B.A. (Calif.), M.Sc, Ph.D. (UBC) V.N. TROUP, B.Sc. (Hons.) (McMaster), M.Sc. (UBC) L.K. W A D E , B.Sc, M.Sc. (UBC), Ph.D. (A.N.U.), Chairman of Sciences Division All Biology courses transfer to SFU, UBC, and U V i c For more details consult the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Laboratory Supervisors and Technician The first term of a course designed primarily as a laboratory science elective for students who do not plan to take further courses in biology. Basic principles of human biology will be presented and the impact of the environment upon humans will be evaluated. Major topics will include cells, cell division, human genetics, digestion, respiration, and the cardiovascular system. D. HARPER, B.Sc. (UBC), Laboratory Supervisor L. M C D O N E L L , B.H.E. (UBC), Laboratory Supervisor J. RICHARDSON, B.Sc. (U.Vic), M.Sc. (UBC), Laboratory Supervisor C. SANDERSON, B.Sc. (Durham), Laboratory Supervisor B. WILLIAMSON, Dip. Tech. (BCIT), Laboratory Technician General Information Capilano College Biology Department offers courses to meet a variety of educational needs. The Biology 104/105 and 104/113 sequences meet the laboratory science requirements for Arts students as well as general interest biology courses. Those planning a major in biology or other life science should enroll in Biology 110/111. Pre-professional students who intend to enter Dentistry, Medicine, Forestry, Agriculture, Home Economics, Rehabilitation Medicine, Dental Hygiene or Pharmacy, etc, should also take Biology 110/111. Students lacking Biology 12, Chemistry 11, or both these subjects, should enroll in Biology 108 rather than Biology 110. A complete selection of second-year courses is available which meet the credit transfer requirements of the three B.C. universities. Some of these courses may be included in the requirements for pre-professional programs, and for specific life science programs. The student should consult the Biology Department for details of course requirements for various programs. All biology courses except Biology 200 and Biology 206 require weekly laboratory periods and/or field trips. Some courses also have extended field trips. Students' contributions to the cost of laboratories are included in the course tuition fee. Lab manuals for those courses requiring them must be purchased for a nominal fee. The student is expected to defray in part the costs associated with field trips. Academic - Biology 42 Course Descriptions Biology 104 Human Biology I (F) (3,3) Biology 105 Environmental Biology (S) (3,3) The second term of a course designed primarily as a laboratory science elective for students who do not plan to take further courses in biology except for Biology 206. Basic principles of ecology will be developed and the impact of contemporary society on the environment will be assessed. Major topics include: ecological concepts and environmental issues. Biology 108 Basic Introductory Biology (F,S) (4.5,3) This course is designed for the student who has either not taken both Biology 11 and 12, or who has not achieved a minimum T3' standing in these subjects, and who has not taken Chemistry 11. It covers both the course content of Biology 110 and the background necessary for the student lacking Biology 12, Chemistry 11, or both. Students lacking either of these courses are STRONGLY R E C O M M E N D E D to take Biology 108 instead of Biology 110. Upon successful completion of Biology 108, students are fully qualified to take Biology 111 in the Spring term. Biology 110 Introductory Biology I (F,S) (3,3) Prerequisite: None; however Biology 11 and 12 with a minimum T3' standing and Chemistry 11 are strongly recommended. The standard introductory biology course for students who plan to take further courses in science. Major topics will include the origin of life, cell structure and function, cell division and introductory genetics. Biology 111 Introductory Biology II (S) (3,3) Biology 205 Ecology II (S) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 Prerequisite: Biology 204 A continuation of Biology 110 which further develops the discussion of basic biological concepts including biological systems, evolution and ecology. A continuation of ecological principles, with the introduction and application of quantitative concepts. The emphasis will be on animal ecology including population dynamics, animal behaviour competition, and other aspects of interactions of plant and animal populations. Biology 113 Human Biology II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Biology 104 A continuation of the study of human anatomy and physiology commenced in Biology 104. The course will involve a detailed discussion of a selection of the following topics: the musculoskeletal, nervous, hormonal, and urinary systems; and a study of the development of the major body systems. Applications of genetics and molecular biology to these systems also will be considered. The laboratory component of the course will provide a complementary practical study of the systems and their component parts. Biology 200 Genetics I (F) (3,0) Biology 206 Ecology of the Western Pacific (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111, or Biology 104 and 105, or Geography 112 and 114, or by permission of the Biology Coordinator. This course examines the complex ecology and biogeography of the lands bordering the western Pacific Ocean. Basic principles of biogeography and ecology will be presented with reference to the regions concerned. Selected environmental issues and biogeographic characteristics will be discussed for the following regions: the Asian Mainland, with emphasis on Japan, China and the Malay Peninsula and Australasia, focusing on Australia, Papua New Guinea and New Zealand. There is no lab for this course. Transfer credit applied for. Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111. An introduction to the principles and mechanisms of heredity. Emphasis will be placed on an analytical approach to classical genetics, genetics of humans, quantitative genetics and population genetics. There is no laboratory in this course. Biology 201 Genetics II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Biology 200. Biology 214 and/or Biology 215 are recommended. A continuation of the principles and mechanisms of heredity, with emphasis on the genetics of microorganisms, molecular genetics, genetic engineering and development of genetics. There is no laboratory for this course. Biology 204 Ecology I (F) (3,3,1) Prerequisite: Biology 110 and 111 or Biology 104 and 105. An introduction to the principles of ecology with emphasis on ecosystem and community dynamics and structure; ecosystem concepts, components, interrelationships, energy flow and nutrient cycling. Introduction to vegetation analysis in the B.C. context. Both plants and animals will be considered but plants will be emphasized. Weekly fieldtrips examine local biogeoclimatic zone structure and composition, while a southern B.C. ficldtrip introduces several inland biogeoclimatic zones. Biology 212 Invertebrate Zoology (F) (3,3) Prerequisite: Biology 108or 110 and 111. A comparative survey of the major phyla and classes of invertebrates with emphasis upon phylogeny, adaptive biology and ecology of each group. The course is designed around the major unifying concept of evolution. Problems of contemporary interest in the field of invertebrate zoology. The laboratory complements the lecture components and the course includes a three-day field trip to the Bamfield Marine Station. Biology 213 Vertebrate Zoology (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111. A comparative survey of the major classes of vertebrates, emphasizing evolutionary trends especially in development and morphology of organ systems. Adaptive features in vertebrates are considered. The laboratory complements the lecture component with representative vertebrates being examined. The lab component includes several half-day field trips. Academic — Biology 43 Biology 214 Cell Biology (F) (3,3) Biology 220 Microbiology I (F) (3,3) Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111 and concurrent registration in Chemistry 200, if not already completed. Prerequisite: Biology 108 or 110 and 111; Chemistry 110 and 111. Corequisite: Transfer to UBC requires Chemistry 200/201. An integrated study of the structure and function of cells and their components. Ultrastructure of cell organelles as determined by electron microscopy will be related to the molecular functions of cells. Emphasis will also be placed on the techniques used to study cells, the evolutionary origin of cells and their components, and on comparisons between specialized cell structure and function. The laboratory exercises will use modern methods of microscopy and separation techniques in a detailed study of cell structures and their functions. Biology 215 Biochemistry (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Biology 214 and concurrent registration in Chemistry 201, if not already completed. An examination of the fundamental principles and basic facts of biochemistry starting with protein structure and enzyme functions. Cell energetics, biosyntheses and mechanisms which control cell metabolism will also be considered. The laboratory will involve detailed experimental analyses, using the current techniques of biochemistry, of the molecular functions of cells and tissues. Academic— 44 Biology A comprehensive treatment of introductory microbiology. The origin, basic structure, growth and genetics of microorganisms will be discussed. The lab provides practical experience in standard microbial techniques. Biology 221 Microbiology II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Biology 220 A continuation of Biology 220, emphasizing metabolism, immunological aspects, and ecology of micro-organisms. The role of micro-organisms in agriculture, various industries, health and sanitation is considered. The lab also includes a major project of interest to the student. Chemistry Instructional Faculty A. B. GILCHRIST, Ph.D. (SFU) P.C. L E COUTEUR, B.Sc, M.Sc. (Auckland), Ph.D. (Calif.), Coordinator of Chemistry, Geology and Physics D.W. READ, B.A., M.Sc. (UBC), Ph.D. (McGill) Laboratory Supervisors and Technicians K.B. H A C K , B.Sc. (UBC), Laboratory Supervisor D. LI, B.Sc. (UBC), Laboratory Supervisor B.J. MOIR. Dip. Tech. (BCIT), Laboratory Technician I. SMITH,, H.N.C. (Aberdeen), Laboratory Supervisor General Information All chemistry courses include weekly three-hour laboratory periods unless otherwise stated. The cost of the labs is included in the course tuition fee except for lab manuals and some field trip costs. Students are required to have (and wear) safety glasses in all laboratory periods. University Transfer Credit All Chemistry courses, except 030, carry transfer credit to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions Chemistry 030 An Introduction to Chemistry (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: None (No university transfer credit) This course is designed for those students who have had no previous chemistry, and who wish to go on in sciences. Two hour labs are given. Chemistry 030 fulfills the entrance chemistry requirement for the Nursing program at BCIT. Atoms, molecules, the mole, chemical formulas, ionic and covalent bonding. Balancing equations, simple stoichiometry problems, solutions, acids, bases and salts, equilibrium, gas laws. Chemistry 104 Fundamentals of Chemistry I (F) (3,3) Prerequisite: None, but some chemistry and mathematics recommended. A course specifically designed for the non-science students who need first-year chemistry requirements for nursing, home economics and physical education, etc. A study of chemical principles, stoichiometry, the chemical bond; atomic structure; chemical periodicity; introductory thermochemistry; gases. Chemistry 105 Fundamentals of Chemistry II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 104. A study of liquids, solids, and changes of state; oxidationreduction, electrochemistry, representative inorganic chemistry; equilibrium; acids, bases and salts; organic chemistry. Chemistry 108 Basic Chemistry I (F) (4.5,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 11 or Chem 030, Algebra 12 or equivalent. Math 110 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Students with Chemistry 12 permitted to enroll in Chemistry 108 with Chemistry Department's permission. Any student who has enrolled in Chemistry 108 or Chemistry 110 previously, will not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. This course covers the material of Chemistry 110, and, in addition, provides the background necessary for a student who has not taken Chemistry 12. Chemistry 109 Basic Chemistry II (S) (4.5,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 108. Math 111 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Students with Chemistry 110 permitted to enroll in Chemistry 109 only with Chemistry Department's permission. This course covers the material of Chemistry 111, and, in addition, provides the background necessary for a student who has not taken Chemistry 12. Chemistry 110 Principles and Methods of Chemistry I (F) (3,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 12 and Algebra 12. Math 110 must be taken concurrently if not already completed. A course for students who plan careers in science. A study of stoichiometry; the gaseous state; solids; liquids; solutions; atomic structure; the periodic system; chemical bonding; thermochemistry. Chemistry 110 Self Study - Principles and Methods of Chemistry I (F,S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 12 and Algebra 12. Math 110 must be taken concurrently if not already completed. A self-study course equivalent in content to Chemistry 110, open to any student but designed to be of particular value to those students who are unable to attend the Lynnmour Campus or a satellite centre on a regular basis. Academic— Chemistry 45 Chinese Chemistry 111 Instructional Faculty Principles and Methods of Chemistry II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 110. Math 111 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Thermodynamics, kinetics, equilibrium, acids, bases and salts; redox equations, electrochemistry; organic chemistry. Chemistry 111 Self Study -'Principles and Methods of Chemistry II (F,S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 110. Math 111 must be taken concurrently if not already completed. A self-study course equivalent in content to Chemistry 111 and designed to be of particular value to those students who are unable to attend the Lynnmour Campus or a satellite centre on a regular basis. Chemistry 200 Organic Chemistry I (F) (3,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 105,109 or 111. Any student who has attempted the course previously will not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. A study of nomenclature, structure, and spectroscopy of organic molecules; alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, organometallic compounds, alcohols, ethers, alkyl halides; mechanisms and stereochemistry. Chemistry 201 Organic Chemistry II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 200 Aromatic chemistry, aldehydes, ketones, acids and their derivatives, carbanions; amines; nitro, azo, diazo and related compounds; heterocyclics; carbohydrates, protein chemistry; polymers; natural products. Chemistry 204 B. NG., B.A. (Intl. Christian U., Japan), M.A. (London), Teach. Cert. Grad. Master (Hong Kong) Course Descriptions Chinese 100 First Year Chinese (F) (3,2) Introduction to Mandarin Chinese as it is spoken in Mainland China today. Emphasis is on basic phonetics, tones, pronunciation, grammar, writing and conversation. Chinese 100 First Year Chinese (F,S) (3,1) The same course content as above, but taught at a slower pace. The course period extends over two terms. Chinese 101 First Year Chinese (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: Chinese 100 or permission from instructor. This course will focus on perfecting students' basic phonetic skills, improving basic conversational skills and listening comprehension, learning more about Chinese grammatical structures, learning more Chinese characters to enable reading and writing of simple Chinese texts; learning to use a Chinese dictionary and a Chinese Word Processor as tools for writing and for further study. Chinese 200 Second Year Chinese (F) (3,2) This course is for students who know the basics of Mandarin phonetics and grammar and approximately 600 Chinese characters, or those who have completed Chinese 100 and 101 or its equivalent. A further 300 characters are taught. Additional work on writing and spoken Mandarin is provided using the language lab, and a Chinese Computer program. Introduction to Physical Inorganic Chemistry I (F) (3,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 105 with "B" standing or Chemistry 109 or 111, and Math 111. A study of gases, thermodynamics, thermochemistry; equilibrium, electrochemistry, solutions, quantitative inorganic analysis. Biological applications of these topics stressed. Chemistry 205 Introduction to Physical Inorganic Chemistry II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Chemistry 204 Chemical kinetics, aspects of bonding; transition elements and coordination complexes. Academic - Chinese 46 Chinese 201 Second Year Chinese (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: Chinese 200 or permission of instructor. Continues the work of Chinese 200. Commerce Instructional Faculty N. A M O N , B A . (Kent), M A . (SFU) G. F A N E , B.Sc. (City U.), M.B.A. (City LL), R.I.A. J.E. SAYRE, B.S., B.A. (Denver), M.A. (Boston) K.V. TOWSON, B.Sc., M.Sc. (SFU) J. WATERS, B.A. (Hons.) M.A. (SFU) C. WATKISS, B.Sc. (Carleton), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Toronto) J. WILSON, B.Comm. (UBC), C A . A Fall term Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.67 with no grade below C- MUST be achieved to continue into the Spring term, when the following courses will be taken: For those with Math 108/109 (or 110/111) in Year I: Commerce 291, 294, 296, 297 and one university transfer elective. For those with Math 107/108: Commerce 291, 294, 296, 297 and Mathematics 109. Transfer to SFU or UVic The College offers a two year transfer package to UBC consisting of Year I and Year II as follows: Year I To enter Year I, fill out an Application for Admission Form. Year I requires 30 credits which MUST include the following: a) Economics 200 and 201 - these may be taken in either order; b) English 100 followed by O N E of English 103,104,105, 106. c) The Mathematics requirement is: • If Math 12 was successfully completed with a " C " grade or better, take Math 108 followed by Math 109 (Note: 110 and 111 can be substituted for 108/109, but this combination is more oriented towards science than business). • If Math 12 was successfully completed with a grade of "P", take Math 107 followed by Math 108. • If Math 11 was successfully completed with a grade of " C " , take Math 107 followed by Math 108 . • If Math 11 was not taken (or the grade achieved was less than a "C") then Math 099 must be taken prior to Math 107. d) 12 credits (four courses) of electives. Students may choose any university transfer courses at the College, but it is suggested to spread these around rather than taking 3 or 4 courses in only one discipline. Year II Upon completion of Year I, students must then APPLY for admission to the Commerce Program itself by getting a "Commerce Program Application" from the Registrar's office. There are only 35 seats available in Year II and preference will be given to students with the best Year I records who want to take the entire Year II Program. Applications to the Commerce Program should be made immediately in late spring once the Year I courses are complete and grades received. Students who wait until late summer may find that all spaces have been filled. Some courses in the U B C transfer package do not transfer to SFU or UVic. Students wishing to transfer to either of these institutions are, therefore, strongly urged to see a Counsellor or Advisor before applying for admission to Year II. Course Descriptions Commerce 290 Quantitative Methods for Business (F) (4,0) A study of standard quantitative methods used in business and industry, including decision theory and basic probability. The study of computer software packages is included. Commerce 291 Applications of Statistics in Business (S) (4,0) The methods and applications of statistics in business; continuous random variables; sampling; estimation of parameters; hypotheses testing and regression analysis. Commerce 292 Principles of Organizational Behaviour (F) (4,0) Behaviour in organizations as it affects people or individuals, their relationships with others, their performance in groups and their effectiveness at work. Commerce 293 Financial Accounting (F) (3,0) An introduction to the construction and interpretation of financial statements and reports including the balance sheet, income statement, statement of retained earnings and the statement of change in financial position. Commerce 294 Managerial Accounting (S) (3,0) Introduction to the development and use of accounting, information for management planning and control and the development of cost information for financial reports. In the Fall term students admitted to Year II will take: Commerce 290, 292 and 293, Economics 211, and one university transfer elective Academic — Commerce 47 Computing Science Commerce 296 introduction to Business Management (S) (3,0) A n introduction to the wide range of interrelationships, both internal and external, of the organization. The development of a framework for analysis of the breadth of issues in management and administration. Commerce 297 Capital Markets and Institutions (S) (3,0) Introduction to the economic environment in which businesses operate including the role of the Bank of Canada. Analysis of domestic and international money markets and institutions and the basic capital asset valuation models. Instructional Faculty J.D. BONSER, B.A.Sc, M.A.Sc. (UBC), Ph.D. (Waterloo) E. EDWARDS, B.Sc, M.Sc. (UBC) M. F R E E M A N , B.Sc. (UBC), M.Sc. (Cal.Tech.), Ph.D. (UBC) L.F. HARRIS, B.A., M.A. (UBC), Ph.D. (Australia Nat. U.) R. HAUSCHILDT, B.Sc. (Hons.) (Queen's), M.Sc. (UBC) U.R. KEDING, B.A., M.A. (SFU) E. KUTTNER, B.Sc, M.Sc. (UBC) M. TALWERDI, B.Sc, M.Sc. (ETSU) R.H. VERNER, B.Sc. (UBC), M.Sc. (EWSC), B.C. Teaching Cert. (UBC) C. WATKISS, B.Sc. (Carleton), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Toronto), Coordinator of Computing Science General Information The Computing Science Department offers computing courses at the first and second-year university level. Students enrolled in these courses have excellent access to the College's computing facilities which include both microcomputer labs and HP3000 terminal labs. University Transfer Credit Students planning to major in Computing Science and Science students fulfilling Computing Science elective requirements normally take Comp 103/104/105 in their first year. Non-science students wishing an introduction to computers and programming normally take Comp.180 or Comp. 100. The first and second year program requirements leading to a Computing Science degree are listed in the SCIENCE: G E N E R A L INFORMATION section. For details on the transferability of each course consult the transfer guide at the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions COMP 180 Computers and their Applications (F,S) (3,0) A n ideal introduction to computer applications for students with little or no previous computing experience. The course outlines the historical development of computers, their uses today, and future trends in computing. NOTE: Because it is an introductory course, C O M P 180 cannot be taken for credit with or after another computing course. COMP 100 Introduction to Programming in BASIC (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C " in Algebra 11 or Math 010. An introduction to computers and computer programming for non-science students. Students intending to take further computing courses should consider Comp 103 Academic — Computing Science 48 instead of Comp 100. Topics covered include principles of problem-solving and algorithm design; computers and their O / S ; applications to problems in statistics, data processing, accounting, social sciences, entertainment; language of instruction is BASIC. programs. Examples will be taken from various areas of Science and Mathematics. Note 1: Any student who has attempted this course within the last year will not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. Note 2: Students will receive credit for only O N E of Comp 100 or Comp 103. Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Comp 103, or another programming language and the permission of the instructor. Introduction to the C programming language for students with experience programming in Pascal or a similar language. Comparison of C with Pascal; C program structure, data types, operators, control structures; arrays and pointers, structures and unions; libraries and separately compiled modules. COMP 103 Introduction to Programming in PASCAL (F,S) (4,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C " grade in Algebra 12 or Math 012, or at least a " C - " in Math 105 or 103. Introduction to programming using Pascal; general understanding of computers, principles of programming; specific experience in writing and executing programs; applications will stress scientific and statistical calculations as well as data processing problems. See Notes 1 and 2 under Comp. 100. COMP 104 Fundamental Concepts of Computing (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: C O M P 103 with at least a " C - " grade, or C O M P 100 and Math 103/105/Algebra 12 with at least a "B-" grade. Theoretical introduction to computing science; computer organization and architecture; information representation; machine and assembly languages; addressing schemes; machine arithmetic; problem solving with low level languages. Hands-on experience with assembly language programming and debugging. COMP 105 Program Design (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in C O M P 103 and Math 110, or CS12 and Algebra 12, and the permission of the instructor. Continuation of Comp 103; experience in application programming and programming methodology; emphasis on larger projects with a scientific orientation; projects will include problem specification, program design, validation, evaluation, documentation. COMP 130 Introduction to APL (S) (1,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Math 110 and Comp. 103. Introduction to A P L (A Programming Language) both as mathematical notation and as a computer programming language. APL primitives and their use, arrays of data and their manipulation, modular design of solutions to problems, practical experience in writing and using APL COMP 131 The C Programming Language (F) (1,0) COMP 222 Data Structures and Program Organization (F) (4,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Comp 104 and Comp 105. Organization of programs and their data structures; methods for modular program design, use of procedures. Definition and use of abstract data types: lists (stacks, queues), trees (binary, A V L , B-Trees, Tries); contiguous and dynamic representations. Applications to searching, sorting; analysis of algorithms. COMP 223 Discrete Structures (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Comp 104 and Math 111. Introduction to mathematical models and formal topics used in computing science; Boolean algebra, sets, relations, functions; proofs, induction and recursion, recurrence relations; graphs, trees, applications; finite state machines. COMP 226 Introduction to Digital Hardware (S) (4.5,3) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Comp 104, Math 111 and Physics 111 or 115. Elementary circuit theory; introduction to linear and nonlinear devices; logic gates; flip-flops; clocked logic; A / D and D / A conversion; interfacing techniques; laboratory experience in these topics. COMP 231 Introduction to Systems Programming (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Comp 104,131 and Comp 222. Operating systems, single tasking and multi-user; multitasking on micro, mini, and mainframe computers. File systems, resource allocation, security. UNIX. Academic — Computing Science 49 Economics Instructional Faculty N. A M O N , B.A., (Kent), M.A. (SFU) P. K A N T R O W I Z , B.A., M.A. (SFU) K.W. M O A K , B.A. (UVic), M.P.A. (UVic.) A. MORRIS, B.A. (Manchester), M.A. (SFU) J.E. SAYRE, B.S., B.A. (Denver), M.A. (Boston) General Information Economics is a social science concerned with the allocation of scarce resources and the production, distribution and consumption of wealth. Economics 100 and 101 are introductory courses which raise and explore the kinds of questions economists deal with. They also serve as an introduction to the study of formal economic theory in the 200-level courses. Students who plan to major in Economics or Commerce should complete Economics 200 and 201 before proceeding to third year courses at UBC, SFU or elsewhere. Students who plan to major in Economics at SFU are also advised to complete Economics 120 and 121. Students who plan on entering the Commerce Program should take Economics 200/201 in their first year. University Transfer Credit Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all Economics courses transfer to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the Transfer Guide in the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions Economics 100 Introduction to Economics (F,S) (3,0) Involves tracing the development of conflicting views of the nature of the capitalist economic system. Focuses on the historical development of capitalist society and on the divergent interpretations of the operation of capitalism as found in the writings of such economists as Adam Smith, David Ricardo, Karl Marx, J.M. Keynes and Milton Friedman. Deals with contemporary economic issues and such basic concepts as supply and demand. Economics 120 Economic History of the Pre-lndustrial Era (F) (3,0) A broad sweep of economic history from man's earliest beginnings to the Industrial Revolution. The economics of prehistoric man, the River Civilizations, Greece, Rome and Europe in the Middle Ages are studied, while emphasis is placed on the transition from European Feudalism to early forms of capitalism. Economics 121 Economic History of the Industrial Era (S) (3,0) A study of the Industrial Revolution and subsequent economic growth taken in context with several countries including Canada. Contrast is made between the paths of development of today's industrial nations and those nations that are now attempting to industrialize. Economics 200 Principles of Macroeconomic Theory (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Students are strongly encouraged to complete Economics 201 before Economics 200. The formal Keynesian theory of national income determination and some contemporary critiques of this theory are considered. Included is the study of the possible causes of and solutions to unemployment and inflation and the importance of international trade. Government fiscal and monetary policies are examined in detail. Economics 201 Principles of Microeconomic Theory (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least one 100 level Economics course is strongly recommended. A study of the theoretical constructs of consumer behaviour and the operation of business firms in the market economy under conditions of perfect competition, oligopoly, monopoly and monopolistic competition. Included is the analysis of the firm's equilibrium position and the determinants of income distribution. Economics 211 Intermediate Microeconomic Analysis (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Economics 201, Math 108 or 110. Economics 101 Canadian Economics - Macro and Micro Considerations (F) (3,0) A n examination of the contemporary structure of the Canadian economy of international trade and tariffs, the effects of foreign investment and ownership; the problems of regional disparities and poverty; the interplay of business, government and unions and federal-provincial relations and taxation policies are considered. Focus is on the hard economic choices the people of Canada now face. Academic — Economics 50 Consumer behaviour, production, exchange, equilibrium of the firm under different market structures, factor markets, economic welfare. Not transferable to SFU. Economics 212 Intermediate Macroeconomic Analysis (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Economics 211, Corequisite: Math 109 Income and employment theory, monetary theory, the open economy, economic fluctuations and growth. Not transferable to SFU. English Instructional Faculty English Writing Centre D. BETHUNE, B.A. (UBC), M.A. (UBC) F. BROWNELL, B.A. (Wash. St. Louis), M.A., Ph.D. (Boston) J. CLIFFORD, B.A., M.A. (UBC) P.L. CONNELL, B.A., M.A. (UBC), Ph.D. (UBC) R. COUPE, B.A. (Tasmania), Ph.D. (UBC) P.L. COUPEY, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (UBC) M.L. FAHLMAN REID, B.A. (UBC), M.A. (Toronto) G. N. FORST, B.A., Ph.D. (UBC) S.R. GILBERT, B.A. (UVic), M.A. (UBC) W. GOEDE, B.A. (Wisconsin), M.A. (Edinburgh), Ph.D. (California) G. HINDMARCH, B.A., M.A. (UBC) C. HURDLE, B.A., M.A. (UVic) D. H. JANTZEN, B.A. (UBC), M.A. (York) C. MCCANDLESS, B.A. (SFU), M.A. (UBC) W.G. SCHERMBRUCKER, B.A. (Capetown), P.Grad.Cert. in Ed. (London), M.A., Ph.D. (UBC) R.G. SHERRIN, B.F.A., M.F.A. (UBC) S. THESEN, B.A., M.A. (SFU) A. WESTCOTT, B.A. (Alberta), M.A. (Queens), Ph.D. (Toronto) The English Department Writing Centre provides: General Information For first-year English transfer credit at UBC, students must take two courses from either a) or b): a) English 100,103,104,105,106 b) English 102,103,104,105,106 For second year English transfer credit to the universities, English majors should take English 200-201; all other second year students can take any two second year level English courses. University Transfer Credit Unless otherwise indicated after the course description, all English courses transfer to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the Transfer Guide in the back of the Calendar. 1) a drop-in centre where you can work on your writing assignments. 2) a set of writing tools: dictionaries, grammar texts, information sheets, exercises and software. 3) an English instructor available to answer any specific writing questions you might have on such topics as researching, grammar, analysis, and essay structure. 4) a tutorial service where you can look at your EDT results, and discuss, in detail, grammatical concerns or graded assignments with an English instructor. 5) a computer room where you can do grammatical exercises and word processing. Course Descriptions English 010 Language Skills (F,S) (3,0) An intensive course in basic language skills to enable the student to proceed without difficulty through an academic college program. Curriculum will evolve from the assessed needs of the students. Transferable to SFU. English 100 Composition (F,S) (3,0) A course in the fundamentals of good writing, giving students intensive practice in writing for a variety of purposes, with emphasis on the essay form. Throughout the term progressively increasing emphasis is given to effective organization and development of material. Research technique and documentation is taught. Problems in mechanics of writing are dealt with individually, in group discussion and by revision of essays. Transferable to SFU and UBC. English Placement Test English 102 Composition (F,S) (3,0) Those students who wish to enroll in English courses in the Academic Division must submit the results of the Language Proficiency Index Test or the College English Diagnostic Test (EDT). A composition course designed for those who wish a more intensive and comprehensive approach to English Composition than offered by the usual first-year composition course (English (100). EDT schedules will be posted in the Switchboard/Reception area and the Humanities Division. Students wishing to write the EDT pay in advance at the Registrar's office and bring their receipts to the appropriate test sitting. Note: English 100 and English 102 DO NOT transfer together as first year English. English as a Second Language See listing in the Preparatory Programs section, page 34. English 103 Studies in Contemporary Literature (F,S) (3,0) A study of selected and representative 20th century literature from the major genres. Works studied will be chosen for their intrinsic literary merit and may, in certain Academic — English 51 sections, also reflect a particular theme of significance in the contemporary world. (When material is selected for theme, the issue under consideration will be announced during the registration period.) The chief aim of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses in well-developed oral and written criticism. English 104 Fiction (F,S) (3,0) A study of selected 20th century short stories and novels, each of intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. English 105 Poetry (F,S) (3,0) A study of selected major and significant minor 20th century poets whose poetry is of intrinsic literary merit. The chief aim of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression in well-developed oral and written criticism. English 106 Drama (F,S) (3,0) A study of selected and representative plays primarily of the 20th century. The chief aim of the course, beyond broadening the student's understanding and appreciation of literature, is to encourage original responses to literary expression in well-developed criticism. English 190 Creative Writing (F,S) (3,0) An intensive workshop course designed to help students develop expressive skill and craftsmanship in poetry, fiction, and drama. Students are required to write extensively in their chosen genre and to develop an awareness through written practice of at least one of the other genres. Students are also required to submit their writing regularly for group discussion. Students will be encouraged to develop their work to the point where it would become acceptable for publication. English 191 Creative Writing (S) (3,0) A continuation of English 190. English 200 English Literature to 1660 (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English Academic — English 52 courses but N O T 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A study of texts in all major genres from selected major authors to 1660. This course will provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame of reference as well as some in-depth study of individual works. English 201 English Literature Since 1660 (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English courses but N O T 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A course similar to English 200, but covering the later period indicated. English 202 Canadian Literature (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English courses but NOT 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A course designed to familiarize the student with major representative authors from the colonial beginnings of Canada to WW II. This course will investigate various themes and styles which evolved through the early literature and which are reflected in contemporary Canadian literature. English 203 Canadian Literature (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English courses but N O T 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. The continuation of English 202, becoming more intensive in the investigation of individual, major, modern authors of poetry, novels and plays in Canada since WW II. This course will study the emergence of significant contemporary themes and the Canadian response to them. English 207 Studies in Mythical and Biblical Backgrounds to Literature (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English courses but N O T 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A study of biblical and classical traditions of western literature and of a selection of works in literature written in English which, have been influenced by these two traditions. The aims of the course are to provide an understanding of the pervasive influence of these traditions in the literatures of the English language and to develop the student's ability to appreciate selected works in the context of these traditions. English 208 Studies in Fiction (The Novel) (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English courses but N O T 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A study of the novel from various perspectives which consider the evolution and diversity of the novel as a literary form. Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to section. The aims of the course are to give the student an awareness of the cultural context in which the novel came into being and into popularity, and to study selected texts closely. English 209 Studies in Poetry (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English courses but N O T 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A study of individual works by various poets from Chaucer's time to the present. Prosody, poetic forms, and critical approaches will be studied, as well as the historical and cultural contexts of the poems and of poetic movements. The aims of the course are to increase the student's knowledge of the craft of poetry and to study selected texts closely. studied. The aim of the course is to give the student an understanding of the development of the genre in context and of writers of major significance to the genre. English 212 Readings in World Literature to 1780 (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English courses but N O T 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A course to acquaint students with a variety of major or influential works of literature from the classical Greek era to the end of the 18th century, and to provide the student with a broad historical and critical frame of reference. Texts are considered both for their own literary merits and in historical context. English 213 Readings in World Literature Since 1780 (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English courses but N O T 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A course similar to English 212, but covering the period from 1780 to 1920, with emphasis on the 19th century. English 290 Creative Writing - Poetry (F,S) (3,0) English 210 Studies in Drama (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English courses but NOT 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A study of dramatic literature from various perspectives: the examination of dramatic types from various periods with reference to the history and development of dramatic forms, of sub-genres of drama, of techniques in dramatic literature and performance, and of the relationship of literary text to performance. Major plays from various periods and national theatres will be considered. The aim of the course is to increase the student's knowledge of drama as an art form which has evolved out of literary and cultural history and out of performance. English 211 Studies in Short Fiction (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Any combination of two first-year English courses but N O T 100 and 102 together; or instructor's written permission. A study of the development of the short story and novella form, through an exploration of the cultural and literary history in which the genre developed and through a detailed analysis of representative texts. Texts and critical approaches may vary from section to section, although examples from both the 19th and 20th centuries will be Prerequisite: English 190 or 191, or instructor's written permission. A n intensive workshop in the writing of poetry, concentrating on furthering the student's knowledge of current poetry forms while at the same time increasing awareness of one's own voice, one's individual ground for writing, and the development of one's own poetic. Students will be expected to read a variety of contemporary work, both poems and statements poets have made about their own poetics. Students will have the opportunity to try a variety of forms, for instance, the short lyric, the serial poem, narrative verse, prose poetry. English 291 Creative Writing - Fiction (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: English 190 or 191, or instructor's written permission. An intensive workshop in the writing of fiction. It will concentrate on furthering the student's knowledge of the state of current fiction and give students the opportunity to develop an awareness of voice, word choice and rhythm, dialogue, character, and point-of-view. Students will be expected to read a variety of works of contemporary fiction and to discuss various techniques. They will have the opportunity of trying out these techniques in both short and extended forms of fictions. Academic — English 53 French Women's Studies 104 Contemporary English-Canadian Women Writers (F) (3,0) A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness of and appreciation for the literature in English being produced by Canadian women writers today, with emphasis on the current, local, West Coast literary scene; to examine and discuss the portraits of women and of women's circumstances revealed in these writings. In addition to students' reading and discussion of the literature, there will be class visits for readings and discussion by several prominent West Coast Canadian women writers. This course may not be offered in 90/91. Check the current timetable. Instructional Faculty L. C A N T I N ORR-EWING, B.A. (Montreal), M.A. (SFU) O. KEMPO, B.A. (Alta.), M.A., Ph.D. (UBC) F. REID, M.A. (Edinburgh) Instructional Associate J. G A C I N A , B.A. (SFU) Teaching Cert. (SFU) G. L A C H A N C E , B.Ed. (Montreal), B.A. (Otttawa) H. LACOURSE Summary of Programs LEVEL COURSES Beginners' French (0 - Grade 11) French 100/101 Women's Studies 106 Contemporary American Women Writers (3,0) A discussion-oriented literature course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness of and appreciation of contemporary and recent important American women authors. There will be brief consideration of 19th and early 20th century works, but the focus will be on works published since World War II, including works of the 1980s. Although the focus will be on plays, stories, novels and poetry, there will be some exploration of those biographical matters and issues of critical status that mark the rise of women's writings from a sub-genre to full status acceptance by the best critics today. This course may not be offered in 90/91. Check the current timetable. Women's Studies 107 Contemporary European Women Writers (In Translation) (3,0) A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness and appreciation of the literature being produced by a wide variety of women writers today in Europe (especially France and Germany) and to encourage students to become more aware of and responsive to the creative process as it is exercised by these authors within the particular circumstances common to women's role in our western society, as well as those circumstances particular to specific cultures in western society. This course may not be offered in 90/91. Check the current timetable. Univ. Preparatory French (Grade 12) Intensive Oral French French French 130/131 French 120/121 1st year Univ. French French 170/171 2nd year Univ. French French 270/271 Students may opt to take a pair of courses in one program, then change to another pair of courses in a different program. Students are also encouraged to take courses in any two programs at the same time. It is advisable to consult a member of the French Department before registering. University Transfer Credit All French courses are transferable to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. French 100 Beginners' French (F) (3,1.75) For absolute beginners and those who do not have Grade 11 French or the equivalent. A n intensive introduction to the French language through grammar, conversation, and laboratory practise. French 101 Beginners' French (S) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: French 100 This course, together with French 100, covers high school French Grades 8, 9,10 and 11 and prepares the student for French 130 or French 120. (See under Intensive Oral French courses and French courses below.) Recommended also for those who are considering taking French 130 and who need review work. Academic - French 54 INTENSIVE ORAL FRENCH PROGRAM Intensive Oral course has the one-day-per-week immersion approach: 4 3/4 hours of Audio/Visual class, conversation, and lab. The emphasis in the Intensive Oral courses is on Canadian content and the audio-visual method is used. Students are required to supply two new tapes onto which a lesson is recorded for practise at home during the week. French 130 University Preparatory French I (F) 3,1.75) Prerequisite: Grade 11 or French 100/101 This is a course designed by Canadian linguists within a Canadian context. The method emphasizes the spoken language. May be taken concurrently with French 120. French 131 University Preparatory French II (S) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: French 130 or written permission of the instructor. A continuation of French 130 (however the student will be expected to start writing short compositions). May be taken concurrently with French 121. FRENCH PROGRAMS The following French courses meet on a twice-a-week basis; three hours of instruction, plus one hour of conversation with a native French speaker, and 3/4 hour of language laboratory work. IMPORTANT Students intending to proceed to a major or honours program at a university should enroll in these courses. French 120 University Preparatory French I (F) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: French 100/101 or French 11 or permission of the instructor. designed to give a limited fluency in speaking and reading as well as writing skills. May be taken concurrently with French 131. French 170 First Year University French I (F) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: Grade 12 French, or French 120/121, or French 130/131 or permission of the instructor. To be taken by all students intending to proceed to a major or honours program at another institution. Continues the linguistic development of the student by means of grammar revision, written and oral exercises, weekly assignments, compositions on and studies of French literary texts. French 171 First Year University French II (S) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: French 170 (minimum Grade C-) or permission of the instructor. A continuation of the work done in French 170, including composition and study of French literary texts. French 270 Second Year University French I (F) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: French 170/171, or permission of Instructor A n advanced course with emphasis on written work, including composition, translation, stylistic exercises, dictations and comprehension passages. Literary works chosen from the francophone literature will be studied and will require some background reading. This course includes cultural enrichment through the medium of films and music. French 271 Second Year University French II (S) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: French 270 or permission of the instructor. This course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following French 270. A continuation of the work of French 270. This course, together with French 121, constitutes Grade 12 French. This is a conversational approach to the French language, including continuing instruction in basic grammar and laboratory practise. May be taken concurrently with French 130. French 121 University Preparatory French II (S) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: French 120 (minimum Grade C-) or permission of the instructor. This course, together with French 120, constitutes Grade 12 French. A continuation of French 120, this course is Academic — French 55 Geography Instructional Faculty K. EWING, B.A., M.Sc. (Michigan) B. MCGILLIVRAY, B.A., M.A. (UBC) S. M A C L E O D , B.A., M.A. (UBC) S. ROSS, B.Sc, M.Sc. (UBC) J. S C H M O K , B.A. (Ottawa), M.Sc. (UBC) G. WILSON, B.SC. (NY State), M.A. (UBC) General Information Geography courses are offered for students who are interested in pursuing a career in Geography as well as for those students desiring both Arts and Science electives. The study of Geography opens the doors for men and women in a wide variety of fields including: Teaching, Urban Planning, Forestry, Resource Management, Recreation, Economic Consulting, Mining, Fisheries, Meteorology, and Map making. The focus of Geography is on the environment in which we live. These courses in Geography will give you a whole new perspective on the world. University Transfer Credit All Geography courses at Capilano transfer to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions Geography 100 Human Geography (F) (3,0) Different cultures in different landscapes are compared and contrasted to our own. This course examines the many issues of human population, perception of the environment, diffusion of ideas, and cultural aspects of resource use and urban growth, to give students a view into the many concerns on the human side of Geography. Geography 101 Environmental Geography: Perception & Change (F) (3,0) There are numerous environmental issues that reach a crisis from time to time. This course examines how we perceive the environment, our lifestyles, and how our attitudes affect the environment. Such issues include our use of water, the food we eat, herbicides and pesticides, and our overall use of energy. This is an excellent course for those concerned about the world we live in. Lectures, seminars, informal discussions, and audio-visual materials are used to make students aware of, examine and analyze some of the most serious concerns in the world today. The environment is in jeopardy from our actions — what can we do about it? Academic — Geography 56 Geography 102 Environmental Geography: Global Concerns (S) (3,0) The focus of this environmental course is the recognition that environmental issues are not restricted to isolated regions; rather, they have become global crises. Acid rain, the greenhouse effect, depletion of the world's resources are but a few of the examples illustrating the global scale of our environmental problems. Identifying and understanding the processes responsible for the problems are most important; however, finding solutions is also critical to this course. Geography 106 British Columbia: A Regional Analysis (F) (3,0) A body of information that is frequently missing from our education is that of the province we live in. This course informs you about B.C. — its physical environment, the risks of living in this province, the variety of peoples, and the economics involved in its resources. From an economic, political, historical, and cultural perspective one learns that contemporary problems are frequently a function of the past. For those interested in business, teaching, or wanting a basic knowledge of B.C., this is an excellent course. Note: This course also serves as Canadian Studies credit to SFU. Geography 108 Canada: A Topical Geography (F,S) (3,0) The understanding of Canada and Canadians is becoming more and more important to our economic and social well-being. This course examines Canadian problems and issues in terms of the different regions in Canada. Topics include the changing economy, cultural diversity, urban growth, and resource management, as we focus on the Maritimes, Quebec, Ontario, the Western provinces, and the Northern frontier. Note: This course carries Canadian Studies credit to SFU and is a component of the professional development program. Geography 112 Introduction to Earth Environments (F,S) (3,2) An introduction to Physical Geography using films, lectures, labs and field trips to explain processes in landscape development. Some of the environments to be considered are: glacial, volcanic, coastal, arid and fluvial. Maps and aerial photographs will be used to illustrate the various features. Emphasis will be placed on Canadian examples and the interactions between people and their physical environment, eg. the physical and cultural history of the Fraser River Delta; the Athabasca tar sands and native peoples; pipelines and permafrost. Note: This course fulfills the requirements as a lab science transfer credit. Geography 214 Our Atmospheric Environment (S) (3,2) Geography 114 Weather and Climate (F,S) (3,2) Prerequisite: Geography 114 or permission of the instructor A physical geography course introducing students to the study of our atmospheric environment. Principles of climatology and meteorology will be explained (using films, lectures and labs), to permit a basic understanding of the weather we experience daily. Emphasis will be placed on Canadian examples and the interactions between climate and other elements of our environment, including humans (air pollution, urban climate and mountain weather for example). This course will provide an intermediate understanding of the processes at work in our atmospheric environment. Broad topics to be covered are atmospheric energy, moisture, and winds. These concepts will be applied to phenomena such as urban climates and air pollution at the small scale, weather and forecasting at the intermediate scale, and climate change, ozone depletion, and El Nino/Southern Oscillation on a global scale. This course will involve lectures, labs, and field work. Note: This course fulfills the requirements as a lab science transfer credit. Geography 221 Map and Airphoto Interpretation (S) (3,2) Geography 200 Technology and Economic Environments (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least one other Geography course An examination of the concepts and themes of economic geography in terms of production and consumption. The traditional primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary divisions in economic geography are reviewed in terms of contemporary issues such as development versus underdevelopment, poverty, the location of industrial activities and the North-South dialogue. This is a second year course which is essential for those considering Geography as a major and is also appropriate for those who intend to pursue careers in Geography, Forestry, Mining, Cartography, and the numerous other areas that use maps and airphotos. This course combines lectures and labs that cover the basics of map reading and interpretation, map making, aerial photography, and remote sensing of the human and physical landscape. Geography 201 Urban Studies (S) (3,0) More and more of us are living in an urban world. This course is designed to examine problems and issues that arise with urban living; including psychological problems, the cost of housing, transportation issues, slums, suburban living, and the future direction of cities. While this course uses local examples, it also draws on examples from other cities in the world. This course approaches these topics through field trips into the city, slides, films, and simulated games. Urban studies leads to careers in urban planning, real estate, land management, architecture, and urban politics as well as giving general community awareness. Geography 205 Economic Geography of the Pacific Basin (S) (3,0) This course examines the Pacific Basin in terms of its social, economic and political geography. The emphasis is placed on the relationships that exist between countries of the Pacific Basin and British Columbia. This course opens up the concept of the Pacific century and recognizes British Columbia's position on the Pacific. Academic — Geography German Geology Instructional Faculty Instructional Faculty D . A T H A I D E , B.Sc. (McGill), M.Sc., Prof. Teacher's Cert. (UBC) A . G . T H O M L I N S O N , B . A . , M . S c , Prof. Teacher's Cert. (UBC) B. H A N K I N , B . A . ( U B C ) , M . A . (Wash.) Instructional Associate R. F R E I B E R G , B.Ed. (Gottingen University, West-Germany) General Information Geology courses are designed for students planning a university degree p r o g r a m i n the geological sciences or i n the arts, humanities or social sciences. Geology 110 and 111 are especially appropriate for students i n need of a laboratory science. They p r o v i d e an understanding of the origin, structure, composition and history of the earth. Courses include weekly two-hour laboratory investigations or the equivalent i n field projects. Lab tuition fees are i n c l u d e d i n the course fee, however students must purchase a lab m a n u a l and share some field trip costs. University Transfer Credit A l l G e o l o g y courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . For details consult the Transfer G u i d e . Course Descriptions Geology 110 Physical Geology (F) (3,2) Structure and composition of the earth's interior is deduced from indirect evidence: gravity, magnetism, heatflow, volcanoes, and earthquakes. K n o w l e d g e of the composition and structure of the continents and ocean basins is gained from these indirect sources as w e l l as the direct study of the ways i n w h i c h they are constantly altered and recycled minerals and rocks. This process w i l l be seen as the result of interactions between three processes: the atmospheric and hydrospheric cycles and the lithospheric cycle (plate tectonics). Intervention by man in the operations of, and interactions between, atmospheric, hydrospheric, and lithospheric cycles is examined. Geology 111 Historical Geology (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: G e o l o g y 110 or equivalent. The geologic evolution of Canada and the adjacent ocean basins since the earth originated more than 4.5 billion years ago. Topics include: age and origin of the solar system, determination of relative and absolute ages of minerals, geologic time scale; origin of continents, ocean basins, atmosphere, and sea-water, origin of life, fossils and stratigraphic paleontology; geological history of the N o r t h A m e r i c a n continent and the Atlantic, Arctic and Pacific Oceans; the geological history of Canada's mineral and fossil fuel resources; environmental impacts of mineral and energy projects i n Canada. Academic — Geology/German 58 General Information N O T E : A l l courses i n German include five and 3 / 4 hours of instruction per week, made up of four hours of lectures; 3 / 4 hours of laboratory practice; and one hour of conversational practice w i t h a native speaker. N a t i v e speakers of G e r m a n w h o w i s h to take a first or second-year G e r m a n course must consult w i t h the G e r m a n instructor first. University rules governing such students differ w i t h i n departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing w i t h matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry. In order to avoid any misunderstanding, such students are invited to discuss these problems w i t h the department prior to enrollment. University Transfer Credit A l l G e r m a n courses at Capilano transfer to S F U , U B C and U V i c . For details consult the Transfer G u i d e at the back of the Calendar. SFU: Students w h o w i s h to proceed to S F U and to pursue further courses i n G e r m a n are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Transfer and course challenge credit i n G e r m a n w i l l be given at S F U for Capilano College G e r m a n courses to a total of 11 semester hours. Exemption from and placement i n higher courses are determined b y the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. U B C : In the case of U B C , present equivalent standards provide transfer credit o n the following basis: Capilano College UBC G e r m a n 100 and 101 (3 credits each) G e r m a n 200 and 201 (3 credits each) 100(3) 200 (3) The student w i s h i n g to major i n G e r m a n fulfills department requirements w i t h G e r m a n 223, w h i c h may be taken in the third year b y permission of the department. History Course Descriptions Instructional Faculty German 100 Beginning German (F) (3,1.75) R. CAMPBELL, B.A. (California), M.A. (UBC) H. JONES, B.A., M.A. (UBC) M. LEGATES, B.A. (Washington), M.A., M.Phil., Ph.D. (Yale) A comprehensive introduction to the German language: comprehension and speaking are reinforced through reading and writing. Films, tapes, games, field trips, etc. help develop an awareness of the cultures of the Germanspeaking countries. German 101 Beginning German (S) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: German 100 (minimum Grade C-) or its equivalent with written permission of the instructor. This course is a continuation of German 100 and must be taken in order to realize First Year level college/university German. German 101 should be taken whenever possible, in the term following German 100. German 200 Intermediate German (F) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: German 101 (minimum Grade C-), Grade 11, 12 German or the equivalent with written permission of the instructor. German 200 reviews basic German grammar and usage, and introduces students to modern German short stories by such authors as Kafka, Brecht and Boll. It aims through the discussion of the cultures and concerns of the German-speaking peoples to increase the ability to communicate in the fullest sense of the term. German 201 Intermediate German (S) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: German 200 (minimum Grade C-), German 12 (or its equivalent with written permission of the instructor.) Continues the review and development of German language skills at the Intermediate level. Together with German 200 it completes the requirements for the Second Year of college/university German. General Information History teaches an understanding of the past that helps people cope with the present and suggests possibilities for the future. Critical thinking and analysis form the core of this discipline and are essential skills in a rapidly changing society. Students planning to major in History should have at least four history courses at the College. These can be A N Y four courses. A n intended major should also have a broad sampling of courses in the Social Sciences and Humanities. Students planning to major in history at SFU should take six history courses in the first two years. For UBC the requirement is four history courses. Students planning to take honours should acquire a reading knowledge of an appropriate non-English language. University Transfer Credit All History courses at Capilano (including Women's Studies 120) transfer to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions History 100 History of the Ancient World (F) (3,0) The origins of civilization in Egypt and Mesopotamia, the civilizations of Ancient Greece and Rome, the origins and development of Judaism and the early Christian Church. History 102 Europe from the Reformation to the French Revolution (F) (3,0) A survey of European history beginning with the 16th c. Protestant Reformation and including absolutism, the scientific revolution, the Enlightenment, the old regime and the French Revolution. History 103 Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries (S) (3,0) Topics include the Industrial Revolution, the rise of political ideologies, nationalism and imperialism, the two world wars, and the inter-war period. History 108 Issues and Themes in U.S. History (F) (3,0) American history from 1607 to 1877 including analysis of social and political developments from early settlement Academic — History 59 Japanese through the Civil War era. Emphasis is placed on the development of an "American" culture, with appropriate comparisons to the development of Canada. Instructional Faculty NORIKO O M A E , B.A., M A . , Teaching Certificates (Osaka University of Foreign Studies), M.Phil. (U. of Exeter) History 109 Issues and Themes in U.S. History (S) (3,0) U.S. history from 1865 to the present. Analysis of the development of America as a world power after the Civil War. Special emphasis is given to "American" culture, and appropriate comparisons are made with Canada. History 110 Canada Before Confederation (F,S) (3,0) A study of New France and British North America. Special emphasis is placed on issues and ideas which are significant in the creation of Canada, in particular, the making of Canadian society in pre-Confederation years. History 111 Canada Since Confederation (F,S) (3,0) The development of Canada since 1867. In particular we University Transfer Credit For details, consult the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions Japanese 100 First Year Japanese (F) (3,2) A comprehensive introduction to the Japanese language through the study of vocabulary, grammar and culture. Emphasis is placed on aural comprehension in the earlier stage, in order to prepare students to speak the language. The Japanese writing system will also be introduced. Japanese 100 First Year Japanese (F.S) (3,1) discuss the issues that affect most Canadians: relations The same course content as above but taught at a slower pace. The course period extends over two terms. with the United States, prosperity and poverty, and the making of a Canadian "culture". By the end of the course students should have not only a better understanding of this country's past, but also what makes Canada unique. Japanese 101 First Year Japanese (S) (3,2) History 205 British Columbia (F) (3,0) From the first contact between natives and whites in the 18th century to the political domination of Social Credit, this course analyses the main issues that have affected British Columbians. It also examines some aspects of the development of the North Shore. History 207 Europe in the Middle Ages and Renaissance (S) (3,0) This course covers a colourful and creative period in European history from the 3rd to the 15th century. Topics include the late Roman Empire and rise of Christianity, monasticism and the church, feudal society and politics, the rise of towns, the crusades, the Black Death, and the art, culture and society of Renaissance Italy. History 208 Canadian-American Relations (S) (3,0) This course examines the major events and themes that have shaped the Canadian-American relationship. From the American Revolution, the war that ultimately created both countries, to recent years, we analyse the influence that the United States has had on Canada. Women's Studies 220 Women & the Past: An Historical Survey (F)(3,0) See page 80 for course description. Academic — Japanese 60 Prerequisite: Japanese 100 or permission from instructor. Students will learn to comprehend simple discourse, simplified texts, speak in a variety of situations, write simple sentences, and understand cultural differences. Japanese 101 First Year Japanese (F,S) (3,1) The same course content as above, but taught at a slower pace. This course extends over two terms. Japanese 200 Second Year Japanese (F), (3,2) Prerequisite: Japanese 101 or permission from instructor. A course to provide students with communicative skills at an advanced beginner's level of Japanese. Students will acquire the ability to understand and speak in various situations on a variety of everyday topics, and also to read adapted texts and write with coherency. The cultural aspect of the language is an integral part of the course. Japanese 201 Second Year Japanese (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: Japanese 200 or instructor's permission. Skills at an advanced beginner's - intermediate level. Students will acquire proficiency in situational and thematic speaking and writing, and also in understanding and reading partly adapted spoken and written Japanese. This course will prepare students to deal with unadapted Japanese in continuing courses of study. Labour Studies Instructional Faculty C. ASKEW, B A . (W. Ontario), LL.B. (UBC) N. A M O N , B.A. (Kent), M.A. (SFU) M. B O L T O N , B.A., LL.B. (UBC) S. D I A M O N D S. L A N Y O N , B.A. (UBC), LL.B. (UBC) E. L A V A L L E , B.Comm., LL.B. (UBC), M.A. (Duke) L. M C G R A D Y , B.A. (Toronto), LL.B. (Man.) A. N. M A C L E A N , B.A. (Alto.), LL.B. (UBC) B. MERRALL, (Diploma) Labour College of Canada R. NEWKIRK, B.A. (Lethbridge), Teaching Cert. (Lethbridge) S. O ' D O N N E L L , B.A., M.A. (UBC) P. PETRIE, B.A., M.A., (Maine) S. RUSH, B.A. (W. Ontario), LL.B. (UBC) General Information The Labour Studies Program is committed to meet the special education needs of B.C. workers, their organizations and the labour movement in general. Close relations with the labour movement are maintained through the Users' Advisory Committee which is open to representatives of unions who use the program. This hard-working group of representatives actively engage in promoting and developing the program. Courses in Labour Studies are offered on both a credit and credit-free basis. The Fall program is offered in October and November and the Spring program in March through May. Each Fall and Spring a special brochure describing the courses to be offered is issued. This brochure is available by writing the program or telephoning. Courses are offered in the evening and on weekends. Many participants in the program have their registration fees paid by the Education Department of their Union. Course Descriptions LSP 100 Introduction to Economics for Trade Unionists (F) (1.5,0) Introduces economics and emphasizes both orthodox and alternative views of how the Canadian economy has developed and how it operates. Canadian economy is placed in an historical and international perspective. Discussion will centre around government policies towards unemployment, inflation and the Canadian dollar. LSP 101 Labour Economics: Alternatives & Options (S) (1.5,0) This course builds on the material from LSP 100 to provide information on alternative economic models including Marxist economic theory. Discussion will focus on the development and nature of capitalist economics and the causes of short and long term economic crises. LSP 110 B.C. Labour Law(F,S) (1.5,0) This is an introductory course designed to acquaint union activists, committee members and staff with the essentials of provincial labour law. Students will gain knowledge of the history of current labour law, the Industrial Relations Act and important Industrial Relations Council decisions. Topics such as eligibility for union membership, organizing, certification, unfair labour practices, strikes, lockouts, and picketing will be covered in detail. LSP 111 The Canada Labour Code (F,S) (1.5, 0) A broad examination of the Code and decisions which affect unions under federal labour jurisdiction. Introduction of labour law research methods and their application. Emphasis is placed on the policy underlying the code and the creation and effect of the collective agreement. LSP 113 Public Service Staff Relations Act (PSSRA) (F,S) (1.5,0) A wide examination of the federal labour laws dealing specifically with the public sector worker and their impact. Emphasis on labour law research methods and their application, collective agreements, grievances and back-to-work legislation for "essential" service workers. LSP 115 Issues in Occupational Health and Safety (F,S) (1,0) A general background to and overview of the main social, medical, economic, technical and legal issues facing B.C. workers in the field of health and safety. Special attention will be given to the Worker's Compensation Board. LSP 116 Workers' Compensation - Act & WCB (F,S) (1,0) The statutory and administrative framework of the Workers' Compensation Board is examined. The course is adjusted to the expectations of the majority of people enrolled in any term, but is generally geared to familiarize students with the preparation and presentation of appeals to the Board of Review and Commissioners. All phases of claims handling are examined, from initial acceptance or rejection, including setting of wage rates to assessments and the payment of pensions. LSP 117 Introduction to UIC Procedures (F,S) (1,0) This course emphasizes a practical understanding of the Academic — Labour Studies i 61 framework of unemployment insurance and, therefore, the jargon used in the act and by the commission. The course will cover the structure of Canada's Unemployment Insurance Act, including the most recent amendments. It will outline the qualifications needed in order to claim unemployment insurance, including "insurable employment," the "variable entrance requirement," "repeaters," "new entrance and re-entrance" and "parttime worker." LSP 119 Civil Rights and the Work Place (F,S) (1,0) Specific civil rights problems arising in the work place, including issues of political, economic and legal rights of the worker; examination of legal remedies available to trade unions and the employee to prevent infringement of civil rights in the work place; protection of civil rights under the provincial and federal legislation through contracting and in collective agreements. A problemsolving format with discussions of current civil rights issues, "right-to-work" legislation, race and sex discrimination. LSP 131 Race and Ethnic Relations (F,S) (1.5,0) The issue of racism has been used in the past to weaken and divide unions. This course will help unionists become sensitive to complexities of race and ethnic relations; give practical advice on integrating minority workers into the union and develop techniques to deal with biases and prejudice at the work place and in the community. Approaches to combatting the disruptive effects of racism will be discussed. LSP 140 History of the Labour Movement in Canada (S) (1.5,0) A survey of the history of the labour movement in Canada from the formation of the working class in the 19th century through to mass industrial unionism. By looking at specific conflicts a good overview is obtained of the struggles of the labour movement to gain the right to organize, obtain union recognition, bargain collectively and provide decent wages and working conditions. LSP 142 History of the Labour Movement in B.C. (F) (1.5,0) The birth and growth of trade unionism in B.C. Through a wide collection of printed and visual materials participants will analyze the raw and vital struggles between B.C.'s working people and the industrialists who opposed them. The major economic and political issues of the movement will be traced; the right to organize, the right to bargain, the demand for the nine and eight-hour day, Academic - Labour Studies 62 the problems of racism and immigration, the struggle to organize the industrial, public and clerical sectors, the fight for women's rights, political expression LSP 151 Leadership Skills, Assertiveness and Advocacy (F,S){1,0) Attempts not only to provide women with the skills they need to take a leadership role in their trade union, but also takes a careful look at the way sex role stereotyping inhibits us from developing these skills. This course covers the following areas: Women and Power, Assertiveness, Advocacy, Organizing and Group Dynamics. LSP 170 Communications: Public Speaking and Parliamentary Procedures (F,S) (1.5,0) •All the skills and techniques necessary for effective communications in active union involvement. Designed to meet the needs of active unionists and officers, this course combines principles and practice in a "learn while doing" format. Training in the following skills areas: 1. effective public speaking: including methods of oral communication, effective listening and response, confidence building, and style development. Role plays will aid the participant in overcoming fears and speech anxiety while maximizing organization, objectives and analysis of impact. 2. effective meetings: effective chairing, preparation of agendas, and building a good "process" with the assistance of rules of order. LSP 181 Collective Bargaining (F,S) (1.5,0) Technical and practical information for the beginning union negotiator. Includes instruction on the bargaining process beginning with preparation, development of proposals, contract language and costing. Advocacy skills for facing management will be taught and practised through role playing. Material will be available for the specific needs of public and private sector bargaining. LSP 210 Arbitration (F,S) (1.5,0) This course, which is open to students who have previously completed LSP 110, 111, 113 or any other Labour Law course, will be an advanced arbitration course dealing with matters such as rules of evidence, procedures, selection of arbitrators, arbitration powers and a brief history of arbitration. It will deal with grievance arbitration arising out of the collective agreement.. Mathematics Instructional Faculty A.E.T. Bentley, B.Sc. (Hons.), M.A., Ph.D. (Missouri), Coordinator of Mathematics L.F. HARRIS, B.A., M.A., (UBC), Ph.D. (Austral. Nat. U) R. HAUSCHILDT, B.Sc. (Hons.) (Queen's), M.Sc. (UBC) R.B. INSLEY, B.Sc. (Hons.) (UBC) M.Sc. (UBC) J. JOHNSTON, B.Math (Waterloo), B.Ed. (Toronto), M.Math (Waterloo) G. MacGILLIVRAY, B.Sc. (Hons.) (UVic), M.Sc. (UVic), Ph.D. (SFU) C. MORGAN, B.Sc. (Hons.), M.Sc.,Ph.D (Memorial) R.R. RENNIE, B.Sc, M.Sc. (Brigham Young), Ph.D. (UBC) K.V. TOWSON, B.Sc, M.Sc. (SFU) R.H. VERNER, B.Sc. (UBC), M.Sc. (EWSU), B.C. Teaching Cert. (UBC) A. WATERMAN, B.Sc. (UBC), M.Sc. (SFU), B.C. Teaching Cert., (UBC) C. WATKISS, B.Sc. (Carleton), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Toronto) Laboratory Supervisor LYNN, W., B.Sc. (Carleton), M.A.Sc. (Waterloo) General Information The Mathematics Department offers courses in Mathematics, primarily at the first and second year university level. In addition, refresher courses or skill upgrading courses are available. For a detailed description of the Computing Science courses and programs, see the Calendar section entitled Computing Science. I) Options for Mathematics 11 Equivalency A. Classroom Format: Math 099 B. Self Paced Format: Math 009/010 II) Options for Mathematics 12 Equivalency A. Classroom Format: 1. Math 103 or 2. Math 105 or 3. Math 107 Math 107 is a specialized Math 12 equivalent designed for business, commerce and some non science programs. Math 103 and 105 are general Math 12 equivalents. Math 103 is an expanded version of Math 105 meeting 6 hours per week and includes some of the Math 099 content. B. Self Paced Format: Math 010/011/012 All of these Math 12 equivalent options receive individual transfer credit at SFU. If combined with a calculus course (Math 108 or Math 110) all receive transfer at UBC to UBC Math 111. Ill) Options for University Level Entering students should use the following three sections, Parts A, B, and C as guidelines for selecting math courses at the first-year level. Due to the specialized needs of some programs at the universities, the Mathematics Department advises students to consult the university calendar and to seek guidance from a college counsellor, advisor, or math instructor for the appropriate course selection. A. Students Planning to proceed in Science, Computing Science, Mathematics, Architecture, Engineering and Forestry. These students normally take Math 110, 111 during their first year. Comments: 1. Math 101,102 are recommended by some science departments at SFU. 2. Science students should consider taking Comp 103,104 or 105 as electives in their first year. 3. The Mathematics Department encourages those students with only a "C+" grade in Math 12 to take Math 105 before attempting MathllO. B. Students Planning to proceed in Arts or Commerce Programs. 1. Students planning to pursue a program in the Faculty of Arts, who wish to satisfy a one-year science course elective, normally take one of the following two course combinations: Math 101/102; 103/108; 105/108 or 110; 107/108; 108/109 or 110/111. 2. Students planning to enter Second Year Commerce at Capilano College or UBC take: a) Math 108 & 109 (or Math 110 & 111). (For students having completed Math 12 with a "C" grade or better). b) Math 107 & 108 (or Math 105 & 110). (For students having completed Math 11 with a "C" grade or better). ** Students planning to enter the Commerce Program at UBC must not take Math 101. For a detailed description of the Commerce courses and programs at Capilano College see the calendar section titled Commerce. 3. For transfer to Business Administration SFU, the following are required: Math 107, (if B.C. Math 12 not completed) and Math 108. In addition, Math 101 is advised. For Honours in Business Administration Math 109 is required. 4. Students planning to study Economics at UBC must take Math 108 and 109. Academic — Mathematics 63 University Transfer Credit For details consult the Transfer Guide in the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions Note: Students are strongly cautioned that normally they need at least a "B-" grade in a prerequisite course (preferably within the past year) in order to have a reasonable chance for success in the following course. Mathematics 009 Arithmetic (SU.F.S) (1,0) A review of the basic arithmetic operations. Applications to percentage, ratio, proportions, areas and volumes. This is a self-paced course primarily intended for returning students who require a basic math refresher. Mathematics 010 Elementary Algebra (SU,F,S) (1,0) Prerequisite: Math 009 or permission of the instructor. Reviews and develops basic algebraic skills necessary in the solution of algebraic equations and the factorization of polynomials. Introduction to analytic geometry with emphasis on straight lines. This course is offered on a self-paced format. Mathematics 011 Intermediate Algebra with Functions (SU,F,S) (1,0) Prerequisite: Math 010 or permission of the instructor. This course continues the development of the algebraic skills introduced in Math 010. Inequalities; functions, exponential and logarithmic functions; systems of linear equations; analytic geometry with emphasis on the conic sections. This course is offered on a self-paced format. students who require a Math 11 equivalent and who anticipate taking pre-calculus (Math 105 or 107). Mathematics 101 Introduction to Statistics (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Math 11 or Math 010 or Math 099 or B M T H 045 An introduction to the language of statistics and some statistical methods, including random variables and their distribution; random sampling, normal distribution, estimation of parameters and testing hypotheses. Mathematics 102 Statistical Methods (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a "C-" grade in Math 101 A study of important statistical methods commonly used in the analysis of research data, including t-tests and their non-parametric competitors, one and two-way analysis of variance chi-square tests and regression analysis. Mathematics 103 Intermediate Algebra and Pre-calculus (F.S) (4.5,0) NOTE This course is not transferable to UBC except if combined with Math 110 or Math 108. Prerequisite: Math 11 with at least a "C" grade, or Math 010 or B M T H 045 with at least a "C" grade, or Math 099 with at least a "C-" grade. A brief review of Introductory Algebra, plus Intermediate Algebra and Pre-calculus, with a focus on functions, mathematical models, graphs, trigonometry, logarithms, and exponential functions. (Students will be brought to the same level as those completing Math 105 by the end of the term). Primarily for students who anticipate taking calculus courses or who require a Math 12 equivalent course. Mathematics 012 Trigonometry (SU,F,S) (1,0) No duplicate credit for Math 103/105/107. Prerequisite: Math 011 or 099 or permission of the instructor. Mathematics 105 Pre-Calculus Mathematics (F,S,SU) (3,0) Introduction to the trigonometric functions, trigonometric identities; inverses, triangles, vectors and applications. This course is offered on a self-paced format. Mathematics 099 Intermediate Algebra (F,S,) (3,0) Prerequisite: Math 11 with a "P" or permission (signature) of a Mathematics instructor. Math 099 begins with Introductory Algebra and continues with the development of Intermediate Algebra. Students will be introduced to linear and quadratic functions, logarithms and trigonometry. This course is primarily for Academic — Mathematics 64 NOTE: This course is not transferable to UBC except if combined with Math 110 or 108. Prerequisite: Math 099 with at least a "B-" grade, or Math 010 or B M T H 045 or Math 11 at least with a "B" grade. A review of algebra and a discussion of functions, graphs, mathematical models, trigonometry, logarithms and exponential functions. Primarily for students who anticipate taking calculus courses or who require a Math 12 equivalent course. Notes: 1. Math 105 is also offered on a self-paced format with the permission of the instructor. 2. No duplicate credit for Math 103/105/107. Mathematics 107 Precalculus for Business and Social Sciences (F,S) (3,0) Note: This course is not transferable to UBC unless combined with Math 108. Prerequisite: Math 11 or Math 010 or B M T H 045 with at least a "C" or Math 099 with at least a "C-". A precalculus course designed for business/commerce students. The mathematical models/applications in this course will be mainly business/finance oriented. Linear and quadratic equations and inequalities, absolute value, systems of linear equations,functions and graphs, inverse functions, mathematical modelling, exponential and logarithm functions, circular and trigonometic functions, right-triangle trigonometry, arithmetic and geometric progressions, compound interest and annuities, summation notation, binomial theorem. No duplicate credit for Math 103/105/107. Mathematics 108 Calculus for Business and Social Sciences I (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C " grade in Math 12 or Math 012 or B M T H 046, or at least a " C - " grade in Math 103 or Math 105, or Math 107. A brief review of algebra, functions, and analytic geometry. The derivative with applications to curve sketching, optimization, growth and decay. The integral with applications. No duplicate credit will be given for Math 108/110. Mathematics 109 Calculus for Business and Social Sciences II (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Math 108 or Math 110. Functions of several independent variables, partial derivatives, extrema, Lagrange multipliers, integration techniques, multiple integrals, some techniques for solving differential equations and difference equations. The Mathematics Department encourages those students with only a "C+" grade in Math 12 to take Math 105 before attempting Math 110. A brief review of functions; trigonometry; analytic geometry; the derivative, techniques of differentiation, applications of the derivative to M A X - M I N and related rate problems, the definite integral, logarithmic and exponential functions. Notes: 1) No duplicate credit will be given for Mathematics 108/110. 2) Math 110 is also offered on a self-paced format using video instruction. Mathematics 111 Calculus II (F,S) (4.5,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Math 110. A study of the anti-derivative; the integral, techniques of integration and application of the integral; sequences, infinite series and Taylor's Theorem. No duplicate credit will be given for Math 109/111. The Math Department offers a full second year university transfer program in math. Students planning to take 200 level math should seek advice from math instructors. Mathematics 200 Linear Algebra (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Math 111. A study of vector spaces, linear transformations, matrices, determinants, eigenvalues, quadratic forms. Mathematics 205 Introduction to Probability and Statistics (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Math 111 with at least a " C - " grade or Math 110 and permission of instructor. A calculus based study of probability, investigating the elements of probability, discrete and continuous random variables, mathematical expectation, moment generating functions, Central Limit Theorem, sampling from normal populations, confidence intervals, hypothesis testing. Mathematics 215 No duplicate credit will be given for Math 109/111. Introduction to Analysis (S) (3,0) Mathematics 110 Note: This course will be offered in the spring when sufficient student demand is evident during the previous Fall term. Calculus I (F,S) (4.5,0) Prerequisite: At least a "C+" grade in Mathl2 or Math 012 or B M T H 046, or at least a " C " grade in both Math 12 and Calculus 12, or at least a " C - " grade in Math 103 or Math 105. Prerequisite: At least a "B-" average in Math 110 and 111. A course for students who plan to proceed in Mathematics. Logic, sets, functions, limits of sequences and series; introduction to continuity, the derivative, Riemann Integral. Academic — Mathematics 65 Music Mathematics 230 Calculus III (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Math 111. Corequisite: Math 200 (if not already completed) or permission of instructor. Analytical geometry of three dimensions; partial differentiation, applications; double and triple integrals; transformations to various coordinate systems. Mathematics 231 Calculus IV (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in Math 230. Vector calculus; line and surface integrals; Green's Theorem; vector fields; divergence theorem; Stoke's Theorem; applications. Mathematics 235 Introduction to Differential Equations (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " grade in each of Math 200 and Math 230. A n introduction to ordinary differential equations; first order equations; second order linear equations; first order linear systems; phase plane, applications to physics, geometry and electric circuits. Academic — Music 66 MUSIC UNIVERSITY TRANSFER PROGRAM This program is designed for students who desire to go on to a B.Mus. degree program at a university. All courses in this program carry transfer credit to the Music Department of UBC and the Faculty of Music at the University of Victoria. The program consists of a liberal arts education and specialized music training, including theory, history, and applied music. Some courses also carry transferability into the Faculty of Education at UBC. In addition, students desiring to transfer into the Faculty of Arts at UBC and SFU with a major in Music may take Music 100/101 and Music 120/121 in their first year, and Music 200/201 and 220/221 in their second year. For further information look in the Career section of the Calendar under Music. Philosophy Instructional Faculty M. BATTERSBY, B.A. (NYU), Ph.D. (UBC) J. DIXON, B.A., Ph.D. (UBC) S. ENGLER, B.A. (UBC), M.A. (UT) M. GUTTERIDGE, B.A. (York), M.A. (SFU) S. PERSKY, B.A., M.A. (UBC) Y. WESTWELL-ROPER, M.A., Ed.D. (UBC), D.Phil (Oxford) University Transfer Credit All of the Philosophy courses offered at Capilano College have transfer credit at every university in British Columbia. Course Descriptions Philosophy 101 Introductory Philosophy: Ethics (F,S) (3,0) An introduction to the part of philosophy concerned with questions of value. These include such issues as: "What is morality?", "Why be moral?", "What is the relationship between law and morality?", "Are there any objective moral values?", as well as such directly moral issues as abortion, suicide, civil disobedience, capital punishment, and the environment. The emphasis of the course varies from instructor to instructor and students should consult the course outlines of individual instructors to determine the precise content of the course. Philosophy 102 Introductory Philosophy: Knowledge and Reality (F,S) (3,0) An introduction to the part of philosophy concerned with questions about the ultimate nature of the world we live in and our knowledge of it (traditionally called Metaphysics and Epistemology). The issues discussed include: the existence and nature of God, the place of human beings in the universe, the nature of reality, human nature, human knowledge and skepticism, freedom and determinism, the relationship behind mind and body, and others. The emphasis of the course varies from instructor to instructor and students should consult the course outlines of individual instructors to determine the precise content of the course. Philosophy 110 Logical Self-Defense (F,S) (3,0) A n introduction to the basic rules of clear and rational thought. The student will be taught through extensive examples how to detect false reasoning, illegitimate appeals to emotions, inconsistencies and contradictions. The goal is to develop our logical awareness to the point that we can no longer be victimized by the rhetoric of everyday life, and can develop our own arguments with clarity and confidence. Philosophy 111 (F,S) Critical Thinking with Computers (3,0) This course is a sequel to Logical Self Defense (Phil 110) and will provide students with advance practice in the skills developed in Logical Self Defence. Students will also be taught the use of computers to enhance their ability to quickly find and assess information. Computer techniques to be learned will include using and making databases, outlining programs, and spreadsheets. Instruction will also be given on oral presentation of persuasive material, the art of reasonable dialogue, analyzing the news media, and assessing statistical arguments. Successful completion of this course should result in the student being quite competent in carrying on rational dialogue and able to make sophisticated use of computers of both evaluate and develop arguments. Prerequisites: Logical Self Defense (PHIL 110) or permission of the instructor. Some familiarity with computers will be helpful. Philosophy 120 Understanding Scientific Reasoning (F.S) (3,0) This course will provide students with an introduction to modern formal logic, and then utilize that skill to explore such topics as the nature and testing of scientific theories in both the natural and social sciences, the difference between causal relations and correlations, and rational decision making. Attention will be given to both the problem-solving and philosophical aspects of scientific reasoning. There are no prerequisites, but the course is a natural continuation of Philosophy 110, and will appeal especially to students who have an interest in either the natural or social sciences. Philosophy 130 Philosophy of Science (F,S) (3,0) Students will learn how to understand the activity of science through theoretical reflection on it and detailed study of developments which promise to bring about scientific revolutions. Topics to be discussed might include: socio-biology, artificial intelligence, the concept of intelligence, the nature of explanation, the role of observation in science, determinism and indeterminism, causation, inductive inference, scientific method, laws and theories, and the status of theoretical constructs. There are no prerequisites, but the course is a natural companion to Philosophy 110, and will appeal to students of mathematics and the natural or social sciences. Academic — Philosophy 67 Philosophy 140 Philosophy and Law: Introduction to Canadian Law (F) (3,0) equality, power and authority, private rights and the public good, sovereignty, democracy, and justice. No prerequisites. A general introduction to the fundamental principles of jurisprudence and to the basic legal institutions of Canada. In addition to addressing such philosophical questions as, "What is a law?", "Is it the case that law is what legislatures say it is, or what courts say it is?", and "How do you tell whether a law is good or bad?", the course also examines the history and theory of Canadian law (including the development of the Canadian Constitution), the system of Canadian courts, and the roles of members of the legal profession. As well, consideration is given to the nature of legal reasoning, the doctrine of precedent, and principles of statutory interpretation, and an introduction is provided to the fields of contract, torts, administrative and family law, as well as to the process of law reform. Philosophy 202 Introduction to Formal Logic (F,S) (3,0) Philosophy 141 Philosophy and Law: Introduction to the Criminal Justice System (S) (3,0) An introduction to an analysis of theories of punishment and rehabilitation through an examination of the operational practices of the Canadian criminal justice system. In the course of studying the structure and operations of the criminal justice system in its various stages from the moment of initial police involvement to the correctional disposition of convicted offenders, the course focuses on both theoretical and practical decision making. Theoretical concerns include: individual civil liberties in relation to police procedures, notions of evidence, sentencing theory, and current correctional strategies. The above two courses are modelled on SFU's Criminology 131/135 and are intended for both philosophy students and those interested in pursuing further studies in the field of criminology. Philosophy 200 Political Philosophy (F) (3,0) This course provides an analysis of the rationale for political institutions and action. Some of the questions considered: Are we really obliged to obey the law? Can the law be justifiably represented as authoritative, or is the real foundation of law in the policeman's holster? Does the state have good reason for involving itself in compulsory programs of education? This is not a study in the history of political thought and every effort is made to view problems from a contemporary perspective. Philosophy 201 Political Philosophy (S) (3,0) A study of some of the central philosophical problems in political life and thought. Topics include liberty and Academic — Philosophy 68 This course provides an introduction to symbolic logic. It teaches students how to translate arguments in English into a powerful symbolic language which makes it possible to prove whether these arguments are valid or invalid. Logical consistency, entailment,truth under an interpretation, and other concepts needed to understand the logic of deductive reasoning are carefully examined. This course is recommended for philosophy and computing science students. Philosophy 207 Business Ethics (F,S) (3,0) This course is an introduction to contemporary philosophical thinking on ethical issues in business. It covers such topics as the power of multinational corporations, bribery and extortion in international business, the ethics of hiring practices, advertising and behaviour control, the conflict between employee loyalty and moral independence, and the responsibilities of corporations and business professionals. The course will aslo introduce students to a number of classical ethical theories and theories of economic justice. Philosophy 208 Environmental Ethics (F,S) (3,0) This course deals with contemporary ethical issues arising from the relationship between human beings and their natural surroundings. Topics include general questions about rights and moral standing (e.g. do trees, animals and future generations have moral claims on us?), issues concerning the preservation of the wilderness, the depletion of natural resources, and the global effects of pollution, as well as problems affecting the formation of social policy. Open to anyone in first or second year. No prerequisites. Philosophy 210 Metaphysics and Epistemology (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least one Philosophy course or permission of the instructor. An introduction to some of the traditional problems of metaphysics and epistemology. Some of the questions considered are: Does God exist? What is the relationship between faith and reason? Does free will exist? Is sense perception a reliable source of knowledge? What is the nature of causality? Is materialism true? What is the nature of mind? What is the relationship between mind and body? What is the scientific method? While this is not a course in the history of Philosophy, it will cover many of the classical attempts to answer these questions. Philosophy 222 Philosophy of Culture (Aesthetics) (F,S) (3,0) A continuation of Philosophy 210. A n introduction to philosophical analysis of cultural works. The course will provide an exploration of aesthetic theory, examining both traditional works of art as well as contemporary cultural productions in a variety of media. One of the objectives of the course is to make sense of what a society is "saying" through its popular culture. Philosophy 220 Philosophy in Literature (F) (3,0) Philosophy 230 (F) (3,0) Greek Thought An examination of the lively relationship between Philosophy and Literature. Philosophical theories will be approached and discussed via literary work which either embodies the theories or grounds them in human experience. Textual sources will range from the classical Greek plays to last month's best seller. Greek Thought is a survey of ancient Greek philosophy, culture and science. As an examination of the foundations of Western civilization, it introduces students to the issues that preoccupied the Greeks as presented in a range of materials extending from Homer to Aristotle. Students will read Homer's account of the Trojan War; experience the theatre of Sophocles, Euripides, and Aristophanes; and examine life in 4th century B.C. Athens through the works of Thucydides, Plato and Aristotle. The contention of this course is that not only is Greek history and culture interesting in itself, but that it raises issues that are thoroughly relevant to the contemporary situation. Philosophy 211 Metaphysics and Epistemology (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Philosophy 210 Philosophy 221 Existentialism in Literature (S) (3,0) This course is, in spirit, a continuation of Philosophy 220, but it is centred on the Philosophy of Existentialism in literature. There will be an introductory set of lectures on Existentialism as a philosophy. Textual sources will range from Dostoyevsky's "Notes from the Underground" to Sartre's "Nausea." Philosophy 231 Philosophy of Religion (F,S) (3,0) A study of the central philosophical issues of religious thought and experience. Included will be a discussion of the intellectual merits of religious beliefs, the nature of revelation, mysticism, and fundamentalism, as well as the apparent conflict between religion and science. The traditional arguments for the existence of God will be assessed, and there will be discussion of the relationship between religion and morality, and of the role of religion in society and personal life. Although not a survey of comparative religion, an effort will be made to offer an introduction to a range of spiritual beliefs. \ \ \ m Academic — Philosophy 69 Physics Instructional Faculty M, F R E E M A N , B.Sc. (Hons.) (UBC), M.Sc. (Cal. Tech.), Ph.D. (UBC) S. GREENSPOON, B.Sc. (Hons.) (McGill), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Waterloo) F. P A R V A Z , B.Sc. (Tehran), M.S. (San Diego State) Laboratory Supervisors D. CIARNIELLO, B.Sc. (UBC) B. SIMSON, B.Sc. (SFU) General Information All first year physics courses include a weekly two-hour laboratory period. The cost of the labs is included in the course tuition fee except for lab manuals. University Transfer Credit All physics courses at Capilano carry transfer credit to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details please refer to the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions Physics 104 A survey of mechanics covering vectors, statics, kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration, and special relativity. Physics 111 General Physics II (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " in either Physics 110 or 108 or 114; and Math 110. Math 111 is a pre or corequisite. Any student who has attempted the course within the last year will not be allowed to register without the instructor's permission. Electricity and Magnetism, waves, physical optics, sound, and atomic and nuclear physics. Physics 114 Fundamental Physics I (F) (3,2) Prerequisite: Physics 12 or Physics 104; Math 110 is a preor corequisite. A survey of mechanics covering vectors, statics, kinematics, dynamics, energy, momentum, rotation, gravitation, vibration, and special relativity. This course, together with Physics 115, is particularly suitable for students going into the physical sciences or engineering. Principles of Physics (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: No Physics prerequisite. Algebra 12 or Math 103 or Math 105 is required. Physics 104 is accepted at BCIT as equivalent to Physics 12. This course serves as an introduction to physics for students with little or no background in the subject. It is intended for students not taking further studies in science. Topics include mechanics, energy, ray optics and heat. Physics 108 Basic Physics (F) (4.5,2) Physics 115 Fundamental Physics II (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " in Physics 114 or at least a "B" in Physics 108 or 110. Math 111 is a pre or corequisite. Electricy and Magnetism, waves, physical optics, sound, and atomic and nuclear physics. Note: Physics 114/115 are at a more advanced level than Physics 108/110/111, and are particularly suitable for students going into the physical sciences or enginering. Prerequisite: Algebra 12 or Math 103 or Math 105. Math 110 is a pre- or corequisite. Physics 200 The course covers the material of Physics 110, together with those topics from high school physics needed by a student with no previous background in physics. A student passing this course should be able to enter Physics 111 in the Spring. Prerequisite: At least a " C - " in either Physics 111 or 115; and Math 111. Math 230 must be taken concurrently, if not already completed. Physics 210 must be taken concurrently. Students who have previously attempted Physics 108, 110, or 114 may not be permitted to register in Physics 108. Heat, temperature, the first and second laws of thermodynamics, kinetic theory, and waves. This course, together with Physics 201, 210 and 211, is required for students majoring in physics and recommended for students majoring in chemistry. Physics 110 General Physics I (F) (3,2) Prerequisite: Physics 12 or Physics 11 or Physics 104; and Math 110 is a pre- or corequisite. Academic — Physics 70 Heat, Kinetic Theory and Waves (F) (3,0) Political Studies Physics 201 Electrical Circuits (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a "C -" in Physics 200; Math 230. Math 231 is a pre- or corequisite. Math 235 is a recommended corequisite. Physics 211 must be taken concurrently. The study of electrical and magnetic fields; fundamentals of a.c. theory; LR, RC, LRC circuits; resonance; mechanical analogs; forced and damped oscillations, and waves. Physics 210 Physics Laboratory I (F) (1,3) Prerequisite: As for Physics 200 which must be taken concurrently. A weekly three-hour lab in mathematical methods, thermodynamics, electrical measurements and mechanics. Physics 211 Physics Laboratory II (S) (1,3) Prerequisite: As for Physics 201, which must be taken concurrently. A weekly three-hour lab in electricity and magnetism, electronics and mechanics. Physics 220 Mechanics I (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C " in either Physics 110 or 108 or 114; and Math 111. Math 230 is a pre- or corequisite. Newtonian mechanics of particles. Topics include kinematics, viscous and turbulent drag, rocket propulsion, conservation laws, and centrifugal and Coriolis forces. This course, together with Physics 221, is required for students majoring in physics and recommended for students majoring in math or computer science. Physics 221 Mechanics II and Special Relativity (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a " C - " in Physics 220; and Math 230. Math 235 is a recommended corequisite. More advanced topics in mechanics: application of special relativity to elementary particle creation and space travel, eliptical and interplanetary transfer orbits, rigid body dynamics and gyroscopes. Instructional Faculty M. CARR, B.A. (UVIC), M.A. (Toronto) E.M. L A V A L L E , B.Comm., LL.B. (UBC), M.A. (Duke) P. MIER, B.A. (SFU), M.A. (Toronto) S. PERSKY, B.A., M.A. (UBC) C. SYLVESTER, B.A. (Gonzaga U.) (Wash) M.A. (U.Notre Dame) (In.) A. TAYLOR, B.A. (Hons.) (Kingston), M.A. (Toronto), M.Sc. (Sussex) D. WINCHESTER, B.A. (Concordia), M.A. (UBC) University Transfer Credit All Political Studies courses at Capilano are transferable to SFU, UBC and UVic. For details consult the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions Political Studies 100 An Introduction to Political Thought - Plato to Machlavelli (F,S) (3,0) The purpose of the course is to introduce students to the tradition of Western political inquiry from the Ancient Greeks to the emergence of the Nation State. Elements within this tradition will be approached from an historical and philosophical perspective. Particular emphasis will be placed upon the critical reading of original texts and background material will be presented in lectures and additional reading. Major topics include ancient and medieval political thought, and the rise of the national state. Political Studies 101 Contemporary Ideologies (F.S) (3,0) A n introduction to the historical development of contemporary ideologies with an examination of the ideas expressed in the political process. The course includes a critical analysis of Liberalism, Conservatism, Fascism, Social Democracy and Marxism-Leninism. Political Studies 102 Comparative Government (F,S) (3,0) An introduction to the elements of government and politics in a comparative perspective. This course will take two or more political cultures and examine the formal and informal political structures and processes in each. A variety of states/countries are selected each term to use as "case" studies (e.g. U.S. and Latin America; Western Europe and the Soviet Union; China and Japan). Academic — Political Studies "~71 Political Studies 104 Canadian Government (F,S) (3,0) Political Studies 203 International Organizations (S) (3,0) A study of the processes, ideologies and government structures which make up the Canadian political reality. This course will examine the role of the prime minister's office, the bureaucracy, political parties, federal-provincial relations and Canadian foreign policy. Since the emergence of the Concert of Europe in 1815, international organizations have played an increasingly important role in world politics. This course examines the history and development of international and regional governmental and non-governmental organizations which act in the international arena. Special emphasis will be placed on the United Nations, the North Atlantic Treaty Organization, the Warsaw Treaty Organization, the European Economic Community and the Council for Mutual Economic Assistance. Political Studies 201 International Relations (F) (3,0) A study of aspects of global conflict and world politics providing students with the background necessary for an understanding of sources of power, techniques of wielding influence and the formulation of foreign policy. The course will examine the origins of the Cold War, Imperialism, local and global wars, detente, and problems of militarization and disarmament. Students will be introduced to primary diplomatic materials. Political Studies 202 Government and Politics of British Columbia (F) (3,0) This course will provide an understanding of the political institutions, dynamics, and socio-economic processes of provincial, regional, and municipal governments in Canada, with particular emphasis on B.C. Specifically, it is intended to familiarize students with the activities of political parties and state institutions in B.C., especially since the end of World War II. It is designed to develop students' skills in critically analyzing the B.C. political process from several methodological perspectives within the discipline of political studies. Academic — Political Studies 72 Political Studies 206 Scope and Methods - Political Analysis (F) (3,0) This course introduces the student to a variety of theoretical approaches and specific tools for studying politics. A general introduction to the nature and controversies of contemporary political science focussing attention on some key issues in the logic of political inquiry - alternative models of explanation, problems in concept-formation, the nature of scientific inference, and so on. The tools and insights will be used to investigate and criticize elements of Canadian politics. Students may have the opportunity to work on a prototype political studies journal. Political Studies 207 Selected Issues in Contemporary Social and Political Theory (S) (3,0) This course will examine some of the major contributions to social and political thought beginning with the rise of the Welfare State to the current problems associated with the structure and organization of late capitalism. Topics will include a discussion of the role of the state, the Frankfurt School, Neo-Marxism, Cultural Theory, the fate of Liberal Democracy, and the current interest in Democratic Theory; Civil Society vs the State, Neo-Conservatism, Militarism, and the question of Power, and how particular theorists have responded to these developments, (for example, Keynes, Arendt, Gramsci, Althusser, Poulantzas, Bahro, Foucault, Habermas, Offe, Friedman, Marcuse, and Williams). Psychology Instructional Faculty P. AVERY, B.A. (York), M.Ed. (Toronto) E. ECCLES, B.A. (Hons.), M.A. (UBC) R. H A W R Y L K O , B.A. (Hunter), M.A. (SFU) M. M A C N E I L L , B.A. (Alta.), M.A. (Manitoba), Ph.D. (Calgary) S. M O E , B.A., M.A. (Mexico) L. MOREY, B.A., M.A. (UBC) Ph.D. (U. of Sussex) J. WATERS, B.A. M.A. (SFU) University Transfer Credit All Psychology courses at Capilano transfer to SFU, UBC, and UVic. For more details consult the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Course Description Psychology 100 Introduction to Psychology (F,S) (3,0) A course designed to introduce the beginning psychology student to some of the major concepts and approaches necessary to an understanding of human behaviour from a psychological perspective. Topics covered include learning, development, sexuality, personality theory, and other selected issues. Psychology 101 Theories of Behaviour (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 A course for those students who desire a complete survey of the basic areas of Psychology (when combined with Psychology 100), before proceeding to an in-depth study of particular areas. The course covers such topics as research methodology, stress, physiological psychology, altered states of consciousness, behaviour disorders, the therapeutic process, and other selected issues. Psychology 200 Social Psychology (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 A study of the dynamics and effects of social influences on individual human behaviour. The course looks at such topics as attitudes and attitude changes, social beliefs, roles, conformity, group processes, leadership, prejudice, interpersonal attraction and psychological effects of the physical environment. Psychology 201 Group Dynamics (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 A study of the behaviour of people in family, friendship and work group situations. This course provides an intel- lectual and experiential approach to small group theory and allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills in a supportive, small group setting. Psychology 203 History of Psychology (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 This course will examine the development of psychological thought to gain a critical understanding of contemporary psychology. Issues will range from the mind-body problem, and the nature of science, to an analysis of historical and contemporary schools in psychology. Psychology 204 Developmental Psychology (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 A study of the child's development from infancy to adolescence, including the development of social behaviour, personality, language and cognitive processes. Students will be encouraged to do research projects and observations. Psychology 205 The Psychology of Aging (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 and 101 A course dealing with the psychological development of the individual from early adulthood to death, with emphasis on intellectual and personality changes, and the social context of aging. As well as being exposed to basic research in the area, students will be encouraged to develop an empathic understanding of the aging process through such means as community projects. Psychology 206 Adolescent Psychology (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 and 101 Examines the research findings and theories pertaining to the development and behaviour of adolescents. Topics covered will include biological and sexual maturation, personality, intelligence, motivation and social issues such as delinquency and family relationships. Psychology 210 Statistics and Research Design (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 A course for students who intend to major in one of the social sciences. Students who intend to major in psychology should take this course and its sequel, Psychology 211. This course will introduce the student to descriptive and inferential statistics, and provide some of the basic skills to design and evaluate research in the social sciences. Academic - Psychology 73 Sociology Psychology 211 Experimental Psychology (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 and 210 A continuation of Psychology 210 for psychology majors. This course deals with current research methods in major areas of psychology. Students should understand the principles of research methodology, and be able to design research in psychology. Psychology 220 Theory of Personality (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 A study of the various theories of personality from psychoanalytic theory to learning theory. Included will be the ideas of Freud, Rogers, Maslow and others. Concepts to be considered will include the development of personality, and the structure and dynamics of personality. The course will include consideration of theoretical problems, and students will become familiar with empirical research in these areas. Psychology 222 Abnormal Psychology (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 A study of the various models and perspectives for viewing patterns and treatment of abnormal behaviour. Included will be an examination of the research as to how the medical model, behaviouristic school, humanistic school, psychoanalytic school, cognitive school and interpersonal school view normal and abnormal behaviour. This course will also focus on the historical and contemporary approaches to treatment. Psychology 230 Cognitive Psychology (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Psychology 100 This course will address many of the issues relating to the thinking processes. Research into memory, problem solving, creativity and artificial intelligence will be examined, as well as experiments in social cognition and cognition across the lifespan. Women's Studies 110 Women and Psychology (F) (3,0) A psychological examination of the origins of sex-roles, their development in childhood and maintenance in adult life. The course will examine current research in biology and behaviour, socialization, personality and will include issues of current interest such as sexuality, aging, and violence against women. Academic — Sociology 74 Instructional Faculty G. BAILEY, B. SC. (McGill), Ph.D. (Oregon) N. G A Y L E , B.A. (York), M.A. (Western), Ph.D. (UBC) C. H A T H A W A Y , B.A. (Harpur College S.U.N.Y.), M.A. (Wash U., St. Louis) M. SPEIER, B.A. (New York), M.A., Ph.D. (Berkeley) General Information All courses in Sociology are geared to help the student comprehend personal and global events in a relevant and meaningful way. Sociology should thus help the student in his/her endeavour to cope with our increasingly complex society. A major in Sociology leads to work in the following areas: social work, teaching, probation work, criminology, industrial Sociology, communications, media, government research and related areas. Students registering for Sociology courses should note that there are no prerequisites for any of the courses and that courses can be taken in any order or combination, according to student interest. Those who intend to major should complete Sociology 100 and 101. University Transfer Credit All Sociology courses at Capilano transfer to SFU, UBC and UVic. All 200 level courses will provide the Simon Fraser transfer student with assigned credit toward second-year courses. The UBC transfer student will be provided with unassigned credit towards a major. For details consult the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Course Descriptions Sociology 100 Social Structures (F,S) (3,0) The course systematically covers major topics and issues of concern to anyone who wishes to begin to understand and come to terms with, the modern world in a personally and sociologically relevant way. The basic theme of the course is that we are, to a greater extent than generally imagined, produced, structured and run by the "social machine". This "social machine" comprises institutions such as the family, religion, class system, mass media, education as well as rules, customs, laws, etc. This course looks at how we are influenced by this "machine" and in turn how we react to that influence. Both Sociology 100 and 101 are required for students intending to major in Sociology at SFU or UBC. Sociology 101 Concepts of Theories of Society (F,S) (3,0) With current social conditions in mind, this course analyses the general development of sociological thought in the 19th and 20th centuries. We will look at three major approaches to understanding society (structural factionalism, conflict theory and symbolic interactionism) and employ these approaches to analyse events of current interest. Both Sociology 100 and 101 are required for students intending to major in Sociology at SFU or UBC. Sociology 200 Canadian Society (F) (3,0) A n introduction to the study of Canadian society and culture, including an analysis of the major Canadian institutions studied on a national basis, with special emphasis on the dynamics of change in a multicultural, complex society. Sociology 201 British Columbia Society (F) (3,0) A continued sociological approach to the dynamics of Canadian society with special emphasis on British Columbia. Close attention will be given to social movements and economics, historical and cultural developments which have shaped British Columbia from a frontier into a modern industrial society. Both sociological and "non-sociological" literature on the meaning and effects of "under development" will be considered. This course may be taken by itself or as a complement to Sociology 210, Current Social Issues. Sociology 222 Sociology of the Arts (F) (3,0) A sociological study of creative endeavours of western civilization through painting, music and the cinema. The course will relate the various art forms to the social context in which they exist; hence it will develop an understanding of the interrelationships between ideas (expressed as Art), social institutions and social behaviour. This course is particularly recommended as a complement to Sociology 223 or 101. Sociology 223 Media and Society (S) (3,0) An intensive study of the relationship between a society's communication systems as media and its technological, economic and political base, its ideology, its behaviour patterns and its cultural life. This will encompass current forms of television, radio, magazines, all forms of advertisement, news production and the movies. This course is particularly recommended as a complement to Sociology 222 or 100. Sociology 210 Current Social Issues (S) (3,0) A study of social concerns and cultural problems common to current conditions in the 20th century in our society and in global perspectives. Classical sociological concepts will be used to examine current social issues in a global framework of political, economic, and cultural analysis, such as mass violence, the economics of the arms race, the sociology of war and peace, social inequality, etc. Current issues are placed in the context of the student's daily world, as it is happening now — this should develop the student's sociological imagination. This course can be taken by itself, or as a complement to Sociology of the Third World. Sociology 211 Sociology of the Third World (F) (3,0) A study of the major theories of development and under development, social and cultural responses to under development, and the inter-relationship of social institutions in and between the "developed" and "under developed" societies. This course will provide students with an opportunity to better understand the social, economic and political causes and effects of under development. Academic — Sociology 75 Spanish Instructional Faculty Course Descriptions C. F U R S T E N W A L D , B A . ( U . N A . M . Mexico), M . B A . (Washington) D. C L A V E R O , M.Sc. (Kansas), M.A. (UBC), Ph.D.(UBC) Spanish 100 First Year Spanish (F) (3,1.75) Instructional Associate J. G A C I N A , B.A. (SFU), P.D.P. (SFU) K. M A T T S O N , B.A. (SFU), Licenciatura (Barcelona) General Information All courses in Spanish include a total of four and 3 / 4 hours of instruction per week, made up of three hours of lectures; 3 / 4 hours of laboratory practice; and one hour of conversational practice with a native speaker. Native speakers of Spanish who wish to take first or second-year courses in these languages must consult with the Spanish Instructor first. University rules governing such students differ within departments, but the Language Department has correspondence dealing with matters relevant to credit transfer and point of entry. In order to avoid any misunderstandings, such students are invited to discuss these problems with the Department prior to enrollment. University Transfer Credit All Spanish courses at Capilano transfer to SFU, UBC and UVic. S F U : Students who wish to proceed to SFU and to pursue further courses in Spanish are reminded of the present equivalency standards. Elective credit will be given at SFU for all Capilano College Spanish courses. Exemption from and placement in higher courses are determined by the results of a placement test or other assessment procedure. As a result of the placement test, area credit may be granted which would count toward a major in Spanish. Courses which do not qualify toward a major will be awarded elective credit only. U B C : At UBC, present equivalent standards equate Spanish 100 and 101 with Spanish 100; Spanish 200 and 201 with Spanish 200. The student who plans to major in Spanish may enter UBC's Spanish when s/he completes the Capilano courses. Academic — Spanish 76 This is a beginners' course which offers a comprehensive introduction to the Spanish language. Emphasis is placed on grammar and the development of the students' speaking, understanding and writing skills. Spanish 101 First Year Spanish (S) (3,1.75) Prerequisite: Spanish 100 or permission from instructor. A continuation of the work of Spanish 100, this course should be taken, whenever possible, in the term following Spanish 100. Recommended also for those who are considering taking Spanish 200 at a later date and need review work. Spanish 200 Second Year Spanish (F) (3,2) Prerequisite: Spanish 100/101 or permission of instructor. A review of Spanish grammar with special emphasis on problematic areas normally encountered by students of the language. The reading, writing and oral fluency of the student will be improved through translations, compositions and a high degree of conversation. Also, the student will be introduced to Hispanic Literature. Classes will be conducted in the Spanish language only. Spanish 201 Second Year Spanish (S) (3, 2) Prerequisite: Spanish 200 or permission from the instructor. A continuation of the work of Spanish 200. This course should be taken, wherever possible, in the term following Spanish 200. Theatre Thai Instructional Faculty Instructional Faculty J. P L A C Z E K , B.A. (Windsor), M.A. Linguistics (UBC), Ph.D. South East Asian Studies (UBC) P. P L A C Z E K , Language Associate, B.A. (Thammasat University) Bangkok D. MOORE, B.F.A. (UVic.) W. M U R D O C H , B.F.A. (UVic), M.F.A. (UBC) Course Descriptions General Information Thai 100 (F) (3,2) The Theatre Program runs courses in the Fall and Spring terms through the College's Academic Division. These are available to both full-time and part-time students who wish the opportunity to continue their interest in Theatre at a post-secondary level. The aim of the program is to provide a professional approach to Theatre through inclass instruction and performance experience, both on campus and on tour. This course provides instruction and practice both in beginning language and in the cultural background which is so necessary to place the examples into meaningful contexts. The international phonetic alphabet is used to avoid confusion of sounds. The basic vocabulary and sentence structures are covered, and social routines and common idioms are stressed as well. Students have time to practice all structures introduced, and are encouraged to initiate their own conversations. At the end of the course students have better than survivallevel fluency, and use only Thai for basic classroom routines. They are ready to learn to write. Thai 101 (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: Thai 100 or equivalent This course reviews the basic material of Thai 100, and introduces the script. Students learn how to write the words they already know. More complex structures are introduced, along with more idioms, common expressions, and exceptions to basic rules. Classes are conducted almost all in Thai, except for occasional detailed historical or technical explanations. At the end of the course students know how to respond to typical situations in Thai and to elicit basic everyday information from Thais. They can read simple Thai passages and the basic road signs. T. FORREST S. ATKINS, B.A. (SFU) Auditions are not required for entry to Theatre 100 or 101. Other performance courses require an audition for entry or to waive a prerequisite. Check with the department for audition dates. This program prepares students who are professionally inclined, for specialized training at other Colleges, Universities and Theatre schools while providing academic transfer credit to students with a casual interest in Theatre. Also, for those who wish to pursue theatre for the sheer joy of it, these courses provide an excellent introduction to the discipline and develop skills which are easily utilized in non-theatre situations. Daytime and evening sections of many courses are offered to allow both full-time and part-time students to take advantage of the Theatre Program. University Transfer Credit Theatre courses at Capilano have transfer credit or elective credit at SFU, UBC and UVic. Please consult Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar and instructor for the most recent transfer information. Course Descriptions Theatre 100 Acting I (F) (3,0) A workshop course in the art of the actor, focusing on voice, movement, and scene work to develop the student's awareness of the actor's resources and his/her own strengths and weaknesses as a performer. In addition to readings and a written analysis of a professional production, the student will rehearse and perform a monologue and a short scene, applying approaches and techniques taught in class to the final presentation of theses scenes for an invited audience. Video and audio tapings of student work will be used to augment individual comment and coaching provided by the instructor. Academic — Thai - Theatre 77 Theatre 101 Acting II (S) (3,0) Theatre 110 Acting for Film and Television I (F) (3,3) A continuation of Theatre 100, exploring performance improvisation and non-scripted theatre. A workshop course focusing on improvisation as an essential tool in developing the actor's imaginative resources and providing the confidence necessary to any form of "thinking on one's feet." Improvisation will be taught as a performance skill in its own right through the use of theatre games such as seen at Theatre Sports, but it will also be explored as a means to develop and amplify scripted works. Prerequisite: Theatre 100 and 101. Audition required Theatre 105 Bodywork I (F) (3,0) Bodywork is a studio course designed for students both experienced and inexperienced with movement techniques. These workshop classes focus on body awareness and alignment, strength, flexibility, and coordination. Class work will develop personal confidence, coordination, imagination, and discipline. Video tapings plus film viewing will also be used to introduce a practical movement vocabulary and criterion. Guest lecturers specializing in mime, contact improvisation, fighting, and tap classes will give workshops according to class interest and availability. This popular course introduces the student to the acting techniques and technical skills necessary to understand the part of performing for the camera. Held in conjunction with a Directing for Film and Television course offered by the Media Resources program, this course will give the students a chance to work in the on-campus television studio, getting hands-on experience behind and in front of the cameras. Portable video cameras wil be used in various locations to simulate the shooting environment of a film set. In addition to gaining experience in on camera techniques such as eye lines, hitting marks, and on set etiquette, the student will also work on appropriate levels of performance for various kinds of takes. Auditioning for film and television will also be taught. Theatre 116 Music Theatre-Movement I (F) (1.5,0) (Must be taken concurrently with Music 116) (not offered 90/91) This studio course is designed for students who want to specialize in Musical Theatre. The course explores various dance styles and choreograpy of Musical Theatre. Music 116 emphasizes singing in the musical. Combined, these courses explore the special presentational styles of Musical Theatre. Students will work on musical numbers and perform for an audience when applicable. Theatre 107 Vocal Communication I (S) (3,0) Theatre 117 Music Theatre-Movement II (S) (1.5,0) This is a workshop course for students interested in developing the voice and oral presentation. The course deals with talking: developing a clear, pleasant, animated and well-projected voice. Prerequisite: Theatre 116 and Music 116 or Audition Theatre 106 Bodywork II (3,0) Improved vocal technique is linked to good vocal communication with an emphasis on speaking before groups. Skill and confidence is built through presentation of vocal exercises using poetry, drama, and speeches. Two or three professionals will give guest workshops and introduce the student to specific applications of using the voice in the working world. Potential guest lecturers: actors, radio and television announcers, public speakers, singers, and others. Theatre 108 Vocal Communication II (3,0) (not offered 90/91) Academic — Theatre 78 A continuation of Theatre 116. The second term will focus on styles not studied in the fall term. Theatre 120 The Elements of Theatre I (F) (3,0) The Elements of Theatre I takes a look at what makes a show tick, providing background insights into the contributions of the Director, Playwright and Theatre Critic. The work of these collaborators is studied in the context of performances which the class will attend and discuss, writing papers and preparing presentations on the work of the playwright and the director, with the student's critical insights being shared in class. Notable among these assignments is the use of the Theatre Game Program on the Macintosh Computer which will enable the student to play director in composing a computer animated version of a scene from one of the great plays from the world of dramatic literature. The shows attended will be chosen from the seasons of companies performing in Vancouver. The evolution of theatrical performance from its ritualistic beginnings to the spectacular melodramas of the 19th Century will also be studied using slide lectures, readings and video presentations of classic works from the great ages of Theatre and Drama. This course is essential for any serious theatre goer and a must for any theatre student. Theatre 121 The Elements of Theatre II (S) (3,0) Theatre 121 is a continuation of Theatre 120, and examines the contribution of the Actor and the Scenic artists in creating a specific interpretation of the plays selected. The focus of this examination will again be performances chosen from the spring season in Vancouver, with the student writing papers and preparing designs for a work chosen from the modern period. This examination will be set in the context of the modern theatre as slide lectures, video presentations and discussions will attempt to clarify for the student some of the major trends in modern theatre from its beginnings in the Naturalistic and Realistic movements at the turn of the century through the Epic Theatre of Bertold Brecht and the experimentors of the Sixties and Seventies to its present eclectic Post Modernist tendencies. Again this course is a must if one wishes to develop an intelligent appreciation of the ever-changing world of theatre. Theatre 150 Introduction to Production and Design I (F) (3,0) A n intermediate introduction to the basic elements of theatrical production and design. It gives a practical look at modern theatrical design of sets, lighting, costume, properties, and promotional materials. Examines the roles of the people involved in producing a show— designers, publicist, lighting and sound technicians, stage manager, and construction crews—with students having the opportunity to try out one or more of these roles in production situations. in the design and construction of the spring presentation and become the production team responsible for the planning and execution of the design concept through all its phases - from pre-production meetings through shop drawings and construction to opening night and beyond (perhaps the Academy Awards)!!! The focus of the course shifts to specific production and design skills required to mount and publicize the show chosen. Assignments will vary depending on the student's aptitude, desire and time commitment, as department standards aim at professionally produced and run productions for a paying public audience. Theatre 200 Script and Stage (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Theatre 100 or 101 (or by audition) and Theatre 150 (may be taken concurrently) This acting course focuses on scripted material and the means that the actor uses to bring about a full rendering of the work chosen. Students are introduced to the discipline of acting within the context of production, so such topics as working with a director, working within a rehearsal schedule, using props, set and costumes, are approached in a practical studio workshop format. This course is project oriented and students will have the opportunity to perform work in a short run before a public audience. Theatre 201 Rehearsal and Performance (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Theatre 200 or by audition and Theatre 151 (may be taken concurrently) This course takes the lessons learned in Theatre 200 and applies them on a larger scale. This term's topic is: What is the job of the actor in the context of a fully produced play? A professionally mounted performance marketed to the community is the format for this course. Students will learn the process of rehearsal from the actor's perspective from casting through to production post mortem. Using a lecture and workshop format the student is familiarized with the theory and practice of technical theatre, shop organization, and the use of hand and power tools, basic construction, electricity and lighting, publicity, and backstage organization. Students will build, tech, and crew final presentations of first and second year acting courses. Theatre 151 Introduction to Production and Design II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Theatre 150 or permission of instructor A continuation of Theatre 150. Students will participate Academic — Theatre 79 Women's Studies Instructional Faculty Women's Studies offerings are taught by fully-qualified instructors who have experience in the field relevant to their courses. These faculty are seconded from relevant disciplines to Women's Studies. University Transfer Credit For information on transferability refer to the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. SFU: Students who wish to pursue further courses in Women's Studies are advised that SFU has instituted a minor program in Women's Studies. Course Descriptions Women's Studies 100 Introduction to Women's Studies (F) (3,0) This course will examine the status and role of women in Canadian Society. Topics will include the impact of Women's Studies on traditional academic disciplines; the nature and origins of patriarchy; women and work; and issues centering around reproduction and sexuality. It will trace the development of sex role divisions in the family and other social institutions; examine the influence of education, media and art on the development of female role models. Differences in women's roles due to class, status, race, and religion will be discussed. Women's Studies 104 Contemporary English-Canadian Women Writers (F) (3,0) A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness of and appreciation for the literature in English being produced by Canadian women writers today, with emphasis on the current, local, West Coast literary scene; to examine and discuss the portraits of women and of women's circumstances revealed in these writings. In addition to students' reading and discussion of the literature, there will be class visits for readings and discussion by several prominent West Coast Canadian women writers. This course may not be offered in 90/91. Check the current timetable. Women's Studies 106 Contemporary American Women Writers (3,0) A discussion-oriented literature course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness of and appreciation of contemporary and recent important American women authors. There will be brief consideration of 19th and early 20th century works, but the focus will be on works published since WWII, including works Academic - Women's Studies 80 of the 1980s. Although the focus will be on plays, stories, novels, and poetry, there will be some exploration of those biographical matters and issues of critical status that mark the rise of women's writings from a sub-genre to full status acceptance by the best critics today. This course may not be offered in 90/91. Check the current timetable. Women's Studies 107 Contemporary European Women Writers (In Translation) (3,0) A discussion-oriented course intended to broaden and intensify the student's awareness and appreciation of the literature being produced by a wide variety of women writers today in Europe (especially France and Germany) and to encourage students to become more aware of and responsive to the creative process as it is exercised by these authors within the particular circumstances common to women's role in our western society, as well as those circumstances particular to specific cultures in western society. This course may not be offered in 90/91. Check the current timetable. Women's Studies 110 Women and Psychology (F) (3,0) A psychological examination of the origins of sex-roles, their development in childhood and maintenance in adult life. The course will examine current research in biology and behaviour, socialization, personality and will include issues of current interest such as sexuality, aging, and violence against women. Women's Studies 122 Women in Anthropology (S) (3,0) The anthropological perspective applied to women in different cultures of the world: their role in economic, political, religious, kinship, and expressive systems; exploration of the work of women anthropologists and the effect of theory on understanding women; women's experience in cultures and areas such as the Eskimos, Amazon jungle, Israeli kibbutz, Greece, Afghanistan, India, Mexico, and Africa. Women's Studies 220 Women and the Past: An Historical Survey (F) (3,0) A survey of the lives of women from the Ancient World to 20th century North America. A n uncovering of women's participation in and contribution to the making of history. Private lives as well as public and political activities will be studied. The course will examine reasons behind the extent to which women have been "hidden from history." Career/Vocational Programs Capilano College offers a variety of employment-related programs. The programs offered are under constant review to make certain that students are taught the latest techniques and skills. Advisory committees, composed of employers, review and recommend content of all programs. Admission is limited and applicants are considered on the criteria established for each program area. In general, Grade 12 standing is required for two year Diploma Programs although others may be admitted on the basis of their experience and abilities. Due to the timely nature of these programs, requirements and profiles may change. Contact the individual departments for current information. Student Course and Work Load Full-time programs are designed so that successful completion is a full-time task. Students are advised not to undertake other activities that require large time commitments, including employment, while undertaking fulltime studies. Graduate Employment transfer credits reduce the total number of credits which are required at Capilano College for the certificate or diploma. Students wishing transfer credit should present suitable documentation to the Registrar's office for adjudication by the appropriate faculty. All approved transfer credits are noted on the student's Permanent Student Record. Full information on transfer of specific courses is available from the Admissions Advisor, Counsellors and in the Division. Admission Dates Enrollment in some Programs may be curtailed due to space and equipment limitations. Consequently, those students who contemplate entrance are encouraged to apply early. Applicants are required to have an interview with the Program Coordinator prior to admission. Unsuccessful applicants who wish to be considered for the next year must re-apply. Canadian Studies Specialty Students who wish to concentrate their studies on Canadian content courses can apply for a Canadian Studies Specialty to be applied to their diploma. See details on page 37. Employment opportunities for graduates have been good, however the College does not guarantee jobs for its graduates. Practicums Exemption Standing For some practicums students may be required to have a Criminal Records check. Students may be exempted from certain courses upon the successful demonstration of acquired skills and knowledge. Such exemption standings will be noted on the Permanent Studies Record. Students granted such exemptions will have their total course load reduced by the number of exempted credit hours to the maximum of two courses or six credit hours per academic year without effect upon the status of the certificate or diploma in the particular program. Such exempted hours are not necessarily transferable to other institutions. Exemption in excess of two courses, or six credit hours, may be awarded a student only upon the recommendation of the appropriate Program Coordinator and the Dean. Transfer to and from Other Institutions There is agreement among all public B.C. Colleges to accept each other's credits upon transfer, if applicable to a program given at the admitting college, and given suitable equivalency. Capilano College reserves the right to review individual course credits. Course Description Code On the right hand side of each course description there is a series of code letters and numbers, for example: Business Management 160 Marketing (F,S) (3,0) The first letter(s) indicate the term in which the class will be offered. Example: F-Fall, S-Spring, SU-Summer. Thus, Business Management is to be offered in the Fall and Spring terms. The first number indicates the number of credit hours granted for the course (which is usually equivalent to the number of instructional hours per week) and the second number denotes the number of lab and conversational hours per week. Thus, Business Management 160 is offered three hours a week for three credit hours with no lab time. Transfer credits are granted to students O N ADMISSION for acceptable work done at other institutions: the Career/Vocational — General 81 Applied Information Technology Contact: Gerry Blitstein, Coordinator, 986-1911, Local 2062 Instructional Faculty Types of Programs A ten month full-time diploma program beginning with an introduction to the essentials behind effective communications (planning, critical thinking and analysis of information), and teaches students the building blocks of strong graphic design, desk-top presentation and computer systems. Students will learn interactive videodisk development. R. BAILEY M. BATTERSBY, B A . (NYU), PH.D. (UBC) G. BLITSTEIN, A.S.P. (Brooks Institute) B. C A M P B E L L S. R. GILBERT, B.A. (UVic), M.A. (UBC) C. G O L D I N G , M.A., B.Ed. C. KILIAN, B.A. (Columbia), M.A. (SFU) A. LOREK, B A . , M.L.S. D. LAMBERT, B.A., M.L.S. J. M O O R E , M.A. (McGill) D. TAIT L. W U Three part-time evening certificate programs will also be offered. The length of time required to complete them will vary from 3-12 months. Staff: Cathy Halawani, Local 2911 Special Fees and Expenses General Information • The Macintosh Plus computer with expanded R A M (2 mega bytes) is considered the minimum machine capable of performing tasks required in this program. Special arrangements can be made through Capilano College for successful applicants to purchase a machine. Additionally, a 20-40 megabyte hard drive is recommended. • Texts • Software • Computer disks (20) • Modem (1200 or 2400 Baud) • Bulletin Board/E mail/conferencing fees • Cost of data bank research time • Mouse pad During the last decade, society and the economy have rapidly changed, increasingly becoming information- and communication-based. Within business and industry, and between governments, the capability to deal with information and its processing has become an important factor in maintaining a competitive edge. As we move into the 1990s and beyond to the 21st century, it becomes increasingly obvious that individuals will need to control their own access to information. They will use the microcomputer, both alone and connected to other microcomputers and mainframe systems. The interaction with this informatin will become an integral part of the new wave of western development. Capilano College's new Applied Information Technology program will identify issues facing communicators and will train students in the skills to acquire, select, organize, and communicate that information using the latest in interactive computer technology. Through an intensive hands-on immersion into the world of electronic communications, students will become capable handlers of the technology, with advanced research and critical thinking skills, and increased sophistication in interactive computer presentation. Admission Requirements • First year post-secondary English course or equivalent • Computer literacy and a modest keyboarding rate • Good working knowledge of the appropriate computer system • Four years' work experience and/or post-secondary certificate, diploma or degree • Students will be required to attend an interview prior to acceptance Career/Vocational - Applied InfoTech 82 • Interactive Communications • Computer-Managed Training • Desktop Presentation Program Content FULL TIME TEN-MONTH PROGRAM 52.5 credits (7.5 credits awarded for previous or post graduate work or experience) FIRST TERM Credit Hours MDIA 140 Communication Planning and Management 1.5 C M P T 140 Computer Systems I 1.5 INFO 150 Contemporary Issues I 1.5 PHIL 170 Critical Thinking I 1.5 MDIA 141 Computer Presentation 1.5 ART 140 Graphics I 1.5 INFO 151 Interactive Communications I 1.5 C M N S 140 Introduction to Interactive Writing I 1.5 MDIA 142 Computer Managed Learning and Training I 1.5 PHIL 171 Critical Thinking II 1.5 MUS 090 Digitized Sound I 1.5 INFO 152 INFO 153 C M N S 141 Interactive Communications II Research Methods Interactive Writing II SECOND T E R M MDIA 145 Computer Managed Learning and Training II PHIL 172 Critical Thinking III INFO 154 Electronic Research Methods MUS 091 Digitized Sound II ART 141 Graphics II INFO 155 Interactive Communications III C M N S 142 Interactive Writing III INFO 157 Computer Conferencing I CMPT 141 Computer Systems II ART 142 Graphics III INFO 158 Interactive Communications IV INFO 159 Technical Support II INFO 160 Marketing INFO 161 Project Management THIRD TERM INFO 162 Contemporary Issues II INFO 163 Computer Conferencing II INFO 164 Major Project 1.5 1.5 15 21.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 13 22.5 1.5 1.5 6J) 9.0 CMPT 140 MDIA 140 C M N S 140 C M N S 141 PHIL170 MDIA 142 MDIA 145 INFO 151 INFO 152 ART 140 MUS 090 Computer Communications Systems Communication Planning Interactive Writing I Interactive Writing II Critical Thinking I Computer-Managed Training I Computer-Managed Training II Interactive Communications I Interactive Communications II Graphics I Digitized Sound I 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Desktop Presentation (13.5 credits) CMPT 140 MDIA 140 C M N S 140 MDIA 141 INFO 153 INFO 154 ART 140 ART 141 INFO 151 Computer Communication Systems Communication Planning and Management Intro, to Interactive Writing I Computer Presentation Research Methods Electronic Research Methods Graphics I Graphics II Interactive Communications I 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Course Descriptions Evening Classes FIRST TERM PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT MDIA 140 Communication Planning and Management (1.5) CERTIFICATE SERIES Interactive Communications (21.0 credits) M A R C H - APRIL Credit Hours CMPT 140 Computer Systems I 1.5 PHIL 170 Critical Thinking I 1.5 INFO 151 Interactive Communications I 1.5 MAY-JUNE C M N S 140 Intro, to Interactive Writing I ART 140 Craphicsl Computer Managed Training (16.5 credits) 1.5 1.5 SEPTEMBER - OCTOBER INFO 152 Interactive Communications II MDIA 140 Communication Planning and Management INFO 153 Research Methods 1.5 1.5 NOVEMBER-DECEMBER C M N S 141 Interactive Writing II MUS 090 Digitized Sound I 1.5 1.5 JANUARY - FEBRUARY INFO 155 Interactive Communications III ART 141 Graphics II 1.5 1.5 M A R C H - APRIL INFO 158 Interactive Communications IV INFO 156 Technical Support I 1.5 1.5 This course introduces the design, development and management processes required to create successful events and products intended to communicate. Students will develop concepts, provide audience and market demographics, and create a design plan for a model communication project. Issues of roles with a design team, timelines and available resources will be examined. Project management systems will be introduced and students will explore how microcomputers can assist both the planning and execution of projects. 1.5 CMPT 140 Computer Systems I (1.5) This course familiarizes students with the systems available to the program. The network used for course work, its operation, its hardware and its printing operations will be explained. Various PC programming languages will be considered. Information transmission systems, including modems, E-mail and bulletin boards, will be examined. (MV version) Career/Vocational - Applied InfoTech 83 INFO 150 Contemporary Issues (1.5) This course presents expert opinion on a variety of issues in the ethics of communication, in human perception and learning in a computer environment, and in the impact of new information systems on human understanding and human society. As communications enters the twentyfirst century, those engaged in processing information will have new new ways to think and new questions of responsibility to answer; the course asks students to consider the moral and cognitive demands of the new age. PHIL 170 Critical Thinking I (1.5) This course introduces students to the basic concepts of critical thinking and argumentation. Students will come to understand the concepts of argument, premise, conclusion, and argument structure and develop facility in using these concepts. They will come to understand and develop facility with the standards of good arguments (including acceptability, sufficiency, irrelevancy, fallacy, and biased language), with some of the basic concepts of deductive reasoning, and with causal and analogical reasoning. MDIA 141 Computer Presentation (1.5) This course explores the related textual, graphic and computer skills needed for effective desktop presentation. Students will learn to design and build an outline, determine what hardware and software applications will best realize the design, interrelate graphics with support text, and structure the final presentation. ART 140 Graphics I (1.5) This course aims to enhance visual literacy through the development of generic skills and abilities. Students will develop a critical awareness of different presentation formats, will learn to make an effective visual analysis, and will develop an ease or facility in resolving graphic problems within the computer environment. Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to preplan for a graphic layout using storyboards and thumbnails, to choose the appropriate graphic tools for a given presentation format, to compose a visual theme for a computer monitor application and to prepare documents within a page layout application INFO 151 Interactive Communications I (1.5) This course first examines the concept of interactive Career/Vocational - Applied InfoTech 84 communications—the active involvement of a human mind with a computer— and the history of developments in the field to date. It then moves to more practical skills, moving from planning and flow charting to basic programming skills and the creation of a simple data base. Members of the class will develop an interactive reference/resource guide. CMNS 140 Introduction to Interactive Writing (1.5) This course will equip students with a clear, concise writing style, will make students aware of various genres and the styles they require, will enable students to "translate" from technical jargon into English, will equip students with basic editing and rewriting skills, will familiarize students with Microsoft Word 4.0 (word processing application) and will enable students to use electronic means of communication. MDIA 142 Computer Managed Learning and Training I (1.5) This course examines the concept of teaching with computer assisted methodologies and of learning in an environment managed by computer. A historical survey of systems will lead to a discussion of current learning systems. Traditional approaches such as drill and practice, simulation and linear programming will be contrasted with emerging hypermedia techniques. Various design approaches—systematic behavioural, market driven, learner controlled—will be described. Students will consider how learning is defined and evaluated. Students will complete a design project and develop a prototype learning product using a computer-based authoring system. PHIL 171 Critical Thinking 11(1.5) This course continues the work of Critical Thinking I. In this term, students will develop an understanding and facility with causal and scientific reasoning, will develop an understanding and facility with the proper use of expert appeals, and will develop an understanding of the role that moral reasoning, values and fundamental committments play in argumentation. MUS 090 Digitilized Sound I (1.5) This course examines the use of sound in computer presentations, including the use of sound effects (SFX), music and voice. Students will learn to use overtones, timbre, waveforms, analog synthesis and analog to digital conversions. The skills learned will be used to enhance projects in other courses by the addition of sound. INF0152 Interactive Communications II (1.5) This course introduces computer publishing in an interactive mode. Students learn to analyse a job to determine its goals and to design and map points of interaction. In small group projects, students will employ these skills and learn additional programming skills (level 2) to create the framework of an interactive publication. INF0153 Research Methods (1.5) This course will introduce students to a variety of information sources, the organization of information and techniques for searching information. Skills necessary for efficient research will be developed. Students will learn to identify, locate and cite information from standard reference sources such as encyclopedias, directories and gazeteers, from government and statistical publication, from journals and newspapers and from audio-visual sources. The hierarchical organization of information in library classification systems and via subject and key word descriptors in catalogues, indeces and abstracting services will be examined. Through practical exercises, students will acquire the basic research skills essential to survival in an information-based environment. C M N S 141 Interactive Writing II (1.5) This course will equip students with an understanding of of the structure of expository, narrative, analytical and argumentative writing, will enable students to write and revise extensive documents for both technical and nontechnical readers and will equip students with the skills needed to produce an electronic journal. SECOND TERM MDIA 145 Computer Managed Learning and Training II (1.5) This course is a continuation of work begun in the previous term. In this course, intensive experience will be provided in the use of an authoring system that allows for the production of sophisticated computer-based training. Students will produce a project plan for the development of a learning product which may have a training, promotional or informational emphasis depending on the student's interests and current departmental guidelines. Students and instructors will test and evaluate the products created (which will be retained as resources for future students). PHIL 172 Critical Thinking III (1.5) In this course, students will develop the ability to produce clear and logical presentation of information and argument. Students will come to an understanding of the relationships between persuasiveness, style and reasonableness. They will develop an enhanced ability to structure presentations, particularly with reference to considerations of hypertext presentation. They will come to understand the role of graphing, and other visual modes of presentation of information. Finally, students will come to understand the ways to use hypermedia to encourage a rational appreciation of information. INFO 154 Electronic Research Methods (1.5) This course will extend the concepts and skills developed in basic research to include their application in computerized databases. Students will explore the rapidly expanding world of electronic information by using remote, online public access library catalogues, C D - R O M full-text and index products, statistical computer packages and a variety of commercially available on-line databases. Methodical search strategies using boolean logic and other organizational techniques will be developed. Students will learn how to select appropriate databases, and how to define the scope of a search to result in successful end-user research. ART 141 Graphics II (1.5) In the second graphics course we extend the exploration to include "time" as a design element. Sequential presentation are coupled with the basic rules learned from "Graphics I". INFO 155 Interactive Communications III (1.5) This project-based course expands earlier concepts, introducing larger scale journal publishing. Students will learn to assimilate previously published material (located through the research techniques taught elsewhere in the program), and to reprocess it. They will round out their earlier journal project, filling in the framework to produce a fininished product. INFO 156 Technical Support I (1.5) This course compliments Interactive Communications III. In it, students will learn to work with expanded memory, learn yet more interactive programming skills (level 3), and learn to design the hardware access configurations necessary to drive their projects. Career/Vocational - Applied InfoTech 85 CMNS 142 Interactive Writing III (1.5) This course will equip students with the skills to "scriptwrite" for the computer, including the ability to plan, outline and write extensive documents; design clear, simple instructions for reader response; apply interactive writing skills to specific projects such as an electronic journal, computer-assisted instruction package, computer conference or the like. MUS 091 Digitalized Sound II (1.5) This course continues the work of the previous semester. In this course, students will explore the principles and processes of live sampling, sampling from CDs and the creation of sample data banks. They will learn sound processing, including reverberation, gating and compression delay and will discuss issues in "midi" and synchronization. Again, these skills will be used in projects for other courses. INFO 157 Computer Conferencing I (1.5) This course considers the role of computers in the planning, administration and holding of conferences. T h e design of a computer interface with the conference will be considered, as will budget restraints, the definition of team roles, regulating the conference, writing organized introductory and promotional information and issues of censorship and copyright. CMPT 141 Computer Systems II (1.5) This course explores various computer systems, beginning with possible interfaces between the Macintosh and IBM environments. Networks, such as the LAN (Local Area Network) and WAN (Wide Area Network), will be examined, and new systems will be studied in depth. ART 141 Graphics II (1.5) Finally, the third term furnishes the student an opportunity to utilize design elements for the establishment of continuity in a major presentation. Materials to be referenced will be from a variety of diverse media. Graphic design is used to develop a cohesive framework for the production. INFO 158 Interactive Communications IV (1.5) Following on from the journal work of the previous two courses, students in this project-based course will create a Career/Vocational - Applied InfoTech 86 second and much more complex interactive product. Students will conceive the goal of the product, find necessary resources, design the project (incorporating ancillary input devices such as laser disk, commercial databases, and the like), and create a finished communications package. INFO 159 Technical Support 11(1.5) This course completes level 4 of interactive programming skills. It also examines the parameters of presentation, helping students to determine which concepts can be made interactive and what limitations exist. Students will explore various linkages to other information sources, and how to incorporate them into the design of their projects. INFO 160 Marketing (1.5) This course will examine the basic principles of marketing in the context of the Canadian market. The course will enable the student to apply these principles in the marketing of themselves with their unique skills in today's business environment INFO 161 Project Management (1.5) This course teaches skills necessary to successfully manage an interactive computer project. Issues such as administration, budgeting, the creation and maintenance of indeces to resource materials and the clearing of copyright will be considered. THIRD TERM INFO 162 Contemporary Issues II (1.5) This course explores further issues of concern to those working with computers in the next decades: the role of computers in a democratic society, the invasion of privacy, the structure of a society of technologists, the effect of artificial intelligence on society. INFO 163 Computer Conferencing II (1.5) This course teaches skills necessary to be a successful conference moderator, including how to create agenda, train participants, steer the meeting, stay on target, stimulate discussion, animate group decision making, and wrap up the meeting. Students will learn from experience by becoming involved in a project conference to be hosted by the Program. Aquaculture INFO 164 Major Project (6) Sechelt Campus Only In the final term of the course, students will undertake to develop an interactive computer project in conjunction with a client. The project may involve CAI or C A T , marketing, cooperative or governmental communication or social advocacy, depending on the interests of the student and the client choosen. In consultation and with the permission of the instructor, students may, instead, opt to work on a major portfolio project. This project must demonstrate a knowledge of the skills taught throughout the course. Contact Person: Dave Bates 987-1535 or 885-3814 ONE YEAR AQUACULTURE TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATE Instructional Faculty D.J. Bates, Dip. Tech. (BCIT), B.Sc., M.Sc. (SFU), R.P.Bio. F. Bishop, B.G.S. (SFU), Teach. Cert. (BC) M. Marsh, Dip. Tech. (Malaspina), B.Sc.(UBC) Career Opportunities Graduates of the program find challenging careers either directly in the Aquaculture industry or in the secondary Aquaculture industries. Job placement may be either in freshwater hatcheries or saltwater growout sites along the B.C. coastline. A n Aquaculture technician, while working under the supervision of a manager will be responsible for the well being of commercial salmonid livestock. The Program The Aquaculture Technician Program is a 10 month program training students in the art and science of salmonid culture. A portion of the program is devoted to shellfish culture. Basic salmonid biology and husbandry techniques are taught with theory backed up by hands on experience. Practicums in this program will involve students living and working at Aquaculture facilities in order to gain important practical skills. In addition to practicum experience, the program utilizes field trips and field days at local aquaculture facilities to emphasize important skills. Course content is designed to meet the needs of the commercial aquaculture industry while also addressing techniques used in wild salmonid enhancement. Admission Requirements Prospective applicants should inquire by telephone or writing to the Sechelt campus. A n information package will then be forwarded and the applicants name placed on an interest list. Applicants on this list will be invited to attend an information and interview session scheduled for the late spring. There are 24 seats available in the Aquaculture Technican Program. Interviews are conducted until the program is full Career/Vocational - Aquaculture ~87 Special Fees and Expenses Students can expect to spend approximately $500.00 on field equipment. In addition, students will have transportation expenses associated with field practicums. Financial assistance in the form of student loans and bursaries may be available. Graduation Requirements Aqua 140 Aquaculture Practicum (F) (3,0) Aqua 101 Fish Culture II (S) (3,0) Program Content Credit Hours 3 3 3 3 3 15 SECOND T E R M Aqua 101 Fish Culture II Aqua 111 Fish Health II Aqua 121 Basic Aquacultural Engineering Aqua 131 Business for Aquaculture Aqua 141 Aquaculture Practicum Techniques and skills ued in Aquaculture including firstaid, marine radio and equipment use. Field practicums involving living and working in the Aquaculture industry. Students will be expected to spend 20 days working at a commercial Aquaculture facility. Regular attendance is necessary. Students must successfully complete all Aquaculture Technician courses (30 credits). FIRST T E R M Aqua 100 Fish Culture I Aqua 110 Fish Health I Aqua 120 Computers for Aquacuture Aqua 130 Field Skills Aqua 140 Aquaculture Practicum Aqua 130 Field Skills (F) (3,0) 3 3 3 3 3 15 A continuation of Aqua 100. This course examines salmonid nutrition and the theory and techniques of successful saltwater culture of salmonids. Aqua 111 Fish Health II (S) (3,0) A continuation of Aqual 110. This course continues to examine salmonid diseases and parasites that are detrimental to successful culturing of salmonids. Aqua 121 Basic Aquaculture Engineering (S) (3,0) An introduction to basic engineering principles, techniques and equipment important to the operation of both freshwater and saltwater Aquaculture facilities. Course Descriptions Aqua 100 Fish Culture I (F) (3,0) An introduction to the theory and techniques used in the freshwater culture of salmon and trout. Course content will cover life histories of salmonids, artificial propagation, rearing, and smolting (saltwater adaptation). Aqua 110 Fish Health I (F) (3,0) An introduction to the science of fish health. This course provides a general introduction to fish health including associated tools and techniques used in the diagnosis and treatment of salmonid diseases detrimental to the west coast Aquaculture industry. Aqua 120 Computers in Aquaculture (F) (3,0) An introduction to personal computers and associated software. The emphasis of this course will be on equipment and software currently used or applicable to the Aquaculture industry. Career/Vocational — Aquaculture 88 Aqua 131 Business for Aquaculture (S) (3,0) An introductory course in the apsects of business important to the set up and operation of a Aquaculture facility. Aqual 41 Aquaculture Practicum (S) (3,0) Field practicums involving living and working in the Aquaculture industry. Students will be expected to spend 20 days working at a commercial Aquaculture facility. Art Instructional Faculty N. BOYD, B.A. (U.ofW.) B. COGSWELL, N.D.D. (Hammersmith) (R.C.A.) P. D E G G A N , Diploma (Worthing Co. England) W. EASTCOTT, Sr. Cert. (V.S.A.) (R.C.A.) J. EDGE, Alberta College of Art F. FORSTER, Alberta College of Art M. F R A M E , B.A., M.A. Fine Arts (UBC) K. H O L L A N D , Dip. Oohannesburg School of Art) J. JUNGIC, B.A., M.A. (UBC) T. K I N G A N , N.D.D. (Blackpool), A.T.D. (Mane), R.C.A., Teach. Cert. (Manchester), B.C. Teach. Cert. M. L L E W E L L Y N , B.A. (Manchester) J. L O N G , B.P.A. Art Center (Los Angeles) D. M A C L A G A N , A.O.C.A., I.D.C., F.C.A. D. M C L A R E N , Cert. (Sheridan College), B.H.Sc. (Guelph) A. M A L L I N S O N , Westdean College, Sussex, England M. MEES, Cert. Handcraft House F. M O L N A R , Dip. (Pennsylvania) D. MORTENSEN, B.FA (UBC) D. N E A V E , B.A. HONS. (Manchester), M.A. (U.Vic) J. N E W T O N - M A S O N , Dip. (Worthing Col., England) G. R A M M E L L L. RICHMOND, M.Art. Ed. (W. Wash. State), Teach. Cert. (London) D. TAIT, Emily Carr J. THORNSBURY, M.Art Ed., W.Wash. Y. W A K A B A Y A S H I , B. Ed., M.Ed (UBC) D. YASINSKI A. Z I M M E R M A N , Art Center (Los Angeles) General Description entitles the student to either a College Certificate or the Associate of Arts and Science Diploma, or entitles the student to seek transfer credit to other post-secondary institutions. 3. Students wishing to repeat a course: Any student who has taken an Art course at Capilano College and who has passed that course may retake it only after all available spaces have been filled by those students who wish to enroll in the course for the first time. STUDENTS M A Y N O T REPEAT A COURSE MORE T H A N O N C E WITHOUT A N A P P R O V A L IN WRITING FROM T H E COORDINATOR. Advance Registration - Art Programs I. Fall Term 1990 STUDENTS ENTERING FIRST YEAR O F DIPLOMA PROGRAMS: Studio Art Contact the College (984-4911) before May 18 to arrange for an interview from May 22 - 28. Bring a portfolio if available. Full and part-time students. Studio Art Institute Clay & Textile Arts Contact the College (984-4911) before May 11 to arrange for an interview. Bring a portfolio if available. Craft Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs The Art Department offers four major programs: Studio Art, Foundations of Graphic Design & Illustration, Graphic Design and Illustration, and Clay and Textile Arts; and two shorter, specialized programs: Crafts Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs, and the Art Institute. Applicants to this program should have a strong craft background. Contact the College (984-4911) before May 11 to arrange for an interview. Interview dates are May 14 18. A portfolio or samples of work is required. (Evening interviews available.) If space is available, late interviews will be conducted August 22, 23, 24. PLEASE NOTE: Graphic Design & Illustration The Art Department is closed from June 16 to August 15. For program information during this time, please contact the Advising Centre at 984-4990. Portfolio submission dates are May 7,8 & 9. (No late applications accepted.) Full-time students only. Admission and Registration Procedures 1. GRAPHIC DESIGN & ILLUSTRATION, STUDIO ART, A N D C L A Y & TEXTILE ARTS applicants should refer to special requirements noted in those sections. 2. For the purposes of admission to art courses a full-time student means a person of any age who takes a full career program (which may include some Art courses and some Academic courses or exclusively Art Option courses) which, upon completion in one or two years of study, II. Spring Term 1991 New students must contact the coordinator of the desired Program for permission to enter. Signature of coordinator or instructor required to register. Evening Credit Courses: Subject to approved funding, the Art Department may offer evening credit courses in the fall and spring terms. Please contact the department for further information. Career/Vocational -Art 89 Prerequisites Prerequisites may be waived in writing by either the Program Coordinator or the instructor concerned when it is felt that a student possesses the ability to cope with the requirements of any given course. Prerequisite for the Graphic Design and Illustration Program is at least a " C " grade. STUDENTS WITH UNSATISFACTORY GRADES IN A N Y TERM M A Y BE ASKED T O WITHDRAW FROM T H E PROGRAM. History of Art Courses Art students may wish to consider the following courses offered by the Academic Division: Fine Arts 100 and 101. (May be taken instead of Fine Arts 104 and 105 for credit in the Art Program.) Students in the Studio Art Program may choose to take English 100 for university transfer or Cmns 150. English Placement Test Those students who wish to enroll in English courses must submit the results of the Language Proficiency Index Test or the College English Diagnostic Test (EDT). EDT schedules will be posted in the Switchboard/Reception area and the Humanities Division. Students wishing to write the EDT should pay in advance at the Registrar's office and bring their receipts to the appropriate test sitting. Transfer Credit The Transfer Guide in the Calendar should be referred to regarding transferability of specific courses. The student should understand that advanced standing in any institution is usually based on interview and portfolio submission, as well as credits held. STUDIO ART PROGRAM Contact Person: Joyce Fancher, 984-4911 TWO YEAR ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA Over 200 careers in art can be identified, from that of a painter or sculptor, to that of an archaeological illustrator or jeweller, a film-maker or industrial designer, to a gallery curator or an arts administrator. Artists are selfemployed as painters and potters, have small businesses as furniture-makers or freelance designers, work for large corporations as designers or illustrators and for public institutions as curators and educators. The Studio Art program gives a thorough foundation in the fundamentals of Fine Art, which will enable the student to make informed decisions regarding future career choices. Career Opportunities In the 1985 report of the National Advisory Committee on Culture Statistics, the arts were given an $8 billion value to the Canadian economy, with over 300,000 people employed in the cultural industry. Art and Culture is an expanding industry, and offers opportunities for employment and self-employment as well as great self-fulfillment. Many people would consider the vocational satisfaction and sense of fulfillment to be gained from pursuing a career in the arts to be paramount, but the practical considerations are also important; therefore professional counselling should be sought before selecting a specific art career option, as the expectations for employment and salary vary greatly from career to career. Full-time students will gain a wide variety of basic skills and insights in this intensive two-year program of studies. It will provide them with a firm, broad foundation for further study in Visual Arts or in any of the related fields. These studies may be continued at a School of Art or Design or at a University. The Program The Studio Art courses carry transferability for entry into B.F.A. programs at university. The Studio Art Program provides studio experiences in Painting, Printmaking, Sculpture, Drawing, Design, Art History and Communications. A schedule of guest speakers and field trips ensures regular contact with other than resident instructors and further expands the student's knowledge and awareness. Through exposure to as broad a range of concepts, materials, techniques and processes as possible, students Career/Vocational - Art 90 are assisted to develop personal directions and creative maturity. They will learn how to conduct their own artistic education according to their individual priorities, abilities and ambitions. Emphasis is placed on preparing students to function effectively within the context of current thought and practice. Part-time students are accepted into the program whenever possible, so that members of the community may participate for other than professional reasons. Evening Credit Courses The Studio Art Program offers selected evening courses that are the equivalent of the day courses. These enable students to complete the 1st year requirements for a diploma in the evening, or to take courses on a part-time basis. Admission Requirements Prospective full-time students are normally admitted on the basis of an interview and portfolio presentation. The nature and scope of work presented is for the candidate to decide, but it should provide as accurate a picture of his or her past and current artistic activities as possible. Sketchbooks, research material and preliminary studies should be included wherever possible, in addition to completed work. Slides, photographs or any other supporting evidence may form part of the portfolio. Where appropriate and with the Coordinator's permission, the portfolio requirement may be waived. Those wishing to enter courses for which they do not have the prerequisites should be prepared to present a portfolio so that faculty may assess the applicant's level of competence. Some part-time students may be admitted to a course when space is available Program Content Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements FIRST T E R M Art 150-1 Drawing I Art 167-1 3-D Studies - Sculpture I Art 182-1 2-D Studies - Printmaking I Art 183-1 2-D Studies - Printmaking II Art 185-1 Design Concepts I Intro, to Visual Literacy F A 104-2 C M N S 150 Basic Communications o r E N G l O O level SECOND TERM Art 151-1 Drawing II Art 171-1 2-D Studies - Painting I Art 172-1 2-D Studies - Painting II Art 174-1 3-D Studies - Sculpture II Art 189-1 Design Concepts II FA 105-2 Intro, to Visual Literacy II C M N S 153 Communications and the Arts THIRD TERM Art 250-1 2-D Studies - Painting III Art 255-1 2-D Studies - Painting IV Art 257-1 3-D Studies - Sculpture III Art 262-1 Drawing III FA 210-2 Modern Art (19th Century) F O U R T H TERM Art 263-1 Drawing IV Art 265-1 3-D Studies - Sculpture IV Art 282-1 2-D Studies - Printmaking IV Art 283-1 2-D Studies - Printmaking IV FA 211-2 Modern Art (20th Century) TOTAL Special Fees and Expenses Although the Studio Art Department can supply some of the materials required for the courses, the student can expect a financial outlay for some basic supplies, as indicated in the course outlines. credit/studio Hours 66 6 72 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 3 3 3 3 3 15 39 0 39 3(L) 3(S) 3(S) 0 9 3(S) 3(S) 3(L) 3(S) 0 12 3(S) 3(S) 3(L) 0 9 3 3 3 3 3 15 3(L) 3(S) 3(S) 0 9 72 39 Course Descriptions Art 150 Drawing I (F) (3,0) University Transfer All Studio Art courses carry some University transferability. Students should refer to the Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar. Art Institute: Advanced Option Courses For students with previous experience the program offers 12 credit full time courses in Sculpture and Printmaking. See page 95. An investigation of the conceptual, technical and perceptual aspects of the drawing process through a wide variety of methods, materials and stimuli. Experiences in current approaches and concerns, including representational, interpretive and experimental drawings in assorted media. Emphasis will be on developing the student's confidence, knowledge, graphic sensitivity and control of media. Specifics to this course will be: study of graphic elements (line, tone etc.), media investigation, perspective, structural analysis (of natural form), life study. Career/Vocational — Art 91 Art 151 Drawing II (S) (3,0) Art 174 Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Prerequisite: A r t 150 A continuation of A r t 150, w i t h the inclusion of the following specifics: composition and design exploration, colour, collage, large scale d r a w i n g , photo-realist project. Art 167 Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture I (F) (3,3) A n introduction to 3-dimensional w o r k as a means of expression, communication and discovery. Some basic sculptural techniques w i l l be explored, these w i l l include: assemblage, w o o d construction, modelling, m o u l d m a k i n g , casting. Sculptural content and subject matter w i l l be considered i n the context of the student's o w n work. A n examination of historical sculpture developments w i l l be a feature of the class; however, the emphasis w i l l be u p o n developing an understanding of contemporary sculptural concerns. Art 171 Two-Dimensional Studies: Painting I (S) (3,3) T h r o u g h a combination of assigned studio work, personal research projects and an introduction to recent and current trends i n the V i s u a l Arts, students w i l l gain an understanding of h o w both abstract and concrete concerns m a y be expressed i n terms of imagery and through a variety of methods and materials. A c r y l i c s w i l l be the preferred m e d i u m but students w i l l be encouraged to investigate the characteristics and possibilities of other media according to their i n d i v i d u a l needs. Guest speakers, field trips and slide-lectures w i l l be a feature of the course and both i n d i v i d u a l and group critiques w i l l be conducted at regular intervals. Art 172 Two-Dimensional Studies: Painting II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: A r t 171 A continuation of A r t 171 w i t h added emphasis on developing personal areas of interest and research i n addition to designated painting problems w h i c h w i l l require students to express their ideas i n multiple or mixed-media techniques of a more ambitious nature. There w i l l be opportunities for students to relate their painting activities to other areas of study w i t h i n the program and to become more responsible for determining their o w n priorities and goals. There w i l l be further exposure to contemporary philosophies and activities i n the V i s u a l A r t s . Career/Vocational — Art 92 A r t 167 A continuation of Art 167, but with the inclusion of the following materials and techniques: metal casting, wood carving and jointing, steel welding. Art 182 Two-Dimensional Studies: Printmaking I (F) (3,3) A foundation course for those w i t h little or no experience. A n introduction to the basic techniques of hardground, softground, drypoint and acquatint. Discussions regarding the image-making potential of p r i n t m a k i n g and the creative processes i n general w i l l be ongoing. Particular emphasis w i l l be given to the relationship between printmaking and painting w i t h the student p r o d u c i n g a number of pieces demonstrating either technical competency and creative potential. Most w o r k w i l l be executed in black and white. Art 183 Two-Dimensional Studies: Printmaking II (F) 3,3) A continuation of A r t 182 w i t h emphasis o n printing procedures both i n black and white and colour. The student w i l l also be introduced to mono and relief printing methods (including l i n o / w o o d blocks and etched plates) and editioning procedures. Discussion of historical and contemporary approaches to image-making w i l l be ongoing. Art 185 Design Concepts I (F) (3,0) A n introduction to the basic elements of both two and three-dimensional design and their use according to formal and expressive needs. U s i n g a variety of materials and processes, students w i l l translate ideas into tangible form through the manipulation of colour, tone, shape, line, texture, v o l u m e , rhythm, proportion, etc. Sources of imagery and methods of extending the form-vocabulary w i l l be investigated and standards of craftsmanship developed. Art 189 Design Concepts II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: A r t 185 Essentially a continuation of Design Concepts I, but w i t h added emphasis o n the ability to communicate ideas and intentions through design and to create original w o r k according to set criteria. Students w i l l find opportunities to relate their experiences i n design to other and more specialized areas of study i n the Program and, b y the end of the course, w i l l be able to respond to problem-solving situations i n a creative fashion. Communications 150 Art 255 Basic Communications (F) (3,0) Two-Dimensional Studies: Painting IV (F) (3,3) C M N S 150 is an introduction to language in the Fine Arts. Students will work with descriptive and critical language to develop expressive and analytical skills in fine arts writing and speech. Assignments include essays, directed journal writing, talks, diction and semantics. Prerequisite: Communications 153 Communications and the Arts (S) (3,0) C M N S 153, a course in the language of Fine Arts, develops the work begun in Communications 150 and introduces the student to practical writing within fine arts. Students study problems in critical and descriptive language in order to describe finished work, artistic process, concept and intention. Contemporary issues in art and design are raised and students are encouraged to express opinions coherently. Assignments include directed journal writing, talks, interview, and various written forms such as resumes, marketing letters and grant applications. Fine Arts 210 Modern Art (19th Century) (F) (3,0) A study of the beginnings of modern art in the work of David, Delacroix, Turner, Goya, Monet, Van Gogh, Gaugin and Cezanne and movements such as Neoclassicism, Romanticism, Realism, Impressionism and Post-Impressionism. Fine Arts 211 Modern Art (20th Century) (S) (3,0) This course begins with Picasso and Cubism and studies the impact of revolutionary movements of art such as Futurism, Dada, Constructivism and Surrealism. America's contribution to modern art: Abstract Expressionism, Pop, Minimalism, Conceptual, Process and Earth Art is studied as well as new directions in the art of the Eighties. Art 250 Two-Oimensional Studies: Painting III (F) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art Art 250 A continuation of Art 250 but with an increased need for students to define their own areas of interest and to extend their thinking in an innovative, self-challenging fashion. As in Art 250, guest speakers, field trips, slide lectures etc. will be a feature of the course. There will be a continuing stress on relating work in this course to contemporary activities in the Visual Arts and to other areas of the Program. Experiments with images, methods and materials will be encouraged, with a view to the development of personal modes of expression. Art 257 Three Dimensional Studies: Sculpture and Design (F) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art 174 Continued studies in 3-dimensional art. Students will be encouraged to pursue media and themes of their choice and to develop individual styles. Bronze casting will be offered as a main component of this course. Art 262 Drawing III (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Art 151 Continued study of drawing as a means of discovery, expression and communication. Conceptual, perceptual and technical aspects of drawing will be examined. Specifics to this course will include: advanced graphic elements, unconventional media, objective/subjective research. Art 263 Drawing IV (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Art 262 Further study of drawing with an emphasis on the development of personal modes of expression. The work of the three previous courses will be reviewed, with the addition of perceptual exploration, and portfolio presentation. 172 In addition to assigned painting problems, students will be required to define their own areas of research and visual articulation as they embark on a thematically linked series of works. As much freedom as possible will be given with regard to subject matter, content, materials, methods, scale, etc. and students will be encouraged to redefine the painting process in terms of their own needs and priorities. Emphasis will be placed on relating work in this course to other areas of the Program, especially with respect to Printmaking and to current trends in the Visual Arts. Art 265 Three-Dimensional Studies: Sculpture (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art 257 Further study of historical and current sculpture concerns as well as the study of the craft and design fields. The first workshop project will be a review of the available techniques through the process of producing set forms, using specific materials. Throughout the remainder of the course the emphasis will be on the development of personal modes of expression through the student's Career Vocational — Art choice of media and subject matter. Each student will be expected to work on two projects from a supplied list of suggested themes. Art 282 Two-Dimensional Studies: Printmaking III (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art 183 or Instructor's permission A comprehensive study of intaglio and relief printing methods, this course is primarily designed for the advanced printmaking student. Other areas that come under consideration will include collographs, uninked embossing and the practical application of colour theory. Discussion of current directions in printmaking and their relationship to painting and sculpture will be ongoing. Art 283 Two-Dimensional Studies: Printmaking IV (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art 282 or Instructor's permission Designed for the advanced printmaking student, the main concern will be combined colour printing techniques based upon the individual's need. A folio of work will be produced to document this research. Technical aspects that surface will include photographic possibilities and dimensional prints. THE ART INSTITUTE The Art Institute, specializing in Sculpture and Printmaking, is a one year post-graduate certificate program unique in the college system. Comparable to artist-inresidence programs, the Institute offers advanced studies to artists with several years experience in sculpture or printmaking, or to recent college, university or art school graduates. Members of the Institute have access to well-equipped studios and specialized equipment, plus auxiliary facilities such as a darkroom, computer lab and media centre. Supplies and materials are available at cost. Lectures, seminars and tutorials feature guest artists and faculty who are professionals in their fields. With the permission of the instructor, and at no additional cost, Institute members may also sit in on Studio Art lectures and classes, such as life drawing or art history. Members may also pursue individual research beyond the one-year certificate. A major component of the Institute experience is the interchange among the participants, which may include critiques, encouragement of work in progress, or exposure to new materials. Along with providing the artist with studio space, the Institute offers the expertise of special speakers and workshop experiences. The atmosphere is stimulating and supportive of the individual's aesthetic development. Admission Requirements The Institute is a graduate Fine Arts Program. Students with a B.F.A. or equivalent (art school graduation, etc.,) are given preference during registration. Exceptional students with previous fine arts training and/or work experience will be accepted at the discretion of the instructors. Note that it is not absolutely necessary to be specifically proficient in the chosen area of study. Parallel experience would be considered, i.e. painting to printmaking or woodcarving to marble sculpture. Enquiries and applications are accepted at any time throughout the year, although the normal registration periods are May and December for the first and second terms, respectively. Submissions 1. Biography - to include pertinent travel and other life experiences. 2. Portfolio -original works where possible; however, slides, photographs or other printed material will be acceptable. Where appropriate, and with the coordinators permission, the portfolio requirement may be waived. 3. Proposal - an outline of the anticipated directions of work. This should be as specific as possible. Career Vocational — Art 94 D u r i n g the academic year (September to A p r i l ) submissions should be adressed to: CLAY & TEXTILE ARTS PROGRAM Contact Person: Joyce Fancher, 984-4911. The A r t Institute Capilano College 2055 Purcell W a y N o r t h Vancouver, B . C . V7J 3 H 5 D u r i n g the months of M a y to August, submissions should be made directly to: R. W . Eastcott 2553 Oxford Street Vancouver, B . C . V5K1M9 Tel. 253-7362 Fees The 1989/90 tuition fees for the A r t Institute were $425.00 per term. There are t w o terms per year. A l t h o u g h the normal shop supplies are provided members of the Institute can anticipate charges for materials directly involved w i t h the production of work. Art Institute: Advanced Option Courses Art 300 ONE YEAR CERTIFICATE, TWO YEAR DIPLOMA PROGRAM Career Opportunities Graduates m a y choose to w o r k independently as artists/ craftspeople or they m a y find employment as instructors in c o m m u n i t y art programs or i n institutions where art and craft courses are used as therapy. The Program Students are trained to develop skill and understanding of contemporary fine craft. O p e n to both full and part-time students, the first year of the Program is a Foundation year. The core content consists of Weaving, Textile Surface design, and Ceramics and is supported b y courses i n Design and D r a w i n g . U p o n completion of the first year students m a y receive a certificate. U p o n completion of the second year, d u r i n g w h i c h students have a choice of specializing i n either clay or textile arts, students w i l l receive a d i p l o m a . Students who have a demonstrated equivalent of the first year may enter directly into one of the second year specialties and receive a certificate. Art Institute I - Sculpture and Printmaking (F) (12,0) Designed to meet the needs of students with seveal years of experience i n sculpture or p r i n t m a k i n g or w h o have left college, art school or univeristy and m a y no longer have access to specialized equipment and facilities, the Art Institute w i l l emphasize access to well-equipped studios as w e l l as lectures, seminars and tutorials w i t h i n structors and invited professional artists. The format w i l l be one d a y of lecture and three or more days of w o r k i n g time per week. Art 301 Art Institute II - Sculpture and Printmaking (S) (12,0) A continuation of A r t 300. Studio a n d Gallery visits are an important learning segment of the program. Guest "lecturers from all craft disciplines are brought i n to enrich the courses. Market research and marketing techniques for the craftsperson are a vital part of the program through lectures a n d seminars. Admission Requirements Prospective full-time and part-time students are admitted on the basis of an interview. A portfolio w h i c h contains as accurately as possible an o v e r v i e w of the students' w o r k is required. W i t h the Coordinator's permission, the portfolio requirement m a y be w a i v e d . Special Fees and Expenses Some of the materials needed for the course are supplied by the Department. The student can expect an additional outlay, which amount m a y v a r y according to the needs of the course. University Transfer A l l courses marked with an asterisk (i.e. * A r t 158) are transferable to S F U and U B C and carry 1.5 transfer units to the B F A Studio Program at U B C . Career/Vocational — Art 95 First Year Certificate Program - Foundation Course Descriptions Credit/Studio Hours Major Program Requirements FIRST T E R M Art 154 Introductory Drawing I Art 158 Design I Art 160 Textile Surface Design I Art 163 Clay I Art 168 Weaving I SECOND T E R M Art 153 Introductory Drawing II Art 161 Textile Surface Design II Art 165 Clay II Art 169 Weaving II Art 178 Design II 30 18 3 3 3 3 3 15 3 3 3 9 3 3 3 3 3 15 3 3 3 0 9 54 _6 60 30 0 30 3 3 3 3 3 15 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 15 3 3 54 6 60 21 0 21 Second Year Diploma Program - Clay Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements THIRD T E R M Art 273 Functional Clay I Art 275 Sculptural Clay I CMNS 150 Basic Communications F A . 104 Intro, to Visual Literacy I Elective FOURTH TERM Art 274 Functional Clay II Art 276 Sculptural Clay II C M N S 153 Communication & the Arts F.A. 105 Intro, to Visual Literacy II Art 230 Marketing Skills 0 6 0 6 Second Year Diploma Program • Textile Arts Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements THIRD T E R M Art 267 Weaving III Art 284 Textile Surface Design III Art 290 Dyes and Dyeing C M N S 150 Basic Communications F.A. 104 Intro, to Visual Literacy I FOURTH TERM Art 268 Weaving IV Art 285 Textile Surface Design IV Art 230 Marketing Skills C M N S 153 Communication & the Arts F.A. 105 Intro, to Visual Literacy II Career/Vocational — Art 96 3 3 3 3 3 15 3 3 3 3 3 15 3 0 3 * All courses marked with an asterisk are transferable to SFU and UBC and carry 1.5 transfer units to the BFA Studio Program at UBC. Art 153 Introductory Drawing II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Art 154 Further exploration of drawing media and techniques with an emphasis on a more individual and interpretive approach, developing themes for drawing aimed at illustration and reproduction. Study of drawing styles and modes of graphic expression, interpretive stylization and distortion. Drawing with pen and ink; washes, ink and brush, felt markers, mixed media. Study of mass, light and dark, plan, depth and space, and their graphic representation through various drawing techniques. Art 154 Introductory Drawing I (F) (3,0) This course offers the students of both the textile and ceramic arts the opportunity to develop those drawing skills that will be useful in the practice of those crafts. The study of primary drawing media and basic techniques, including pencil, pen and ink, brush and ink, marking pens, conte and pastel. Study of perspective drawing from direct observation. Study of representational rendering techniques of objects, structures, surfaces and textures. Learning to visualize in graphic terms, symbolizing, stylizing in terms of line and line characteristics. Developing power of observation and graphic sensitivity. * Art 158 Design I (F) (3,0) Basic design elements and principles will be studied. Sources of inspiration and imagery will be explored using a variety of materials and processes. Two dimensional repeat design will be studied for application to surface decoration and compositional elements will be investigated and adapted for craft media. Main projects will be presented in a craft medium. Art 160 Textile Surface Design I (F) (3,3) An introduction to traditional methods of printing on fabric using found objects, blocks and stamps with pigments and dyes. Wax resist and bleach discharge effects will be explored. Bound and tied resists will also be used with natural and fibre-reactive dyes. Design possiblities will be studied for each medium and there will be an introduction to the history of dyed fabrics. Art 161 * Art 178 Textile Surface Design II (S) (3,0) Design II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Prerequisite: Art 160 An introduction to printing fabric with stencils using pigments, fibre-reactive and natural dyes. Katazome techniques with rice paste resists will be demonstrated. Applique and stitching techniques will be used for surface decoration and design possibilities for each medium will be explored. There will be an introduction to the history of printed fabrics. * Art 163 Ceramic Art I (F) (3,3) A n introduction to the use of clay as an expressive media. Hand construction and wheel forming will be presented as well as glazing, firing and clay body technology. Design, history and conceptual theory will be reviewed as it relates to the ceramic object. 158 A further study of design principles and concepts. Use of themes and problem solving techniques. More studies of sources of imagery and inspiration. Continuation of colour studies, designing within limitations for specific environments. Introduction of three dimensional space and form. Use of different design media and its adaptation to crafts and applied arts. Art 230 Marketing Skills for the Craftsperson (S) (3,0) This course is designed to be a survey. It will develop professionalism and good management in the craftsperson. Areas covered are Advertising and Promotion, Marketing, Portfolio Design, and Photography. Art 267 * Art 165 Ceramic Art II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art Art 163 A continuation of Art 163 with greater emphasis on personal development. Casting, moldmaking, glaze preparation and application, and firing technology will be reviewed. Students will be encouraged to explore the use of non-firable materials in conjunction with clay. Contemporary issues on art will create the focus for personal exploration. Weaving III (F) (3,0) Study of more complex weave structures by exploring the four-and eight-harness loom. Techniques will include fundamental loom controlled weaves, hand-manipulated structures, space dyeing and painting warps. Although emphasizing the development of technical skills, the course will also encourage personal expression through use of structures in individual projects. Art 268 Weaving IV (S) (3,0) Art 168 Weaving I (F) (3,3) This course has been divided into several parts. In the first segment, off-loom techniques will be studied as well as ethnic and historic textile sources. In the second segment, the traditional technique and contemporary imagery of tapestry will be covered. Another area of exploration will be feltmaking. Art 169 Weaving II (S) (3,3) Beginning experiences in loom weaving. Learning to • warp a loom, drafting basic weaves on four-harness looms. Class will include samples and finished pieces, with an emphasis on colour relationships, surface textures, and fibers. Introduction to dye methods. Slides and examples of historical, ethnic, and contemporary woven textiles will be used as inspiration. Further exploration of the design possibilities of woven textiles. Each student will work on a series of individually designed projects in a technique of his/her choice, developing ideas and personal expression with class feedback and individual critiques. * Art 273 Functional Clay I (F) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art 165 Further exploration of pottery techniques, particularly wheelwork and glaze materials; study of contemporary styles and creative ceramics. * Art 274 Functional Clay II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art 273 Increased emphasis on craftsmanship and design. Exploration of dinnerware mainly made on the wheel. Development of original glazes and manipulation of glaze characteristics. Career/Vocational — Art 97 Art 275 Sculptural Clay I (F) (3,0) An introduction to the concepts and techniques of using clay as a sculptural medium. A wide variety of construction and firing techniques will be examined with an emphasis on personal exploration. Three dimensional design as well as historical and contemporary concepts of the visual language will be the foundation for personal growth. Technical information covering clay bodies, firing techniques and glaze application will be presented. CRAFTS INSTRUCTOR TRAINING FOR COMMUNITY AND INSTITUTIONAL NEEDS For students with a craft background the Program offers the following part-time certificate program: F A L L TERM Art 187 Crafts Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs I 3 credits Art 276 Sculptural Clay II (S) (3,0) SPRING TERM Prerequisite: Crafts Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs II 3 credits Art 275 Further study of concepts and techniques of using clay as a sculptural medium. Students will be encouraged to pursue techniques and concepts of their choice and to develop individual style. A n investigation of combining non-clay materials with clay construction will be encouraged. The use of glaze and non-firing sources of colour will be explored. Art 284 Textile Surface Design III (F) (3,0) A study of screen printing techniques using paper, wax, lacquer and direct emulsion stencils. A variety of methods of producing a repeat design with different registration possibilities will be studied. There will be an option of using photographic stencils for projects. Light sensitive dyes will be used for direct effects on fabric. Art 285 Textile Surface Design IV (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Art 284 A study of direct application of dyes on different fibres using fibre reactive dyes, disperse dyes, french alcohol and acid dyes. Airbrushing of dyes and pigments will be introduced. Basic paper-making techniques will be studied exploring the possibilities of paper collage, cast paper, use of different pulps, colouring of pulp and making pulp from plants. Relief and 3D fibre construction methods will be used. Art 290 Dyes and Dyeing (F) (3,3) The emphasis in this course will be on synthetic dyes, although students will also familiarize themselves with natural dyes and colour possibilities. Vat, direct, acid, dispersed and basic dye methods will be covered, using synthetic dyes and incorporating them with dye application methods. A comprehensive notebook will be made of colour samples for future reference. Career/Vocational — Art 98 Art 287 Course Descriptions Art 187 Crafts Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs I (F) (3,0) During the first of this two term course, students with a strong Craft background will be trained in adaptation and instructional skills. They will improve and extend present craft skills in order to teach people in recreation and community situations or in institutions where Art and Craft courses are used as therapy. This course is a prerequisite for Art 287. Art 287 Crafts Instructor Training for Community and Institutional Needs II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Art 187 Further training in adaptation and instructional skills for experienced craftspeople. Learning to set up and administer a craft program. Students will do practicums in hospitals, senior citizen centres, schools, or community centres. CLAY AND TEXTILE ART PROGRAM EVENING COURSES Art 163 Clay I (F) (3,0) A n introduction to the use of clay as an expressive medium. Hand construction and wheel forming will be presented as well as glazing, firing and clay body technology. Design, history and conceptual theory will be reviewed as it relates to the ceramic object. Art 194 Weaving (F) (3,0) Beginning experiences in loom weaving. Learning to warp a loom, drafting basic weaves on four-harness looms. Class will include samples and finished pieces, with an emphasis on colour relationships, surface textures, and fibers. Introduction to dye methods. Slides and examples of historical, ethnic, and contemporary woven textiles will be used as inspiration. Art 165 Clay II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite Art 163 A continuation of Art 163 with greater emphasis on personal development. Casting, moldmaking, glaze preparation and application and firing technology will be reviewed. Students will be encouraged to explore the use of non-firable materials in conjunction with clay. Contemporary issues on art will create the focus for personal exploration. Art 198 GRAPHIC DESIGN & ILLUSTRATION FOUNDATION PROGRAM ONE YEAR CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Open to full-time students only. This one year certificate program is designed to provide a foundation in drawing skills, figure studies, illustration and painting, mediums and techniques, design principles and the history of art and design. It stresses the necessity of developing consecutively the creative thought processes and skills necessary for Graphic Design & Illustration. This program provides the direction to prepare the student for further studies in many professionally-oriented art fields. Admission Requirements Both these programs require a high level of maturity and integrity. Students with life experience following high school are usually more knowledgeable and mature in their choice of direction and better prepared; however, highly motivated high school students can succeed here and we encourage those students to apply. Fabric Printing (S) (3,0) Exploring design and colour as they would apply in the surface decoration of fabric. Experiments with various pigments and dyes on fabric, using immersion and direct application methods. Printing techniques will be used with block, stencil and screen. Resist techniques using paste and tie/stitch Applicants to the program must supply the following documentation to the college by March 30,1990. • Completed Capilano College Application for Admission • Secondary and Post-secondary Transcripts • Certificate of English Language Assessment Test (ELAT) or Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL), if applicable • Departmental Information Sheet No late applications accepted. GRAPHIC DESIGN & ILLUSTRATION PROGRAM Contact Person: Joyce Fancher, 984-4911. Portfolio submission dates are May 7, 8, 9. No portfolio will be examined if proper documentation has not been received at the College by March 30,1990. No late TWO YEAR ASSOCIATE IN ARTS submissions accepted. AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA Portfolios are reviewed by an Admissions Committee and are assessed on the basis of drawing, design, colour, creativity, media variety and presentation. Applicants whose portfolios meet the standards of the Program are called for interviews within two weeks of submission. Final decisions on the make-up of the new class is made by June 1. Open to full-time students only. This is a two year Diploma program for those wishing to enter into the advertising industry as a graphic designer, advertising illustrator, or any of the related visual communication professions. Students are trained in design, visual imagery, media choice, typography, advertising layout, and conceptual thinking. Instructors are practising professionals; thus the program relates to the current demands of business and industry. Real and simulated problems are taken from initial concept to finished art. Frequently guests from the profession are brought in to evaluate student projects. Portfolio Requirements There should be a minimum of 12 and a maximum of 18 samples of original work (work produced, drawn, designed, or photographed by the artist) representing current abilities. Imaginative and experimental drawings in any medium (water-colour, guache, oils, etc.) are welcome additions to the portfolio. Samples must be flat, not rolled; they should not be framed or glassed. Career/Vocational — Art 99 We will not accept portfolios larger than 23" x 31". Photographs of any larger work or 3D projects may be sent; however, photographs or slides do not replace the required minimum of 12 samples of original work. The applicant's name and address must be on the outside of the portfolio in large letters. If a portfolio is to be returned, send either stamps or cheque to cover the cost of return postage. Do no send any portfolios by cross-country bus system as they are not delivered to Capilano College. Parcel Post insured or air parcel post insured is usually the best way to have portfolios sent and returned. Capilano College cannot accept responsibility for loss or damage to an applicant's work. Portfolios will not be evaluated unless proper application documentation has been received by the College by March 30,1990. Program Content Graphic Design and Illustration Foundation Program Credit/Studio Hours Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements FIRST T E R M Art 156 Principles of Visual Cmns I Art 158 Design I Art 152 Life Drawing I Art 154 General Drawing I Art 155 Mediums & Techniques I FA 104 Intro to Visual Literacy I *CMNS 150 Basic Communications SECOND T E R M Art 157 Principles of Visual Cmns II Art 178 Design II Art 184 Life Drawing II Art 164 General Drawing II Art 159 Mediums & Techniques II Art 166 Anatomy Drawing I F A 105Intro to Visual Literacy II C M N S 153 Communications & the Arts 33 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 24 Students who wish to substitute English courses for Communications 150 may do so with the Communications Coordinator's approval. Career/Vocational — Art 100 10 2 Graphic Design and Illustration Program Major Program Requirements FIRSTTERM Art 162 Typography I Art 175 Photo, for Graphic Design Art 177 Graphic Design I Art 180 Drawing for Illustration I Art 192 Applied Design I Art 195 Painting for Illustration I SECOND TERM Art 170 Studio Production I Art 179 Graphic Design II Art 181 Drawing for Illustration II Art 193 Applied Design II Art 196 Painting for Illustration II Art 197 Typography II THIRD TERM Art 278 Studio Production II Art251 Illustration Medial Art 252 Applied Design III Art 277 3-D Graphic Design I Art 295 Advertising Illustration I F O U R T H TERM Art 253 Applied Design IV Art 269 Illustration Media II Art 289 Studio Production III Art 298 Advertising Illustration II 3 0 5 2 63 48 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 0 5 3 3 3 9 3 3 3 3 3 15 6 3 2 2 2 15 3 3 3 3 12 3 2 5 3 13 Part-Time Evening Courses For students interested in upgrading drawing and design skills to assist in the preparation of a portfolio, we offer the following evening classes (subject to approved funding): Art 056 - Graphic Design Portfolio Studio I (F) (3,0) Art 057 - Graphic Design Portfolio Studio II (S) (3,0) 3 3 0 11 For further information and course outlines, contact the Graphic Design and Illustration Program at 984-4911. Course Descriptions Note: *Denotcs university transfer * Art 152 and nature of visual communications, form, elements and their characteristics are investigated with reference to Fine Art, Crafts and Applied Arts. Emphasis on two-dimensional composition and graphic media, collage and assemblage. Life Drawing I (F) (3,0) Drawing from the observation of the human figure; exercises in developing visual perception, memory and basic drawing skills. Study of the proportions of the human body. Line characteristics in pencil, pen, conte, charcoal techniques. Contour, cross-contour, gesture and volume drawings from draped and undraped models. * Art 154 Art 159 Mediums and Techniques II (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: Art 155 with at least a " C " grade. Drawing analysis techniques and the consideration and use of various mediums as they relate to specific subjects. Further (to Art 155) location studies and classroom development of same. General Drawing I (F) (3,0) Art 162 Primary representational drawing, media and techniques. Drawing as expression of observation and perception of visual aspects of environment and visual thinking. Study of graphic means of representing objects, structure, planes, volumes, space, surface characteristics. Learning to perceive, isolate and select visual elements or descriptive rendering in lead an charcoal pencils. Developing the habit of working daily with a sketchbook, power of observation, perception and graphic sensitivity. Typography I (F) (3,3) Historical origins of the alphabet, numerals and letter forms. Proportion and spacing. Lettering indication in pencil, brush, chalks and felt markers. Comprehensive lettering indication and reproduction art to improve craftsmanship and drawing skills. Art 164 General Drawing II (S) (3,0) Art 155 Prerequisite: Mediums and Techniques I (F) (3,2) An introduction to basic painting and illustration techniques. On location drawing and wash studies using watercolour, pencil, coloured pencil, ink and combinations of the above. Developing location studies into more controlled, finished classroom works. Art 156 Principles of Visual Communications I (F) (3,0) An overview and understanding of the basic design process, graphic design principles and fundamental visual communications techniques as utilized by contemporary graphic designers and illustrators. Art 157 Principles of Visual Communications II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Art 156 with at least a " C " grade. The basic principles of advertising as applied by a graphic designer or illustrator. Includes a study of contemporary graphic designers and illustrators and how they rely on various visual styles to complete assignments. * Art 158 Design I (F) (3,2) (Basic Design 2-D) A n introduction to the concepts and principles of visual arts with analytical and creative study of basic elements and pictorial organization. Processes Art 154 with at least a " C " grade. Further exploration of drawing media and techniques with emphasis on expressive and interpretive approaches. Developing themes and drawings aimed at illustration, for reproduction and individual expression. Stylization, distortion and caricaturization are explored in relation to the study of line, mass, value and contrast, Various pen, pen and ink drawing techniques are explored. Emphasis on student's initiative in researching, investigating and exploring drawing theories, schools and techniques. Art 166 Anatomy Drawing I (S) (3,0) The purpose of this course is to help the student understand the skeletal-muscular structure, movement of the human body, its basic proportions and its structural characteristics. Teaching will be concentrated on drawing skeletal and muscular detail as well as on drawing structural diagrams of the body in various positions, poses, movements and actions. Art 170 Studio Production I (S) (3,0) An introduction to the basic studio production techniques encountered in a graphic design studio. Students will learn basic pasteup and mechanical production. Students will be instructed in the ruling of straight lines using the T-square, drawing ellipses, cutting masking film, preparation of finished artwork, copyfitting and type specifying. Career/Vocational — Art 101 Art 175 Photography for Graphic Design (F) (3,2) Basic photography with emphasis on fundamental camera and darkroom procedures. Instruction in 35mm camera operations as they assist in graphic design and illustration. Art 177 Graphic Design I (F) (3,2) A n introduction to design elements (shape, line, value, texture, colour) to demonstrate the versatility and application of each. Exercises to develop a sound grasp of design principles and to encourage experiment and discovery as well as how these elements work in combination. Media includes pencil, paint, collage materials and mixed media. * Art 178 Design II (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: Art 158 with at least a " C " grade. stressed using lighting, negative shapes, depth, abstractions for emphasis, perspective and correct perception. Uses of drawing and wash mediums will be expanded. As well, the student will be expected to become familiar with current uses of illustration. * Art 184 Life Drawing II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Art 152 with at least a " C " grade. Further study of drawing from direct observation of the human figure. Exercises in perceiving and graphically interpreting the elements of plane, mass, rhythm and form; relating perceptual elements to drawing media. Investigation of more complex drawing techniques and materials. Perceiving graphic elements in life form and action; drawing from memory and imaginative reflection upon visual experience. Art 192 Applied Design I (F) (3,3) Further study of basic 3-D design principles. Basic threedimensional concepts, components and principles of three-dimensional arts material and techniques. Functional aesthetic aspects of contemporary and traditional 3D art. The elements of 3-D form. An introduction to visual communication and the role of professional designers. Design principles, layout techniques, tools, methods, materials and media. Emphasis will be on concept and on "comprehensive" finish using basic marker rendering skills. Art 179 Graphic Design II (S) (3,2) Art 193 Applied Design II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art 177 with at least a " C " grade. Further study of design principles, pictorial organization and the characteristics of visual form. Combining design elements of the previous semester with the new elements of typography and photography. Media will include a wide variety of materials. A n experimental, inventive approach will be stressed. Art 180 Drawing for Illustration I (F) (3,0) The purpose is to develop the students' awareness and capacity to perceive objects correctly and the skills necessary to draw with quality and creativity. It introduces the students to skills that must be developed if they are to visually communicate consciously and effectively. Basic drawing and wash media will be used. Art 181 Drawing for Illustration II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Art 180 with at least a "C" grade. The students play an advanced role in the choices of reference materials, mediums and techniques used. The skillful and imaginative use of illustrative methods is Career/Vocational — Art 102 Prerequisite: Art 177 and Art 192 with at least a " C " grade. A course relating to presentation of ideas at a professional level representing real agency/client situations. Making rough layouts and tight comps. Ideas will be evaluated against criteria established. Art 195 Painting for Illustration I (F) (3,0) This course offers expanded skills in perception, visualization and continued practice in control of lof various media. It gives the student the opportunity to develop similar styles to the old masters as well as experiment with his/her own drawing. Art 196 Painting for Illustration II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Art 195 with at least a "C" grade. The student's personal style of realistic life drawing is pursued to a much finer degree. Structured tutorials in the use of various mediums and student/instructor criticisms of work-in-progress are emphasized. Experimentation of style and medium is encouraged. Art 197 Typography II (S) (3,3) Art 277 3D Graphic Design I (F) (3,2) Prerequisite: Prerequisite: Art 162 with at least a " C " grade. This course expands upon the major role typography has on advertising layouts and design. Construction of various styles of letter forms in pencil, felt marker and brush will be studied. Application of typography in various advertising pieces will be investigated. Art 251 Illustration Media I (F) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art 181 & Art 196 with at least a " C " grade. To introduce the student who has achieved a competent degree of drawing skills to the mediums necessary for illustrative techniques. The course develops through stages from pencil, pen and ink, ink and wash, watercolours and eel vinyl. The use of the illustrator's tools and processes such as repellants, air brush, mixed media, etc., are reviewed. Art 252 Applied Design III (F) (3,2) Prerequisite: Art 179 & Art 193 with at least a " C " grade. The application of design and rendering skills to the development of solutions to print advertising. Explores companies, products, services, corporate identification and their relationship to print advertising layouts and tight comps prepared for class critiques. Art 253 Applied Design IV (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: Art 252 with at least a " C " grade. Advertising agency and graphic design studio oriented. The interelationship of illustration, photography and graphics into advertising, packaging and point of purchase. Consultation on student portfolio. Art 269 Illustration Media II (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: Art 251 with at least a " C " grade. Taking the techniques outlined in 251 into finished illustrations for advertising, books, magazines, etc. A further expansion of the uses of mediums to include mixed media. Concept is stressed as well as an emphasis on self expression. Art 181 & Art 179 with at least a " C " grade. This section will give insight into the procedures involved in the design of small commercial retail structures such as boutiques and service shops in shopping centres and malls. Model-building techniques are studied as well as the use of colour in merchandising and display. During this section the emphasis is on exterior design. Art 278 Studio Production II (F) (3,6) Prerequisite: Art 170 with at least a " C " grade. To familiarize the student with techniques and procedures as used in a Graphic Design Studio. The development of skills and disciplines necessary in the production of camera-ready mechanicals necessary for a variety of reproduction methods including the use of Macintosh computers to increase productivity. Emphasis is placed on computer application in graphics including layout. Art 289 Studio Production III (S) (3,5) Prerequisite: Art 278 with at least a " C " grade. Print production from photo-mechanical to printing procedures. Includes 3 and 4 colour process, binding,job estimating,paper specifications, 2nd production control. An intermediate course in the use of Macintosh computers for graphic design. Print and advertising applications are emphasized. Art 295 Advertising Illustration I (F) (3,2) Prerequisite: Art 181 and Art 196 with at least a " C " grade. A comprehensive study of contemporary advertising illustration techniques and materials from original concept to final presentation. Art 298 Advertising Illustration II (S) (3,3) Prerequisite: Art 295 with at least a " C " grade. Further exploration of advertising illustration techniques using a variety of mediums and techniques with the emphasis on actual studio working methods. Career/Vocational — Art 103 Business Management Instructional Faculty J. BARBER, B.A.Sc, M.A. D. BROWNE, B.A., M.A. B. C A M P B E L L A. W. CARTER, B.Sc. H. C L A R K , B.H.E., Dip. Ed. R. EINBLAU, B.A., M.A. G. F A N E , Dip. Tech., B.Sc, M.B.A., C.M.A. G.H. FARRELL, M.B.A., C.M.A., F.C.M.A. F. G R U E N , B.Mgt.Eng., M.A.Sc. P. H O L D E N , B.A., LL.B., M.B.A. S. IBARAKI W. INGLIS, B.A., Dip. Mktg. W. INKSTER, C.G.A. C. KILIAN, B.A.,M.A. R. KUBICEK, B.A., M.A. J.K. LAWRIE, C A . J.D. LOBLAW, B.A. R. L O N G W O R T H , B.Sc, M.Ed. C. MCKIE, B.Comm., M.B.A., P.T.C. L. MICHAELS, B.Sc, B.Ed., M.Ed. K.W. M O A K , B.A., M.P.A. F. MORRIS, B.A., LL.B., L L . M . B. MOSELEY, B.A., M.B.A. R. MUTIMER, B. Sc. R.C. NICHOLS, B.Comm.,C.M.A. A . G . OBERNDORF, B.S., M.I.M. R. O ' C O N N O R J. PENDYGRASSE, B.Sc, Teacher's Cert. D. RATHBORNE, B.A., C A . R. RENNIE, B.S., M.S., Ph.D. D. SAUER, B.A., M.B.A. J. SAYRE, B.S., B.A., M.A. R. S H A H R O K H , M.B.A. L. SPICER, B.Comm. M. TAYLOR, B.Sc. K.Y. T O W S O N , B.Sc, M.Sc. A . H . VICK, B.Comm. K. VICKARS, B.Ed., L i e Acct. G. W A U G H , B.A.,M.A. J. WILSON, B. Comm., C A . H. B. YACKNESS, B.Comm., M.B.A., C A . Support Staff Carol McQuarrie, Div. Assistant Sharon Miletic, Receptionist General Information The objective of the programs offered within the Business Management Department is to prepare students for careers in the various aspects of business. The courses offered attempt to satisfy a variety of needs: I. High school graduates planning a career in business or industry who desire a comprehensive business education; (2 years full-time). Career/Vocational — Business Management 104 2. Persons with a minimum of 7 years business experience in industry, government, the military or private business ventures who desire a concise, formal business education; (10 months full-time). 3. Persons presently employed in business who require additional formal business education or upgrading; (Parttime, day or evening). 4. Persons wanting to take courses that carry credit towards non-Capilano College certificate and diploma programs; (Part-time, day or evening). 5. Persons interested in furthering their knowledge in a particular area of business; (Part-time, day or evening, or co-sponsored events.) These courses, providing students with a comprehensive education in basic managerial skills in one of five specialized program areas, have been designed both to lay a practical foundation for those who wish to enter new careers in business and to expand present careers, either as independent entrepreneurs or as prospective employee-managers. A detailed description of the programs follows. Types of Programs Programs in the Business Department are of three kinds: A. Two Year Full-Time Diploma Programs (see page 104) B. Accelerated Business Diploma Programs (see page 108) C. Part-Time Evening Certificate Program (see page 109) D. RIA, C G A , and C A transfer courses (see page 110) Admission requirements for each of the programs vary and will be found in the Calendar description relating to the specific program. Full description of course offerings in the Department on page 111. STUDENTS WITH UNSATISFACTORY GRADES IN A N Y TERM M A Y BE ASKED T O WITHDRAW FROM T H E PROGRAM. A. TWO YEAR FULL-TIME DIPLOMA PROGRAMS There are FIVE full-time programs in the Department leading to an Associate of Arts and Science Diploma after successful completion of the program requirements, usually in two years of study. Courses are taught by instructors with practical, up-to-date knowledge; many faculty have full or part-time positions in business in their areas of specialty. Class sizes are not large. Their intensive nature requires a minimum of 18 hours weekly in class and 36 hours weekly of outside study and preparation. Two Year OLA University Transfer ADMINISTRATIVE MANAGEMENT Graduates of Capilano College Business programs receive block transfer of up to 60 credits to the Bachelor of Arts in Administrative Studies program with the Open Learning Agency (OLA). Those with accounting concentrations may follow a program of study that will lead to an O L A degree and the professional designation of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of British Columbia. For further information regarding block transfer, contact the program Coordinator. This program provides a solid core of knowledge and skills which can be applied to a wide variety of administrative positions in business, industry, and government. In addition, the program is of value to those whose goal it is to become involved in the operation of small or selfowned businesses. Admission Requirements Interested persons should apply for admission to any of the programs early in the calendar year. Entry is based on business experience, grades at high school graduation, maturity, interest, and aptitude. Normally, Grade 12 graduation with a minimum of C+ in English 12 and C in Algebra 11 is required, although admission may be granted to mature students who can provide evidence of probable success in the program. A personal interview may be required for admission. The Programs The programs set out below begin in September each year. 1. Administrative Management 2. Financial Management 3. Marketing Management 4. Computer Systems Management 5. International Business The first three programs have common first year courses. The second year contains courses tailored to meet the specialized requirements of the particular program. Admission to the second year of a program is based on grades obtained during the first full year of the program. Where student demand is particularly high, students may not be able to continue in the program of their first choice. It is expected that beginning in September of 1990 we will have an increase in the number of courses that will be transferable to university programs. DOUBLE DIPLOMA: After receiving a Diploma in one of the Business Management programs at the College, a graduate may earn a second diploma in another program of the Department upon successful completion of all requirements for that second program. In the case of the Administrative, Financial, and Marketing Programs, this may be done in the course of one full academic year or its equivalent. Each program leading to a Double Diploma must be approved by the Department Chairperson. Career Opportunities Past graduates have found employment in business, industry, and government. Students in this program should expect to find employment in such diverse areas as planning, banking, finance, production, retailing, real estate, marketing, personnel, industrial relations, and small business. Program Content FIRST YEAR - F A L L Credit Hours BSMG 158 Marketing I 3 BSMG 170 Quantitative Methods I 3 C M N S 152 Report Writing 3 BSMG 177 Principles of Management 3 BSMG 178 Accounting I 3 BSMG 180 Intro, to Business Computers 3 18 FIRST Y E A R - S P R I N G BSMG 159 Marketing II 3 BSMG 171 Quantitative Methods II 3 BSMG 179 Accounting II 3 BSMG 192 Business Systems 3 BSMG 175 Organizational Behaviour 3 BSMG 222 Microcomputer Applications 1 3 18 SECOND YEAR - F A L L E C O N 200 Principles of Macro Economics 3 BSMG 215 Critical Thinking & Decision Making 3 BSMG 230 Salesmanship 3 BSMG 240 Canadian Business Law I 3 BSMG 291 Management Accounting 3 R.M. 161 Management Presentation Skills 3 18 SECOND YEAR - SPRING BSMG 200 Business Policy 3 BSMG 241 Canadian Business Law II 3 BSMG 262 Operations Management 3 BSMG 267 Business Finance 3 BSMG 268 Human Resource Mgt. 3 BSMG 276 Management Practicum 3 18 Career/Vocational — Business Management 105 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT MARKETING MANAGEMENT Management skills of financial resources and the provision of management information for sound financial planning and control comprise the core of the program. Courses allowing for transfer to C.A., C.G.A., and R.I.A. certification are part of the basic program. As an integral part of today's business, marketing management is concerned with identifying market opportunities, setting goals, and establishing marketing policies and programs to satisfy market needs and corporate objectives. Marketing's task is to understand and coordinate the major customer satisfying activities of the business firm. Career Opportunities Career opportunities include financial planning, budget preparation, and financial control, and can be found in the public and private sectors in investment, banking, real estate, and related industries. Entry to middle management positions in financial accounting, cost accounting, internal audit, and budget preparation are not uncommon. Career Opportunities Graduates have learned to translate consumer wants and needs into products and services, to cultivate markets and to program distribution activities to reach such markets. In the past, they have become employed in product management, purchasing, merchandising, advertising, public relations, and marketing research. Program Content FIRST Y E A R - F A L L Credit Hours BSMG 158 Marketing I 3 BSMG 170 Quantitative Methods I 3 C M N S 152 Report Writing 3 BSMG 177 Principles of Management 3 BSMG 178 Accounting I 3 BSMG 180 Intro, to Business Computers 3 18 FIRST Y E A R - SPRING BSMG 159 Marketing II 3 BSMG 171 Quantitative Methods II 3 BSMG 179 Accounting II 3 BSMG 192 Business Systems 3 BSMG 175 Organizational Behaviour 3 BSMG 222 Microcomputer Applications 1 3 18 SECOND Y E A R - F A L L E C O N 200 Principles of Macro Economics BSMG 240 Canadian Business Law I BSMG 255 Financial Accounting I BSMG 260 Finance I BSMG 264 Cost Accounting I BSMG 286 Taxation 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 SECOND YEAR - SPRING BSMG 241 Canadian Business Law II BSMG 252 Accounting Micro. Applications BSMG 256 Financial Accounting II BSMG 261 Finance II BSMG 274 Cost Accounting II BSMG 276 Management Practicum 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 Program Content FIRST YEAR - F A L L Credit Hours BSMG 158 Marketing I 3 BSMG 170 Quantitative Methods I 3 C M N S 152 Report Writing 3 BSMG 177 Principles of Management 3 BSMG 178 Accounting I 3 BSMG 180 Intro, to Business Computers 3 18 FIRST YEAR - SPRING BSMG 159 Marketing II BSMG 171 Quantitative Methods II BSMG 179 Accounting II BSMG 192 Business Systems BSMG 175 Organizational Behaviour BSMG 222 Micro Computer Applications I 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 SECOND YEAR - F A L L BSMG 230 Salesmanship BSMG 240 Canadian Business Law I E C O N 200 Principles of Macro Economics BSMG 267 Business Finance BSMG 273 Advertising I BSMG 275 Marketing Research 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 SECOND YEAR - SPRING BSMG 271 Merchandising BSMG 200 Business Policy BSMG 241 Canadian Business Law II BSMG 276 Marketing Practicum BSMG 277 International Marketing BSMG 279 Advertising II (Cap Ads) 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 Career/Vocational 106 — Business Management COMPUTER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT Industry today requires people trained in systems analysis, programming, the application of computers, with a clear understanding of management objectives. This program has proven that it can satisfy the current need for computer personnel. SECOND YEAR - F A L L C M P T 296 Powerhouse: 4th Gen. Lang. BCOP 411 Computer Operating Systems BCOP 431 COBOL: 3rd Gen. Language BCOP 441 Info Systems & Mgmt.: Case Study I BCOP 442 Management of Data BCOP 451 Computing Stats: Market Research BCOP 471 Computers and Accounting L5 18 Career Opportunities With the comprehensive training provided, recent graduates have been able to secure positions as systems analysts, operations managers, analyst programmers, sales representatives, and technical consultants. BUSINESS COMPUTING CO-OPERATIVE PROGRAM The past two decades have seen the incredible growth of computers used in business. Industry requires people trained in systems analysis, programming and the application of mainframe and micro computers to business systems. Eight of the 24 months of the program is in paid placement. SECOND YEAR - Spring Co-op Placement Term BCOP 501 Co-op Placement II BCOP 591 Interpersonal Skills v SECOND YEAR - SUMMER C M P T 208 C & Machine Level Programming CMPT 291 Finance for Managers BCOP 611 Research: The Competitive Edge BCOP 612 Computer Communications BCOP 621 Computer as Design Tool BCOP 641 Info Systems &Mgmt: Case Study II BCOP 662 Hardware/SoftwareTraining BCOP 691 Writing Your Way to Success Career Opportunities INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS PROGRAM With the comprehensive training provided, graduates will secure positions as systems analysts,operations managers, analyst programmers, sales representatives, and technical consultants. Contact Person: Anne Watson,984-4960, Local 2341 Program Content FIRST YEAR - F A L L Credit Hours BCOP111 Overview of Computers 3 BCOP121 Intro to Micro Applications 3 BCOP 131 Intro to Programming 3 C M P T 155 Math & Stats: Business 3 BCOP 161 Intro to Business 3 BCOP 191 Gen. Business & Personal Skills 3 18 FIRST YEAR - SPRING C M P T 191 Accounting for Managers 3 BSMG 215 Critical Thinking 3 BCOP 221 Micro Computer Applications 3 BCOP 231 COBOL 3 BCOP 242 Developmental Tools 3 BCOP 282 Computing Industry Marketing 3 18 FIRST YEAR - Summer Co-op Placement Term BCOP 301 Co-op Placement I 3 BCOP 361 Understanding Management 3 6 1.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 6 1.5 3 1.5 3 1.5 3 1.5 15 16.5 A n 8 month program of study for students who wish to work in Canada while conducting business in the International arena. World trade has assumed a position of major importance in the global community. Virtually every manager in Canada is influenced by international events in business and finance. This certificate program will provide students with the knowledge, cultural awareness and business skills required for a professional level of competence in the International Business arena. The emphasis will be on the Canada-USA relationship as well as the growing trade within the Pacific Basin . Candidates have the opportunity to enrol in the first term of the Accelerated Program and build enough credits for a Diploma in International Business. Admission Requirements The ideal candidate for the International Business program will have a college diploma or some university related course work. In addition, the potential candidate will probably be working with a company that is conducting overseas business. In some cases, candidates may come from unrelated fields but now wish to prepare themselves for a career change. Career/Vocational — Business Management 107 Career Opportunities Graduates may seek employment with a Canadian company working in a Canadian city conducting business in the International market. Graduates who are returning to their current employer would have enhanced opportunities for promotion. Those who have changed careers may join a new company at a junior management position. Program Content FIRST T E R M Credit Hours IBUS 315 Critical Thinking & Problem Solving 1.5 IBUS322 Int. Business Communications 1.5 IBUS 330 Pacific Basin: Economic Georgraphy 3 IBUS 340 International Trade Law 3 IBUS 357 International Trade & Marketing 3 IBUS 370 Customs Documentation & Procedures 3 15 SECOND T E R M IBUS 334 International Cross-Culture 3 IBUS 338 Canada/USA Trade Relations 3 IBUS 366 International Banking & Finance 3 IBUS 374 International Transportation Strategies 3 IBUS 399 Int. Trade Opportunities & Strategies 3 15 Current programs are under review, but at present are available in five areas of study: Administration, Finance, Marketing, Retail Management, and Computer Systems. Interested students are encouraged to inquire concerning the current offerings. Each diploma program is covered in three terms: FIRST TERM is an eight-week preparatory period usually held during July and August. Lectures will total 36 hours weekly and are held between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. The courses are cross-disciplinary and consist mainly of introductory topics. The SECOND T E R M , beginning in September, and THIRD TERM, beginning in January, each consist of fifteen weeks of instruction, totalling 21 to 28 hours weekly in class. In order to allow for some flexibility in meeting particular educational needs and to allow for diverse working backgrounds, it is possible, with the approval of the Coordinator, to substitute certain courses in the Second and Third Term with other courses offered in the Department. The accelerated programs normally begin in July each year, however there are exceptions. Retail Management and Computer Systems Management have in-takes in September and January depending upon student demand. Please check with the program convenor to ensure when the new courses will be offered. ACCELERATED ADMINISTRATIVE MANAGEMENT B. ACCELERATED BUSINESS MANAGEMENT DIPLOMA PROGRAMS These 10-month programs are designed to offer business training for mature students. The student is provided with an opportunity to gain a clear understanding of business principles and to refine and add to the practical on-the-job experience that has been previously acquired. A unique feature of the Accelerated Diploma Program is the credit given for work experience. For a Diploma, students must obtain 60 credits, of which 9 advance credits are assigned for a minimum work experience of seven years. The remaining 51 credits are earned from satisfactory completion of regular Business Management courses. Admission Requirements Admitted students will have a minimum of seven years business experience in industry, government, education, private business or the military. In addition, acceptance to the program is based upon the nature of the applicant's work experience, maturity, aptitude, and ability to effectively manage the concentrated studies inherent in the program chosen. Since enrollment is limited, it is recommended that interested students arrange with the Department for an interview by April 1st. Career/Vocational — Business Management 108 FIRST TERM - SUMMER Credit Hours BSMG 166 Business Mathematics 3 BSMG 178 Accounting I 3 BSMG 180 Introduction to Business Computers 3 BSMG 160 Marketing 3 12 SECOND TERM - F A L L BSMG 179 Accounting II 3 BSMG 222 Microcomputer Applications I 3 BSMG 240 Canadian Business Law I 3 BSMG 215 Critical Thinking & Decision Making 3 BSMG 230 Salesmanship 3 BSMG 291 Managerial Accounting 3 R.M. 161 Management Presentation Skills 3 21 THIRD TERM - SPRING BSMG 200 Business Policy 3 BSMG 241 Canadian Business Law II 3 BSMG 262 Operations Management 3 BSMG 267 Business Finance 3 BSMG 268 Human Resources Mgt. 3 BSMG 276 Management Practicum 3 18 ACCELERATED FINANCE FIRST T E R M - SUMMER Credit Hours BSMG 166 Business Mathematics 3 BSMG 178 Accounting 1 3 BSMG 180 Intro, to Business Computers 3 BSMG 160 Marketing 3 12 SECOND T E R M - F A L L BSMG 179 Accounting II BSMG 222 Microcomputer Applications I BSMG 240 Canadian Business Law I BSMG 255 Financial Accounting BSMG 260 Finance I BSMG 264 Cost and Managerial Accounting I BSMG 286 Taxation THIRD T E R M - SPRING BSMG 241 Canadian Business Law II BSMG 252 Accounting Applications BSMG 256 Financial Accounting II BSMG 261 Finance II BSMG 274 Cost and Managerial Accounting II BSMG 276 Management Practicum 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 21 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 ACCELERATED COMPUTER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT The enhanced Accelerated Computer Systems Management program is modularized into 2-month segments with practically-sequenccd courses. Graduates obtain an Associate Arts and Science Diploma upon successful completion of 10 months of intensive training. Program Content TERM I CMPT 152 C M P T 180 C M P T 191 C M P T 155 Credit Hours Structured Programming with Pascal 1.5 Intro to Data Processing 3 Accounting for Managers 3 Quantitative Methods for Managers 3 10.5 TERM II C M P T 189 C M P T 222 C M P T 182 BSMG 160 COBOL I Microcomputer Applications I Intro to Systems Marketing/sales 3 3 3 3 12 TERM III CMPT 205 C M P T 223 CMPT 293 CMPT 291 C O B O L II Microcomputer Applications II Systems Design Accounting for Managers II 3 3 3 3 12 TERM IV C M P T 208 CMPT 226 CMPT 298 C M P T 172 " C " Language Microcomputer Applications III Data Base Design Entrepreneurial 1.5 3 3 3 10.5 TERM V BSMG 276 CMPT 297 C M P T 230 C M P T 296 Projects in Industry Telecommunications Operating Systems 4 GLs 3 1.5 3 L5 9 ACCELERATED MARKETING FIRST TERM - SUMMER BSMG 166 Business Mathematics BSMG 178 Accounting 1 BSMG 180 Intro, to Business Computers BSMG 160 Marketing SECOND TERM - F A L L BSMG 222 Microcomputer Applications I BSMG 179 Accounting II C M N S 225 Career Preparation BSMG 230 Salesmanship BSMG 240 Canadian Business Law I BSMG 271 Merchandising BSMG 273 Advertising I BSMG 275 Marketing Research Credit Hours 3 3 3 3 12 3 3 1.5 3 3 3 3 3 21.75 THIRD T E R M - SPRING BSMG 267 Business Finance BSMG 241 Canadian Business Law II BSMG 276 Management Practicum BSMG 277 International Marketing BSMG 279 Advertising II (Cap Ads) BSMG 200 Business Policy 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 C. PART-TIME EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS The courses in these programs, beginning in September and January each year, will provide the student with basic managerial skills that are of practical value in a wide variety of employment positions. Classes are conducted by Department faculty either one or two evenings each week during the term, and those enrolled in the programs may take the courses at their chosen pace. A number of credit courses from both the full-time Diploma Programs and the part-time Certificate Programs are offered during the evenings of both regular College terms. Career/Vocational — Business Management 109 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CERTIFICATE A Certificate in Business Administration will be awarded after the successful completion of two required courses as shown and a choice of any four additional 3 credit courses chosen from the Business Management evening or daytime offerings. Substitution may be allowed at the discretion of the evening program coordinator. REQUIRED BSMG 160 Marketing Management BSMG 187 Introduction to Business OPTIONAL BSMG 163 BSMG 178 BSMG 179 C M P T 180 BSMG 197 C M P T 222 BSMG 210 BSMG 240 BSMG 241 BSMG 170 BSMG 171 BSMG 175 BSMG 192 C M N S 152 Supervisory Skills Accounting I Accounting II Introduction to Business Computers Hands-on Advertising for Small Business (1.5 credits) Microcomputers Applications I Small Business Management Canadian Business Law I Canadian Business Law II Quantitative Methods I Quantitative Methods II Business Management Business Systems Report Writing Other regular offerings from the Business Management Department. ADVANCED BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION CERTIFICATE A second or Advanced certificate will be awarded following successful completion of an additional four 3 credit courses chosen again from the Business Management evening or daytime offerings. NOTE: A student must attain a 2.0 G P A or better to qualify for either certificate. BUSINESS COMPUTING CERTIFICATE A Certificate in Business Computing will be awarded after the successful completion of three required courses as shown and a choice of any three additional 3 credit courses chosen from the Business Management evening or daytime offerings. REQUIRED C M P T 180 Introduction to Business Computers C M P T 222 Microcomputer Applications BSMG 192 Business Systems Career/Vocational — Business Management 110 OPTIONAL BSMG 160 Marketing Management BSMG 163 Supervisory Skills BSMG 175 Organizational Behaviour BSMG 178 Accounting I BSMG 179 Accounting II BSMG 187 Introduction to Business BSMG 240 Canadian Business Law I BSMG 241 Canadian Business Law II Substitution may be allowed at the discretion of the evening program coordinator. D. RIA, CGA, a n d CA TRANSFER COURSES The Department offers a number of courses which carry credit towards non-Capilano College certificate and diploma programs. Some provide transfer credit to other college and university programs, and one should refer to the University Transfer Guide at the back of the Calendar for details. In addition, those professional bodies currently recognizing courses taken at Capilano College are: Institute of Chartered Accountants (CA.) Certified General Accountants Association (C.G.A.) Society of Management Accountants (R.I.A.) Currently, the following Capilano courses are transferable to C A / R I A / C G A programs, but students are cautioned to verify with the specific professional body concerned or with the Business Management Department concerning credit requirements. C M N S 150, or pre-test/152 Report Writing BSMG 240/241 Canadian Business Law E C O N 200/201 Economics BSMG 180 or C M P T 180 Introduction to Computers BSMG 192 Business Systems BSMG 175 Organizational Behaviour BSMG 170 Financial Mathematics ** BSMG 171 Statistics for Business BSMG 268 Human Resource Management BSMG 253 Labour Relations BSMG 178/179 Accounting I and II BSMG 255/256 Financial Accounting I and II BSMG 260-261 Finance I and II BSMG 264-274 Cost Accounting I and II BSMG 286 * Intro to Business Taxation CMPT 299 ** Management Information Systems * C A / R I A only ** C A only Course Descriptions Business Management 158 Marketing I (F) (3,0) An introduction to the Canadian marketing environment. Provides a detailed study of the practical functions of product planning, promotion, market research, selection of trade channels, merchandising, advertising and salesmanship with emphasis on both consumer and industrial goods and services. Business Management 159 Marketing II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 158 or permission of instructor. This course is a continuation of Marketing I. It is intended to add more depth to the basic marketing knowledge and expand on the overall use of marketing in today's competitive environment. Field trips and student projects will form part of the content of this course. Business Management 160 Marketing (F,S) (3,0) Familiarization with all the basic Canadian marketing concepts and their roles within the Canadian economy and the individual firm. Emphasis will be on consumer product marketing, although some industrial marketing concepts will be discussed. Students will be encouraged to actively participate in group and class discussions on marketing problems and opportunities related to product planning, research, planning, promotion and distribution systems. Merchandising, advertising and salesmanship will also be included in the overview of the marketing principles and their practical approach. Business Management 163 Supervisory Skills (F,S) (3,0) Study of human elements in organizations, with emphasis on group behaviour. Concepts in persuasion, guidance and understanding of the individual within the group. Applications of human relations management, i.e. leadership, power, authority, group dynamics, formal and informal organization, communications, conflict and the introduction of change. Business Management 164 Retail Mathematics (F) (3,0) This course provides a practical knowledge of the mathematical methods utilized in retail operations. Students will develop the ability to efficiently solve various types of problems relevant to retailing. Business Management 166 Business Mathematics (SU) (3,0) This course is designed to assist students in developing the basic skills and concepts of quantitative analysis relating to business and personal finance. A review section on problem analysis and algebra is included. Business Management 167 Financial Management (F,S) (3,0) A practical introduction to understanding how to finance a business. The primary subjects undertaken are sources of financing and dealing with lenders. Other closely related topics include: asset management, financial analysis, investment decisions, and financial and profit planning. Students taking this course do not require an accounting background. Business Management 169 Accounting Fundamentals (S) (3,0) This course discusses the ways in which accounting systems are developed and applied to retailing businesses. In addition, the techniques used to apply accounting information to management decisions are thoroughly covered. Business Management 170 Quantitative Methods I (F) (3,0) This course will provide the basic quantitative analytical tools used to aid decision-making in modern organizations. In particular, the mathematics of finance will be covered with an emphasis on the time value of money. Business Management 171 Quantitative Methods II (S) (3,0) This course covers the quantitative analytical tools used as aids in decision-making, stressing common statistical methods used in the face of certainty and uncertainty. Business Management 175 Organizational Behaviour (F,S) (3,0) Human behaviour within organizations. Students will actively participate in role-playing and other simulated activities dealing with organizational and personal factors that influence different types of work behaviour. Specific topics such as motivation, leadership, change within organizations, and formal and informal organizations will be explored. Business Management 177 Principles of Management (F,S) (3,0) This course directly addresses the need to achieve high productivity through good management. The essentials Career/Vocational — Business Management 111 of management—planning, organizing, leading, and controlling—are presented in a systematic and thorough manner. Business Management 178 Accounting I (F,S,SU) (3,0) An introduction to basic accounting principles and procedures including the recording of transactions, and adjustments in basic accounting records. Students will prepare financial statements for the proprietorship and will study, in detail, the accounting and reporting of cash, accounts receivable, merchandise inventory and long-Jived assets. Transferable to SFU, UBC, and UVic. Business Management 179 Accounting II (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 178 with at least a C - grade. A continuation of BSMG 178. Analysis of funds flows, both cash and working capital. Management uses of accounting: cash budgeting, forecasting, profit planning and responsibility accounting. Accounting for manufacturing operations. Transferable to SFU, UVic and UBC. Note: when both BSMG 178 and 179 are completed they receive credits at SFU, UBC, and UVic. These concepts are crucial in the "information age" of the '90s. Business Management 193 Retail Merchandising (F,S) (1.5,0) This course provides students with the necessary practical and theoretical skills to apply retail knowledge within the retail organization or in working with the industry. Business Management 197 Hands-on Advertising for Small Business (ForS) (1.5,0) Students will be introduced to the 'behind the scenes' of an advertising campaign through examples developed from the Vancouver market. Advertising case studies will be used to instruct students in the techniques of producing meaningful, effective promotion for small businesses on a small budget. Business Management 200 Business Policy (S) (3,0) The fourth term student gains a basic understanding of the concepts, purposes, and procedures of business policy, and an integrated view of the strategic management of business enterprise. Business Management 210 Business/Computer Management 180 Small Business Management (S) (3,0) Introduction to Business Computers (F,S) (3,0) Students will gain an understanding of the unique nature of the small business within the Canadian context. A n integrated approach to both the short and longer term managerial activities is stressed, with explicit emphasis on the process of analysis, strategy, and planning required in the small business environment. A general orientation to the computer — what it is, how it functions, and what it can and cannot do. Provides hands-on experience in using a word processing program, introduces a data base management program, the disk operating system, and looks into the multiple uses of computers today and the foreseeable future. Business Management 187 Introduction to Business (SU.F.S) (3,0) This course will explain the five key tasks in managing an enterprise: Planning, Acquisition of Resources, Organization, Activation and Control. In addition, the key organizational functions of Marketing, Production, Finance and Personnel are covered. The course is essentially an overview of the theoretical framework of the task of management. Business Management 192 Business Systems (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Business/Computer Management 180 This course provides students with the basic tools for understanding, designing, and working with the relationships between the many items of corporate information. Career/Vocational — Business Management 112 Business Management 215 Critical Thinking and Decision Making (F,S) (3,0) Through problem solving rather than abstract discussion, students are introduced to techniques for distinguishing between correct and incorrect patterns of reasoning. Students are encouraged to see these "patterns" as universal and applicable to all situations and people. Business/Computer Management 222 Microcomputer Applications (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: B S M G / C M P T 180 An introduction to the use of microcomputers in the business world. Hands-on experience with common packages such as Spreadsheets and Data File Management programs. Macros and programming in dBase are also covered. Business Management 230 Salesmanship (F,S) (3,0) accounts receivable, accounts payable, and inventory control. An introduction to professional selling. Communication basics, including effective listening, probing, problem finding and solving, and creativity will be covered. Specific techniques of professional selling including prospecting, qualifying and contracting prospects. The course will also explores, in depth, the organization and management of sales activities. Business Management 253 Management Responsibility in Labour Relations (F,S)(3,0) Business Management 239 Law for Retailing (S,SU) (1.5,0) An overview course designed to provide students destined for the retail industry with a basic understanding of the Canadian legal system and selected elements of commercial law appropriate to contracts and business. This course is not transferable. Business Management 240 Canadian Business Law I (F) (3,0) Examines the effect of legal principles from both common and statute law on business relationships. A n introductory course in law which focuses on the source of rules and principles of commercial law, the functioning of the Canadian legal system and its components, and involving a detailed examination of the Law of Contract, including the Sale of Goods, Negotiable Instruments, Employment Law, and Consumer Protection legislation. A study of management's responsibility and role in present-day labour relations. Topics covered include the history of unionism, contemporary unionism, the B.C. Labour Code and collective bargaining. Business Management 255 Financial Accounting I (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 178/179 with a minimum C - grade. This course studies the theories underlying financial statement presentations, and is a logical continuation and reinforcement of the material covered in BSMG 178 and 179. The course encompasses the study of Financial Accounting at the intermediate level. Transferable to SFU. Business Management 256 Financial Accounting II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 255 with a minimum C - grade. A sequel to BSMG 255 which examines current developments in financial accounting and their effects on financial statement presentation. Available for transfer credit. Transferable to SFU. Business Management 241 Canadian Business Law II (S) (3,0) Business Management 257 Retail Financial Management (F) (1.5,0) Prerequisite: Preferably, BSMG 240, or an introductory college or university course in commercial or contract law, or by permission of the instructor. This course examines the sources of financing available to retail stores. Special emphasis is placed on preparing requests for bank loans and understanding financial statements. A second course in law which examines the effect of legal principles from both case and statute law upon business relationships. The principal focus in this course is on the application of common law and legislation to commercial transactions apart from basic contract, including Corporations, Torts, Agency, Partnership, Bankruptcy, Creditors' Rights, Labour, Insurance, Bailment and Real Property. Available for transfer credit. Business Management 252 Microcomputer Accounting Applications (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMC 178 Students will complete microcomputer accounting implementation projects using A C C P A C accounting software and will be expected to understand the practical constraints of internal control in the A C C P A C environment. Systems covered will include general ledger, Business Management 260 Finance I (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 178/179 with a minimum C- grade. The financial manager's responsibilities are studied in depth in Finance I and the subsequent course, BSMG 261. This course concentrates on the details of financial planning and the management of current assets and liabilities. Other areas of study are financial analysis, time value of money, working capital policy, and the tax environment. Throughout the course, contemporary financial issues are discussed. Designed for students requiring C G A and RIA transfer credit. Career/Vocational — Business Management Business Management 261 Finance II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 260 with a minimum C - grade. A continuation of BSMG 260, examining longer term sources of financing and investment. Major financial policy decisions, international finances, and relevant Canadian and international topics are discussed. Business Management 262 Production/Operations Management (S) (3,0) Of special interest to generalist managers and operators of small businesses, this one term course familiarizes the student with the principles, practices and functions of production-operations management, using modern decision-making aids. Foundation skills in production control (inventory, quality and cost control) are examined using computing devices and procedures. Business Management 264 Cost and Managerial Accounting I (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 178/179 with a minimum C- grade. A study of organizational decision making and planning using accounting tools. Topics include the nature of accounting controls, common control methods, measures of management performance, and the role of the management cost accountant. Business Management 267 Finance (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 178/179 As a practical look at financial management, this course will cover obtaining financing, management of assets, investment decisions, financial planning, and financial analysis. Contemporary financial issues will be discussed throughout the course. This is for business students who are not majoring in financial management. Business Management 268 Human Resource Management (F,S) (3,0) This course provides the student with a basic, functional understanding of current personnel/human resource management concepts and applications in developing small and larger businesses. Special emphasis will be placed on the concept of personnel management being the responsibility of A L L management, not just the Personnel Department. Business Management 271 Merchandising (F) (3,0) This course will acquaint the student with an overview of both retailing and merchandising operations in today's competitive market. Discussion will cover types of Career/Vocational — Business Management 114 retailing establishments, analysis of a trading area, site location, and store layout and design, with an emphasis on changing lifestyles and consumer demand patterns. Students will be exposed to a wide range of merchandising techniques and strategies covering many corporations and commodities. Guest lecturers and field trips emphasize practical aspects. Business Management 273 Advertising I (F) (3,0) This course will examine the Canadian and American advertising industry from both micro and macro perspectives. It will enable the student to grasp the basic theoretical and practical approaches to advertising and provide an insight into the various aspects of advertising history, creativity, communication systems, media choice, and other functions. This is not a course on designing, creating and preparing specific types of advertising, but is meant to serve as an overview of what advertising is and how it relates to other marketing concepts and operations. Business Management 274 Cost and Managerial Accounting II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 264 with a minimum C- grade. A more in-depth study of subjects covered in Cost and Managerial Accounting 264. Cost determination for manufacturing operations, planning and cost control systems, performance evaluation methods, strategic decisionmaking methods. Business Management 275 Marketing Research (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 158 & 159 An introductory course indicating how to make the most out of marketing research. Through practical applications of a research project, students will learn the elements of research design, basic methods of collecting data, analysis and reporting. Applications of Canadian and American research will be studied. Business Management 276 Management Practicum (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: of Term 3 An acceptable resume, approved by the end Students in their final quarter in some programs are required to undertake a concentrated period of practical experience in the workplace. While placements are the primary responsibility of each student, assistance is provided by the program convenor and faculty to ensure that work experience and assigned tasks are at an appropriate learning level. In some cases, a directed research project may be undertaken in lieu of the practicum. Business Management 277 International Marketing (S) (3,0) IBUS 330 Pacific Basin: An Economic Geography (F) (3,0) A study of the mechanics of international trade, foreign exchange rates, tariffs, etc. Product/distribution/ promotion mixes for export markets of Canadian industry with an emphasis on Pacific Rim and American market influences. Students will learn how to adapt domestic marketing techniques to foreign conditions. A broad study of the international business milieu will be undertaken from the economic/geographic/political perspective. Business Management 279 Advertising II (S) (3,0) International trade conventions and agreements, the legal processes of importing and exporting, and the challenge of dealing with conflicting domestic laws between countries will be studied. As a follow-up to Advertising I, this course will offer students an opportunity to create and present a full advertising campaign for an operating company. A team approach will be used to create an advertising agency environment with such areas as research, creative media, and account supervision being studied and portrayed. While not a prerequisite, Advertising I is recommended to fully understand the course content and program. Business Management 286 Introduction to Business Taxation (F) (3,0) This course familiarizes the student with the Canadian income tax system as it applies to corporation, shareholders, and unincorporated businesses, so that the student can identify potential tax problem areas, complete the basic compliance forms, and appreciate its impact on some business decisions. Business Management 291 Management Accounting (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: BSMG 178 & 179 with a minimum C- grade. This course introduces students to the specialized area of Management Accounting. It provides an overview of controls affected internally by management using the tools of budgets, costing and analysis. Planning for an organization will be examined from both the capital and operational perspectives. IBUS 340 International Trade Law (F) (3,0) IBUS 357 International Trade & Marketing (F) (3,0) This course will develop student awareness of the potential of international trade and provide the ground work for an in depth study of trade with our major trading partner, the U.S., in second term. International Marketing will provide students with the tools necessary to develop export trade. IBUS 370 Customs Documentation & Procedures (F) (3,0) This course will provide a working understanding of the tools and methodology required to analyze the impact of Canadian Commodity Taxes and current Canada Customs legislation on a business engaged in import/export. IBUS 334 International Cross Culture (S) (3,0) Participants will study comparative cultural systems to develop sensitivities to other cultures, particularly as related to business dealings. IBUS 338 Canada/USA Trade Relations (S) (3,0) IBUS 315 Critrical Thinking & Problem Solving (F) (1.5, 0) An in-depth study of our historical and current trade relations with our major trading partner. Case studies will be used to illustrate the "real world" nature of our crossborder trade and emerging trade patterns. A framework for logical analysis of information will be provided in a workshop setting. Students will be taught to detect false reasoning, illegitimate appeals to emotions, inconsistencies and contradictions. IBUS 366 International Banking & Finance (S) (3,0) IBUS 322 International Business Communications (F) (1.5, 0) Students will develop an understanding of two types of risk involved in international business: performance risk and financial risk. A examination will then be made of the risk management products available through banks and other financial institutions to mitigate corporate risk. Essentials for communicating cross-culturally will be studied, including writing for machine translation. Career/Vocational — Business Management 115 IBUS 374 International Transportation Strategies (S) (3,0) This course provides an introduction to commodity movement alternatives, relative costs of various forms of transportation, regulatory requirements, and the traders' rights and responsibilities in Canada and internationally. IBUS 399 International Trade Opportunities & Strategies (S) (3\0) A series of guest lectures by industry and government experts on topics which are immediately relevant to Canadian business people. Lectures will be followed by case studies designed to apply the speakers' concepts. Computer Management 152 Programming Structure (SU) (1.5,0) Introduction to standard programming structure, standard techniques and programming aids in relation to business applications. Computer Management 155 Quantitative Methods for Managers (S,SU) (3,0) Designed for accelerated computer students, this course is a survey of the basic quantitative analytic tools used to aid decision making. Financial and statistical concepts, methods and applications will be examined. Computer Management 172 The Entrepreneur in Business I (S,F) (3,0) This course is oriented towards specific job skills needed in our changing environment. Some topical issues to be addressed are: business research skills, starting a small business, writing a business plan, proprietorship and partnership. Computer Management 181 "BASIC" Programming I (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: At least a "C" grade in Bus/Comp Mgt. 180, or by permission of the instructor. Areas of study include program organization, table handling techniques, file maintenance, desk file organizations, access methods, and programming efficiency. Computer Management 182 Systems Analysis I (SU,F) (3,0) Provides a basic understanding of system concepts, including the "life cycle" and the concept of a business as an information system. Introduces the working tools of systems analysis, including form design, coding, charting, flowcharting and written verbal communication. Provides detailed understanding of the four life cycle phases (Study, Design, Development and Operation) through Career/Vocational — Business Management 116 their application in a detailed continuous case study. Provides an understanding of the logical approach to solving a problem. Computer Management 189 COBOL Programming I (F) (3,0) Provides the student with practical training in the organization and writing of computer programs. Topics include program structure, text editor, introduction to COBOL language, program instruction, and compilation. Computer Management 191 Accounting for Managers I (S,SU) (3,0) This course provides the student with an understanding of the elements of the accounting cycle. It will focus on howthe computer serves managerial needs by providing financial information for decision making in the context of generally accepted accounting principles. Computer Management 205 COBOL Programming II (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: C M P T 189 with at least a " C " grade or by permission of the instructor. An extension of C M P T 189, strengthening the knowledge of COBOL. Areas of study include table handling techniques, master file updates, file maintenance, program instructions related to disk file handling techniques, and programming for efficient execution. Computer Management 208 The "C" Programming Language (Su) (1.5, 0) Students with a background of programming experience in COBOL or dBase will be able to transfer their skills to the " C " language in a microcomputer environment and will study how to write application programs in "C" using most features of the language. Computer Management 223 Microcomputer Applications II (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: B S M G / C M P T 222 Further extends the students' knowledge of managing the computer and its peripherals. Discusses more advanced techniques in known packages and introduces more sophisticated applications such as file recovery, menuing, macros and dBase programming Computer Management 226 Microcomputer Applications III Prerequisite: B S M G / C M P T 223 This course provides a conceptual framework for "leading edge business programs and offers students "hands-on" experience in accounting applications, project manage- ment, etc. Topics include Desk Top Publishing, File Transfers, Handshaking, Local Area Networking and Operating Systems on IBM and Apple technology. Computer Management 230 Introduction to Operating Systems (F) (3,0) An introduction to the micro and mini computer operating systems, particularly the MSDOS, UNIX and MPE environments. Students will gain experience in using highlevel language and learn to make system calls. Instruction will be given on creating and controlling multiple communicating processes in a microcomputer environment. Computer Management 291 Accounting for Managers II (S,F) (3,0) Prerequisite: CMPT 191 or BSMG 178/179 This course will examine managerial planning from the financial viewpoint, taking both the capital and operational perspectives. Computer Management 293 Systems Design (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: CMPT 182 with at least a " C " grade. This course is an extension of C M P T 182 furthering the student's ability to analyze the managerial requirements of information systems. It provides a practical experience in the logical design of on-line systems for business applications. Topics include structured systems analysis and design, data dictionary, and structured charts. Computer Management 296 4GL Programming (F) (1.5,0) A new high-level language has emerged to support data base processing. This course will introduce 4th generation languages using "Powerhouse". The main focus will be the utilization of a data dictionary to drive data entry screens, report writers and batch processing systems. The course is hands-on with numerous exercises utilizing the HP3000. Computer Management 297 Telecommunications (S) (1.5,0) An introduction to the field of data communications and networking, covering aspects of local area networks, protocols and standards, hardware and software components, and PC links. Computer Management 298 Database Design (F) (3,0) sequential access methods, and such data base topics as: elements of a data base administration, data integrity, data security, data dictionaries, and Query facilities. Design considerations will also be discussed, and labs will concentrate on creating accessing (both programatically and Query), and restructuring data bases. BCOP 111 An Overview of Computers and Computing (3,0) Prerequisite: None The fundamental concepts (including the historical perspective) of hardware, software, data organization and the development of Information Systems. BCOP 121 Introduction to Microcomputer Applications (3,0) Prerequisite: None The DOS operating system (purpose and function), word processing, desktop management, basic dBase functions, Procomm and other public domain software. BCOP 131 Introduction to Programming and Programming Logic (3,0) Prerequisite: None This is the foundation course for all programming skills and, as such, must be rigorous. The course uses a computer language to demonstrate the structured programming skills necessary for good programming. BCOP161 Introduction to Business: Concepts, Ethics and Practice (3,0) Prerequisite: None An introduction to the components of business, including various types of businesses and their unique and common qualities. A look at the "systems" of business will be introduced. A n examination of business practices, with respect to Canadian Society and the environment will be undertaken. BCOP 191 General Business and Personal Skills (3,0) Prerequisite: None This course will be given in a modular format. It will include keyboarding skills, study skills, time management skills, reading/speed reading skills, report writing skills and oral presentation skills. Data structures and data management techniques with emphasis on the practical application of data base methodology. Topics will include data structure types, index- Career/Vocational — Business Management 117 BCOP 221 Microcomputer Applications for Development (3,0) BCOP 431 COBOL: A 3rd Generation Language for Development Prerequisite: (3,0) BCOP 121 and BCOP 131 Students will develop applications for spreadsheets and dbase. They will use a graphics package and understand the process of installing software on a microcomputer system. BCOP 231 COBOL: Introduction to a 3rd Generation Language (3,0) Prerequisite: BCOP 131 In addition to the basic COBOL language skills, students will learn how to handle I/O for disk, console and reports. Emphasis will be placed on developing a system of programs over the two C O B O L courses involved. BCOP 242 The Developmental Tools of Information Systems (3,0) Prerequisite: BCOP 111 Case tools, systems development, charting and business hierarchy. BCOP 282 Marketing Concepts In the Computer Industry (3,0) Prerequisite: None An examination of marketing concepts as they apply to the computer industry. Prerequisite: Students will learn how to program for multiple input files, array processing, indexed file processing, copy libraries and external program calls. Emphasis will be placed on developing a system of programs over the two COBOL courses involved. BCOP 441 Info Systems and Project Management: Case Study Part I Prerequisite: Prerequisite: All Term I and II courses BCOP 242 A traditional life-cycle project using a case study approach. BCOP 442 The Management of Data (3,0) Prerequisite: BCOP 242 Data Diagram Modelling, Data Base Design, (enterprise modelling, a top-down view of the organization and control of data). BCOP 451 Computing Stats/Demographics for Marketing Research (3,0) Prerequisite: BCOP 301 Co-op Placement I (3,0) BCOP 231 BCOP 221 & C M P T 155 The course has a component of basic business statistics combined with a marketer's need for information and demographics. Team taught, (would like to include statistical modelling here) BCOP 361 Understanding Management (3,0) Prerequisite: None Students will learn effective management functions and activities, including how to implement and assess planning, staffing, compensating, training, systems/procedures, while establishing positive working relationships. BCOP 411 Computer Operating Systems (3,0) Prerequisite: BCOP 121,131,221,231 An overview of operating systems and examination of their function and purpose. Students will work with AIX (Unix), DOS, OS/2, [MVS] and MPE. Some emphasis will be given on file structures and recovery from hardware and software errors as well as the operating system's Job Control Language. Career/Vocational — Business Management 118 BCOP 471 Accounting: Computers to Control/Track Information (1.5) Prerequisite: CMPT 191 This course is intended to provide the students with hands-on-experience using both Bedford and A C C - P A C . Some emphasis will be given to the theory of Audit controls and how they are implemented. BCOP 501 Co-Op Placement II (3,0) Prerequisite: All terms I, II, III, and IV BCOP 591 BCOP 621 Effective Interpersonal Skills in Organizations (3,0) Using the Computer as a Design Tool (1.5) Prerequisite: Prerequisite: BCOP 121,221 None The effects of individual and group behaviour in organizations. Core topics include motivation, leader behaviour and power, attitude development, perception, work stress and conflict. Students will also study how to apply communication, problem solving and conflict resolution skills towards an organization's overall effectiveness. Research and the Drive to Remain Competitive (1.5) Case Study Part II (3,0) Prequisite: BCOP 441,442 None Students will learn how to remain current in a competitive business world with an innovative use of resources. Use of system design and implementation methodologies in a software engineering project. BCOP 691 BCOP 662 Training Users of Computer Hardware/Software Systems Writing Your Way to Success (1.5) Prerequisite: (1-5) Prerequisite: BCOP 641 Info Systems and Project Management: BCOP 611 Prerequisite: Students will learn the basics of DeskTop Publishing using one of the commercially available packages (eg. Pagemaker). Included in the course will be a component on designing documents for the targeted user. BCOP 121,221, 411 None Develop memo and resume writing skills. This course examines L A N and W A N networks. Students will study value-added data communication systems and examine the protocols and standards employed by the industry. Some time will be given to hardware/software requirements and the actual setting up of a L A N . Career/Vocational — Business Management 119 Contact Person: Crawford Kilian, Coordinator, Office P210. Phone: 986-1911, local 2585. Instructional Faculty H . C L A R K , B.H.E., T.T. Dipl. D. H O L L A N D , B.A. (Ph.) Ottawa, B.Ph. (St. Paul's), D.F.A. (Cambrian) C. KILIAN, B.A. (Columbia), M . A . (SFU) R. KUBICEK, B.A. (Sir George Williams), M . A . (SFU) B. REID, B.A. (Alberta) L. S A V A G E B.A., Dip.Ed. (McGill), M . Ed. (Alberta) A. SEDKY, B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Ain Shams, Cairo) G. W A U G H , B.A. (Reading), M . A . (UBC), Standard Teaching Credentials (UK), B.C. Registered Psychologist M . WITTMAN, B.A. (Toronto), M . A . (UBC) The Communications (CMNS) Department provides training in writing and speech for students in Career/ Vocational programs as well as those wishing to apply specific skills to the world of work. In addition to courses in English basics, C M N S also offers courses in business and report writing, career preparation, public speaking, and freelance writing. Career Opportunities In an information-based economy, good communication skills are a vital asset in any career. Many career-program C M N S courses offer components on effective job search techniques, including resume writing and interviewing. Courses for freelance writers equip students with the basic skills needed to market their work to magazines, newspapers and book publishers. Admission Requirements Students wishing to enrol in a specialized career-program C M N S course must meet the admission standards of that particular program. In some cases students may wish to take the C M N S component before enrolling in the rest of the program. Such students will require permission of the coordinators of both C M N S and the career program in question. Students wishing to enrol in "open" sections of CMNS, such as those offered in the evening, must meet general College admission standards. Special Fees and Expenses Most C M N S classes require no special fees; consult the coordinator if you have questions about such fees in your course. Awards and Scholarships The Lucille Fisher Memorial Scholarship is awarded annually to an outstanding student enrolled in a credit writing course in the fall term. The award is granted as early as possible in the spring term of the same academic year. Course Descriptions Communications 140 Introduction to Interactive Writing (F,S) (1.5, 0) Developing a clear, concise writing style suited to computer communications. Mastering basic editing and rewriting skills. Using a standard word processor. Communicating through electronic bulletin boards, email, and other computer media. Communications 141 Interactive Writing (F,S) (1.5, 0) Mastering the structure of expository, narrative, analytical and argumentive writing. Writing and revising extensive documents for both technical and nontechnical readers. Producing an electronic journal. Communications 142 Advanced Interactive Writring (FS) (1.5,0) Developing skills in computer communications "scriptwriting," planning, outlining, producing and revising extensive elecronic documents. Critiquing other documents. Communications 150 Basic Communications (F,S) (3,0) Development of writing and speaking skills, with material largely related to specific career goals. Extensive practice in improving English basics, many writing assignments, and in some cases a spoken presentation. Communications 152 Report Writing (F,S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Proven English skills. Researching, organizing and presenting information for business and technical reports. Attention to graphics, style and report format. Spoken presentations using audiovisual aids are required. Communications 153 Communications and the Arts (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: C M N S 150 or proven English skills. The use of language in combination with graphic and other arts. Attention to job-search strategies suitable for artists and craftspersons. Career/Vocational — Communications 120 Communications 154 Communications in Recreation (S) (3,0) Communications 280 Marketing Commercial Fiction (F,S) (3,0) Writing and speech related to Outdoor Recreation Management: reports, memorandums, press releases, articles and briefs. Spoken presentations are required. Preparing short stories and novels in commercial genres such as mysteries, romances, thrillers and science fiction. Discussion of the market for such fiction in Canada and the U.S. Students will submit three assignments (such as three short stories or a novel synopsis and two chapters) in marketable form. Students should discuss their plans with the instructor before registering. Communications 156 Communications for the Media Resources Student (S) (3,0) A continuation of C M N S 150 with emphasis on interviewing techniques in applied situations. The course also deals with public speaking and group leadership techniques. Communications 159 Communications for the Legal Secretary (F.S) (3,0) Strong emphasis on English basics (grammar, spelling, punctuation, correct usage), proofreading skills, and business writing. Communications 290 Marketing a Non-Fiction Book (S) (3,0) Planning, organizing, researching and writing a publishable non-fiction book. Survey of potential markets, development of a detailed outline, and production of a proposal including a query letter, outline, and sample chapters to be submitted to an appropriate publisher. Students should discuss their plans with the instructor before registering. Communications 170 Public Speaking (F,S) (3,0) Researching, organizing and presenting different kinds of speeches. Attention to voice training, nonverbal communication, and public speaking in various contexts. Communications 179 Legal Communications (F) (3,0) Intended primarily for students in the Legal Assistant Program. Emphasis is on the styles and formats of writing in law firms, especially letters and contracts. Some attention as well to English basics. Communications 190 Magazine Article Writing (F,S) (3,0) Researching and writing articles for publication in news media and magazines. Analysis of magazine readership, techniques of researching and interviewing, the current market for articles and development of an effective prose style. Students write three articles in suitable format and submit them for publication in established periodicals. Communications 250 Technical Writing (F,S) (3,0) The basic techniques of technical writing for students from business or technical backgrounds: extended definition, process, procedure, description and summary. Intensive work in descriptive writing and vocabulary usage; examination of actual technical reports; study of the role of technical writers in corporate settings. Career/Vocational — Communications 121 Early Childhood Education Contact Person: Lois Rennie, Coordinator, 984-4947 TEN MONTH CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Instructional Faculty R. A N N E , Dip. E.C.E. (Ryerson), Art Therapy (Toronto) J. C L A R K , R.N. (Regina General Hospital), Teaching Dip. (Sask.) J. MOSES, B.A., B.S.W. (McMaster) ECE Cert. M. RAWSTHORNE, B.H.E., M.Ed. (UBC), R.D. L.J. RENNIE B.Sc., Dip. E.C.E. (Brigham Young) Our society is recognizing the importance of the early years in children's development. There is an increasing need in communities for child care services, and for trained staff who can ensure that the children's needs are met in a variety of programs for preschoolers. The Early Childhood Education program prepares students for supervising in these centres. Career Opportunities Graduates of the 10 month program are eligible, upon completion of the 500 hours of work experience required by the Provincial Child Care Facilities Licensing Board, to receive the Preschool Supervisor Certificate which qualifies them to be in charge of a Nursery School or Day Care Centre for 3-5 year olds. They may also be employed in programs for children under three or who have special needs. Additional courses which are needed for Supervisors in these centres are provided in the Post Basic Early Childhood Education programs. The positions obtained by graduates demand a high degree of maturity and interpersonal skill in addition to the ability to plan and implement program activities for young children. Courses are presented in a manner which promotes active participation through labs, practical demonstrations, reports, group projects, role play, and discussions. Students are encouraged to explore their values, beliefs, feelings, and self concepts. It is expected that students will demonstrate professional attitudes and behaviours. Admission Requirements Enquiries to the department may be made at any time. Information meetings for potential applicants are held early in the year. Following these meetings applicants are required to attend a group interview with the Program Coordinator and Instructors. Further interviews may be held in early August, if spaces are available. Candidates must be 19 years of age or older, with Secondary School Graduation. A year or more of life experience following high school usually contributes to the development of the maturity and personal characteristics which are necessary for success in the program and in working with young children and their families. Successful applicants will show evidence of development of interpersonal and life skills, emotional health, and a commitment to young children and their families. Related past work experience and education will be considered. College-level writing and academic skills are essential. Three references are required. Applicants are required to be functional in the English language, and the department reserves the right to assess their competence prior to admission into the program. Applicants are required to present a medical report on a form supplied by the College, plus evidence of the absence of active tuberculosis. Some practicum centres require a Criminal Records check. Special Fees and Expenses The Program Early Childhood Education is a full time 10 month program beginning in the middle of August. Based on the Competencies in Early Childhood Education developed by the Ministry of Education, the foundation of the E.C.E. program is the study of development from birth to adulthood. The history and current philosophies of Early Childhood Education are examined. A n interrelated series of courses focus on the care and guidance of the young child, program planning, and curriculum content. Other areas of study include health and nutrition, interpersonal skills, parent-teacher relationships and community resources. Theory and practice are closely related throughout the program as students spend weekly periods in a variety of settings under the guidance of qualified supervisors. Two five week block practicums are also included. Career/Vocational — Early Childhood Education 122 The student can expect to spend approximately $550 on books and supplies. Additional costs will be incurred for a First Aid course and transportation for practicums. Graduation Requirements Attendance: Early Childhood Education courses are intensive; regular attendance is mandatory. Provincial certification requires the graduate to hold a valid First Aid Certificate. The student is responsible for obtaining this and for presenting it to the coordinator before the end of October. The St. John's Emergency-level Safety Oriented First Aid Certificate or any higher level is acceptable. Continuation into the second term of the program is dependent on the demonstration of an adequate level of interpersonal, academic and teaching/ guiding skills. C is the minimum acceptable grade in all courses. Graduation from the program requires completion of all courses in the program with a 2.0 G P A after the first term. Practicum course grades must be C or higher. Program Content FIRSTTERM C M N S 150 Education 155 Education 170 Education 171 Education 172 Education 173 Education 174 Education 175 Education 176 Credit/Lab Hours Basic Communications 3 Human Growth and Dev. I 3 Interpersonal Skills 1.5 Introduction to E.C.E. 1.5 Guiding Young Children I 1.5 Curriculum Development I 1.5 4 Health 1.5 Observing and Recording 1.5 Applied Theory—Practicum I 3 6 18 10 SECOND T E R M Education 254 Theoretical Perspectives 3 Education 270 Intro, to Working with Families 1.5 Education 271 Intro, to Centre Organization 1.5 Education 272 Guiding Young Children II 1.5 Education 273 Curriculum Development II 1.5 4 Education 274 Nutrition 1.5 Education 275 Human Growth and Dev. 1.5 Education 276 Applied Theory—Practicum II 4 6 Education 277 Applied Theory—Practicum III 4 6 Education 279 Practicum Issues & Practices 1J5 21.5 16 sequence. A schedule is available on request. There are three core courses which are part of both programs. Credit for these courses taken as part of one program means that the student has credit for part of the second program as well. Graduates of the Capilano College 10 month Early Childhood Education program who complete the two Post Basic Programs are eligible for the College Diploma in Arts and Science. For further details and course descriptions, contact the Early Childhood Education Coordinator. Under Three Program Program Content FIRSTTERM *Education 350 Advanced Child Development Education 351 Family, School & Community (only available in Fall 91) Education 355 Physical Care & Safety Education 356 Under Three Practicum A Education 357 Under Three Practicum B SECOND TERM *Education 352 Centre Operations Education 353 Program Planning Education 356 Under Three Practicum A Education 357 Under Three Practicum B E.C.E. Post Basic Programs Special Needs Program The Early Childhood Education "Under Three" Program and the E.C.E. Special Needs Program are two evening part-time programs for persons who have already completed a basic program in Early Childhood Education. Candidates must cither hold a Preschool Supervisor Certificate from the Provincial Child Care Facilities Licensing Board or be in the process of completing the required 500 hours work experience. Program Content Completion of the Under Three Program qualifies students for the PCCFLB Infant/Toddler Preschool Supervisor Certificate. Completion of the Special Needs Program qualifies students for the PCCFLB Special Needs Preschool Supervisor Certificate. 2.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 15 8.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 15 6.5 FIRST TERM Credit Hours *Education 352 Advanced Child Development 2.0 Education 358 Special Needs Practicum A 1.5 Education 359 Special Needs Practicum B 1.5 5.0 SECOND TERM *Education 352 Centre Operations Education 358 Special Needs Practicum A Education 359 Special Needs Practicum B 2.0 1.5 1.5 5.0 *These courses apply to both the Under Three & Special Needs Programs Each of the two programs consists of seven courses including two practicums. Courses are scheduled in the late afternoon and evening to accommodate persons who are working full-time. Some flexibility is possible in scheduling the daytime practicum in order to meet the needs of individual students. Courses in these two programs are scheduled on a twoyear rotation. Students can begin at any time in the Career/Vocational — Early Childhood Education 123 Course Descriptions Education 155 Human Growth and Development I (F) (3,0) The first half of a two-part sequence. Course material spans the period from conception through the preschool years and examines physical and motor development, cognitive, language, and affective growth and development. A n introductory study of theories, principles of development, and child study techniques is included. Education 170 Interpersonal Skills (F) (1.5,0) A n introductory two -week course in which students gain an understanding of basic communication principles and techniques. Practice in the application of these skills is included. Education 171 Introduction to Early Childhood Education (F) (1.5,0) A two week course which introduces the student to many aspects of programs for the young child and the role of the preschool teacher. Course content includes discussion of philosophy and goals, scheduling, arranging play spaces, the important role of play, and knowing children as individuals. Basic play activities are examined with respect to learning values, equipment, preparation, and teacher guidance. Education 172 Guiding Young Children I (F) (1,5,0) This course develops a theoretical framework of guidance principles and techniques and examines their application. It also discusses the significance of routines in the day care centre program, and describes procedures and teacher guidance in these situations. Education 173 Curriculum Development I (F) (1.5,4) The first of a two part sequence in which curriculum areas are explored. This course is based on the philosophy that play provides the foundation for children's growth and development The course is closely coordinated with the concurrent practicum course so that students have particular children in mind as they plan goals, developmentally appropriate activities and materials, and teaching strategies. Building a curriculum resource file is a significant component of this course. Education 174 Health (F) (1.5,0) The course is designed to familiarize students with some of the common childhood illnesses. Particular emphasis Career/Vocational — Early Childhood Education 124 is placed on the management of the young child with a health problem in a preschool setting. The course also includes preventive health measures, and the symptoms of common childhood illnesses and communicable diseases. Education 175 Observing and Recording (F) (1.5,0) A course which develops skill in objectively observing and recording the behaviour of young children. Weekly supervised observations form the major part of the course. Different kinds of observational techniques are explored. The uses of teacher observations are examined. Education 176 Applied Theory-Practicum I (F) (3,6) The first of three practicum courses. In this course the student spends two mornings per week in a practicum centre, arranged by the College, working under the supervision of a qualified supervisor. A n instructor also observes the student working in the centre. Assignments are integrated with the course work in Education 173. Students plan, implement, and evaluate activities. Classroom discussion once a week helps the student integrate theory and practice. Education 254 Theoretical Perspectives (S) (3,0) This course provides an introduction to educational philosophy recognizing historical, sociological and psychological influences. Major contemporary issues will be examined. Cross culture approaches to early childhood education will be discussed. Education 270 Introduction to Working with Families (S) (1.5,0) This course is designed to develop a beginning understanding of the significance and complexity of an effective relationship between the early childhood educator and the child's family. The student is helped to identify needs, feelings, values, and expectations of parents, to plan for the introduction of new families to the centre, to clarify roles of family and staff, to further develop communication skills, to examine similarities and differences in customs and values in various ethnic and religious groups, to recognize personal values, and to identify the essence of a professional relationship with parents. Education 271 Introduction to Centre Organization (S) (1.5,0) An introductory look at some of the administrative aspects of operating a centre for young children. This course assumes a knowledge of curriculum and daily program planning, and identifies necessary functions relating indirectly to children, e.g. handling finances, hiring staff, leadership and management, cleaning and maintenance, policies and procedures, etc. The Provincial legislation regulating child care is examined. Steps to opening a centre will also be discussed. Education 272 Guiding Young Children II (S) (1.5,0) This is a follow up to Education 172 and will extend the student's repertoire of guidance/teaching techniques. The focus is on responding to the needs of the individual child and on fostering prosocial behaviour and a positive self concept. The student will develop skill in writing behavioural goals, and planning for their achievement. Planning effectively for the new child in the group is also included. Education 273 Curriculum Development II (S) (1.5,4) of activity planning and teaching/guiding young children. Education 277 Applied Theory - Practicum III (S) (4,6) This is the final course of the E.C.E. program, taken after completion of all other courses in the program. The student consolidates and extends the skills developed earlier. It is a full day block practicum of five weeks duration. Weekly classes again link theory to its practical application. Education 279 Practicum Issues & Practices (S) (1.5,0) This course will examine two significant current practices in ECE - infants and toddlers in group centre and the integration of children with special needs in typical centres. Issues surrounding child abuse will be discussed. "Let's Talk About Touching" program will be incorporated. Post Basic Program A continuation of Education 173. The student will acquire further knowledge, experience and skill in planning, implementing and evaulating curriculum activities to enhance the development of the whole child. It is recognized that each child's cultural heritage must be valued and, therefore, visible throughout the curriculum. This course is closely coordinated with Education 276/277. This course will focus on the growth and development of infants, toddlers, and special needs children. Education 274 Nutrition (S) (1.5,0) Education 355 Physical Care and Safety (F) (1.5,0) A n introduction to the basic nutrients and their role in human physiology, and the special requirements of the preschool child for optimum health. The second part of the course deals with the planning and preparation of foods and snacks for the preschool child, food storage, and food safety. The student will develop an awareness of the teacher's role in preparing a safe, sanitary environment and planning routine procedures through which the child's basic needs can be met in a centre for children under three years of age. Education 275 Human Growth and Development II (S) (1.5,0) A continuation of Education 155 following the preschooler through the middle years of childhood, adolescence, and into adulthood. Education 276 Applied Theory-Practicum II (S) (4,6) This is a full time block practicum of five weeks duration. The student works under the guidance of a qualified early childhood educator in a centre selected by the College. An instructor also observes the student. Classroom discussion is focused on integrating theory and practice. Assignments are designed to extend the developing skills FIRSTTERM Education 350 Advanced Child Development (F) (2,0) Education 356 Under Three Practicum A (F,S) (1.5,0) This is the first of a two part sequence in which the student will work with "Under Threes" in a group setting. Previously developed skills will be extended and adapted to infants and toddlers. Emphasis will be placed on the development of strategies to promote self-esteem, language, social behaviour and self-help skills. Education 357 Under Three Practicum B (F,S) (1.5,0) This is the second of a two part "Under Three" Practicum sequence. The student will "fine tune" her/his ability to work with both children and adults in a day care program for children under three years of age. Career/Vocational — Early Childhood Education 125 Health and Human Services Education 358 Special Needs Practicum A (F,S) (1.5,0) This is the first of a two part sequence in which the student will work with children with special needs in an integrated or specialized setting. Emphasis will be placed on the development of strategies to promote the child's self-esteem, developing communications, self-help and cognitive skills. Education 359 Special Needs Practicum B (F,S) (1.5,0) This is the second of a two part Special Needs Practicum sequence. The student will extend her/his ability to plan a program for an individual child and the group in an integrated or specialized setting. Communication with parents, staff and children will be emphasized. SECOND T E R M Education 352 'Centre Operation (S) (2,0) The student will develop an understanding of administration tasks. Leadership and supervisory roles necessary to operate a child care centre will be explored. Education 353 Program Planning for Under Threes (S) (1.5,0) The focus will be on planning schedules, routines, and program activities for infants and toddlers. Individual and small group activities which promote self-esteem, language, social behaviours and self-help skills will be planned. Goal setting and effective guidance will be discussed. Education 356,357, 358,359 See First Term "Education 350 and Education 352 are core courses and are, therefore, components of both the Under Three and Special Needs Programs. Courses offered in 1991/1992 will complete the two year rotation enabling students to qualify for either or both Infant/Toddler Preschool Supervisor Certificate, Special Needs Preschool Supervisor Certificate. Contact People: Margot Rawsthorne, Coordinator, Office: C119, Phone: 986-1911, local 2201; Arlene Miller, Receptionist; Judith Weiss, Divisional Assistant, Office: CI, Phone: 984-4947 Instructional Faculty T. ADLER, B.A. (Toronto), M.S.W. (UBC) S. ENGELBERT, B.A., R.N. B. MILLER, R.N. M. RAWSTHORNE, M.Ed. (UBC), R.D.N. K. TAYLOR, R.N. C. T W E E N , R.N. LONG TERM CARE AIDE PROGRAM FOUR MONTH CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Career Opportunities The proportion of elderly in the population is evergrowing; services to the handicapped are increasing. Consequently, there is a steady demand for qualified men and women to work full-time or part-time in this field. Graduates of the full-time program qualify to work with long term care clients in a variety of settings: 1. Group homes for physically handicapped adults 2. Personal care residences 3. Intermediate care residences 4. Extended care facilities The Program Capilano College offers a four month full-time certificate program recognized throughout British Columbia. This program is designed to provide students with the opportunity to qualify to work with long term care clients in a variety of settings. Two programs a year are offered: September to December, and January to April. Applications are considered in October for the January Program and in April for the September Program. All students who are interested in the Long Term Care Aide program must attend an Information Meeting. This meeting takes place in October for the January program, and in April for the September program. Admission Requirements 1. Desire to work with people requiring long term care. 2. Good physical and mental health (a Medical Certificate and T.B. test are necessary). 3. Grade 10 English or equivalent. (Applicants may be required to complete a reading comprehension test). 4. Minimum age 19. 5. Current First Aid and CPR Certificates. Career/Vocational — Health and Human Services 126 Graduation Requirements Program Content Attendance: The four month Long Term Care Aide program is intensive - regular attendance is mandatory. L T C A students must obtain a minimum of B- in L T C A 003, a credit in L T C A 004 and must possess FIRST AID and CPR certificates on the date of graduation to obtain the Long Term Care Aide Certificate. L T C A 006 Fees and Expenses L T C A 007 L T C A 008 Level I: Basic nutrition, food safety and work simplification Level II: Special diets, portion control, and texture modification Level III: Communication in the L T C facility 2. Working with the Mentally Fragile Financial Aid is available to eligible students. This is a series of evening sessions designed for employees and health professionals working with the mentally fragile in clinical or residential settings. A Capilano College certificate is given to all students who complete a course. Offered in the Fall term, in September, October and November. Awards and Scholarships Admission Requirements The L T C A program offers the Rosalind Brossard Scholarship. 1. Employment or interest in working with the mentally fragile. 2. Grade 10 English or equivalent. L T C A 003 L T C A 004 Tuition = $461.25 (in 1990) Uniform & shoes = $80.00 approximately Text & Student Handbook = $70.00 Other equipment = $55.00 Program Content LTCA 003 L T C A 004 Long Term Care Aide Theory Long Term Care Aide Practicum PART-TIME EVENING PROGRAMS 1. Food Service Workers Program The Food Service Workers Program, an upgrading evening program, is open to all food service employees involved in institutional food preparation and service. It is designed to help employees who do not have formal training in the food service field, and is of particular interest to those who are employed in Long Term Care facilities. A Capilano College certificate is given to all students who complete a course. The Food Service Workers Program is offered in the Spring term, in March, April and May. Admission Requirements 1. Employment as a Food Service Worker. 2. Grade 10 English or equivalent Special Fees and Expenses $30.00 approximate fee for following courses: L T C A 006, L T C A 007, L T C A 008 Note: Each course receives 0.5 credit, and fees are calculated according to the College Calendar. Graduation Requirements Attendance at all classes is mandatory to obtain a certificate for the part-time evening courses. Special Fees and Expenses $30.00 approximate fee for the following courses: L T C A 011, L T C A 012, L T C A 013 Note: Each course receives 0.5 credits and fees are calculated according to the College Calendar. Graduation Requirements Attendance at all classes is mandatory to obtain a certificate for the part-time evening courses. Program Content L T C A 011 L T C A 012 L T C A 013 Preventative handling of aggression Managing stress The confused elderly Course Descriptions LTCA 003 LTC Aide Theory (F.S) (15,0) Effective communication with the long term care client and members of the health care team. Ethical and professional standards of behaviour. Growth and development of the long term care client. Need for: Nutrition, Sexuality, Sensory Stimulation, Security/Self-esteem, Protection and Safety, Rest and Activity, Elimination, Oxygen LTCA 004 Long Term Care Aide Practice (F,S) (0.0) Application of knowledge and skills in supervised laboratory and clinical settings. Career/Vocational — Health and Human Services 127 Landscape Horticulture LTCA 006 Food Service Worker, Level I (S) (.5) 1. Basic nutrition 2. Nutritional needs of the elderly (affected by medica tion, age) 3. Food Safety-food handling and storage (cleaning and schedules) 4. Personal hygiene and cleanliness 5. Work simplification (making the job easier) LTCA 007 Food Service Worker, Level II (S) (.5) 1. Special diets: Diabetic, Low Salt, Low Fat, Ethnic 2. Portion control 3. The Meaning of Food to Residents 4. Texture modification LTCA 008 Food Service Worker, Level III (S) (.5) 1. Myths and realities of aging 2. Effective communications at work 3. Solving problems in communication LTCA 013 I. The Confused Elderly (F) (.5) 1. The signs of confusion in the elderly client 2. Causes of temporary confusion and the causes of permanent confusion 3. The point of view of the confused elderly person 4. Possible behaviours of the confused elderly and their meaning 5. Effective ways of responding to the confused elderly in providing care and managing their behaviour LTCA 011 II. Preventing and Handling Aggressive Behaviour (F)(.5) 1. The basic principles of behaviour 2. Disturbing and aggressive behaviours of elderly clients 3. The thoughts, feelings, and conditions giving rise to disturbing and aggressive behaviours 4. Specific strategies for interventions to prevent and/or handle disturbing and aggressive behaviour LTCA 012(F) (.5) III. Managing Stress and Burn-out on the Job 1. The signs and causes of stress and burn-out on the job 2. Self-perceptions as care-givers 3. Develop a personal strategy for dealing with the factors giving rise to stress so as to prevent burn-out. Contact People: L. KOSKITALO, Coordinator, B.Sc. (U. of M.), Ph.D. (UBC), 986-1911, local 2213 R. WELSH, Instructor, Dip. Landscape Tech. (B.C.l.T.), 986-1911, local 2204 ]. WEISS, Divisional Assistant, 986-1911, local 2208, or 984-4947 ONE YEAR CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Career Opportunities Graduates of the Applied Landscape/Horticulture program find employment in many areas of horticulture including: municipal parks, golf courses, residential and commercial landscape installation and/or maintenance; garden centre sales, nursery and greenhouse operations. The Program The objective of the Applied Landscape/Horticulture program is to provide individuals with the basic skills and knowledge prerequisite to beginning a career in landscaping or landscape-related industries. This full-time 8 month certificate program integrates horticultural theory with practice; the first term emphasizing theory and the second term practical applications. Due to the popular nature of the program, and its limited enrollment, prospective students are advised to contact the Horticulture department by late April to arrange to attend our mid-May INFORMATION MEETING. Interested students may arrange for a student/instructor interview time at the conclusion of this Information Meeting. Admission Requirements 1. All prospective students are required to attend a student/instructor interview prior to acceptance into the program. Interviews are held in mid-May. Further interviews may be held in mid-August, if spaces in the program are available. Students who are unable to attend the interview should contact the program coordinator to make alternative arangements. 2. Applicants must be at least 19 years of age and should have a genuine interest and desire for commencing or continuing a career in horticulture. 3. The minimum educational prerequisite is grade 10, with grade 12 preferred. Students not proficient in basic mathematics may be required to take a math upgrading course. 4. Applicants should be in reasonable health and physical condition. 5. Successful applicants will show evidence of development of interpersonal skills and emotional health. Career/Vocational — Landscape Horticulture 128 Special Fees and Expenses Course Descriptions In addition to the program tuition, students will incur further expenses of approximately $500.00 for books, personal work gear and equipment, certification fees, conference and membership fees. Horticulture 101 Introductory Horticulture (F) (3,2) Graduation Requirements Due to the intense nature of the program, regular fulltime attendance is crucial. Students are expected to attend and participate in all classes and program activities. Students with poor attendance may be required to withdraw. Participation in all field trips, including the 3day orientation field trip, is compulsory. Students must attain a minimum aggregate G.P.A. of 2.3, must possess a valid B.C. pesticide dispenser or acceptable applicator certificate, and attain a minimum 60% standing in plant materials to successfully complete the program. This course details commercial horticulture in B.C., covers basic plant science theory, deals with work site safety and develops basic horticultural skills including the use and proper care of hand tools, day to day greenhouse operations, planting and watering techniques. Students participate in a 3-day orientation field trip near the beginning of this course. Students also participate in a WCB certified survival first aid practicum. Horticulture 102 Plant Materials I (F) (5,0) An introduction to woody and herbaceous ornamentals including deciduous trees and shrubs, conifers, broadleaf evergreens, bulbs, and ground covers. This course emphasizes identification, landscape values and requirements of the plant materials studied. Awards and Scholarships The Applied Horticulture Bursary for $500.00 is presented at the beginning of the second term. Applications for this award will be received in mid-December, the award being based upon: • first term marks • program participation • financial need The B.C. Council of Garden Clubs Scholarship for $500.00 is presented at the beginning of the second term. This scholarship is awarded to the student who has demonstrated excellence in terms of scholastics and programs involvement. FIRST TERM Credit/Lab Hours Hoit. 101 Introductory Horticulture 3 2 Hort. 102 Plant Materials I 5 Hon. 103 Growing Media & Fertilizers 2 1 Hort. 104 Plant Protection & Pesticide Management 2 Hort. 105 Plant Production 2 2 Hort. 106 Landscape Irrigation & Drainage 2 1 Hort. 107 P & T Gardens Practicum 2 16 8 SECOND T E R M Hort. 108 Landscape Design Hort. 109 Plant Materials II Hort. 110 Turfgrass Management Hort. I l l Business Practices Hort. 112 Landscape Maintenance Hort. 113 Landscape Const. & Installation Hort. 114 P & T Gardens Practicum Horticulture 103 Growing Media & Fertilizers (F) (2,1) This course is designed to provide students with the media science knowledge necessary for the production and maintenance of plants in the greenhouse, nursery and landscape. Horticulture 104 Plant Protection and Pesticide Management (F) (2,0) The objective of this course is to create an understanding of pests and pest management practices. Students conclude this course by writing the B.C.Ministry of Environment General Dispenser and Landscape Applicator pesticide certification examinations. Horticulture 105 Plant Production (F) (2.,2) To acquaint students with greenhouse and nursery production systems and methods. Topics will include: plant propagation, greenhouse production and nursery stock production. Students will successfully produce a number of specific greenhouse and nursery crops. Horticulture 106 Landscape Irrigation and Drainage (F) (2,1) 1 5 3 1.5 1.5 3 0 15 2 2 3 5 2 14 This course is designed to familiarize the student with the basics of turf and drip irrigation systems as well as basic landscape drainage systems. Students learn how to install, operate and maintain landscape irrigation systems. Career/Vocational — Landscape Horticulture 129 Legal Assistant Horticulture 107 P & T Gardens Practicum (F) (0,2) This is a scheduled landscape maintenance work experience at Park and Tilford Gardens with a pass/fail status. The objectives of the practicum are to develop a professional work ethic, to master basic gardening skills and to learn to complete tasks effectively and in a timely manner. Horticulture 108 Landscape Design (S) (1,2) A highly practical introductory course in design theory and practices; plan reading and revisions; and basic design skills. Course materials are presented by means of lectures, visuals, projects and specific practicum labs. Horticulture 109 Plant Materials II (S) (5,0) A continuation of Hort 102 with the emphasis on conifers, broadleaf evergreens, annuals and perennials. Horticulture 110 Turfgrass Management (S) (3,2) A n introductory turfgrass course dealing with the selection of grasses for turfs, turfgrass installation, and maintenance, (includes fertilization, irrigation, moving, cultivation, pest control) practices for residential, and large area turfs. Horticulture 111 Business Practices (S) (1.5,0) Deals with business establishment, business organizations, business operations, landscape estimating, quotations and contracts. Job search, job applications, resumes and interviews are also discussed. Horticulture 112 Landscape Maintenance (S) (1.5, 3) A largely applied course covering plant installation and common landscape maintenance practices. Topics include: pruning, planting and transplanting, mulches, and methods of fertilization. Horticulture 113 Landscape Construction and Installation (S) (3,5) Course topics include: site preparation, use of aggregates, and construction of walks, steps, retaining walls, fences, trellises, and use of paving materials. The majority of the course time is spent on field installation work. Horticulture 114 P & T Gardens Practicum (S) (0,2) A continuation of Hort. 107. Career/Vocational — Legal Assistant Program 130 Contact: 986-1911, local 2726 TWO YEAR ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA Instructional Faculty D. C O C H R A N , B.A., LL.B. (UBC), Cert. Ed., M.A. Ed. (SFU) V. C O C H R A N , LL.B. (UBC), External Co-ordinator A. D U M O U L I N , B.A., LL.B. (UBC) W. ENWRIGHT, B.F.A., M.F.A. (UBC) LL.B. (McGill) J. FAIRLIE, B. Mus., LL.B. (UBC) D. PHILLIPS, Internal Co-ordinator D. T H O M S O N , B.SC., LL.B. (Queens) G. W A U G H , B.A. (Reading), M.A. (UBC), Standard Teaching Credentials (UK), B.C. Registered Psychologist Support Staff M. M A C K A Y , Divisional Assistant R. BERGNER, Receptionist A legal assistant, while working under the supervision of a lawyer, is capable of originating work and making decisions. This person has knowledge of both procedural and substantive law. Some examples of work functions are: interviewing clients; drafting pleadings, wills, probate, conveyancing and corporate documents; legal research; file management; assisting in trial preparation. Career Opportunities Graduates of the program will find challenging careers working as legal assistants in law offices, government agencies, and corporate legal departments. The program has been in operation for thirteen years and has a 90% placement rate. (This figure may fluctuate for any one graduating class depending on the economy.) The Program Upon completion of the two year program, students must complete a six month practicum under the supervision of a lawyer. Students are paid during this practicum by their employer. At the end of a successful practicum, the student is eligible for graduation. Faculty work closely with students and with the legal community to ensure successful practicum placements. Faculty maintain close contacts with the legal community, and several faculty members are practising lawyers. As well, support is provided by an external Advisory Committee, which provides information on recent developments in the legal community, and offers advice on topics ranging from curriculum changes to job placement of graduates. Members of the Advisory Committee include representatives from the Law Society of British Columbia, the Canadian Bar Association, private law firms, a government agency, and crown corporations. Admissions Requirements Prospective applicants may apply by telephoning 986-1911, local 2726. All names will be recorded and applicants will receive an invitation to an information meeting, and a formal admission procedures outline. All applicants will be required to have a personal interview. Admission to the program is based on an interest in law, maturity, educational and/or work background, and commitment to the Legal Assistant Program. There are 35 seats available in the Legal Assistant Program. Interviews are conducted until the program is full, and are normally held each year from February through May. Special Fees and Expenses The student can expect to spend approximately $800.00 per year on books and photocopying expenses. Since regular use of a law library is necessary for research purposes, students should include necessary transportation expenses. Financial assistance may be available in the form of student loans and bursaries. Information on these is available at the Registrar's office. SECOND TERM LGAS 152 Litigation Proc. II LGAS 156 Introduction to Evidence LGAS 157 Wills & Probate LGAS 254 Torts II LGAS 255 Real Property C M N S 179 Communications THIRD TERM LGAS 172 Legal Drafting I LGAS 179 Legal Interviewing LGAS 180 Contracts I LGAS 256 Family Law LGAS 264 Canadian Insurance Law LGAS 271 Administrative Law FOURTH TERM LGAS 153 Corporate Procedures LGAS 174 Legal Drafting II LGAS 181 Contracts II LGAS 253 Company Law LGAS 262 Lit. Procedures III L C A S 199 Career Practicum Total Credits: Academic Transfer: Computer Course: Diploma Requirement: 1.5 1.5 3 3 3 3 15 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 4.5 3 3 3 3 16.5 3 67.5 3 3 73.5 Graduation Requirements LEGAL ASSISTANT PART-TIME OPTION Regular attendance is necessary. Students must successfully complete all Legal Assistant courses offered (67.5 credits). Students must also complete 3 credits of University Transfer 100 level courses and 3 credits of computer training equivalent to BSMG 1801. These courses may be completed at any accredited post-secondary institution. This is a part-time evening program designed for students with at least two years legal experience, who are presently working in a law office. In addition all students must complete a 6 month practicum, and receive a "Pass" grade prior to graduation. The Legal Assistant Part-time Option courses start in September, January, and May. Contact the Legal Assistant Program area at 986-1911, local 2726 for registration deadline information. To be eligible to go out on a practicum students must maintain a cumulative 3.0 G P A . Program Content Legal Assistant Courses: University Transfer: Computer Course : FIRSTTERM LGAS 150 Intro to Study of Law LCAS162 Litigation Procedures I LGAS 170 Legal Research LGAS 176 Legal Office Procedures LGAS 252 Torts I Credit Hours 67.5 3 3 73.5 3 3 3 3 Those without a legal background may be admitted to a single course after consultation with the coordinator. Certificate Requirements In order to attain the Legal Assistant Part-time Option Certificate students must successfully complete 39 credits. Thirty-three of these credits must be chosen from substantive Legal Assistant Courses. Students must also complete six credits of University Transfer courses at a 100 level or one three credit 100 level university transfer course and 3 credits of computer training equivalent to BSMG 180. 3 15 Career/Vocational — Legal Assistant Program 131 Legal Assistant Part-time Option Courses LGAS 150 LGAS 151 LGAS 170 L G A S 172 L G A S 180 LGAS 181 LGAS 182 LGAS 252 L G A S 253 LGAS 254 LGAS 255 LGAS 256 LGAS 268 LGAS 264 LGAS 271 Introduction to Study of Law Evidence Legal Research Legal Drafting Contracts I Contracts II Creditors' Remedies Torts I Company Law Torts II Real Property Family Law Criminal Law Canadian Insurance Law Administrative Law Course Descriptions LGAS 150 Introduction to the Study of Law (F) (3,0) Introduction to legal concepts and legal reasoning. The course will cover the historical development of legal institutions and the principles of common law and equity, the interpretation of statutes, and an analysis of the system; its strengths and weaknesses. Transferable to SFU. LGAS 151 Evidence (S) (3,0) An introduction to the law of evidence. Although some statutes will be considered, emphasis will be on case law and current developments in the law. LGAS 152 Litigation Procedures II (S) (1.5,0) Prerequisite: LGAS 156 Introduction to Evidence (S) (1.5,0) This course is an introduction to the law of evidence including relevancy, materiality, admissibility, opinion evidence, etc. LGAS 157 Wills & Probate Procedures (S) (3,0) An examination of the Wills Act, the Administration Act, and Wills Variation Act. Students will prepare the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate and Letters of Administration. Students will also learn how to deal with assets after Letters Probate or Administration have been obtained. LGAS 162 Litigation Procedures I (F) (3,0) Introduction to procedures in the courts of B.C. The course will cover procedures in pre-trial preparation of documents, and the use of precedents in litigation. LGAS170 Legal Research (F,S,SU) (3,0) Provides the student with the techniques and methodology of legal research and will include functions such as reading briefs and legal documents; using encyclopedia, annotated reports, law reviews, case comments; locating decisions. LGAS 172 Legal Drafting I (F,S) (3,0) Course work includes drpfting of agreements, statements of claim and defences, letters and memos, and a study of the rules of statutory interpretation. Emphasis will be placed on developing different writing styles, rather than obtaining a detailed knowledge of specific areas of law. L G A S 162 This course is designed for legal assistants assisting in a litigation practice. The rules of court will be studied in detail from the beginning of a process to trial. LGAS 174 Legal Drafting II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: LGAS 172 LGAS 153 Basic Corporate Procedures (S) (4.5,0) A continuation of the work begun in LGAS 172; students will draft more complex documentation. An examination of the B.C. Company Act and the various documents required to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Records office requirements, annual proceedings, preparing share certificates and registrations will also be covered. Differences between reporting and non-reporting companies will be studied. Procedures relating to the listing and trading of securities are also examined. LGAS 176 Legal Office Procedures (F) (3,0) Career/Vocational — Legal Assistant Program 132 Practical information about the organization of legal offices. Instruction in timekeeping, filing and communications systems, use of data processing equipment in law offices, ethical responsibility of legal assistants and legal terminology will be covered. LGAS 179 Legal Interviewing (F) (3,0) of rights and duties of officers, directors, and shareholders, as well as an analysis of provincial securities practice. This course will give an understanding of the role of the legal assistant and of the process of legal interviewing. Students will acquire skills in conducting various types of interviews. LGAS 254 Torts II (S) (3,0) LGAS 180 Contracts I (F) (3,0) This is a continuation of L G A S 252. Intentional torts are studied, including false imprisonment and assault and battery. As well, nuisance, defamation, and recovery of pure economic loss are analyzed. The objective of this course is to give the students a general understanding of the fundamental principles of contract law, including offer and acceptance, certainty, intention, consideration, privity capacity and public policy. LGAS 181 Contracts II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: L G A S 180 This course is a continuation of LGAS 180; Topics include frustration, breach, misrepresentation, mistake, and remedies. LGAS 182 Creditors' Remedies (F) (3,0) Discussion of the principles, practice and information gathering procedures necessary to realize on judgments. The case method will be used and students are expected to be familiar with the documentation used in the above process. LGAS 199 Career Practicum (F,S,SU) (3,1) Prerequisite: 3.0 Cumulative G P A This is the work portion of the Career Practicum and consists of six months in a law firm. This course include classroom seminars and instructor/student consultations. Students will be assisted by the instructor in finding a practicum, but it is the student's responsibility to obtain a practicum position. This practicum must be commenced within 2 years of completing the Legal Assisant course requirements. LGAS 252 Torts (F,S) (3,0) An introductory study of "torts" - the protection of personal interest from interference and the way in which the courts meet this need in a changing society. Principal topic to be studied is the law of negligence. LGAS 253 Company Law (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: LGAS 252 LGAS 255 Real Property (F,S) (3,0) A review of the common law relating to real property as modified by legislation will be studied in this course using the case analysis method. LGAS 256 Family Law (F.S) (3,0) Law and the family: marriage and its dissolution; rights and duties of spouses and parents; custody; access, guardianship, and adoption. LGAS 262 Litigation Procedures III (S) (3,0) Prerequisites: LGAS 152 and 162 This course covers divorce, Family Relations Act, and small claims procedures. LGAS 264 Canadian Insurance Law (F,S) (3,0) An overview of Canadian Insurance law including structure of the industry, insurable interest, valuation, subrogation, contribution and indemnity and duty to disclose. I.C.B.C. procuedures will also be reviewed. LGAS 268 Criminal Law (S) (3,0) Substantive elements of selected criminal offences and consideration of various defences. The effect of the Charter of Rights on rights of the accused will be also studied. This course will receive 3 general elective credits at SFU. LGAS 271 Administrative Law (F,S) (3,0) The law relating to administrative tribunals in Canada. The rules of natural justice and fairness will be examined as well as judicial review of decisions and administrative tribunals. Emphasis will be on provincial administative tribunals and the effect of the Charter of Rights in this area. The law relating to business associations. A n examination Career/Vocational — Legal Assistant Program 133 Media Resources Contact Person: 984-4940 TWO YEAR ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA Instructional Faculty J.V. BIZZOCCHI, B.A. (Michigan), Teaching Cert. (Sec.) (Michigan), Video Production (Banff Centre) M. F E A R O N , B.A.. (Mount Allison), M.A. (UBC) P. K E L L I N G T O N , Film Studies (UBC) A.A.S., Media Spec. Cert. (Capilano) A. MORLEY, B.A., Dip. Ed. (London U.) A.A.S., Media Spec. Cert. (Capilano) B. M A Y L O N E J. M O O R E , B.Sc. (McGill), M.A. (McGill) B. REID, B.A. (Alta.) S. ROGERS, B.A. (Ryerson) P. T H O M P S O N , B.A. (Stanford), M.Ed., Teaching Cert. (Minnesota) J. WESTENDORP, B.F.A. (UBC) In recent years there has been an increasing awareness of the importance of the media in communications, industry and education. Consequently there is a growing market for personnel with the appropriate training and attitude for work in these fields. Career Opportunities In 20 years of operation, approximately 80% of the Media Resources graduates have become employed in related fields within six months of graduation. Our graduates are currently working in a variety of settings as media producers and A / V directors for a variety of educational institutions, private companies, and other organizations; production and administration staff; news and film editors; and freelance producers. The Program FILM, P H O T O G R A P H Y , VIDEO, AUDIO and C O M P U T ERS are vital components of the media mix used in all levels of educational and instructional communication. The Media Resources Program is a two-year program training students for current and developing applications of media technologies. In areas of education, commercial and community media, there is an increasing readiness to use new techniques to foster learning, growth, and social interaction. Capilano College's Media Resources Program prepares students for work and leadership in this growing media resources field. The core of the program is production training. Students are taught standards of excellence and effectiveness in all forms of educational production work. Basic technical Career/Vocational — Media Resources 134 skills are taught in all media areas, and a large number of projects are completed by students during their training. In this way students are prepared for a wide range of practical work possibilities, rather than simply a proficiency in theory. The program involves more than technical skills. Courses also develop knowledge and skills in communication, learning theory, instructional design, the uses of media in education, the maintenance and purchasing of equipment, and resources distribution. The program's instructional design reflects its practical goals. Workshop methods, hands-on training and field trips are used throughout the program. The College's training facilities are equipped with a broad variety of standard audiovisual equipment. This ensures that students are ready to do quality work with the types of equipment presently used in educational instruction, training, and community facilities. Admission Requirements The Media Resources Program consists of four terms of study. New students are admitted each September in a class of 28. Persons over 18 years of age or with secondary school graduation are eligible for admission to the College and this program. Application forms are available from the department and at Information Meetings held between November and April. Applicants will be contacted for an interview in the January-May period and, if there are places available, in August. Interviews are conducted until the class is filled. Admission is based on general ability, interest in media, noteworthy experience, previous work, education, and commitment to the Media Resources Program. It is highly recommended that applicants to the Media Resources Program take Media 065 (Media Studies) and a media production course (such as filmmaking, photography, slide-tape, or video production) prior to applying to the Program. Everyone admitted to Media Resources must take Media 065 during the first term in the program (unless Media 065 or an equivalent university-level film history course has been taken). Special Fees and Expenses Students may expect to pay approximately $5000.00 for tuition, fees, materials and textbooks during the two-year program. Graduation Requirements In order to graduate from the Media Resources Program, the student must successfully complete all the component courses. Professional Standards All Media Resources students are required to adhere to high standards of academic performance and professional behaviour (as described in the booklet Media Resources Department Guidelines). Program Content Credit/Lab Hours Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements FIRST T E R M C M N S 150 Basic Communications Graphics- Media Specialist Media 152 Basic Audio Production Media 181 Photographic Production Media 183 Research Methods Media 189 Instructional Design Media 190 Media Selection & Utilization Media 191 Applications of Photography Media 195 SECOND T E R M Introduction to Filmmaking Media 157 Small Format Television Media 171 Media 172 Video Technology I Ed. Media Applications: Audio Media 173 Advanced Audio Production Media 182 Advanced Photography Media 185 Computers in Media Prod. Media 186 THIRD T E R M Filmmaking Prod. Techniques Media 253 Slide/Tape Production Media 260 Media 271 Educational T.V. Systems Video Technology II Media 272 Visual Concepts- Filmmaking Media 295 Media 296 Educational Media Applications: Slide/Tape Ed. Media Applications: TV Media 297 F O U R T H TERM C M N S 156 Communications for the Media Resources Student Documentary Scriptwriting Media 250 Production Resources Media 263 Media Specialist in Education Media 303 and Training Media 304 Educational Media Applications: Computers Computer Systems for Media 307 Media Technologist TOTAL 66 6 72 3 3 3 3 1.5 3 1.5 3 60 0 60 6 6 3 0 21 15 3 3 1.5 3 3 3 3 19.5 6 3 3 3 3 1.5 3 3 3 19.5 6 3 18 6 3 6 Credit Hours PART-TIME COURSES 1.5 Media 055 Basic T.V. Studio Operation 3 Media 061 Basic Slide/Tape Production 3 Media 065 Media Studies 3 Media 071 Basic Photography - Open Lab 3 3 Media 073 Advanced Photography 3 Media 074 Basic Filmmaking - Open Lab Media 090 Independent Production and 1.5 Portfolio Presentation Media 092 Computers in Media - Desktop Publishing Media 093 Computers in Media 1.5 - Desktop Presentation Media 094 Computers in Media 1.5 - HyperCard Applications Course Descriptions Media 152 Graphics for the Media Specialist (F) (3,0) An introduction to the methods, materials and equipment related to mixed media production; special consideration given to layout and fundamental design. Media 157 Filmmaking (S) (3,6) An introduction to the basic principles of filmmaking theory and practice. Topics covered include: camera operation, the filmmaking process, film animation, film planning, storyboarding, and film construction (montage and continuity) techniques. Media 171 Small Format Television (S) (3,3) Camera work, lighting, audio, editing and television graphics using 1/2" portable video equipment. The development of a shooting script is also emphasized. 0 15 Media 172 Video Technology I (S) (1.5,0) An introduction to video systems, including a history of video technology, components of a complete video system, and a comparison of different formats. 3 1.5 1.5 6 1.5 6 3 L5 12 0 12 72 60 Media 173 Educational Media Applications: Audio (S) (3,0) An introduction to the fundamental principles of sound generation and reproduction, and to the terminology, hardware, and systems related to audio components. Applications of audio technology, equipment maintenance, and critical analysis of product specifications are given special emphasis. Career/Vocational — Media Resources 135 Media 181 Basic Audio Production (F) (3,6) Media 191 Media Selection and Utilization (F) (1.5,0) A n introduction to basic production techniques; components include interviewing, scripting, dubbing, editing, mixing, and packaging. The course also covers the operation of microphones, tape recorders and dub/mix facilities. An introduction to the operation, characteristics, and applications of the range of educational media. Media 182 Advanced Audio Production (S) (3,0) A n introduction to the areas of darkroom maintenance, photographic chemistry, print finishing, small and medium format copy camera, and relevant copying materials used in a variety of media applications. The application of production techniques in a variety of situations, including multi-track recording and mixing, documentaries, location recording, radio plays, film and video soundtracks and music recording, often using the department's sound production studio. Media 183 Theory and Applications of Photographic Production (F) (3,6) A n introduction to the photographic base relative to audiovisual production, including the camera and its controls, darkroom techniques, photosensitive materials and their control, and visual reproduction. Media 195 Special Applications: Photography (F) (3,0) Media 250 Documentary Scriptwriting (S) (1.5,0)) An overview of the production planning process with an emphasis on the roles of scripts, concepts, treatments and storyboards in documentary production. Media 253 Film Making Production Techniques (F) (3,6) Media 185 Advanced Photography (S) (3,6) An introduction to film production practice. Topics include camerawork (operation, lenses, composition, camera moves), lighting (basic exposure, triangle lighting, lighting for mood, colour temperature, special problems), editing (montage and continuity), titling, audio, and scripting. The application of photographic techniques, with emphasis on combining shot sequences to tell a story, as well as editing, layout, presentation, and basic studio operation. Media 260 Slide/Tape Production (F) (3,3) Media 186 Computers in Media Production (S) (3,3) A n introduction to the use of computers in pre-production to increase productivity. Emphasis is placed on computer application in graphics, budgeting, storyboarding and planning for the media. Media 189 Research Methods (F) (1.5,0) An introduction to the production of instructional slide/ tape programs. Includes operation of slide/tape equipment, production of transparencies, sound track and design considerations,and the integration of sound and visuals. Media 263 Production Resources (S) (1.5,6) Methods for planning, organization, and presentation of research for educational media productions. Sources considered will include print, non-print, and people. The comparative study of media technical systems and their operation; evaluation of various resources available in the Lower Mainland; design and/or modification of systems for media production and delivery; and interface of different types of systems. Media 190 Instructional Design (F) (3,3) Media 271 Educational Television Systems (F) (3,6) An introduction to the fundamentals of instructional design as applied in the production of educational media packages. Topics will include systems theory, objectives, audience analysis, evaluation, curriculum, learning activities, and resources. This course assumes background in basic portable video tape equipment and operations covered in Media 171 and is designed to develop the students' ability to effectively use multi-camera studio setups for the production of educational programs. These programs are of a quality suitable for cablecast or broadcast on the Knowledge Network. Career/Vocational — Media Resources 136 Media 272 Video Technology II (F) (1.5,0) A continuation of video systems with an emphasis on colour, the practical application of test equipment, systems design, and a look into the future of video technology- Media 295 Visual Concepts in Filmmaking (F) (3,0) A companion course to Media 253, this course will train the student in film theory and its relationship to film planning and film production. Topics covered will include film vocabulary, selected historical concepts, traditional continuity theory, the theory of montage, film aesthetics, the role of sound in film, and film planning. Optional Courses Each term the department will offer a limited number of courses that are open to college students and community members not enrolled full-time in the Media Resources Program. These courses carry college credit and may be applied towards a Capilano College Diploma. Check the timetable to see which ones will be offered in a given time. Media 055 Basic Television Studio Operation (S) (1.5,0) (Open) An introduction to video and television techniques for studio production. Students will design, shoot and edit several short subjects using the College's television studio (Dynamics Lab). Media 296 Educational Media Applications: Slide/Tape (F) (3,0) Media 061 Basic Slide/Tape Production (S) (3,0) Consideration of the design, utilization, and evaluation of slide/tape productions for educational purposes. A basic introductory course in slide-tape production. Similar to Media 260, but more limited in scope and depth of coverage. This course is not for students enrolled fulltime in the Media Resources Program. Media 297 Educational Media Applications: Multi-Camera TV Production (F) (3,0) This course assumes the background in basic portable videotape equipment and operations covered in Media 171 and is designed to develop the student's ability to plan, script, produce, and evaluate single and multicamera educational television productions. Media 303 The Media Specialist in Education and Training (S) (1.5,6) A course concerned with the uses of media for motivation, information transmission, emotive learning, and selfawareness. A field practicum course exploring the relationship of the media specialist to education in general and the role of the media generalist in educational and instructional communication. • Media 304 Educational Media Applications: Computers (S) (3,0) A theoretical and hands-on introduction to the use of computers in education. Includes producing and evaluating computer-assisted instruction packages and computer-assisted video instruction. Media 307 Computer Systems for the Media Technologist (S) (1.5) A n introduction to the computer systems with which the educational media technologist will come into contact; in particular, computer-assisted slide/tape programming systems. Media 065 Media Studies (F) (3,0) (Open) An introductory analysis and historical overview of media, especially film, combining aesthetic concepts, production techniques, and theoretical foundations. See discussion on Media Resources admission requirements. Media 071 Basic Photography - Open Lab (S) (3,0) A n introductory course including both practical and theoretical aspects of 35 mm photography. Topics include: the camera and its controls, darkroom techniques, visual reproduction, photo-sensitive materials, filtration, and composition. Media 073 Advanced Photography (F,S) (3,3) (Open) A practical and lecture course in advanced photography. Similar to Media 185, this course is not for students enrolled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Media 074 Basic Film Making - Open Lab (S) (3,0) A practical and theoretical course in cinematography similar to Media 253, but more limited in scope and depth of coverage. This course will provide access to production facilities rather than structured laboratory instruction. Not for students enrolled full-time in the Media Resources Program. Career/Vocational — Media Resources 137 Merchandising Management Media 090 Independent Production and Portfolio (S) (1.5,0) (Open) A survival guide to the world of freelancing, with an emphasis on the various fields of audiovisual production. Topics include: portfolio preparation, developing clientele, budgeting, legal concerns, and developing new opportunities. Contact Person: Eleanor Best, 986-1911, Local 2055. • TWO YEAR ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA •CERTIFICATE PROGRAMS Instructional Faculty Media 092 Computers In Media - Desktop Publishing (F) (3,0) A practical introduction to the computer as a tool for desktop publishing. The computer will be used to assist in development of skills for layout and designforprint materials. Media 093 Computers in Media Desktop Presentation (S) (1.5,0) An introduction to the computer as a tool for desktop presentation. The computer will be used to plan, design and deliver presentations for education,training, or industry. Media 094 HyperCard Applications In Media and Training (S) (1.5,0) An introduction to the use of hypercard to create tutorials, promotional material, and presentations. The applications will be appropriateforeducational, training, or business situations. Media 153 Film Animation (S) (3,6) An introduction to film animation using Super 8 film. Components include: Basic motion picture technique, drawing on film, cutout animation, tabletop animation, and the use of sound. J. BARNES, Dip. I.D., B.Sc. E. BEST, B.Sc., M.Sc. H. CLARK, B.H.E., Dip.Ed. E. HALL, B.A. (Hons.) A.T.C. C. HILL J. MCLEAN, B.P.E., Cert. Ed. (London) Mktg. & Adv. Cert. P. PODOLAK, Cert. Display (Aus.) Support Staff Carol McQuarrie, Div. Assistant Sharon Miletic, Receptionist Courses are designed to prepare studentsformany facets of merchandising and to provide them with opportunities for concentrated exposure to creative aspects of the retail and wholesale industry. Applicants should be energetic, creative, and business oriented. Career Opportunities Careers of previous graduates of the program include positions as store managers, sales representatives, promoters, and sales managers. Many start as management trainees. The Program The objective of this is to prepare students for careers in the various aspects of merchandising management. The courses offered have been designed to meet the needs of a variety of applicants: I. High school graduates planning a career in merchandising, retailing, or fashion-related areas; 2. Mature persons who are planning a change of career or wishing to re-enter the workforcein the area of merchandising management; 3. Persons with some experience in retailing who wish to up-grade their qualifications or seek a management-level career in merchandising; 4. Persons who wish to further their knowledge in one or more particular areas of merchandising and fashionrelated technology. 5. Persons who intend to manage their own merchandising/fashion retailing business. Career/Vocational - Merchandising Management 138 Admission Requirements PART-TIME EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Interested persons should apply for admission early in the calendar year. Entry is based on business experience, grades at high school graduation, maturity, interest, and aptitude. The courses in these programs, which begin in September and January each year, will provide you with basic merchandising skills that are of practical value in a wide range of employment positions. Classes are conducted by Department faculty either one or two evenings each week during the term, and those enrolled in the programs may take the courses at their chosen pace. Normally, Grade 12 graduation with a minimum of C+ in English 12 and C in Algebra 11 is required, although admission may be granted to mature students who can provide evidence of probable success in the program. A personal interview may be required for admission. MERCHANDISING MANAGEMENT CERTIFICATE TWO YEAR FULL TIME DIPLOMA PROGRAM Program Content FIRST TERM Computers in Retailing I RM121 Law - For Retailing RM139 Colour and Design RM158 Retail Mathematics BSMG 164 Canadian Business Methods RM178 C M N S 152 Communications Work Experience RM165 Social Survey of Western RM174 Civilization Credit Hours 1.5 1.5 3 3 3 3 1.5 SECOND T E R M Computers in Retailing II BSMG 221 Creative Advertising RM153 Sales Promotion RM 156 Visual Presentation RM 157 Management Presentation Skills RM161 Work Experience RM166 Product Knowledge RM172 THIRD TERM Marketing I BSMG 158 Accounting BSMG 169 Salesmanship BSMG 230 Retail Merchandising BSMG 271 Store Interiors RM 264 Independent Store Management I RM272 - (plus practicum) FOURTH TERM Marketing 11 BSMG 159 BSMG 175 |, Organizational Behaviour Advanced Merchandising & RM258 International Trade Career Readiness RM265 Independent Store Management II RM 273 - (plus practicum) Elective 3 19.5 3 3 3 3 3 1.5 3 19.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 A Certificate in Merchandising Management will be awarded after the successful completion of any six (6) credit courses from the following list. Substitution may be allowed at the discretion of the department co-ordinator. BSMG 160 BSMG 187 BSMG 163 BSMG 178 BSMG 179 C M P T 180 C M P T 222 C M N S 152 BSMG 230 BSMG 271 RM 153 RM 264 Marketing Management Introduction to Business Supervisory Skills Accounting I Accounting II Introduction to Business Computers Microcomputer Applications I Report Writing Salesmanship Merchandising Creative Advertising Production Store Interiors ADVANCED MERCHANDISING MANAGEMENT CERTIFICATE A second or Advanced Certificate will be awarded following successful completion of an additional four credit courses chosen from the list above or from the Merchandising Management daytime program. Note: A student must obtain a 2.0 G P A or better to qualify for either certificate. Course Descriptions Note: For courses that don't have an R M prefix see Business Management or Communications sections in this Calendar. RM121 Computers in Retailing I (F) (1.5, 0) This course provides students with an understanding of the computer, how it works, how it processes data into useful information and how it can be used as an effective tool in business. Students will learn how to use a word processing program (Microsoft Word) to produce memos, letters, research papers and business reports. Career/Vocational - Merchandising Management 139 RM153 Creative Advertising Production (S) (3,0) RM174 Social Survey (F) (3,0) An emphasis is placed on the practical application of advertising principles through developing production skills. Copywriting, layout, design and illustrative techniques will be taught. A survey of social history from the Egyptians to the present will discuss the design cycle, contemporary styles and motifs in architecture, interiors, and garments and relate them to the market place of today. RM156 Sales Promotion (S) (3,0) RM178 A n overview on promotion from a study of personal selfpromotion to the larger world of promoting retailing. The emphasis in class will be to learn how to promote products, ideas and services for the market place. This course culminates in a professional fashion presentation where all skills learned are demonstrated. RM157 Visual Presentation (S) (3,0) Practical techniques and theory of visually presenting merchandise: window displays, interior displays, and merchandising of fixtures will be taught. RM158 Basics of Colour & Design for Retailers (F) (3,0) This introduction of concepts of colour and design teaches application of the principles of graphic composition, basic form and shape, colour theory and visual communications, with an impact on retail-related themes and subjects through instruction, field trips, individual design and analysis. RM161 Management Presentation Skills (F,S) (3,0) Business skills will be developed in training for management and supervisory positions. Public speaking, report writing, chairing meetings and management communication skills be covered. RM165 Work Experience (F) (1.5) The students will explore the various career opportunities in retailing by networking within the industry. They will complete a 2 week practicum during the term in a retail or retail-related business. RM166 Work Experience (S) (1.5) M l 172 Product Knowledge (S) (3.0) An introductory study of textile fabrics and the textile industry will survey the development and use of fabrics. Other products studied will include jewellery, metals, toys etc. Career/Vocational — Merchandising Management 140 Canadian Business Methods (F) (3,0) Retail business methods in Canada, will focus on the Canadian environment and the recent rapid changes in the retail industry. RM 221 Computers in Retailing II (S) (3,0) This course provides students with an understanding of the microcomputer market, the management uses of microcomputers and the steps in hardware and software selection. Students will learn how to communicate with an IBM PC through its Operating System commands, how to use a data management program (dBase III+) at a managerial level and how to use a financial planning package (Lotus 1-2-3) in the creation of various business reports. RM 258 Advanced Merchandising and International Trade (S) (3,0) This course provides students with an opportunity to explore additional selected topics in merchandising which may include market research, small business contracts, buying, trends in visual retailing, and creative media use with an emphasis on the expanding international market place. RM 264 * Store Interiors (F) (3,0) Store Interiors teaches the fundamentals of interior design as they relate to merchandising. Students design a store using the floor plan, renderings, choice of fabric, selection of colours and texture to showcase merchandise. RM 265 Career Readiness (S) (3,0) The objective of this course is to provide the student with practical skills for successful job search. The students will research several professionals in the retail industry, and will spend a brief period with a professional (during work). Focus will be on resume writing, interview skill development, and other career-related skills. Music RM 272 Independent Store Management I (F) (3,0) This course is a practical application of the Retail Management courses. The instructor will provide the basic management structure of the Retail Management "Gift Shop" activities weekly. The students will act as store managers in Control, Staff Training, Buying and Display and Promotion. Students will be entirely responsible for operating the store and all those activities and managerial responsibilities in operating a successful retail store. RM 273 Independent Store Management II (S) (3,0) A continuation of RM 272. Instructional Faculty P. AVERY, B.A. (York), M.Ed. (Toronto) G. A L C O C K , A.R.C.T. (Toronto) F. ARDIEL, B.A. (SFU) D. ASTOR, BA. (UBC) H. BASHAW, B.Mus., M.Mus., (UBC) J. BECKOW, B. Mus. (UCLA), Dip. Music Therapy (Capilano) M.T.A. N. B O H N A , Dip. (Capilano), B.Mus., M.Mus. (UBC) S.BOSWELL D. BRANTER, B.Mus., M.Mus. (Indiana) D. BROWN K. BURKE, B.A. (Antioch), Dip. M.T. (Capilano), M.T.A. K. C A R W A N A , B.S.R. (UBC) K. CERNAUSKAS, Dip. (Salzburg), B.Mus. (Toronto) R. DOYLE L. FALLS, A.R.C.T. (Toronto), B.Mus., M.Mus. (UBC) N. FISHER S. G U N N R. GURR A. H A R L O W C. H A N N E Y , B.Mus. (UBC) T. HAZLITT, A.R.C.T. (Toronto) L. KAARIO, B.Mus. (UBC), M.Mus. (W.Wash.) L. KASPVZAK, M.F.A. Hons. (Poland) S. KING, B.Mus. (UBC) K. KOBYLANSKY, Dip. (Ryerson), Dip. (Tchaikovsky Conservatory, Kiev), B.Mus., M.Mus. (UBC) I. K U K U R U D Z A R. LISTER, B.Mus. (UBC) R. MAROIS, B.Mus. (LAVAL) A. MCINTYRE, B.Mus. (UBC) R. MCKENZIE, M. MUS. (UBC) N. MCMASTER, B.A. (UBC), Dip. M.T. (Nordoff & Robbins) D. M C C O Y , M. Mus. (UBC) G. M C N A B , B.Mus. (UBC), M. Mus. (UBC) J. MEYER, B.Ed., M.Ed. (UBC) E. MOFFITT, B.Mus. (McGill) M.A. (CPU), Dip. Music Therapy (Capilano), M.T.A.Coordinator K. MOORE, B.Mus. (UBC) E. O S A D C H Y , Dip. (Tchaikovsky Conservatory, Kiev) A. POLSON M. REVELEY, B.Mus. (UBC), Coordinator, Diploma (Bcrklee School of Music) J. SIMPSON, B.Mus., M.A. (UBC), Coordinator D. V A N D E R E Y K , B. Mus. (UBC) M. Mus. (UBC) L.VERNON V. WATERS, Dip. (Philadelphia), (Julliard) J. WHITING, L.T.C.L./F.T.C.L. (Trinity) A. W O L D , B.Mus. (UBC), A.R.C.T. (Toronto) S. W O O D Y A R D , B.Mus. (Victoria) Career/Vocational — Merchandising Management 141 General Information Admission Requirements Capilano College offers three Music programs: Commercial Music, Music Therapy and the Bachelor of Music Transfer Program. Most courses are open to part-time students. Entering students are expected to demonstrate knowledge of the rudiments of music and a level of performance on their major instrument that is acceptable to the faculty. Admissions Procedure Special Fees and Expenses The fees for private music instruction (P.M.I.) will be announced at least one month prior to the beginning of the fall term. In 1989/90 the fees were $290.00/term. COMMERCIAL MUSIC PROGRAM Contact Person: Mike Reveley, Coordinator, Office HI 15, Phone 986-1911 or 984-4951. TWO YEAR ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA This program offers aspiring jazz/commercial musicians and vocalists an in-depth grounding in their field. To ensure a practical education, the program offers a choice of specialized areas of study. Two-year Associate in Arts and Science Diplomas are offered with options in Instrumental Performance, Vocal Performance, Arranging/ Composition and General Music. As recording experience has become an essential part of today's musical training, the Commercial Music Program has now integrated multi-track recording into the curriculum. Vocal, instrumental, and arranging/composition students all make extensive use of our multi-track facilities. Composition and arranging students will work with electronic instruments in our Midi Studio. A computer lab is available to students for supplemental help in ear training, sight reading, and other basic music skills. Career Opportunities The role of the Commercial Music Program is to provide its students with the skills necessary to develop careers as self-employed professionals in the contemporary music industry. University Transfer It is not the primary intention of the Commercial Music Program to provide transferability towards a university degree. However, selected courses can be transferred and students of the program have gone on to gain university degrees in music from other institutions. Students with degrees in traditional music have found our program beneficial in developing their abilities in jazz and popular music. Career/Vocational — Music 142 All full-time applicants must: 1. Comply with the general admission requirements of Capilano College 2. Participate in an interview with the music coordinator or a program instructor. 3. Write a theory placement test. 4. Play an audition on their major instrument Auditions involve the presentation of two contrasting (in tempo and style) prepared pieces and the demonstration of technical (e.g. scales, arpeggios) and sight reading abilities. Returning students may pre-register during the month of April. Returning or new full-time students who have been accepted may register during May and August. Part-time students may enroll during in-person registration. Interviews, auditions and placement tests are held in May and August. Please phone 986-1911 or 984-4951 for an audition and interview appointment. Graduation Requirements Students must complete all courses outlined under "Program Content" to receive an Associate in Arts and Science Diploma. These include all of the core curriculum courses plus twelve elective credits selected from the Commercial Music Options. A total of 52.5 credits. Upon the demonstration of a sufficient piano level (Toronto Conservatory Grade VII or equivalent) a student may be given a course exemption from class piano. Program Content FIRST TERM Music 103 Comm. Harmony I Music 114 Class Piano Music 170 History Jazz Music 184 Sight/Ear ENS 1st term level PMI 100 level Music Major Elective Credit Hours 2 1 1.5 3 1 2 3 13.5 SECOND T E R M Music 104 Comm. Harmony II Music 105 Orchestration I Music 115 Class Piano Music 185 Sight/Ear ENS 2nd term level PMI 200 level Music Major Electives THIRD T E R M Music 171 History of Pop Music 203 Comm. Harmony III Music 214 Class Piano Music 284 Sight/Ear ENS 3rd term level PMI 300 level Music Major Electives FOURTH TERM Music 204 Comm. Harmony IV Music 215 Class Piano Music 260 Comm. Relations Music 285 Sight/Ear ENS 4th term level PMI 400 level. Music Major Electives Credit Hours 15 15 1 3 1 2 3 13 1.5 15 1 3 1 2 3 13 1.5 1 1.5 3 1 2 3 13 FOURTH TERM Music 233 Studio Vocal Performance Music 235 Studio Vocal Performance Arranging/Composition Electives SECOND TERM Music 107 Composition I Music 172 Arranging I 15 1.5 THIRD TERM Music 205 Orchestration II Music 206 Composition II Music 209 Intro to Midi Music 272 Arranging II 1.5 15 1.5 15 F O U R T H TERM Music 208 Music Production Music 273 Arranging/Composition III Music 270 Song Writing 1.5 3.0 1.5 BACHELOR OF MUSIC TRANSFER PROGRAM Contact Person: Joyce Simpson, Coordinator, Office H119, Phone 984-4951 or 986-1911 TWO YEAR ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA AND TRANSFERABILITY TO THIRD YEAR C O M M E R C I A L MUSIC OPTIONS UNIVERSITY Instrumental Performance Electives Career Opportunities FIRST T E R M Music 180 Improvisation I Music 194 Repertoire I 1.5 3 SECOND TERM Music 181 Improvisation II Music 195 Repertoire II 1.5 3 THIRD T E R M Music 280 Improvisation III Music 294 Repertoire III 15 3 FOURTH TERM Music 281 Improvisation IV Music 295 Repertoire IV 1.5 3 Vocal Performance Electives FIRSTTERM Music 132 Music 134 15 15 • Private Music Teacher - with the completion of the 2 year diploma program • 1st two years toward a Music degree leading to a career in Music Education or Performance University Transfer Capilano College offers the first two years of a Bachelor of Music Degree. All courses in the Bachelor of Music Transfer Program are transferable to the Music Department at the University of British Columbia and the Faculty of Music at the University of Victoria. Students wishing to transfer to the Faculty of Arts at UBC, SFU, or UVic with a major in music may take Music 100/101, 112/113,120/121 in their first year, and Music 200/201, 212/213, 220/221 in their second year. Our students have also received transfer credit from the following universities: Alberta, Western Ontario, McGill, and Western Washington. Studio Vocal Performance Vocal Jazz Master Class 1.5 1.5 SECOND T E R M Music 133 Studio Vocal Performance Music 135 Studio Vocal Performance 1.5 1.5 Admission Requirements THIRD TERM Music 232 Studio Vocal Performance Music 234 Studio Vocal Performance 1.5 1.5 Entering students should have a basic knowledge of music rudiments (approximately at the level of Toronto Conservatory Rudiments II). Career/Vocational — Music Students entering on piano must be at a grade ten level (Toronto Conservatory). Piano students who require a qualifying term may enroll in other courses. Students entering in composition must have a working knowledge of diatonic harmony. Students entering in voice or instruments other than piano must have a performance level acceptable to the faculty. Admissions Procedure All applicants must: 1. Comply with the general admission requirements of Capilano College. 2. Participate in a private interview with the music coordinator or a program instructor. 3. Write a theory placement test. 4. Play an audition on their major instrument: this will consist of two contrasting pieces, technique, and sight reading. 5. Take an English Placement Test. Auditions will involve the presentation of two contrasting prepared pieces and a demonstration of the student's instrumental technique and sightreading ability. Returning students may pre-register during the month of April. New students demonstrating sufficient instrumental and/or theoretical accomplishment in their placement test may preregister during May and August to ensure their enrollment. Students may register during in-person registration. All interviews, auditions, and placement tests are held in May and August. Early application is advised. Special Fees and Expenses The fees for private music instruction (P.M.I.) will be announced at least one month prior to the beginning of the fall term. In 1988/89 the fees were $290.00/term. A deposit of $40.00 of the P.M.I, fees must be paid by the end of the Registration period in order to take P.M.I. No late registration is allowed. Program Content Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements FIRSTTERM ENS 100 or 110 PMI 100 Level Music 100 Music 112 Music 114 Music 120 Music 360* English 100 or 102 SECOND TERM Ensemble 150 or 160 PMI 200 Music 101 Music 113 Music 115 Music 121 Music 361* English 103 or 104 or 105 or 106 THIRD TERM Ensemble 200 or 210 PMI 300 Level Music 200 Music 212 Music 214 Music 110 or 210* Music 220 English 200 or 212 F O U R T H TERM Ensemble 250 or 260 PMI 400 Level Music 201 Music 213 Music 215 Music 111 or 211* Music 221 English 201 or 213 Credit/Lab Hours 44 24 68 8 0 8 1 2 3 1.5 1 3 1.5 3 16 2 0 2 1 2 3 1.5 1 2 3 1.5 3 16 0 2 1 2 3 1.5 1 1.5 2 3 3 16 0 2 1 2 3 1.5 1 1.5 3 3 16 2 0 2 Graduation Requirements The complete program requirements must be successfully completed to receive an Associate in Arts and Science Diploma. Scholarships The department offers two entrance scholarships of $200 each, and two second year $200 scholarship. Career/Vocational — Music 144 * Students may substitute six credits of Arts electives for Mus 360/361, and 110/111 or 210/211 if their goal is General Music Studies. * Students may, with the permission of the coordinator, substitute Stage Band, Ens 135/185, 235/285 for Mus 360/ 361 and 110/111 or 210/211. Such students will require 62 credits for graduation. MUSIC THERAPY PROGRAM Contact Person: Elizabeth Moffitt, Coordinator, Office No. H118, Phone: (604) 984-4951, or 986-1911, Local 2306. • TWO YEAR ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE DIPLOMA • BACHELOR OF MUSIC THERAPY - BRITISH COLUMBIA OPEN UNIVERSITY This is the first year in which graduates of the Capilano College Music Therapy program will receive a Bachelor of Music Therapy from the British Columbia Open University along with the Diploma in Music Therapy from Capilano College. Music Therapists use the creative process inherent in musical participation to assist individuals and groups to improve their mental, physical and emotional functioning. Music therapists work with deep emotions in special therapeutic programs, run exercise and dance programs, lead choirs, instrumental ensembles and music appreciation groups as they contribute to therapeutic goals. Music Therapy is increasingly identified by health care professionals as an effective catalyst for client motivation, stimulation and communication. Career Opportunities of the four terms, in which they are given increasing responsibility to design, implement and evaluate their own treatment programs, under clinical supervision. This course work fulfills the educational requirements for professional accreditation by the Canadian Association for Music Therapy. A supervised internship is also required before graduation, to fulfill the accreditation requirement for clinical work. The Music Therapy Program has a policy regarding continuation in the program. Admission Requirements Fall 1991 All students entering the Music Therapy Program must: 1. Comply with the general College entrance require ments. 2. Participate in an interview with the Music Therapy Coordinator. Interviews are held in April and May. 3. Play an audition on his/her concentration instrument, demonstrating technique, repertoire, and musical sensitivity through two contrasting pieces at a Grade 9 Toronto Conservatory level, or equivalent. 4. Have completed one full year at the university level of Music Theory*, Ear Training and Sight singing, or Grade 5 Toronto Conservatory. Graduates of the program work with all age groups, with a wide range of physiological, cognitive and emotional disorders, in a variety of clinical settings or in private practice. They are trained to work as part of a health care team. 5. Have successfully completed at least two years postsecondary education, including at least six credits of English, six credits of Music History, twelve credits of psychology **, (including Introductory Psychology, Child Development and Psychology of Aging), three credits of Human Biology, three credits of Orff and Kodaly Methodology. The Program 6. Have some experience with people with special needs. Capilano offers the 3rd and 4th years leading to the Bachelor of Music Therapy granted by the British Columbia Open University. This new degree program is designed so that students may enter with a variety of backgrounds: music, general arts, education, or nursing etc. This program provides students with the opportunity to gain knowledge and develop competencies in such areas as clinical disorders; assessment, planning and intervention; improvisation and music of many eras and cultures; interpersonal skills and group dynamics; basic research, documentation and presentation of music therapy. The program blends academic and experiential course work. Students deepen their experience of music, creative expression and the role of the arts. They are encouraged to explore their values, beliefs, feelings and communication patterns, to increase their effectiveness in the field. They have practicums with a different population for each 7. Be able to demonstrate a high level of maturity, integrity, and natural interpersonal ease. 8. Have basic guitar and keyboard skills at the level of University Class Piano. * For the music courses, any equivalent non-credit studies must be challenged for credit. ** Abnormal Psychology is offered within the Music Therapy Program. Admission Requirements - Fall 1990 Only For those students entering in the fall of 1990, the original admission requirements will stand; (see below) however, the above new requirements must be completed before the Bachelor of Music Therapy degree can be awarded. 1. Comply with the general College entrance requirements. Career/Vocational — Music 145 2. Participate in an interview with the Music Therapy Coordinator. Interviews are held in April and May. 3. Play an audition on his/her concentration instrument, demonstrating technique, repertoire, and musical sensitivity through two contrasting pieces at a Grade 9 Toronto Conservatory level, or equivalent. 4. Have completed one term at the university level of Music Theory*, or Grade 4 Toronto Conservatory. 5. Have successfully completed at least two years postsecondary education, including at least three credits of English, three credits of Music History, plus 3 credits of introductory psychology. 6. Have some experience with people with special needs. 7. Be able to demonstrate a high level of maturity, integrity, and natural interpersonal ease. credit Hours Major Program Requirements FIRSTTERM MT 120 Improvisation I M T 130 Basic Clinical Skills M T 150 The Influence of Music M T 160 Music Therapy I M T 170 Disabling Conditions of Childhood MT180 Interpersonal Skills PMI 100 Concentration Instrument PMI Secondary Instrument SECOND T E R M M T 161 Music Therapy II MT191 Practicum I PSYC 222 Abnormal Psychology M T 264 Disabling Conditions of Adulthood PMI 200 Concentration Instrument PMI Secondary Instrument Career/Vocational — Music 146 3 1 6 2 1 19 Vocal workshops monthly throughout the 2 years. M T 310 Internship (compulsory upon completion of all above courses) 9 CHILDREN Continuation in the program and granting of the Arts and Science Diploma in Music Therapy will be contingent upon demonstration of an adequate level of personal, academic and clinical skills as jointly evaluated each term by the student, music therapy faculty and field supervisors. THIRD T E R M PSYC 201 Group Dynamics MT220 Improvisation II MT 260 Music Therapy III MT 290 Practicum II PMI 300 Concentration Instrument PMI Secondary Instrument 1.5 1.5 3 Some Music Therapy Practicum Placements Graduation Requirements Program Content FOURTH TERM The Influence of Music II MT 151 Music & the Creative Arts MT250 Music Therapy IV MT261 Introduction to Research Methods MT262 for Music Therapists Class Guitar Improvisation MT280 Practicum III MT291 Concentration Instrument PMI 400 Secondary Instrument PMI 80.5 North Vancouver School Board Children's Hospital UBC Bob Berwick Preschool PSYCHIATRY Riverview Hospital Westside Community Care Team GERIATRICS German Canadian Care Home UBC Extended Care Yaletown House PALLIATIVE CARE 1.5 3 3 3 3 1.5 2 1 18 3 6 3 3 2 1 18 3 1.5 3 6 2 1 16.5 Lion's Gate Hospital Vancouver General Hospital Course Descriptions ENS 100 Choir 1(F) (1,0) An exploration through five centuries of choral music from the Renaissance to the present. Opportunities for singing without accompaniment (a capella), with piano, with rhythm section and/or complete symphony orchestra. Particular attention will be paid to pitch, rhythm, diction and balance. Performance before an audience will be the culminating event of the term. ENS 105 Swing Choir (F) (1,0) Rehearsal and performance in one of Capilano College's Jazz Choirs. Students will be auditioned during the first week of classes. The intent of the class is to build group singing abilities in such areas as phrasing, blending and intonation. Performances are a mandatory part of the course. ENS 110 Orchestra I (F) (1,0) Rehearsal and performance of concert repertoire. Pro- spective students must contact the Music Department at least one week before classes commence to arrange for an audition. Persons winning a position through audition will be allowed to register. ENS 250 Choir IV (S) (1,0) ENS 120 Guitar/Bass Ensemble I (F) (1,0) A continuation of ENS 205. Performance in guitar/bass ensemble for the development of sight reading and phrasing skills. Emphasis will be on single-note reading in all areas of the neck. ENS 260 Orchestra IV (S) (1,0) ENS 135 Stage Band (F) (1,0) Participation in the Capilano College large Jazz/Rock Ensemble for development of phrasing and sight reading skills. ENS 140 Percussion Ensemble (F) (1,0) A n ensemble comprised exclusively of percussion instruments of both definite and indefinite pitch. Students will develop their sight reading and interpretive skills. A continuation of ENS 200. ENS 255 Swing Choir IV (S) (1,0) A continuation of ENS 210. ENS 270 Guitar/Bass Ensemble IV (S) (1,0) A continuation of ENS 220. ENS 285 Stage Band (S) (1,0) A continuation of ENS 235. ENS 290 Percussion Ensemble IV (S) (1,0) A continuation of ENS 240. Music 100 Theory I (F) (3,0) ENS 155 Swing Choir II (S) (1,0) A study of music from c. 1600 to 1800 with an emphasis on diatonic harmony up to simple modulation. Related concepts of form will be explored. The student will learn control of chord progression and voice leading. He/she will be familiarized with figured bass. A continuation of ENS 105. Music 101 Theory II (S) (3,0) ENS 160 Orchestra II (S) (1,0) Prerequisite: Music 100 or equivalent. A continuation of ENS 110. A continuation of Music 100 with the introduction of tonicization, modulation, diatonic sequence, and melodic and rhythmic figuration. ENS 150 Choir II (S) (1,0) A continuation of ENS 100. ENS 170 Guitar/Bass Ensemble II (S) (l,0) A continuation of ENS 120, with more emphasis on complex rhythms. Music 103 Commercial Harmony I (F) (2,0) ENS 185 Stage Band (S) (1,0) Prerequisite: A working knowledge of music rudiments (scales, intervals, triads) A continuation of ENS 135. ENS 190 Percussion Ensemble II (S) (1,0) A continuation of ENS 140. ENS 200 Choir III {F} (1,0) A continuation of ENS 150. ENS 205 Swing Choir III (F) (1,0) A continuation of ENS 155. A practical look at melodic/harmonic relationships in tonal music. Includes study of the overtone series, intervals, scales, modes, chord symbols, diatonic chords, root motion, Roman numeral analysis, principles of chord progression, inversions, functional harmonic analysis, melodic analysis and chord scales. Music 104 Commercial Harmony II (S) (1.5,0) Prerequisite: Commercial Harmony I ENS 220 Guitar/Bass Ensemble III (F) (1,0) Continued exploration of chord progression and melody, including: secondary dominants, and diminished chords, minor key chord progression, subdominant minor in major keys, chord scales, mixed mode concepts, pivot chords, augmented sixths, songforms and turnarounds. A continuation of ENS 170. Music 105 Orchestration I (S) (1.5,0) ENS 235 Stage Band (F) (1,0) Students will undertake the study of score preparation, notation, basic musical terms and articulations, and writing for the rhythm section instruments. ENS 210 Orchestra III (F) (1,0) A continuation of ENS 110. A continuation of ENS 185. ENS 240 Percussion Ensemble III (F) (1,0) A continuation of ENS 190. Career/Vocational — Music 147 Music 107 Composition I (S) (1.5,0) Music 121 History II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: To be taken concurrently with Commercial Harmony II. A study of music history from Dufay to Monteverdi. Study includes: the composition of jazz and pop style melodies on standard chord progressions analysis of jazz and popular tunes. Music 110 Class Strings (F) (1.5,0) A practical study of the violin family. Music 111 Class Strings (S) (1.5,0) A continuation of Music 110. Music 132 Studio Vocal Performance (F) (1.5,0) A course designed to develop the students studio performance ability thorough preparation and performance of selected solo and ensemble material in the colleges' recording studio. Music 133 (S) (1.5,1) A continuation of Music 132. Music 134 Vocal Jazz Master Class (F) (1.5,0) Music 112 Ear Training and Sight Singing I (F) (1.5,0) By audition only. Study of the aural recognition of intervals and chords. The student will learn to transcribe melodies and rhythms appropriate to their level, and to sight sing melodies using Solfege harmonic dictation. This course is intended to develop the live performance abilities of the student through the study of jazz repertoire. Students will study style and interpretation and perform with some of Vancouver's top jazz musicians. Music 113 Ear Training and Sight Singing II (S) (1.5,0) Music 135 Vocal Jazz Master Class II (S) (1.5,0) A continuation of Music 112. A continuation of Jazz Master Class II instruction. Music 114 Piano Class (F) (1,2) Music 170 History of Jazz (F) (1.5,0) This course is designed for students who wish to learn basic keyboard skills. Reading, improvisation, transposition and harmonization are the skills developed during this course and the three subsequent levels. Theoretical concepts are applied at the keyboard and include diatonic triads and sevenths of the major key, all major, minor and modal tetrachords. A weekly lab evaluates material covered in class. Students practice on the department's pianos. A survey of jazz through styles and stylists from its roots in Africa to the present. Music 115 Piano Class (F) (1,2) A continuation of Music 114. In addition, keyboard sequences, arpeggios and major scales are introduced along with easy original repertoire. Music 116 Music Theatre Voice I (1.5,0) By audition only. To be taken concurrently with Theatre 116. This course is a studio musical theatre ensemble. Repertoire will be taken from light opera through present day Broadway shows. Scenes will be fully staged and will include both solos and ensemble numbers. Music 117 Music Theatre Voice II (1.5,0) A continuation of Music Theatre Voice I. Music 120 History 1(F) (3,0) A study of musical history from the time of ancient Greece to Dufay. Career/Vocational — Music 148 Music 171 History of Popular Music (F) (1.5,0) A survey of popular music styles of the 20th century. Music 172 Arranging I (S) (1.5,0) Prerequisite: Music 103, to be taken concurrently with Music 104 and Music 105. A study of four-part block harmonization arranging techniques. Music 180 Improvisation (F) (1.5,1.5) A course to teach the basics of improvisation on chord changes. The first term will be devoted to rhythmic concepts, basic chord-scale relationships and development of technical exercises for basic chord progressions. Music 181 Improvisation (S) (1.5,1.5) A continuation of Music 180. This term will be devoted to analysis of chord progressions and more advanced chordscale analysis. At the end of this term, students should have the basic theoretical knowledge necessary to analyze and learn to improvise on any "standard" jazz tune. Music 184 Sightsinging/Ear Training (F) (3,0) Aural and sight training concentrating on melodic, rhythmic dictation and sightsinging. Music 185 Sightsinging/Ear Training (S) (3,0) Music 206 Composition II (F) (1.5,0) A continuation of Music 184. To be taken concurrently with Commercial Harmony III. Music 194 Repertoire I (F) (3,3) For all instruments, requirements include five hours of rehearsal a week plus a number of performances. The styles studied are varied and all students must perform a set number of tunes, take part in recording sessions, and complete various pertinent assignments. Music 195 Repertoire II (S) (3,3) A continuation of Repertoire I. Music 200 Theory III (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Music 101 or equivalent. A study of advanced tonal procedures: review of nonchord tones, mixture, seventh chords, applied V and VII, diatonic modulation, seventh chords with added dissonance. A detailed study of compound ternary and rondo forms. Investigation of the fugue. A course oriented to those interested in developing their abilities in composing and arranging. A study of the principles of part writing. Music 208 Music Production (S) (1.5,0) A course designed to acquaint students with the role of the music producer and some of the technology used in music production. Music 209 (F) (1.5,2) Introduction to Midi and Music Synthesis This course is designed to acquaint students with the basic principles of Midi, synthesis, and computerized sequencing; students will learn the operation of drum machines, 4 track recorder, computer programs and synthesizers. This course is intended to be taken with Music 205 and Music 272. Music 210 Class Woodwinds (F) (1.5,0) Music 201 Theory IV (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Music 200 A study of chromaticism: the phrygian II, augmented sixth chords, other chromatic chords, chromatic voiceleading techniques, chromaticism in larger contexts. A detailed study of sonata, sonata-rondo, and variation forms. Music 203 Commercial Harmony III (F) (1.5,0) Prerequisite: Music 104 or permission of the instructor. Continued exploration of chord progression and melody including: analysis of popular chord progression, modal harmony, mixed mode chord progression, augmented 6th chords, tonicization, chord scales/harmonic extensions, turn arounds, correction of standard progressions, reharmonization techniques. Music 204 Commercial Harmony IV (S) (1.5,0) Prerequisite: Music 203 Continued exploration of chord progression and melody including: analysis of modern jazz chord progression, organpoint, equal division of the octave, parallel harmony, modal jazz chord progression, '70s jazz theory of modal areas, modern voicing techniques. A practical study of the woodwind family. Music 211 Class Woodwinds (F) (1.5,0) A continuation of Music 210. Music 212 Ear Training and Sight Singing III (F) (1.5,0) A continuation of Music 113. Music 213 Ear Training and Sight Singing (S) (1.5,0) A continuation of Music 212. Music 214 Piano Class (F) (1,2) For students who have taken Music 115 or have had previous keyboard experience. Students are introduced to common idiomatic accompaniment patterns as well as four-part chorale studies, keyboard sequences, minor scales and chords. Basic keyboard techniques are emphasized including relaxation, touch, rotation, weight transfer and their musical application in simple repertoire. The lab hour is utilized to develop sight reading skills at the keyboard. Music 215 Piano Class (S) (1,2) A continuation of Music 214 with increased complexity of repertoire and technique. Music 205 Orchestration II (F) (1.5,0) Orchestration for modern rhythm section. Drum machine, Guitar, Bass and Keyboards. To be taken concurrently with Music 272. Music 220 History III (F) (3,0) This course is designed as a complementary study both for Music and General Arts students. The music from Cavalli to Mozart will be examined emphasizing aural recognition of the evolution of musical style. Career/Vocational — Music 149 Music 221 History IV (S) (3,0) Music 280 Improvisation (F) (1.5,1.5) A course designed as a complementary study both for Music and General Arts students. This course will examine music from Beethoven to the present day. The emphasis will be on aural recognition of the evolution of musical stye and its relationship to its historical context. A continuation of Music 181. Students must audition. Music 281 Improvisation (S) (1.5,1.5) A continuation of Music 280. Music 284 Sightsinging/Ear Training (F) (3,0) Music 232 (F) (1.5,1) A continuation of Music 185. A continuation of Music 133 Music 285 Sightsinging/Ear Training (S) (3,0) Music 233 (S) (1.5,1) A continuation of Music 284. A continuation of Music 232 Music 234 Vocal Jazz Master Class III (F) (1.5,0) Prerequisite: Sightsinging ability, higher level of performance abilities. A continuation of Jazz Master Class II instruction with more emphasis on individual contribution and responsibility. Music 294 Repertoire III (F) (1.5,3) A continuation of Repertoire II with emphasis on recording work. Music 295 Repertoire IV (S) (1.5,3) A continuation of Repertoire III. Music 235 Jazz Master Class IV (S) (3,1.5) Music 360 Method Studies in Music Education: Kodaly A continuation of Jazz Master Class III instruction. Methodology (F) (1.5,0) Music 260 Commercial Relations in Music (S) (1.5,0) This will provide a knowledge of Kodaly methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method in a classroom. A course involving aspects of the music industry including copyright, contracts, performing rights organizations and the recording industry. Music 361 Method Studies in Music Education: Orff Music 270 Song Writing (S) (1.5,0) Methodology (S) (1.5,0) Prerequisite: Commercial Harmony I or permission of the instructor. This will provide a knowledge of Orff methodology and the skills necessary to use this teaching method in a classroom. An investigation of the techniques and roles of lyrics and lyric writing for popular song styles. Music 272 Arranging II (F) (1.5,0) Prerequisite: Arranging I and Orchestration I, taken concurrently with Commercial Harmony III and Orchestration II. Arranging projects for various combinations of instruments, plus a study of two and three-part writing. Music 273 Arranging/Composition III (S) (3,0) Prerequisites: Arranging II, Orchestration I & II, taken concurrently with Commercial Harmony IV. Course content includes: advanced chord voicing concepts, background writing, linear writing techniques, arranging projects for various instrumental vocal and rhythm section combinations, studio recording labs, and composition of pop, rock and jazz tunes in all harmonic styles. Career/Vocational — Music 150 PMI Various Numbers) (F) (S) (2,0) A course designed to permit the student to pursue indepth study of his/her own music specialty. The course consists of a series of one-hour lessons. PMI (Various Numbers) (F) (S) (1,0) This course consists of a series of half-hour lessons on the student's secondary instrument. Note: To enroll in any PMI courses students must get permission from the coordinator of their Music Program. Music Therapy Courses Music Therapy 120 Improvisation I (F) (1.5,0) An experiential study of free and structured improvisation forms for groups and solo work. Music Therapy 130 Basic Clinical Skills (F) (3,0) Music Therapy 250 Music Through the Creative Arts (S) (1.5,0) A n introduction to the basic concepts of observation, assessment and goal setting, including six weeks of introductory field work and in class observations. A n experiential exposure to creative arts which can be used in conjunction with music: eg. dance, visual arts, poetry. Music Therapy 150 The Influence of Music (F) (3,0) Music Therapy 260 Music Therapy III (F) (3.0) A study of the physical and psychological impact of music, and its components for music therapy. A study of healing and music in various cultures. A continuation of the presentation of music therapy styles, for psychiatry, palliative care, music education and in healing, including the work of Helen Bonny and Mary Priestley. Assessment and treatment planning will be covered in depth. Music Therapy 151 The Influence of Music (S) (1.5,0) A continuation of the study of music's influence on groups and individuals in a variety of cultures from the perspective of music therapy. Music Therapy 160 Music Therapy I (F) (3,0) This course presents the development of music as therapy, the clientele groups and their needs, and the potential of music as a therapeutic medium. Music Therapy 261 Music Therapy IV (S) (3,0) This course focuses on professional attitudes, skills, and awareness. Students leam job hunting skills, and practise leading workshops. Music Therapy 262 Principles of Research (S) (3) A n introduction to elementary research designs and basic statistical procedures. Music Therapy 161 Music Therapy II (S) (3,0) Music Therapy 264 (S) (3,0) Disabling Conditions of Adulthood This course presents three music therapy styles with a focus on theory, analysis, and practice. Included are Developmental Music Therapy, Nordoff/Robbins improvisational style, and the use of Music Therapy in inpatient psychotherapy. A basic introduction to anatomy and physiology, normal and abnormal, and practical elements of standard treatment. Music Therapy 170 Disabling Conditions of Childhood (F) (3,0) A basic introduction to normal and abnormal child development and some major intervention approaches. Music Therapy 180 Interpersonal Skills for Music Therapists (F) (1.5,0) Communication and observation exercises to increase awareness of ingrained skills and habits, and to introduce new alternatives. Music Therapy 191 Practicum II (S) (6,0) Field work, in which students design, lead and document music therapy sessions, in consultation with staff supervision. Weekly seminars examine practicum issues. Music Therapy 220 Improvisation II (F) (1.5,0) Music Therapy 280 Guitar Improvisation for Music Therapists (S) (1,0) Group leading using guitar improvisation, plus exploration of current popular styles and idioms. Music Therapy 290 Practicum III (F) (6,0) Field work and weekly seminars. (Refer to Music Therapy 191.) Music Therapy 291 Practicum IV (S) (6,0) Field work and weekly seminars. (Refer to Music Therapy 191.). Music Therapy 310 Internship (9,0) 1000 hours of clinical field work, including monthly seminars. A n exploration of group process through free and structured improvisational group techniques. Career/Vocational — Music 151 Office Administration Instructional Faculty D. BLANEY, I.D. (UBC), C.P.S.; Coordinator, Legal Secretarial Program N. BURY, B.A. (UBC), ACI, (U. of T.) Coordinator Office Technology Program D. C L A R K , Lab Supervisor J. C L A R K , R.N. (Regina Cen. Hosp.), Teaching Dip. (Sask.) V. C O C H R A N , LL.B. (UBC) C. C R A M , B.A., M.A., Prof. Teaching Certificate, (Univ. of Toronto) S. FREUND, I.D. (UBC), Legal Assistant Certificate, Coordinator, Office Technology Program S. H O R N , I.D. (UBC) L. JEST, I.D. (UBC), Coordinator, M O A Program D. PHILLIPS, Coordinator, Legal Assistant Program M. SEWARD, B.S.A. (St. Francis Xavier), B.Ed. (Mt. St. Vincent) B. SMITH, B.A., Prof. Teaching Cert. (UBC) L. SPICER, B.Comm., Prof. Teaching Cert. (UBC) M.B.A. W. TILLEY, B.Ed. (UBC), M.A. (SFU) K. VICKARS, B.Ed., Lic.Acct. (UBC) G. W A U G H , B.A. (Reading), M.A. (UBC), Standard Teaching Credentials (UK), B.C. Registered Psychologist A. WHITE, Instructor/Lab Supervisor The Office Administration department coordinates and delivers six different programs to students with varying levels of skills. These programs/courses provide you with a comprehensive education in preparation for employment in business. OFFICE TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM Contact: 984-4959 The Office Technology Programs are designed to train students in basic office skills as well as in the computer skills essential for the automated office. There are three options within the program providing specialized training in accounting procedures, clerical applications and word/information processing. Graduation Requirements In order to receive a certificate for any of the Office Technology programs you must successfully complete the courses, accumulate the required credits for graduation, and maintain a grade point average of 2.0. Special Fees and Expenses Costs of tuition, textbooks and supplies change regularly. Contact the office at 984-4959 for up-to-date information. Support Staff Martha Mackay, Divisional Assistant Regina Bergner, Receptionist Margaret Taylor, Clerk Typist General Information The Office Administration Division offers business training through the following programs: • Office Technology Program - Secretarial, Financial and Word/Information Processing options • Accelerated Office Training Program- Financial and Secretarial Options • Information Processing Program- Evening Certificate • Legal Secretarial Program • Medical Office Assistant Program Why Office Administration at Capilano College? Quality Education: small classes, personalized instruction, and professional instructors Career Training: secretary, clerk typist, accounting clerk, medical office assistant, legal secretary and word information processing Flexibility: day or evening, part-time or full-time Low Cost: our professional training courses are competitive with other institutions on the Lower Mainland New Technology: electronic typewriters, microcomputer training in fully equipped microcomputer labs. Career/Vocational — Office Administration 152 Awards and Scholarships Gerry Turner Memorial Award - Office Administration Gerry Turner worked for the College for many years. She was Secretary to the Principal, and also worked in the Deans' offices, the Bursar's office, Purchasing, Community Education, Placement, and Accounting. Wherever she was, Gerry gave her best, and her aim was always to promote excellence, and to improve the image of the college in the community. This award is maintained by Gerry's friends at Capilano College who continue to remember her good humour, gentle demeanor, and always even disposition. The Gerry Turner Award is granted on the basis of scholastic excellence and financial need to a student in the Office Administration Program in the Spring term. Apply to the Office Administration Coordinator. 1. Secretarial Option Career Opportunities The graduates of this option are employed in any area of business requiring well developed office skills. Successful students find employment as clerk typists, secretaries, data entry clerks, and dicta-typists. Many graduates continue to supplement their training with either Legal, Medical or Information Processing programs. The Program Admission Requirements The Secretarial Option is a full-time eight month program offered each year from September to April. This program provides training in general office skills. Students are required to have a personal interview with the program coordinator prior to program admission. Although no prerequisites are required for entry into the Financial Option, students will be assessed at the completion of their second month to determine their suitability for the financial option. Admission Requirements Students are required to have a personal interview with the program coordinator prior to program admission. The purpose of the interview is to answer any questions concerning the program and to ascertain whether this type of training is suited to the career goals of the student. Program Content FIRST T E R M BOT 100 Business English BOT 102 Keyboarding BOT 105 Office Procedures BOT 108 Accounting Procedures I BOT 110 Business Records BOT 111 Office Procedures II OFTR 165 Typing Speed Development I Credit Hours 3.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 13 16.5 SECOND TERM BOT 106 Intro to Machine Transcription OFTR 150 Records Management I OFTR 155 Business Writing OFTR 161 Microcomputer Business Applications OFTR 166 Typing Speed Development II OFTR 300 Directed Work Experience I OTEC 108 Word Processing 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 M 15.0 Certificate Requirements: 31.5 credits 2. Financial Option Career Opportunities Individuals are increasingly being confronted with information presented in financial terms. This option provides students with an understanding of both manual and electronic accounting procedures and the ability to apply this knowledge to business situations. Program Content FIRST TERM BOT 100 Business English BOT 102 Keyboarding BOT 105 Office Procedures BOT 108 Accounting Procedures I BOT 110 Business Records BOT 111 Office Procedures II OFTR 165 Typing Speed Development I Credit Hours 3.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 16.5 SECOND TERM BOT 109 Accounting Procedures II OFTR 150 Records Management OFTR 155 Business Writing OFTR 161 Microcomputer Business Applications OFTR 166 Typing Speed Development II OTEC 108 Word Processing (March - June) OTEC 109 Electronic Bookkeeping 4.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 3J) 19.5 THIRD TERM (May/June) BOT 128 Computers in the Financial Office OFTR 167 Typing Speed Development III OFTR 300 Directed Work Experience I OFTR 301 Directed Work Experience II OTEC 108 Word Processing (continued) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 0 6.0 Certificate Requirements: 42 credits 3. Word/Information Processing Option Career Opportunities Graduates are finding employment in positions such as: accounting clerks, data information processors, accounting assistants, junior bookkeepers, full-charge bookkeepers for small and medium-sized firms. The Word/Information Processing Option provides students with the skills needed to work in today's offices. Graduates from this option will find employment in a wide range of positions, which include administrative secretary, correspondence secretary, office assistant, word processing specialist, proofreader, and records management trainee. The Program The Program The Financial Option is a full time program, offered from September to June. This program provides students with training in accounting, general office applications, and microcomputers. The Word/Information Option is a full time program offered from September to June. This program provides students with training in secretarial, word processing, and microcomputers skills. Career/Vocational — Office Administration 153 Admission Requirements Students are required to have a personal interview with the program coordinator. The Word/Information Processing Option requires a minimum typing speed of 45 words per minute. Students will be evaluated at the completion of the second month to determine their suitability for the Word/Information Processing option. Program Content FIRST TERM BOT 100 Business English BOT 102 Keyboarding BOT 105 Office Procedures BOT 108 Account Procedures I BOT 110 Business Records OTEC 108 Word Processing Credit Hours 3.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 3£ 16.5 SECOND TERM BOT 111 Office Procedures II OFTR 150 Records Management OFTR 155 Business Writing OFTR 161 Microcomputer Business Applications OFTR 166 Typing Speed Development II OFTR 181 Machine Transcription OFTR 188 Word Processing II OFTR 189 Word Processing III OFTR 252 Interpersonal Skills & Organizational Psychology OFTR 300 Directed Work Experience I THIRD TERM (May/June) OFTR 167 Typing Speed Development III OFTR 189 Word Processing III (continued) OFTR 301 Directed Work Experience II 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 15 3.0 3.0 15 22.5 1.5 15 3.0 Certificate Requirements: 42.0 credits ACCELERATED OFFICE TRAINING PROGRAM Career Opportunities Graduates of this program are employed in areas of business requiring well developed office skills. There are job opportunities for graduates of the Secretarial option as trainees in many types of businesses. Graduates of the Financial option are employable as accounting clerks or bookkeepers in small to medium sized firms. The Office Training Program is a six month, accelerated program designed to allow students to acquire fundamental office skills plus specialized studies in accounting procedures and introductory word processing. Students taking the Financial Option are fully trained in a manual accounting system. All students receive an introduction to word processing. Career/Vocational — Office Administration 154 While all students receive an introductory course in microcomputers, graduates of this program are advised to augment their training by taking additional microcomputer courses after graduation. Admission Requirements Applicants are required to meet with the program coordinator prior to acceptance. The purpose of this interview is to familiarize the student with program curriculum and ensure that this program meets with the individual's career goals. Program Content Financial Option Credit Hours FIRST TERM (January-April) 3.0 BOT 102 Keyboarding 3.0 BOT 108 Accounting Procedures I BOT 109 Accounting Procedures II 4.5 (March - June) 3.0 BOT 110 Business Records 45 BOT 127 Business English (January - June) 18.0 SECOND TERM (May & June) 15 BOT 105 Office Procedures BOT 109 Accounting Procedures II (continued) BOT 127 Business English (continued) 3.0 OTEC 108 Word Processing 15 OFTR 300 Directed Work Experience I 6.0 Certificate Requirements: 24 credits Secretarial Option FIRST TERM (January - April) BOT 102 Keyboarding BOT 108 Accounting Procedures I BOT 110 Business Records BOT 127 Business English (January - June) SECOND TERM (May - June) BOT 105 Office Procedures BOT 106 Intro to Machine Transcription BOT 127 Business English (continued) OTEC108 Word Processing OFTR 300 Directed Work Experience Certificate Requirements: 21 credits 3.0 3.0 3.0 45 13.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 15 7.5 Business Office Training 105 Office Procedures I (F,S) (1.5,0) INFORMATION PROCESSING PROGRAM EVENING CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Career Opportunities This evening program is designed for individuals wanting to supplement and upgrade their present office skills to meet the demands of today's technology. There is an increasing demand for office personnel with up-to-date micro-computer training. The program offers in-depth training in microcomputers. There are two options in the program - the financial option which provides skills needed to function in a computerized accounting environment and the secretarial option which focuses on the development of computer skills needed for secretarial and general office work. Prerequisites for the Financial Option are a typing speed of 30 words per minute and basic bookkeeping. Prerequisites for the Secretarial Option are a typing speed of 45 words per minute, and good English skills. Certificate Requirements - Core Courses: Electronic Office Procedures Spreadsheets for the Office Worker Word Processing Financial Option Courses O T E C 105 Electronic Bookkeeping This course introduces students to the theory of accounting and to tasks performed in the basic accounting cycle. Emphasis is placed on correct analysis, accuracy and thoroughness, as well as on attitudes of professionalism and independence. Business Office Training 109 Accounting Procedures II (F,S) (4.5,4) 6.0 This course is a continuation of BOT 108 with an emphasis placed on accounting systems and procedures. Business simulations are used throughout the course. 1.5 Business Office Training 110 Business Records (F,S) (3,0) Secretarial Option Courses Word Processing II Students will develop machine transcription skills. Specifically, they will learn to operate efficiently the LanierEdisette transcriber. Specific reviews of points of grammar, punctuation, spelling and transcription style will be emphasized in the transcription of mailable business letters. 1.5 1.5 M Certificate Requirements: 7.5 credits OFTR 188 Business Office Training 106 Introduction to Machine Transcription (S,SU) (1.5,0) Business Office Training 108 Accounting Procedures I (F,S) (3,2) Admission Requirements O T E C 052 O T E C 053 OTEC108 This is an introduction to the new office technology and terminology used in business offices. Students will gain knowledge of the procedures used to obtain, store, and distribute information. 1.5 Certificate Requirements: 7.5 credits Course Descriptions Business Office Training 100 Business English I (F) (3,0) The course will familiarize students with business communications with emphasis on spelling, punctuation, and grammar. Memo writing will be covered. Business Office Training 102 Keyboarding (F,S) (3,2) Students will learn the basic skills of keyboarding using correct techniques to acquire speed, accuracy and knowledge of basic formatting. The course is designed to instruct the student in current styles for the preparation of typewritten business materials as well as the correct methods to use in achieving these styles. This course will provide the student with an introduction to business and the skills to correctly compute and record the necessary figures to accurately maintain basic business records. The student will also learn how to operate a ten-key electronic calculator with a minimum level of 100 key strokes per minute on a one minute timing. Business Office Training 111 Office Procedures II (S) (1.5,0) This course is a continuation of BOT 105 and in it the student will gain a knowledge and perspective of the varying roles of office workers in today's automated office. It will help the student to understand the importance of work flows in information processing and recent advances in electronic communication of information. Students will learn about choices available in reprographics and use acquired skills to perform a variety of office simulation tasks. Career/Vocational — Office Administration 155 Business Office Training 120 Introduction to the Keyboard (F.S.SU) (3,0) word processing applications in the preparation of forms, documents and correspondence. This course will teach the student the basic skill of keyboarding using correct techniques to acquire speed and accuracy. Office Technology 109 Electronic Bookkeeping (SU) (3,0) Business Office Training 121 Hands-on course to develop proficiency in the use of the computer for completing bookkeeping tasks, including accounts receivable, accounts payable, payroll, general ledger, and inventory modules. Keyboarding Skill Development (F,S,SU) (1.5,0) This course will take the typist from the point at which he or she is currently performing to appreciably higher keyboarding levels. Business Office Training 123 Microcomputer Keyboarding (F,S) (1.5,0) Students will learn the basic skill of keyboarding on the microcomputer using correct techniques to acquire speed and accuracy. Business Office Training 127 Business English (S) (4.5,1.5) This course is designed to train students in all aspects of business communications necessary for office workers. Emphasis will be placed on spelling, punctuation and grammar and techniques for preparing memorandums and business letters. Business Office Training 128 Computers in the Financial Office (S) (1.5,0) The use of the computer to perform specialized business applications. Spreadsheets, their design and use, will be a major component of this course. Office Technology 052 Electronic Office Procedures (F,S) (1.5,0) Introduction to a data base program and its use in an electronic filing system. Students will learn to create, add, delete, store and retrieve files electronically. Office Technology 053 Spreadsheets for the Office Worker (F,S) (1.5,0) A n introduction to the design and use of spreadsheets for general office applications. Office Technology 105 Electronic Bookkeeping I (F,S) (1.5,0) The use of accounting programs for entering, storing, and retrieving records; and producing reports of the financial activities of a business. Office Technology 108 Word Processing (F,S,SU) (3,0) A hands-on course in the use of the microcomputer for Career/Vocational — Office Administration 156 Office Training 150 Records Management: Systems and Administration (S) (1.5,0) The course will provide students with an understanding of computer-assisted storage and retrieval systems. The primary emphasis in this course is the hands-on use of electronic filing and report generating programs, along with an introduction to a data base program. Office Training 155 Business Writing (S) (3,2) This course utilizes the computer to improve the student's quality of grammar, spelling and word usage, and to develop and/or improve his/her composition skills. Office Training 161 Microcomputer Business Applications (S) (3) A n introduction to the theoretical aspects of microcomputers and to a number of widely-used business programs; DOS, Spreadsheets and database. Office Training 165 Typing Skill and Speed Development (F) (1.5,0) This course will build typing speed and accuracy by taking the student by planned progression from the point at which each is currently performing to appreciably higher stroking levels. Office Training 166 Typing Skill and Speed Development II (S) (1.5,0) A continuation of OFTR 165. Office Training 167 Typing Skill and Speed Development III (SU) (1.5,0) A continuation of OFTR 166. Maintenance or further development of typing speed and accuracy. Office Training 181 Machine Transcription (S,SU) (3,0) Development of transcription skills including special reviews of spelling, punctuation and grammar, to produce mailable business letters using the microcomputers. Office Training 188 Word Processing II (S) (1.5,6) LEGAL SECRETARIAL PROGRAM Contact: 984-4959 Prerequisite: OTEC 108 or equivalent. A reinforcement of work procedures used in word processing by producing complex documents which require format, machine operation, and language skill decisions. Advanced features of WordPerfect will be used. Office Training 189 Word Processing III (S,SU) (3.0) Students will learn to use Microsoft Word for producing documents and reports. Office Training 252 Interpersonal Skills and Organizational Psychology (S) (3,0) This course will provide students with basic psychological concepts and experience in several skill areas important in business. It includes practice in relating, assertion, feedback and problem solving skills. Other topics include: small group behaviour, verbal and non-verbal communications; dynamics of personality; leadership styles; supervisory difficulties and conflict resolution. A n experiential approach allows the student to practice constructive interpersonal skills in a supportive setting. Office Training 300 Directed Work Experience (SU) (1.5,0) This course involves both lectures and at least thirty hours of office experience in an industry placement in a field related to the students' program option. This will better qualify the student for employment in that area and/or enable the student to make an informed decision as to career choice. Office Training 301 Directed Work Experience II (SU) (1.5,0) Emphasis will be placed on job search techniques. Students will be required to research employment opportunities, seek interviews with prospective employees, and produce progress reports at regular intervals. Career Opportunities The exacting field of law offers excellent career opportunities for students graduating as legal secretaries. This very specialized program provides intense training in traditional secretarial skills as well as legal procedural courses including: Civil litigation, wills and probate, corporate law, and conveyancing and mortgaging. Upon completion of the program students find employment in specialized, as well as general, law offices. Many graduates of the Legal Secretarial Program proceed to the Part Time Legal Assistant Option Program after graduation. The Legal Assistant Program requires Option students to have 2 years working experience prior to enrolling in the first course, but Legal Secretarial Program graduates are required to have only one year working experience. This allows them to further their education in the evening while earning a salary and gaining valuable experience in the legal support field. The Program This eight month vocational program covers four main areas of law which provide a fundamental understanding of the legal system in B.C. Students are trained in legal terminology, procedural rules, and review relevant legislation, and formatting and handling of legal documents. Shorthand, typing, word processing, legal office procedures, and a two-week legal office work practicum are included in the curriculum. A Capilano College certificate is granted upon successful completion of the program. Admission Procedures Students are admitted to the Program twice a year in September and January for two consecutive four month terms of study. Applications may be made at any time. To ensure your name is on the list for the Information Meetings held twice a year call the Office Administration Department at 984-4959. Interested applicants are invited to attend an information meeting. An evaluation of keyboarding speed, English language proficiency, and arthmetic skills will be conducted at this time. During the meeting, an appointment for a personal interview will be arranged. During your interview you will have an opportunity to ask further questions, and discuss your qualifications and Career/Vocational — Office Administration 157 career goals. Your test results will be reviewed with you at this time. The objective of the Personal Interview is to assist in selecting applicants who will be most suited to a career as a Legal Secretary. Admission Requirements f. High school diploma or equivalent 2. English language proficiency 3. Keyboarding of 45 wpm Please submit the following material prior to or during the pre-admission interview: (a) A resume describing your education, skills, and work experience. (b) A transcript from the last educational institute you attended (c) A letter of recommendation from a former employer or teacher. Special Fees and Expenses In addition to registration and tuition fees, students can expect to spend approximately 600.00 on textbooks and supplies. Program Content Credit Hours FIRST TERM 3.0 Beginning Shorthand LGST 102 3.0 Basic Litigation LGST 109 Basic Conveyancing & Mortgage LGST 112 3.0 Procedures 1.5 Wills & Probate Procedures LGST 114 1.5 Introduction to the Legal System LGST 116 LGST 123 C M N S 159 Legal Document Processing on the Microcomputer Communications for Legal Secretaries SECOND TERM Shorthand Speed Development LGST 103 Typing Skill & Speed Developmentl LGST 105 LegalMachine Transcription LGST 107 Corporate Procedures LGST 110 Basic Conveyancing & Mortgage LGST 112 Procedures (continued) Legal Office Procedures LGST 117 Directed Work Experience LGST 119 Computer Applications LGST 122 in the Legal Office Graduation Requirements Total Program Credits: 35.25 A program completion certificate is awarded to students who have successfully completed 35.25 credits. Course Descriptions Awards Legal Secretary Training 102 Beginning Shorthand (F,S) (3,2) 3.0 3J) 18.0 1.5 .5 3.75 3.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 17.25 Two scholarships are awarded annually to students in the Legal Secretarial Program. The first one is the Davis & Company Legal Secretarial Scholarship. This $300.00 scholarship, donated by the law firm of Davis & Company, is granted on the basis of scholastic excellence and financial need. This scholarship is available in the Spring to a second term student in the Legal Secretarial Program. Beginning study of Forkner shorthand system with emphasis on application of theory and development of speed utilizing high frequency vocabulary. Successful students should be able to take dictation at 60 wpm after completing one term. This course requires an additional two hours of lab time per week. The second one is a Campney & Murphy Legal Secretarial Scholarship. This $350.00 scholarship, donated by the law firm of Campney & Murphy, will be awarded in the summer term to an outstanding student entering the second term of the Legal Secretarial Program. Legal Secretary Training 103 Shorthand Speed Development I (S.SU) (1.5,0) Candidates for both scholarships must rank in the top four grade point average placements during first term and must demonstrate potential as professional careerminded legal secretaries. Prerequisite: LGST 102 or a shorthand speed of 60 wpm. Continuation of speed development, theory review, increased vocabulary, dictation of familiar and unfamiliar material aiming at 90% accuracy in transcription. Legal Secretary Training 105 Typing Skill and Speed Development I (S,SU) (1.5,0) Remedial drills, power drills, short and sustained timed writings to increase speed and accuracy in keyboarding. Career/Vocational — Office Administration 158 Legal Secretary Training 107 Legal Secretary Training 117 Legal Machine Transcription (S.SU) (3.75,2) Legal Office Procedures (S,SU) (3.0,0) After a review of basic transcription skills, students will develop skills in transcribing legal materials including: correspondence, accounts, legal forms, and documents in specialized areas of law. Mandatory two hour lab per week. A course to prepare legal secretarial students for positions in law offices. Instruction in time keeping, diary systems, use of law library, ethical responsibilities, filing, and other procedures particular to the profession. Emphasis will be placed on the structure of a law office, the differences between large and small offices, and the office procedures unique to the practice of law. Legal Secretary Training 109 Basic Litigation I (F.S) (3,0) Introduction to court procedures in County and Supreme Courts of B.C. The course will cover procedures in pretrial preparation, the preparation of documents, the use of precedents in County and Supreme Courts. Legal Secretary Training 110 Corporate Procedures I (F,S) (3,0) A n examination of the B.C. Companies Act and the various documents that a legal secretary must be familiar with in order to incorporate a company and attend to routine filings and resolutions. Records Office requirements, annual proceedings, preparing share certificates and registration, etc., will also be covered. Legal Secretary Training 119 Directed Work Experience (S.SU) (1.5, 30) In-term work experience involving three lecture hours and at least 60 hours of related office experience in the legal field. Also covered is the resume, job application, cover letter and interview. Legal Secretary Training 122 Computer Applications in the Legal Office (S,SU) (3,0) The student, as a non data processing office worker, will learn to identify the components of office automation and to identify the utilization of advanced work stations in time-consuming production and administrative functions. Legal Secretary Training 112 Legal Secretary Training 123 Basic Conveyance & Mortgage Procedures (F.S.SU) (3,0) Legal Document Processing on the Microcomputer (F,S)(3,2) History and examination of the land registry system in B.C. Land Titles Act requirements, documents necessary for registration; the nature and effect of transfers and charges; search procedures will be covered. The course covers contracts of purchase and sale, Land Titles Act requirements, procedures, documents, forms involved in conveying title and registering various charges. Emphasis will be on preparing acceptable documents, transfers, mortgages, agreements for sale and necessary related forms. Using WordPerfect software on an IBM compatible microcomputer, the student will be introduced to word processing concepts through practical applications indicative of a legal office. Legal Secretary Training 114 Wills and Probate Procedures (F,S) (1.5,0) A n examination of the Wills Act, and Estate Administration Act. Students will prepare the necessary documents to obtain Letters Probate and Letters of Administration in the Supreme Court of B.C. Legal Secretary Training 116 Introduction to the Legal System (F,S) (1.5,0) This course acquaints students with a working knowledge of the Canadian and B.C. Court System, ethics of the legal profession and the rules of the Law Society relating to trust accounts, with added emphasis on legal vocabulary. Career/Vocational — Office Administration 159 MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM Contact: 984-4959 Career Opportunities The health care industry is one of the largest industries in Canada, and the Medical Office Assistant is a recognized member of the modern medical team. Graduates of this program have the specialized training required to work in a number of medical settings: receptionist or medical assistant in an office or clinic, or in a hospital as an admitting clerk or department stenographer. Assistant Program. A bursary of $250 to $300 will be awarded to an M O A student based on a financial need and who has a satisfactory standing of 70% or better. Program Content Credit Hours FIRST TERM 3.0 Communications C M N S 150 3.0 Medical Document Processing I M O A 100 3.0 Medical Office Procedures M O A 105 1.5 Introduction to Health Care M O A 107 M O A 109 M O A 111 M O A 121 Anatomy & Related Physiology and Pathology I Medical Terminology I Medical Document Processing II The Program This Medical Office Assistant program offers pre-service, specialized education for prospective students which includes: • • • • • • Medical terminology and anatomy and physiology Medical ethics Medical transcription Medical records management Aseptic techniques Preparation, assisting and follow up of patient for medical examinations • Specimen collection and basic office diagnostic proce- • dures • Financial record keeping and computer medical billing • A two- week work practicum in industry Admission Requirements All applicants must meet with the Program Coordinator prior to registration to assess whether or not they have the personal qualities and clerical skills necessary to be a successful Medical Office Assistant. Prior to admission students must complete a St. John's Standard First Aid Certificate and achieve a typing speed of 45 wpm. Graduation Requirements Students completing 36 credits, as outlined in the above profile, will be awarded a Capilano College Program Completion Certificate. Special Fees and Expenses In addition to tuition and registration fees, students can expect to spend approximately $600.00 on textbooks and supplies. Awards and Scholarships The Maureen Piekaar Bursary was established in memory of Maureen Piekaar, an instructor in the Medical Office Career/Vocational — Office Administration 160 SECOND TERM Typing Skill & Speed Development M O A 102 Machine Transcription M O A 103 Medical Office Procedures M O A 106 Introduction to Health Care II M O A 108 Anatomy & Related Physiology M O A 110 and Pathology II Medical Terminology II M O A 112 Directed Work Experience M O A 115 Fundamentals of Computers in M O A 122 Health Care 3.0 3.0 L5 18.0 1.5 3.0 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 18.0 Total Program Credits: 36 Course Descriptions Medical Office Assistant 100 Medical Document Processing I (F) (3.0,3) Prerequisite: Typing speed of 40 wpm Speed development and accuracy in typewriting with emphasis on production, including display techniques, letter styles, and general business and medical reports. Medical Office Assistant 102 Typing Skill and Speed Development (S) (1.5,0) Remedial drills, power drills, short and sustained timed writings to increase speed and accuracy in medical typewriting. Medical Office Assistant 103 Machine Transcription (S) (3,2) Prerequisite: M O A 100 & 111 Practice in transcribing medical forms, letters and reports from Lanier dictation equipment. This course entails a mandatory two-hour lab. Medical Office Assistant 105 Medical Office Assistant 112 Medical Office Procedures I (F) (3,0) Medical Terminology II (S) (3,0) Students will learn office procedures common to medical offices and hospitals. The students will gain expertise in meeting the patient, making patient appointments, keeping patient records, maintaining a filing system, and processing patient accounts for submission to licensed carriers. Prerequisite: M O A 111 Continuation and reinforcement of terminology in M O A 111. Medical Office Assistant 115 Directed Work Experience (S) (1.5,0) Medical Office Assistant 106 Medical Office Procedures II (S) (1.5,0) Continuation of M O A 105. Students will be able to perform financial record keeping for the medical office. Medical Office Assistant 107 Introduction to Health Care I (F) (1.5,16) Prerequisite: St. John's Standard First Aid Certificate Students will learn about clinical procedures pertinent to the doctor's office and the hospital setting. The course includes general information about physical and mental health; medications and health products. Students will also learn how to use and maintain medical office equipment. Medical Office Assistant 108 Introduction to Health Care II (S) (3,16) Prerequisite: M O A 107 Continuation of M O A 107. Medical Office Assistant 109 Anatomy and Related Physiology and Pathology (F) (3,0) A study of structure, function and interrelationships of the organic systems of the body. Common medical disorders, operative procedures and related terminology will be studied in conjunction with the systems. Medical Office Assistant 110 Anatomy and Related Physiology and Pathology II (S) (3,0) Following successful completion of term two, a medical office/clinic or hospital work practicum is arranged for the student. Before the work placement, the student will be required to attend career preparation lectures which will include practice sessions for the employment interview. Medical Office Assistant 120 Medical Terminology and Related Anatomy and Physiology (F.S) (3,0) This course is an evening course designed to familiarize the student with medical terms commonly used in a number of medical settings. The student will also be able to identify the basic function and interrelation of the body systems, as well as identify anatomical terminology. Medical Office Assistant 121 Medical Document Processing II (F) (1.5,2) This course will familiarize the student with word processing applications used in a medical and/or hospital environment. Basic computer terminology will be covered, and students will learn to perform word processing applications on a microcomputer. This course has a mandatory two hour lab. Medical Office Assistant 122 Fundamentals of Computers in Health Care (S) (1.5,0) The student will acquire skills to use the microcomputer to accumulate patient demographic data, disease data, and accounts receivable data for claims submission and research purposes. Prerequisite: M O A 109 Medical Office Assistant 125 A continuation of M O A 109. Medical Office Computer Applications (S) (1.5,0) Medical Office Assistant 111 This course will assist the student in improving practice management by acquiring skills to use the microcomputer as a tool to produce medical and administrative documents common to a health care facility and to accumulate patient demographic data, disease data, and accounts receivable data for claims submission and research purposes. Medical Terminology I (F) (3,0) A n introduction to Greek and Latin prefixes, suffixes, roots, and combining forms common to medical terminology- Career/Vocational — Office Administration 161 Outdoor Recreation Management Contact: Judith Weiss, Divisional Assistant; Brian White or Don Basham, Coordinators, phone 984-4947 Instructional Faculty D. B A S H A M , Coordinator C. BONIFACE, B.Sc., P.G.L.E. (Birmingham), M.Sc.(SFU) L. BOWERING, B.Ed. (UBC) T. B R A A K S M A , Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Cap), Canoe Sport Instructor Cert., CANSI N. CHESTER, B.Ed., B.A. (P.E.) (Sask.), M.P.E. (UBC) A . CHRISTENSEN, CPR Instructor-Trainer, Wilderness First A i d , Instructor, Wilderness Leadership Certificate, Outdoor Recreation Mgt. Dip. (Capilano) J. H A T C H A R D , Dip. Outdoor Rec. Mgt., Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Capilano), Canoe Sport (B.C.) Instructor Cert., CANSI W. INGLIS, B.A., Dip. Marketing C. KILIAN, B.A. (Columbia), M.A. (SFU) S. KIRKVOLD, B.A., M.A. J. PENDYGRASSE, B.Sc., Teacher's Cert. (Manitoba) M. REES, R.N., Industrial First Aid, CPR Instructor, Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Capilano) Wilderness First Aid Instructor D. STEVENS, Dip. Outdoor Rec. Mgt., Wilderness Leadership Cert. (Cap), Canoe Sport Instructors Cert., St. John's Ambulance Instructors Cert., CANSI, C S A Tour Leaders Cert. D. TAIT V. TIMMONS, Sr. Cert. Hospitality & Tourism Admin. (BCIT), B.A. B. WHITE, B.A. (Hons.), M.A. (SFU), Coordinator OUTDOOR RECREATION MANAGEMENT TWO YEAR ASSOCIATE IN ARTS AND SCIENCE Career Opportunities Capilano College's well-established Outdoor Recreation Management program provides excellent training for a wide range of careers in federal and provincial parks, resorts, social service agencies, adventure tourism, and environmental education. Careful practicum placements and an increasing variety of career opportunities ensure that graduates readily find employment in the field. The Program The curriculum includes several trips into B.C.'s wilderness areas, including backpacking experiences in the Coast Mountains, canoeing on coastal waterways, and nordic skiing in the Cariboo. Our program has earned an excellent reputation for its top-quality management and technical skills, wilderness leadership training, and employment contacts. Over the past 18 years, we have expanded our network of practicum placements, keeping us in touch with the latest developments and providing access to career prospects. Admission Requirements Information meetings and interviews are scheduled in the fall and spring. Phone the department for dates and times. In order to be considered, applicants must be at least 19 years of age at the date of entry into the program, should have good reading and writing skills, have previous relevant outdoor experience, and must be physically and psychologically fit. Note: Prior to admission, a doctor's certificate of health will be required. All students need to be well equipped with outdoor gear. DIPLOMA B.C.'s "super natural" environment is ideal for outdoor recreation, and with the growing tourism business and increase in leisure time for most people, the demand for qualified, well-trained managers in the field of recreation management is expanding rapidly. Nestled on the forested slope of the North Shore mountains, close to Whitewater rivers, wilderness lakes, ocean shoreline, and mountain back country, the College is ideally suited for the challenging two-year program. The Outdoor Recreation Department is relaxed and informal; however, we set and maintain high academic and wilderness leadership performance standards. Students will appreciate the individual attention College faculty are able to provide. The College offers two programs: a two year diploma in Outdoor Recreation Management and a part-time certificate program in Wilderness Leadership. Career/Vocational — Outdoor Recreation 162 Admission Procedure Please bring the following documentation to your interview: • At least two letters of reference • High school or post secondary education transcripts • A letter of application, including a resume of past experiences Program Content Credit/Lab hours Major Program Requirements General Education Requirements FIRST T E R M C M N S 150 Basic Communications REC 140 Recreation Delivery Systems REC 152 Intro, to Outdoor Recreation REC 156 Intro, to Environmental Studies *REC 157 Skills Development REC 169 Landscape Interpretation TOUR 111 From Tourism to Tourist T O U R 118 Special Events SECOND TERM C M N S 154 Communications in Recreation REC 130 Physical Fitness REC 141 Outdoor Rec Programming REC 141 Computer Lab REC 151 The Outdoor Environment REC 153 Leisure Issues *REC 157 Skills Development Lab REC 163 Wilderness First A i d I REC 164 Nordic Skiing I T O U R 112 Tourism Marketing 64.5 £0 70.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.5 15 21.0 3.0 1.5 3.0 0 3.0 3.0 0 3.0 3.0 15 21.0 7.0 0 7.0 2.0 0 2.0 3.0 2.0 The Program This is a program for the adventurous! Students will learn the skills necessary to become accomplished leaders in the outdoors. Canoeing, nordic skiing and mountain travel are the major activities, and safety is the emphasis. Emergency management, first aid, and wilderness contingency planning are stressed. Also, ethical behaviour in natural environments and the responsibility to pass these attitudes on to others is accentuated. Students learn through practical experience and are trained to certifiable skill levels. Level Two, the Wilderness Leadership Certificate, combines basic skills with leadership training. 3.0 Admission Requirements 0 8.0 Students must be 19 years of age or older, have some outdoor experience, and possess personal outdoor equipment and clothing. Graduation Requirements *Note: REC 157 is a full-year course. Students register in the fall only for this course. FOURTH TERM REC 255 Outdoor Recreation Practicum PART-TIME CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Level One, the Capilano College Skills Acquisition Certificate, is designed to provide the student with a basic level of activity skills. Note: REC 162 Wilderness Canoeing is offered as an option at the end of the second term. THIRD T E R M REC 161 Backpacking Leadership REC 178 Human Relations in Recreation REC 240 Recreation Administration REC 249 Interpretation Programming REC 252 Outdoor Rec. Resource Mgt. REC 259 Skills Development REC 293 Human Services Applications TOUR 120 Adventure Tourism WILDERNESS LEADERSHIP PROGRAM 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 15 18.0 12.0 12.0 Note: REC 263, Wilderness First Aid II, is offered as an option in the third term. Students will enroll in one course per term, and must obtain a B grade in each course in order to continue in the program. Because outdoor leaders are responsible for people's lives a student receiving a C grade must repeat the course or show proficiency in that activity during the following term before continuing in the program. This must be arranged with the consent of the Program Coordinator and the course instructor. Program Content Wilderness Canoeing Option I. SKILLS ACQUISITION CERTIFICATE FIRST YEAR REC 162 Canoe Leadership I Wilderness First Aid I Credit Hours 3.0 3.0 SECOND YEAR REC 262 Canoe Leadership II 3.0 REC 163 II. WILDERNESS LEADERSHIP C E R T I H C A T E First Year REC 162,163 REC 165 Intro to Wilderness Leadership 6.0 1.5 Second Year REC 262 3.0 REC 263 3.0 Wilderness First Aid II Career/Vocational — Outdoor Recreation 163 Recreation 141 Outdoor Recreation Program Planning (S) (3,3) Wilderness Backpacking Option I. SKILLS ACQUISITION CERTIFICATE FIRST Y E A R REC 161 Backpacking Leadership I REC 163 Wilderness First A i d I Credit Hours 3.0 3.0 SECOND YEAR REC 262 Backing Leadership II 3.0 Recreation 151 The Outdoor Environment (S) (3,2) II. WILDERNESS LEADERSHIP CERTIFICATE First Year REC 163,161 REC 165 Intro to Wilderness Leadership 6.0 1.5 Second Year REC 261 REC 263 Wilderness First A i d II 3.0 3.0 Wilderness Nordic Skiing Option 3.0 3.0 SECOND YEAR REC 264 Nordic Skiing Leadership II 3.0 II. WILDERNESS LEADERSHIP CERTIFICATE First Year REC 163,164 REC 165 Intro to Wilderness Leadership 6.0 1.5 Second Year REC 264 REC 263 Wilderness First Aid II 3.0 Note: This is a part-time program. Course Descriptions Recreation 130 Physical Fitness (S) (1.5,0) A n overview of the constituents of physical fitness in which the following topics are dealt with: What is physical fitness? What are its physiological determinants? How can physical fitness be achieved and maintained? Weight control, physiological changes resulting from training and exercise, tests for physical fitness. Recreation 131 Physical Fitness Lab (S) (1.5,0) Practical applications of Recreation 130 content. Open to university transfer students with Recreation 130. The structure of delivery systems in British Columbia including non-profit/non-government organizations. Career/Vocational — Outdoor Recreation 164 A concentration on the basics of weather and climate and how weather affects outdoor recreation activities. Mountain weather and personal forecasting will be dealt with in detail. Recreation 152 Introduction to Outdoor Recreation (F) (3,0) I. SKILLS ACQUISITION CERTIFICATE FIRST YEAR REC 163 Wilderness First Aid I REC 164 Nordic Skiing Leadership I Recreation 140 Outdoor Recreation Delivery Systems (S) (3,0) Topics will include: the problems of planning programs in existing delivery systems, seeking ways to solve these present problems, new philosophies to consider in program planning. A lab introducing computer applications in Recreation is included in the course. A n overview of the development of outdoor recreation. Nature and scope of outdoor recreation in relation to modern leisure, nature of supply and demand, demand analysis as a planning tool, outdoor recreation resource perception, psychological nature of outdoor recreation, experience and behaviour, carrying capacities of wildlands, land use conflict, multiple use policies, inventory techniques, land use zoning. Recreation 153 Leisure Issues (S) (3,0) Work and leisure in the human life cycle, adolescence, aging, special needs and leisure, cultural variations in leisure, leisure-related social problems, lifestyle-based variation in work and leisure, factors in lifestyle choice, consumerism and outdoor recreation, sociological perspectives on present and future trends. Recreation 156 Introduction to Environmental Studies (F) (3,0) A n introduction to ecological principles and their application to environmental issues. Local ecosystems and their indicator species will be examined through field work. Recreation 157 Skills Development (F,S) (3,3) Bike touring, winter camping, snowshoeing, camp crafts, woodsmanship skills. Recreation 161 Backpacking Leadership I (SU, F) (3,0) An introduction to the skills of alpine hiking and camp crafts in wilderness areas. Emphasis will be placed on leadership development in organization, safety and group assessment. Topics will include access to wilderness areas, equipment, clothing, navigation, trip planning and legal issues. Consideration will be given to the problems of working with groups, particularly in terms of budget limitations and improvising equipment. Recreation 162 Canoe Leadership I (F.SU) (3,0) A n introduction to the skills, techniques and knowledge of paddling in open canoes. This course includes instruction in proper handling of equipment; paddling skills in grades of water up to and including grade two, practice and rescue, tracking, lining, portaging, river reading, canoe camping and teaching. Leadership techniques and canoeing skills will be stressed throughout the course. Upon completion of Canoe I students will be given the opportunity to take the Flat Water Instructors exam from BCRCA. Recreation 163 Wilderness First Aid I (F.S) (3,0) This course incorporates the principles of First Aid with the specialized needs of the outdoor leader. This course is designed for leaders who can arrange for medical attention for a participant within 12 hours of suffering an injury. The course includes Basic Life Support (CPR) skills and improvised splinting techniques, in addition to the content of a standard first aid course. Special attention will be given to environmental injuries/illnesses. Successful students may apply for Basic Wilderness First Aid for Outdoor Leaders certification. Recreation 164 Nordic Skiing Leadership I (S) (3,0) This is an introductory course designed to give students an initial exposure to winter environments on crosscountry skis. The course includes a lecture and field trip series with emphasis on outdoor activity. Lecture topics are: equipment, waxing, clothing, fitness, avalanche awareness, nutrition, and safety. Skill levels will reflect CANSI and CSA material content. Recreation 165 Introduction to Wilderness Leadership (S) (1.5,0) This course will address topics which relate to Wilderness Leadership in general, regardless of the activity. Topics covered include navigation, woodsmanship, clothing, equipment, menu planning, fitness, leadership styles and legal issues. Recreation 169 Landscape Interpretation (F) (3,2) assessing landscape for potential and hazards for outdoor recreation, outdoor recreation impact on landscape. Recreation 178 Human Relations in Recreation (F) (3,0) Topics include Human Relations in Management, Management Styles, Time Management, the Supervisory Leadership Role, and Human Resources Management Techniques. Recreation 240 Outdoor Recreation Administration (F) (3,0) (Note: This course is open to recreation practitioners in the field.) A study of general business practices in the operation of outdoor recreation facilities, including: record keeping, budgeting, accounting, purchasing, advertising and concession agreements, liabilities, laws and statutes governing parks and recreation agencies. Recreation 249 Interpretive Programming (1.5,0) Interpretive skills, program planning and design, concepts of interpretation. Recreation 252 Outdoor Recreation Resource Management (F) (1.5,0) Parks planning and management, fish and wildlife management, forest recreation, integrated resource management concepts. Recreation 255 Outdoor Recreation Practicum (S) (12,0) The practicum is designed to integrate classroom theory with working experience in the field. Students will arrange with the faculty supervisor to spend three-andone-half months in an acceptable agency placement and will be responsible to a specific agency supervisor. Students will be provided with terms of reference for the practicum experience. Student work performance and potential will be evaluated by the facility and agency supervisor, and students will make a major presentation to the department at the conclusion of the practicum. Recreation 259 Skills Development (F) (1.5) The purpose of this course is to develop specialized visual arts skills related to the students' employment goals. Students will upgrade skills in wilderness photography, display design, brochure design, layout and graphic arts. Landscape awareness and appreciation, interpretation of mountain environments, local geology and landforms, Career/Vocational — Outdoor Recreation 165 Recreation 261 Backpacking Leadership II (SU) (3,0) Prerequisite: Backpacking Leadership I The focus of this course is on expedition planning and leadership, safe travel on ice and snow, and safety on rocky train. Students will also be given instruction on route finding and navigation. A n additional fee will be levied to cover field trip expenses. Recreation 262 Canoe Leadership II (SU) (3,0) Tourism 111 From Tourism to Tourist: An Industry Perspective (1.5,0) A n introduction to the tourism industry and its role in the economy, the scale, impact and major sectors of the tourism industry, tourism products in B.C., development potential, language and terminology used in the industry, tourism industry structure and organization, revenue and costs in various sectors, case studies and applications. Students will learn key legal issues in the industry, and will identify educational and professional career path opportunities in various industry sectors in the province. Prerequisite: Canoe Leadership I This course is a review and addition to the Canoeing I material. The additions include: canoe construction and repair, canoe history and evolution of the aboriginal canoes, tandem and solo moving-water skills, and canoe poling. The course is designed to further develop paddling skills, personal experience, teaching ability and leadership techniques. Where applicable the standards and instruction will be from BCRCA and the Canadian Recreational Canoeing Association. Recreation 263 Wilderness First Aid II (F) (3,0) Prerequisite: Wilderness First Aid I Reviews the material presented in Wilderness First A i d I with emphasis on increased proficiency under conditions of isolation, where medical assistance is distant and where evacuation may be delayed. Non-traumatic illnesses and medical problems are addressed. Emphasis on practical problem-solving and decision-making. Successful students may apply for Advanced Wilderness First Aid for Outdoor Leaders certification. Recreation 264 Nordic Skiing Leadership II (S) (3,0) Prerequisite: Nordic Skiing Leadership I or equivalent This course is designed to further experience, awareness, knowledge, and activity skills initiated in Wilderness Nordic Skiing I. Emphasis will be placed upon the acquisition of techniques for teaching the skills of cross-country skiing in a group situation and ski touring techniques for multi-day trips. This course will also deal with safe winter travel and winter survival. Recreation 293 Human Services Applications (F) (1.5,0) A study of human service policies, statutory responsibilities, social services trends, outdoor recreation services for special populations, human growth and development methods utilizing recreation, appropriate leadership and programming applications. Career/Vocational — Outdoor Recreation 166 Tourism 112 Tourism Marketing (1.5,0) Concepts and principles of marketing, market research, product pricing and costing, service as a primary product, advertising methods, targets marketing, factors in consumer preference, assessment of guest satisfaction. Tourism 118 Special Events as Tourism Generators (1.5,0) Creating a special event or attraction, product choice, community fit, community resources, market analysis, sponsor identification and benefits, administrative structure, volunteer management, public relations, media relations, management styles, B.C. case studies. Tourism 120 Adventure Tourism (1.5,0) Adventure Tourism products in B.C. including rafting, heli-skiing, guiding and outfitting, ocean kayaking, and mountain travel; economic impact of the industry, selling adventure tourism, identifying markets, packaging, legal liability, insurance issues, organization and structure of the industry, licensing requirements for different activities, governments' role in area and activity management, resource management issues, protecting resource areas. Tourism Management Contact: Judith Weiss, Divisional Assistant; Brian White or Don Basham, Coordinators, phone 984-4947 Instructional Faculty D. B A S H A M , Coordinator W. INGLIS, B A . Dip. Marketing S. MEYER, B.A. (Trinity Western) J. PENDYGRASSE, B.Sc., Teacher's Cert. (Manitoba) E. SHERLOCK, B.A., M.A. (UBC) V. TIMMONS, Sr. Cert. Hospitality and Tourism Administration (B.C.l.T.), B.A. S. IBARAKI G. F A N E , B.Sc, M.B.A., R.I.A., B. WHITE, B.A., M.A., (SFU), Coordinator TOURISM MANAGEMENT CO-OP PROGRAM the Supervisory Development Program. It also includes the American Hotels/Motels Association Certificate. Intensive, specialty technical skills courses, contact with the industry, and a four and a half month supervised coop work term encourage a professional attitude to the industry. The program's pragmatic business management approach combined with creative, high content teaching promises a rewarding educational investment for students. Admission Requirements In order to be considered, applicants should be high school graduates, at least 19 years old with good reading and writing skills, and tourism industry work experience. Previous secondary education is a definite asset. Phone the Tourism Department for dates of the information meetings and follow-up interviews. CERTIFICATE PROGRAM Admission Procedure Tourism is British Columbia's second largest industry. As it continues to grow and diversify, the demand for welltrained, qualified supervisors and managers, and for small owner-operated tourism businesses in the provincial tourism work force increases. Capilano College presents two high quality educational options to prospective students: The Tourism Management Co-op Certificate Program, offered at the Lynnmour campus, is an intensive, full-time one year program, incorporating the seven-course core Pacific Rim Institute of Tourism Supervisory Development curriculum. The Tourism Supervisory Development Program is offered on a part-time basis at the Lynnmour campus, and at the Sechelt Campus and Whistler Resort Municipality as demand warrants. The Tourism Department at Capilano is a provincial leader in innovative tourism education, working in close co-operation with the Pacific Rim Institute of Tourism and industry employers to present challenging programs which will start you on your path toward a stimulating career as a professional in the tourism industry. The Program Capilano College's full-time Tourism Management Co-op Program is on the leading edge of tourism education programs in B.C. Its goal is to train students in the supervisory and management skills necessary for the management of travel generators, including resorts, adventure tourism, attractions, conferences, and special events. Please bring the following documentation to your interview: • At least two letters of reference • High school or post-secondary education transcripts • A letter of application, including a resume of past experiences Program Content SPRING TERM Credit Hours Session #1 TOUR 111 From Tourism to Tourist * 1.5 TOUR 112 Tourism Marketing * 1.5 TOUR 114 Human Relations * 1.5 TOUR 116 Financial Management * 1.5 TOUR 117 Computer Applications 1.5 TOUR 126 Conference Management 1.5 TOUR 128 Tourism Careers and Hospitality Management 45 TOTAL 13.5 * Provincial Tourism Supervisory Certificate Program SPRING TERM Session #2 TOUR 113 Human Resource Dev.* TOUR 118 Special Events TOUR 120 Adventure Tourism TOUR 124 Advertising Strategies TOUR 128 Tourism Careers and Hospitality Management TOTAL The program will prepare students for recognition by the Pacific Rim Institute of Tourism through its inclusion of SUMMER T E R M TOUR 130 Co-op Work Term (May 1 to Sept. 15) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 15 7.5 12 Career/Vocational — Tourism 167 FALLTERM Supervisory Leadership* TOUR 115 The Japanese Tourism Market TOUR 119 TOUR 121 Tourism Packaging Media Production Techniques TOUR 123 Financial Planning for TOUR 125 Tourist Operations Tourism Resource and Resort TOUR 127 Management in B.C. TOTAL Course Descriptions 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 9.0 TOURISM SUPERVISORY CERTIFICATE PROGRAM While preparing industry employees for the provincial certification offered by the Pacific Rim Institute of Tourism, this program provides high quality supervisory training for B.C.'s tourism industry. The program is fully transferable within the province's system of colleges and institutes. Courses are offered during the evening starting in January. Courses in the Tourism Supervisory Program will be offered in response to demand in the satellite areas, as well as on the main Lynnmour campus. Admission Requirements In order to be considered, applicants should be at least 19 years old with good reading and writing skills and some tourism industry work experience. Phone the Tourism Department for dates of the information meetings and follow-up interviews. Selection occurs during the fall term. Admission Procedures Please bring the following documentation to your interview: At least two letters of reference • High school or post secondary education transcripts • A letter of application, including a resume of past experiences 168 credit Hours From Tourism to Tourist Tourism Marketing Human Resource Development Human Relations Supervisory Leadership Financial Controls Computer Applications TOTAL Career/Vocational — Tourism A n introduction to the tourism industry and its role in the economy: its scale and impact, major sectors, tourism products in B.C., development potential, language and terminology, industry structure and organization, revenue and costs in various sectors, case studies and applications. Students will learn key legal issues in the industry. Concepts and principles of marketing, market research, product pricing and costing, service as a primary product, advertising methods, target marketing, factors in consumer preference, assessment of guest satisfaction. Tourism 113 Human Resource Development in Tourism (1.5,0) Recruiting, hiring, orientation, initial job training, designing job specifications, interviewing techniques, human rights guidelines, relevant legislation, employee incentive programs, (performance appraisal). Tourism 114 Human Relations in Tourism (1.5,0) Interpersonal communications skills for supervisors in the tourism industry: stress management, listening skills, time management, presentation methods, conflict resolution techniques, staff counselling interviews, non-verbal cues. Tourism 115 Supervisory Leadership in Tourism (1.5,0) • TOUR 111 TOUR 112 TOUR 113 TOUR 114 TOUR 115 TOUR 116 TOUR 117 From Tourism to Tourist: An Industry Perspective (1.5,0) Tourism 112 Tourism Marketing and Customer Service (1.5,0) The Program Program Content Tourism 111 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 L5 10.5 Motivation techniques, leadership styles and development, group dynamics, role-modelling, team-building techniques, concepts of organizational culture, innovation support, dealing with organizational change. Tourism 116 Principles of Financial Controls in the Tourism Industry (1.5,0) Financial control methods, inventory control, labour costs and controls, employee scheduling, payroll, loss prevention, reporting, accounting applications, financial statements, cash/credit transactions, basic financial planning. Tourism 117 Tourism 125 Computer Applications in Tourism (1.5,0) Financial Planning for Tourist Operations (1.5,0) A n introduction to computer techniques applicable to the tourism industry including operating systems, word processing, spreadsheets, and database systems. Future trends and their impact on the industry are also covered. Designing a business plan, financial planning techniques, financial goal setting for tourism managers. Tourism 126 Conference Management (1.5,0) Tourism 118 Special Events as Tourism Generators (1.5,0) Creating a special event or attraction, product choice, community fit, community resources, market analysis, sponsor identification and benefits, administrative structure, volunteer management, public relations, media relations, management styles, B.C. case studies. Tourism 119 The Japanese Tourism Market (1.5,0) Basic phrases necessary to assist Japanese guests. Expectations of Japanese tourists, acknowledgement of Japanese culture and traditions, Japanese beliefs and attitudes, dealing with the Japanese business community. Tourism 120 Adventure Tourism (1.5,0) Adventure Tourism products in B.C. including rafting, heli-skiing, guiding and outfitting, ocean kayaking, and mountain travel; economic impact of the industry, selling adventure tourism, identifying markets, packaging, legal liability, insurance issues, organization and structure of the industry, licensing requirements for different activities, governments' role in area and activity management, resource management issues, protecting resource areas. Tourism 121 Packaging in the Tourism Industry (1.5,0) The components of packaging, costing, market research, dealing with tour wholesalers, researching the package components, selling the package. Basic principles of conference management, client relations, pricing, program planning, staffing, venue selection, and catering. Tourism 127 Tourism Resource and Resort Management in B.C. (1.5,0) Tourism resources in the nine tourism regions of B.C., infrastructure, access, and resource potential, Tourism Resource Management Policy, design, operations, and management of resorts. Tourism 128 Tourism Careers and Hospitality Management (4.5,0) A n in-depth review of industry sectors and employment opportunities, practicum orientation, employment liaison, resume preparation, and an overview of the hospitality management sector, incorporates A H M A Tourism and the Hospitality Industry course. Tourism 130 Tourism Co-op Work Term (12,0) The co-op work term is designed to apply classroom theory through work experience. Students will spend four and one-half months in an acceptable industry placement and will be responsible to a specific industry supervisor. Students' work performance and potential will be evaluated by the faculty and industry supervisor, and students will make a major presentation to the Department at the conclusion of the co-op work term. Tourism 123 Media Production Techniques for Advertising (1.5,0) The production of advertising materials for the tourism industry. Tourism 124 Advertising Strategies (1.5,0) Basic theoretical and practical aspects of advertising, understanding communication systems and media, developing a creative campaign. Career/Vocational — Tourism 169 Special Programs ASIA PACIFIC MANAGEMENT COOPERATIVE PROGRAM Contact: Bob Bagshaw, 984-4981, Fax 984-4992 Instructional Faculty N. A M O N , B.A. (Kent), M.A. (SFU), Economics R. BAGSHAW, B.Comm., M.A. (UBC), M.A. (Colorado), Program and Co-op Coordinator T. HELLWIG, B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Leiden), Indonesian Language S. K A U F M A N N , B.A. (L'Institute d'Etudes Politiques), North Asia Business F. KIEM, B.B.A., Ph. D. Ed. (Jakarta) Indonesian Language L. M A Y , B.A. (Brock), M.A., Ph.D. (UBC), Pacific and Asian Studies B. N G , M.A. (London) B.A. (Int'l Christian Univ.), Teach. Cert. Grad. Master (Hong Kong), Language Teach. Cert. (UBC), Chinese Language, Cross Cultural Communications N. O M A E , B.A., M.A., Teaching Cert., (Osaka U. of Foreign Studies), Japanese Language B. P E N D L E T O N , B.Sc, M.A., Ph.D. (Alberta), Pacific and Asian Studies H. PEVECZ, B. Econ. (Budapest), International Business J. P L A C Z E K , B.A. (Windsor), M.A. (UBC), Ph.D. (UBC), Thai Language C. PRIESTER B. Comm. (Hons), M.A. (UBC) International Business General Information This Diploma Program has been developed to offer training to Canadians who are considering international careers. It is a joint-venture in educational programming, bringing Canadian employers together with students and the College to form a unique blend of experiential and academic training. The emphasis is on Canada's relationships with PACIFIC RIM COUNTRIES and our potential to extend our network through trade, business, applied technology and development projects. The Program Students who are interested in a career in the Pacific Rim will follow an integrated program of study which includes the historical, economic, political, cultural and business dynamics of the region. This is a full-time day program which offers an intensive curriculum designed to serve the student in future international work. Each student will take the core courses in Pacific and Asian Studies and International Business Trade and Finance. In addition, students will choose an Asian language. Japanese, Chinese (Mandarin), Indonesian and Thai are offered in a classroom format. Other Asian languages may be offered by special arrangement. Special Programs 170 After two terms of study, eligible students will complete a work placement. This co-op work term will vary from four to twelve months. Students will be evaluated by the College and the employer, and this will become part of the student's record. Every effort will be made to secure co-op placements for students. Jobs will be sought in Asian countries and in International Canadian organizations. The work term will end with a debriefing session. Career targets of the current class include areas such as Finance, International Marketing, Trade, Tourism, Human Resources, Development, Education, Planning, Journalism, Urban Land Development, Government and NonGovernment organizations. Applications for admission should be sent to the Asia Pacific Management Cooperative Program office, telephone 984-4981, F A X 984-4992. Admission Requirements Applications for admission are invited from: a) Students who have completed a degree in Arts, Sciences or a professional area such as Business A d ministration, Applied Science, Agriculture, Engineering, Biotechnology, or Forestry. b) Students who are currently employed and who are eligible for company sponsorship into this program. Sponsorship may come from a wide range of business and development organizations which have the common factor of wanting their employees trained for international work. * Admission maximum is 32 students per year. * Students are selected on the basis of their academic record, relevant experience, a written submission and an interview. * Successful applicants will have strong written and inter-personal communication skills. Program Content F A L L TERM PASN 500 Pacific & Asian Studies I PASN 502 International Business Trade and Finance I Language Elective SPRING TERM PASN 501 Pacific & Asian Studies II PASN 503 International Business Trade and Finance II Language Elective WORK TERM Co-op I Summer Co-op II Fall Co-op III Spring Course Descriptions PASN 500 Pacific and Asian Studies I (F) (10.5) This is an interdisciplinary course designed to acquaint students with the geography, economy, history, culture, social and political structures of 18 Pacific Rim countries from the period before Western contact to the First World War. The course will make students aware of the national and regional patterns of experience in the Pacific Rim. Chinese 110 Intensive Chinese (F) (3,2) Course designed to maximize the acquisition of oral fluency and comprehension. The course will lay the foundation for further understanding and study in an immersion environment. Chinese 111 Intensive Chinese (S) (3,2) Continuation of Chinese 110. PASN 501 Pacific and Asian Studies II (S) (10.5) This is an interdisciplinary course designed to acquaint students with the geography, economy, history, culture, social and political structures of 18 Pacific Rim countries from the first world war to the present day. The course will make students aware of the national and regional patterns of experience in the Pacific Rim. Indonesian 110 Intensive Indonesian (F) (3,2) Course to develop basic oral and reading skills in Bahasa Indonesian through the study of grammar, vocabulary and culture. Indonesian 111 Intensive Indonesian (S) (3,2) PASN 502 International Business Trade & Finance I (F) (3.0) 1. Familiarizes students with the business environment of Pacific Rim countries, in order that they can realistically determine the problems and prospects of developing mutually beneficial business relations with these countries. 2. Delineates the problems and prospects of trade between Canada and the Pacific Rim countries, in the sense of which commodities would likely be most profitable and how trade can be carried out most effectively. Continuation of Indonesian 110. Japanese 110 Intensive Japanese (F) (3,2) Course to develop basic oral and written communicative skills in Japanese, through the study of vocabulary, grammar, culture and introduction to word processing. Japanese 111 Intensive Japanese (S) (3,2) Continuation of Japanese 110. This course will follow a case study format combined with a number of field studies. The lectures will include a number of guest experts from our business community and abroad. Through these studies students will learn to analyze and solve problems systematically, gain a comprehensive understanding of the complexity of international business, and develop wide sources of business information. PASN 503 International Business Trade & Finance II (S) (3.0) Continuation of PASN 502 PASN 505 Co-op Work Placement (F,S,SU) (9.0) Language Courses Also, see listings under Chinese, Japanese, Indonesian, and Thai in the Academic section of the Calendar. Special Programs 171 Non-Credit Programs and Courses EXTENSION PROGRAMS AND SERVICES Contact: 984-4901 ACHIEVEMENT RESOURCE CENTRE WORKSHOPS AND COURSES Contact: 984-4945 Extension Courses The College offers a variety of cost recoverable non-credit and credit courses and programs through its Extension Programs and Services Department. There are no prerequisites for admission to non-credit courses but occasionally a certain level of proficiency is recommended for admission. The majority of Extension offerings are an outgrowth of the College's academic and career/vocational programs whose faculties contribute to the high level of instructional competence of the programs. Courses and programs are drawn from the areas of arts, music, social sciences, natural sciences, career development, business, computer science, personal development, fashion, media, and modern languages. Educational study tours are also available through Extension Programs. Extension courses are not listed in the Calendar — they are advertised in seasonal brochures distributed throughout the community, in newspaper ads and by direct mail. Community Music School The Capilano College Community Music School offers courses and programs in Instrumental, Voice and Theory for both children and adults at Capilano College and in other community locations. Private music instruction is also offered. The calendar is available by phoning 9844901. Programs for adults are listed in the Extension Programs and Services calendar published twice yearly. Contract Education Extension Programs and Services draws on a wide range of educational resources to provide training for groups of any size in all aspects of business and professional development. Co-sponsorship of Educational Activities Organizations and societies are encouraged to co-sponsor their educational activities with Capilano College. The College can provide facilities, program design and administrative services and welcomes the opportunity to foster public understanding on social, business, artistic and technological issues. For further information on Extension Programs & Services phone 984-4901 (lower mainland), 892-5322 (Howe Sound), or 885-9310 (Sunshine Coast). (For Extension Programs Services tuition fee policy please see page 9). Non-Credit Programs and Courses 172 The Achievement Resource Centre (ARC) offers free workshops on learning skills for college success. You can come for single one hour sessions in lunch hours or you may enroll for the ten hour series. Workshop topics: Concentration Exam Preparation Mind Mapping Learning from your Text Listening Memory Training Notetaking Reading Efficiency Researching a Term Assignment Test Taking Strategies Time Management Introduction to Word Processing A R C also offers 1.5 credit courses: ARC 010 Learning and Study Skills A 15 hour course to develop strategies for time management and effective study. ARC 201 Reading Dynamics A 15 hour course in which participants learn and practice flexible reading skills. Strategies for developing reading comprehension are also included. For further information, call 984-4945 or come to the Achievement Resource Centre in B107 (accessed through the Library). Transfer Guide This transfer guide is provided as a convenience to the student and is correct at the time of printing. Information on any courses not listed can be obtained from the department concerned. Capilano College assumes no responsibility for articulation changes made at the universities which invalidate this guide. Students should be aware when using the guide that Capilano College and Simon Fraser University are on a semester system. The University of British Columbia and the University of Victoria are on a yearly system. This accounts for the apparent discrepancy in transfer credits. NOTE: 11/2 units at U B C or UVic are equal to 3 or 4.5 Capilano College credit hours (see College Calendar under course description for correct credits). Similarly, if two Capilano College courses are required, 3 units at UBC or UVic could equal 6 or 9 credit hours at Capilano College. For example, Psychology 100 and 101 (three credit hours each) would equal 3 units at UBC. This transfer guide is accurate as of January, 1990. If further or updated information is required, please contact one of Capilano College's counsellors or the institution that you wish to transfer to. SIMON FRASER UNIVERSITY Admissions Office Burnaby, B.C. V5A 1S6 291-3224 UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA Registrar's Office #204-2075 Wesbrook Mall Vancouver, B.C. V6T 1Z2 228-2844 (For information regarding transfer credit to any of the above, you may also contact the Business Management Department of Capilano College.) NOTES #1 - SFU: S O C I O L O G Y A N D A N T H R O P O L O G Y Sociogy and Anthropology courses at Simon Fraser University carry four semester hours credit, while college courses generally carry three. To facilitate entry to the program, the following exemptions will be granted to students transferring 60 credits from a college: 1. Completion of five Type 1 transfer courses in Sociology and Anthropolgy (15 credits) will be judged as satisfying the lower division Sociology and Anthropology requirement of five courses (20 credits), providing that program prerequisites have been fulfilled. 2. Completion of four Type 1 transfer courses in Sociology and Anthropolgy (12 credits) will be judged as completion of four Sociology and Anthropology lower division courses (16 hours), providing that program prerequisites are being fulfilled. Such students will be required to take one additional lower division Sociology and Anthropology course at Simon Fraser University in order to complete lower division Sociology and Anthropology requirements. 3. Completion of three or fewer Type 1 transfer courses (nine credits or less) will warrant a department exemption of one credit per course. For further information, consult the Department of Sociology and Anthropology. #2 - UBC: A R T UNIVERSITY OF VICTORIA Admissions Office P.O. Box 1700 Victoria, B.C. V8W2Y2 721-7211 BRITISH C O L U M B I A INSTITUTE OF T E C H N O L O G Y 3700 Willingdon Avenue Burnaby, B.C. V5G 3H2 434-5734 CERTIFIED G E N E R A L A C C O U N T A N T S 1555 West 8th Avenue Vancouver, B.C. V6J 1Y5 732-1211 SOCIETY OF M A N A G E M E N T A C C O U N T A N T S 1575-650 West Georgia Street Vancouver, B.C. V6B 4W7 687-5891 INSTITUTE OF C H A R T E R E D A C C O U N T A N T S 1155 Melville Street Vancouver, B.C. V6E4C4 681-3264 Students planning to enter the program leading to a B.A. degree with a major in Fine Arts should normally apply after four terms. Where Art (History and/or Studio) courses are not available at the College attended, transfer following only two terms would be advisable. Students planning to enter the Studio program leading to the B.F.A. degree should normally apply to the university following two terms. Applicants with four terms will be considered. The maximum credit possible for studio courses for a student who has completed First Year will be three units Fine Arts 181. A student who has completed Second Year will be allowed a further six units of credit in studio courses to correspond to a selection from Fine Arts 281290 (Fine Arts 281-290 or equivalent, to a total of 6 units, is required for the B.F.A.). Students applying for the B.F.A. are reminded that admission to the program is by selection based on standing and courses and an assessment of a folio of art work. The year of admission whether second of third year will be at the discretion of the Department. Transfer Guide 173 The selection committee to screen applicants will meet early in April prior to the session to which application will be made. Applicants should contact the Department of Fine Arts by mid-March to obtain the necessary information on application procedure. Late applicants for the B.F.A. program will be considered at registration time if places are still available. Students who plan to transfer Fine Arts studio credit into an Art Education Program must produce a representative folio of work. The Adjudication Committee of the Art Education program will determine if the work is of acceptable standard for transfer of credit. #3 - SFU: L A N G U A G E COURSES 1. Exemption from language courses will normally be determined by a placement test or other assessment procedure prior to registration. For further information on assessment procedures, consult the appropriate language department. 2. All students (except native speakers or complete beginners) with prior knowledge of a language are required to consult with the language department concerned, for a placement prior to or at registration. Native speakers or students who received their secondary education in a language taught at Simon Fraser University will not normally be admitted to a language course, in that particular language, numbered between 100 and 300 inclusive. 3. Total transfer and course challenge credit in basic language courses may not exceed the limits given below: French —13 semester hours German —11 semester hours Russian — 9 semester hours Spanish —11 semester hours Students interested in course challenge should contact the appropriate language department. Transfer Guide 174 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B . C . University of Victoria Anthropology 120 S.A. (3) Anthropology (1.5)(1 st or 2nd year) Anthropology 100 B (1.5) Anthropology 121 S.A. (3) Anthropology (1.5)(1st or 2nd year) Anthropology 100 B (1.5) Anthropology 120 & 121 S.A. 170 (3), S.A. (3) Anthropology 200 (3) Anthropology 100 B (1.5) & (100 level)(1.5) Anthropology 120 & Women's Studies 122 S.A. 170 (3), S.A. (3) or S.A. 170(3), Women's Studies 200 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Anthropology 100 (3) Anthropology 121 & Women's Studies 122 S.A. 170(3), S.A.(3) or S.A. 170 (3), Women's Studies 200 (3) These courses transfer separately, See individual numbers. Anthropology 100 (3) Anthropology 123 Archaeology 101 (3) Anthropology (1.5)(1st or 2nd year) Anthropology 240 (1.5) Anthropology 124 Archaeology 131 (3) Anthropology 240 (1.5) Anthropology 100 A (1.5) Anthropology 200 S.A. (3)(200 division) Anthropology (1.5) Anthropology (200 Level)(1.5) Anthropology 202 S.A. (3)(200 division) Anthropology (1.5) Anthropology (200 Level)(1.5) Anthropology 204 S.A. 203 (3) Anthropology (1.5)(2nd year) Anthropology (200 Level)(1.5) Anthropology 206 S.A. 286 (3) To be determined. To be determined. Anthropology 208 S.A. (3) To be determined. To be determined. Anthropology 241 Archaeology (6) Anthropology (3) Anthropology (200 Level)(1.5) Anthropology 249 S.A. (3) Anthropology (1.5) Anthropology (200 Level)(1.5) For further information on Anthropology see Note #1 (page 173) Art 150,151,152,154,156 157,158,164,166,167,171, 172,174,178,182,183,184, 185,189 (any two) See individual courses Fine Arts 181 (3) See individual courses Art 250, 255, 257, 262, 263, 265,271,272, 274,282, 283 See individual courses Fine Arts (Studio) (1.5) units each. Credit may be granted from Fine Arts 281-290 (6) after assessment of portfolio See individual courses Art 150 Visual Art (Studio) (2) Art (100 level) (1.5) Art 151 Visual Art (Studio) (2) Art 101 (1.5) Art 152 Visual Art (Studio) (2) Art 153 Visual Art (Studio) (2) Art 154 Visual Art (Studio) (2) Art 160 Art (100 level) (1.5) Art 163 Art (100 level) (1.5) Art 164 Visual Art (Studio) (2) Art 166 Visual Art (Studio) (2) ... Art 167 Visual Art (Studio) (3) ... Art 169 Art (100 level)(1.5) Art (100 level) (1.5) - Art 171 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art (100 level) (1.5) Art 172 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art 110 (1.5) Art 174 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art 120 (1.5) Art (100 level) (1.5) Art 182 Art 183 Art 184 Visual Art (Studio) (2) Art 185 Visual Art (Studio) (2) Art 130 (1.5) ... Art (100 level) (1.5) Art 188 Art 189 TRANSFER GUIDE 175 University of B . C . University of Victoria Capilano College Simon Fraser University Art 204 G.E. Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art 206 G.E. Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art 216 G.E. Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art 217 G.E. Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art 250 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art (200 level) (1.5) Art 255 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art 210(1.5) Art 257 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art 262 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art (200 level) (1.5) Art 263 Visual Art (Studio) (2) Art 220 (1.5) Art 265 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art (200 level) (1.5) Art 100 (1.5) ... Art (200 level) (1.5) Art (200 level) (1.5) Art 268 Art 271 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art 272 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art 273 Art (200 level) (1.5) Art 274 Art (200 level) (1.5) Art 282 Art (200 level) (1.5) Art 283 Art 232 (1.5) Art 284 Visual Art (Studio) (3) Art (200 level) (1.5) Art 300 Visual Art (Studio) (3) For Sculpture Art (200 level) (1.5) Art (200 level) (1.5) Art 301 Art History 100 Art History (3) Transfers with 101 Transfers with 101 Art History 101 Arts History (3) Transfers with 100 Transfers with 100 Art History 100 & 101 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Fine Arts 125 (3) History in Art 120 (3) Art History 104 Arts (3) Transfers with 105 F.A. (100Level)(1.5) Art History 105 Arts (3) Transfers with 104 F.A(100Level)(1.5) Art History 104 & 105 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Fine Arts 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Art History 210 Art History (3) Fine Arte (1.5)(Not to be counted toward the major) Transfers with 211 Art History 211 Art History (3) Fine Arts (1.5)(Not to be counted toward the major) Transfers with 210 Art History 21 OS 211 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. History in Art 260 (3) Art History 220 G.E. VSAR HIST (3) Art History (1.5) History in Art (200 Level)(1.5) Art History 221 G.E. VSAR HIST (3) Art History (1.5) History in Art (200 Level)(1.5) Art History 220 & 221 Art History (3) Art History (3) (may not receive credit for Fine Arte 335) History in Art (200 Level)(3) Art History 250 Visual Art (3) Art History (1.5) History in Art (200 Level)(1.5) Art History 251 Visual Art (3) Art History (1.5) History in Art (200 Level)(1.5) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Art History 250 & 251 TRANSFER GUIDE 176 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B.C. University of Victoria Biology 104 Bioscience 101'(3) Transfers with 105 Biology (100 Level)(1.5) Biology 105 Bioscience 102*(3) Transfers with 104 Biology (100 Level)(1.5) Biology 104 &'105 These courses transfer separately See individual numbers. Biology (3)(no credit in Life Science Departments) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Biology 104 & 1.13 These courses transfer separately. Biology (3)(no credit in Life Science Departments) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Biology 108 Bioscience 101 (3) Transfers with Biology 111 Biology (150 partial credit) (1.5) Biology 110 Bioscience 101*(3) Transfers with 111 Transfers with 111 Biology 111 Bioscience 102*(3) Transfers with 110 Transfers with 110 Biology 110 & 111 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Biology 101 (3) or 102 (3) Biology 150 (3) Biology 113 Bioscience 102 (3) Transfers with Biology 104 Biology (300)(1.5) Biology 200 Bioscience 202 (3) Biology (1.5)(2nd year)(precludes credit for Biology 334) Biology (200 Level) (1.5) Biology 306 (1.5) Biology 204 Geography (300 level) (1.5) Biology 206 Geography 215(3) Biology 212 Bioscience 306 (3) Zoology 205 (1.5) Biology 206 (1.5) Biology 213 Bioscience 316 (3) Zoology 203 (1.5) Biology 207 (1.5) Biology 214 Bioscience 201 (3) Biology 200 (1.5) Biology 200 (1.5) Biology 215 Bioscience 301 (3) Biology 201 (1.5)(when accompanied by Organic Chemistry) Biochemistry 200 (1.5) Biology 220 Bioscience (3) Transfers with 221 Transfers with 221 Biology 221 Bioscience (3) Transfers with 220 Transfers with 220 Biology 220 & 221 Bioscience 303 (3), Bioscience (3) Microbiology 200 (3) Microbiology 200 (3) ' Students obtaining C+ or above in Biology 201/202 are allowed to waive Biology 300 requirement for major. * Students contemplating further work in Biology should endeavor to take Biology 110 & 111. Credit will not be allowed for both Biology 104 & 110, or Biology 105 & 111. Statistics (100 Level)(1.5) Business Management 171 Business Management 172 Transfers with 176 Transfers with 176 Business Mgt. 172 & 176 Business (3) (both courses must be completed for credit) Commerce (100 Level)(1.5) Business Mgt. 178 & 179 Business 251 (3) (both courses Commerce 251 (1.5) Business Management 180 Business Management 185 Transfers with 184 Commerce 253 (1.5) Business Mgt. 184 & 185 Business 222 (3) ... Business Management 255 Business (3) Business Management 256 Business (3) Business Management 257 Business (3) Chemistry 104 Chemistry (3) Transfers with 105 Chemistry (100 Level) (1.5) Chemistry 105 Chemistry (3) Transfers with 104 Chemistry (100 Levell) (1.5) Chemistry 103 (3) Chemistry 101 & 102 (1.5) each Transfers with 111 Chemistry 100 (1.5) Chemistry 104 & 105 Chemistry 108 Chemistry 104 (3)(exempts from Chemistry 115) TRANSFER GUIDE 177 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B.C. University of Victoria Chemistry 108 & 111 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry 120(3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry 109 Chemistry 105 (3) (exempts from Chemistry 118) Chemistry 108 & 109 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry 110(3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry 110 Chemistry 104 (3)(exempts from Chemistry 115) Transfers with 111 Chemistry 101 (1.5) Chemistry 111 Chemistry 105 (3)(exempts from Chemistry 118) Transfers with 108 & 110 Chemistry 102 (1.5) Chemistry 110 & 111 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry 120(3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry 200 Chemistry 251 (3)(exempts from Chemistry 256. Will be required to take SFU 251 if "D obtained in 200) Transfers with 201 Chemistry 231 (1.5) Chemistry 201 Chemistry 252 (3)(Will be required to take SFU 252 if "D" obtained in 201) Transfers with 200 Chemistry 232 (1.5)* Chemistry 200 & 201 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry 230 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry 204 Chemistry 261 (3) Transfers with 205 Chemistry (200 Level)(1.5) Chemistry 205 Chemistry 232 (3) Chemistry 204 & 205 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Chemistry 205 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. - ' May take 3rd year organic courses if 213 taken as corequisite in Fall. Consult Department replacement Chinese 100 & 101 Chinese 100 & 101 (6) Chinese 100 (3) Chinese 100 (3) Chinese 200 & 201 To be determined To be determined To be determined Commerce 290 To be determined Commerce 290 (2) Statistics (100 level) (1.5) Commerce 291 To be determined Commerce 291 (2) Economics 240 (1.5) Commerce 292 Business 270 (3) Commerce 292 (2) Commerce 120 (1.5) Commerce 293 Business 251 (3) Commerce 293 (1.5) Commerce 253 (1.5) Commerce 294 To be determined Commerce 294 (1.5) Commerce 254 (1.5) Commerce 296 To be determined Commerce 296 (1.5 Commerce 100(1.5) Commerce 297 To be determined Commerce 297 (1.5) Communications 150 Communications 150 & 156 English (100 level) (1.5) Communications (3) Communications 153 English 115 (1.5) Communications 190 Creative Writing (1.5) Communications 280 Creative Writing (1.5) TRANSFER 178 GUIDE University of B.C. University of Victoria Capilano College Simon Fraser University COMPUTING SCIENCE For Mathematics courses please refer to he "Mathematics" section of the guide Computing Science 100 (Basic) Computing Science 100 (3) Computer Science (1.5) (may allow admission to Computer Science 118) Computer Science 100 (1.5) Computing Science 103 (Pascal) Computing Science 103*(4) Computer Science 114 (1.5) Computing Science 110 (1.5) Computing Science 104 Computing Science 105 (3) Computer Science 213 (1.5) Computer Science (1.5) Computing Science 105 Computing Science (3) Computer Science 116 (1.5) or 118 (1.5)(depending on language used) Computer Science 110 (1.5) Computing Science 130 Computing Science 104 (1) Computing Science 131 Computing Science 112 (1) To be determined To be determined Computing Science 180 Computing Science 001 (3) To be determined To be determined Computing Science 222 Computing Science 201 (4) Computer Science (1.5) Computer Science 115 (1.5) Computing Science 104 & 222 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Computer Science 215 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Computing Science 223 Computing Science 205 (3) Computing Science 220 (1.5) Math 222 (1.5) Computing Science 226 Computing Science 290 (3), 291 (1) To be determined. Computer Science (200 Level)(1.5) To be determined To be determined To be determined Computing Science 231 "If "B" grade achieved, credit will be 101 (4), if below a "B", credit will be 103(4). Economics 100 Economics 100 (3) Economics (1.5) Economics 100 (1.5) Economics 101 Economics 101 (3) Economics (1.5) Economics 100 (1.5) Economics 100 & 101 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Economics 100 & (100 Level)(1.5) Economics 120 Economics 150 (3) Economics (1.5) Economics (100 Level)(1.5) Economics 121 Economics 152 (3) Economics (1.5) Economics (100 Level)(1.5) Economics 200 Economics 205 (3) Economics (1.5)(transfer students taking Economics 100 at UBC may not also obtain transfer credit for one of Economics 200 & 201) Economics 202 (1.5) Economics 201 Economics 200 (3) Economics (1.5)(transfer students taking Economics 100 at UBC may not also obtain transfer credit for one of Economics 200 & 201) Economics 201 (1.5) Economics 200 & 201 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Economics 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Economics 211 ... Economics 201 (1.5) Economics (200 Level)(1.5) ... Economics 202 ((1.5 Economics (200 Level)(1.5) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Economics (200 Level)(3) Economics 212 Economics 211 & 212 English 010 English (3) English 100 English 099 (2) G.E. Engl. (1) See English 100 or 102 Listing. English 115 (1.5) English 100 or 102,103,104, 105,106 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Any two: English 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. English 102 English 210(3) See English 100 or 102 Listing. English 115 (1.5) English 103 English (3) See English 100 or 102 Listing. English (100 Level)(1.5) TRANSFER GUIDE 179 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B.C. University of Victoria English 104 English 101 (3) See English 100 or 102 Listing. English 121 (1.5) English 105 English 102 (3) See English 100 or 102 Listing. English 122 (1.5) English 106 English 103 (3) See English 100 or 102 Listing. English 122 (1.5) English 105 & 106 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. See English 100 or 102 Listing. English (100 Level)(3) English 190 English (3) Transfers with 191 Transfers with 191 English 191 English (3) Transfers with 190 Transfers with 190 English 190 & 191 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Creative Writing 202 (3)(permission to enter senior courses in Creative Writing subject to assessment of recent writing by UBC department) Creative Writing 100(3) English 200 English (3)(exempts from English 204 or 205) Transfers with 201 Transfers with 201 English 201 English 206 (3) Transfers with 200 Transfers with 200 English 200 & 201 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. English 201 (3) English 200 (3) English 202 English 121 (3) Transfers with 203 English (200 Level)(1.5) English 203 English 221 (3) or English (3) Transfers with 202 English (200 Level)(1.5) English 202 & 203 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. English 202 (3) English 202 (3) English 204 English 222 (3) Transfers with 205 Transfers with 205 English 205 English 222 (3) or English (3) Transfers with 204 Transfers with 204 English 204 & 205 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. English (3)(2nd year literature) English 203 (3) English 206 English 103 or English (3) English 206 (1.5) English (200 Level)(1.5) English 207 To be determined To be determined To be determined English 208 English (3) English 207 (1.5) English (200 level) (1.5) English 209 English (3) English 205 (1.5) English (200 level) (1.5) English 210 English (3) English 206 (1.5) English (200 level) (1.5) English 211 English (3) English 204 (1.5) English (200 level) (1.5) English 212 English (3) Transfers with 213 English (200 Level)(1.5) English 213 English (3) Transfers with 212 English (200 Level(1.5) English 212 & 213 These courses transfer separately See individual numbers. English (3)(2nd year Literature) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. English 215 English (3) English (1,5)(2nd year) English (200 Level)(1.5) English 216 English 102 (3) or English (3) English (1.5)(2nd year) English (200 Level)(1.5) English 290 English (3) Creative Writing (1.5) Creative Writing 201 (1.5)(part credit) English 291 English (3) Creative Writing (1.5) Creative Writing 202 (1.5)(part credit) Ensemble 100 & 150 Music 154(1) Music 180(1) Ensemble 110 & 160 Music 150(1) Music 180(1) Ensemble 135 & 185 Music 164(1) Ensemble 200 & 250 Music 154(1) Music 280(1) Ensemble 210 & 260 Music 150(1) Music 280 (1) Ensemble 235 & 285 Music 164(1) Total allowable transfer credit in large assembly (Music 150,152, 153,154) will be limited to 2 units. TRANSFER 180 GUIDE Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B.C. University of Victoria French 100 French *{3) Transfers with 101 Transfers with 101 French 101 French *(3) Transfers with 100 Transfers with 100 French 100 & 101 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. French 105 (3) French 100 (3) French 120 & 121 French '(3) each French 110 (3) French 160 (3) French 130 & 131 French '(3) each French (3) (1st year) French 100 (3) French 170S 171 French '{2) each French 120 (3) French 180 (3) French 190 & 191 French *(3) each French 115(3) French 160 (3) French 270 & 271 French '(3) each French 202 (3) French 290 (3) French 290 & 291 French *(3) each French 215(3) French 180 (3) 'For information on the transferability of any one of the following French courses see Note #3 (page 174) Geography 100 Geography 141 (3) Geography 220 (1.5) Geography 101 B (1.5) Geography 101 Geography (3) Geography 102 (1.5) Geography (100 Level)(1.5) Geography 106 Geography 263 (3) Geography (1.5) Geography (100 Level)(1.5) Geography 108 Geography 262 (3) Geography 190 (1.5) Geography (200 Level)(1.5) Geography 112 Geography 111 (3) Transfers with 114 Geography 203 A (1.5) Geography 114 Physical Geography (3) Transfers with 112 Geography 203 B (1.5) Geography 112 & 114 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Geography 101 (3) Geography 203 (3) Geography 200 Geography 121 (3) Geography 260 (1.5) Geography 201 A (1.5) Geography 201 Geography (3) Geography (1.5) Geography 201 B (1.5) Geography 200 & 201 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Geography 201 (3) Geography 205 Geography 263 (3) Geography (1.5) Geography 221 Geography 250 (3) Geography (1.5) Geography (200 Level)(1.5) Geography 249 Geography (3) Geography (1.5) Geography 205 B (1.5) Geology 110 Geology (3) Transfers with 111 Transfers with 111 Geology 111 Geology (3) Transfers with 110 Transfers with 110 Geology 110 & 111 These courses transfer separately. Geology 105 (3) Geology 100 (3) German 100 & 101 German' (3) each German 100 (3) German 100 (3)* German 200 & 201 German* (3) each German 200 (3) German 200 (3)' ' Must complete survey of German Grammar. Grade of "C" or above required. ' For information on the transferability of any one of the following German courses see Note #3 (page 174). History 100 History 216(3) To be determined Classics (100 level) (1.5) History 102 History 223 (3) History (1.5) History 240 (1.5)(part credit*) History 103 History (3)(2O0 Division) History (1.5) History 240 (1.5)(part credit*) TRANSFER GUIDE 181 Capilano College S i m o n Fraser University University of B . C . U n i v e r s i t y of V i c t o r i a History 102 & 103 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. History 120 (3) History 240 (3) History 108 History 212(3) History (1.5) History 210 (1.5)(part credit*) History 109 History 213 (3) History (1.5) History 210 (1.5)(part credit*) History 108 & 109 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. History 210 (3) History 110 History 101 (3) History (1.5) History 230 (1.5)(part credit*) History 111 History 102 (3) History (1.5) History 230 (1.5)(part credit*) History 110 & 111 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. History 135 (3) History 230 (3) History 200 History (3)(200 division) History (1.5) History (200 Level)(1.5) History 201 History (3)(200 division) History (1.5) History (200 Level)(1.5) History 205 History 201 (3) History (1.5) History (200 Level)(1.5)(students should not be permitted to take 355) History 207 History (3)(200 division) History (1.5)(preclues credit for History 101) History 236 (1.5)(part credit*) History 208 History (3) History (1.5) History (200 Level) (1.5) * If half the course has been students will not be permitted to take the complete course at UVic. For further information contact the UVic. History Department. completed Indonesian 100 G.E. INDO (3) PACI (100 level) (1.5) Indonesian 101 G.E. INDO (3) PACI (100 level) (1.5) Indonesian 100 & 101 Indonesian 102 (3) Japanese 100 Japanese 100 (3) Japanese 101 Japanese 101 (3) Japanese 100 & 101 Japanese 110 & 111 Japanese 102 (3) Japanese 100 (3) Japanese 100 (3) Japanese 100 or 149 (3) Japanese 200 To be determined To be determined To be determined Japanese 201 To be determined To be determined To be determined Labour Studies 140 History (200 level) (1.5) Labour Studies 142 History (200 level) (1.5) Labour Studies 170 English (100 level) (1.5) Legal Assistant Studies 150 Political Science 151 (3) Legal Assistant Studies 151 Criminology (3) Legal Assistant Studies 258 Legal Studies (3) Legal Assistant Studies 268 Criminology (3, MATHEMATICS For Computing Science courses please r3fer to the "Computing Science" section of the guide. Mathematics 010, 011,012 All three must be taken Mathematics 100 (3) TRANSFER 182 GUIDE Mathematics 012(0) Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B.C. University of Victoria Mathematics 099 To be determined To be determined To be determined Mathematics 101 Mathematics 101 (3) Statistics 203'(1.5) Statistics (100 Level)(1.5) without Algebra 12 (0) credits Mathematics 101 & 102 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Statistics (100 level)(3) with Algebra 12; without Algebra 12 Mathematics 101 & 110 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Statistics 105 (1.5) and Mathematics 100 (1.5) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 101,102 & 205 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These course transfer separately. See individual numbers. Statistics 250 & 251 (3) Mathematics 101 & 205 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Statistics 250 (1.5) Mathematics 102 Mathematics 302 (3) Statistics 303' (1.5) Statistics 250 (1.5) Mathematics 103 Mathematics 100 (3) To be determined Mathematics 012 (0) Mathematics 105 Mathematics 100 (3) Transfers with 108 or 110 Mathematics 012(0) Mathematics 105 & 108 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 111 (3)(1.5 units in Faculty of Science) Mathematics 111 (3) (1.5 units in Faculty of Science) Mathematics 111 (3)(1.5 units in Faculty of Science) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 108 Mathematics 157*(3) Mathematics 140'(1.5) Mathematics 102(1.5) Mathematics 109 Mathematics 158(3)" Mathematics 141* (1.5) Mathematics (200 Level)(1.5) Mathematics 110 Mathematics 151 *{3) Mathematics 100 (1.5) Mathematics 100 (1.5) Mathematics 111 Mathematics 152 (3)" & Mathematics (1) Mathematics 101 (1.5) Mathematics 101 (1.5) Mathematics 110 & 111 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Mathematics 100 (1.5), Math 101 (1.5) & Math (100 Level)(1) Mathematics 200 Mathematics 232 (3) Mathematics 221 (1.5) Mathematics 233 A (1.5) Mathematics 205 Mathematics 272 (3) Mathematics or Statistics 205 (1.5) Statistics (200Level)(1.5) Mathematics 215 Mathematics 242 (3) Mathematics 220(1.5) Mathematics (200 level) (1.5) Mathematics 230 Mathematics 251 (3) Mathematics 200 (1.5) Mathematics (200 level) (1.5) Mathematics 231 Mathematics 252 (3) Mathematics 201 (1.5) Mathematics (200 Level)(1.5) Mathematics 235 Mathematics 310 (3) Mathematics (1.5) (precludes credit for Math 315) ' Credit is permitted for only one of Mathematics 151 or 157. ' Not for faculty of Science or Mathematics students. Mathematics 103 & 110 Mathematics 105 & 110 Mathematics 201 (1.5) " Credit is permitted only for one of Mathematics 158 or 152. Media 053 Film (Studio) (3) Media 075 Film (Studio)(2) Media 153 Film (3) Media 171 &271 Communications 257 (3) ... ... Media 181 &182 Communications 258 (3) Media 183 & 185 Credit may be assigned after portfolio interview with student. Media 253 Film (Studio) (3) ... Music 100 Music (3) Music 100(1) Music (100 Level)(1) Music 101 Music (3) Music 101 (1) Transfers with 100 Music (100 Level)(1) TRANSFER GUIDE 183 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B.C. University of Victoria Music 100 & 101 These courses transfer separately. These courses transfer separately Music 100 A & 100 B (1.0 each) Music 102 (2) Music (200 level) (1.5) Music Studio (1) each* Music 105(1) Music 170 (1.0) Music 141 (1) Music 236 (1.5) Music 120 Music History (3) Transfers with 121 Music (100 Level)(1.5) Music 121 Music History (3) Transfer with 120 Music (100 Level)(1.5) Music 120 & 121 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Music 120 and 121 (3) Music (100Level)(1.5) Music 120,121 & 220,221 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Music 110 (3), Music (100 Level)(3) Music 110 & 111 Music 112 & 113 Music 114 & 115 Music 170 Music (100Levei)(1/2) Music 170 & 171 Music (3) Music 180 Music (Studio)(3) Music 180 & 181 Music (100 Level)(1) Music 184 Music (Studio)(3) Music 185 Music (Studio)(3) Music 184 & 185 Music 170(1) Music 194 & 195 Music 181 (1) Music 200 Music (3) Music 200(1) Music 100 A (1) Music 201 Music (3) Music 201 (1) Music 100 B(1) Music 200 & 201 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately Music 201 (2) Music 122 (2) Music (200Level)(1.5) Music 205(1) Music 270(1.0) Music 241 (1) Music 236 (1.5) Music (100 Level)(1.5) Music 210 & 211 Music Studio (1) each" Music 212 & 213 Music 214 & 215 Music 220 Music History (3) Transfers with 221 Music 221 Music History (3) Transfers with 220 Music (100 Level)(1.5} Music 220 & 221 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Music 220 and 221 (3) Music (100 Level)(3) Music 220, 221, & 120,121 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Music 110 (3), Music (100 Level)(3) Music 294 & 295 Music 181 (1) Music 360 Music Education (1) (second year) (Students granted this credit may not take Mus. Ed. 336 for credit.) Music Education (1) (second year) (Students granted this credit may not take Mus. Ed. 335 for credit.) Music 361 Music Education 350 (1.5) Music Education 400 B (1.5) * If Music 112,113,212, &213 completed: FPA104(3) and Music Studio (3) ' Applicants for a major or concentration in Music Education must have at least 65% (or equivalent) in both Music Education 101 & 201. Philosophy 100 (3) Philosophy (1.5) Transfers with 102 Philosophy 102 Philosophy 120 (3) Philosophy (1.5) Transfers with 101 Philosophy 101 & 102 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy 100 (3) Philosophy 100 (3) Philosophy 101 TRANSFER 184 GUIDE Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B.C. University of Victoria Philosophy 101 & 210 Philosophy 100 (3), Philosophy (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. 101 transfers with 102, 210 transfers separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy 101,210 & 211 Philosophy 100 (3), Philosophy 203 (3) Philosophy (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. 101 transfers with 102. 210,211 transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy 110 Philosophy 001 (3) Philosophy (1.5)(precludes credit for Philosophy 102) Philosophy (100 Level)(1.5) Philosophy 110 & 120 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy 102 (1.5) Philosophy 111 To be determined To be determined Philosophy 120 Philosophy (3) Philosophy 130 Philosophy 244 (3) Philosophy (1.5) Philosophy 222A (1.5) Philosophy 140 Criminology 135 (3) To be determined To be determined Philosophy 141 Criminology 131 (3) To be determined To be determined Philosophy 200 Philosophy (3) Philosophy (1.5) Philosophy 232 (1.5) Philosophy 201 Philosophy 220 (3) Philosophy (1.5) Philosophy 326(1.5) Philosophy 200 & 201 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy 201 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy 202 Philosophy 210(3) Philosophy 302 (1.5) Philosophy 203 (1.5) Philosophy 210 Philosophy 100 (3) Philosophy (1.5) Philosophy (200 Level)(1.5) Philosophy 211 Philosophy 203 (3) Philosophy (1.5) Philosophy (200 Level)(1.5) To be determined Philosophy (100 Level) (1.5) Philosophy 210 & 211 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy 250 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Philosophy 220 Philosophy 241 (3) Philosophy (1.5) Philosophy (200 Level)(1.5) Philosophy 221 Philosophy (3) Philosophy (1.5) Philosophy (200Level)(1.5) Philosophy 222 To be determined To be determined To be determined Philosophy 230 To be determined To be determined To be determined Philosophy 231 To be determined To be determined To be determined Physics 104 Physics 100 (3) Physics (1.5) not for credit in the Science Faculty Transfers with 105 Physics 108 Physics 101 (3), Physics (1) Transfers with 111 or 115 Physics (100Level)(1.5) Physics 108 & 111 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physics 110 (3) Physics 102 (3) Physics 108 & 115 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physics 110 (3) 108 tranfers separately. See individual numbers. Physics 110 Physics 101 (3) Transfers with 111 or 115 Transfers with 111 Physics 111 Physics 102 (3) Transfers with 110 or 108 Transfers with 110 Physics 110 8,111 Students will be exempted from Physics 131 (2) Physics 110 (3) Physics 102 (3) Physics 110 & 115 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physics 110 (3) 110 transfers with 111 115 transfers with 114 Physics 114 Physics 120 (3) Transfers with 111 & 115 Physics (100Level)(1.5) Physics 115 Physics 121 (3) Transfers with 108 or 110 or 114 Physics (100Level)(1.5) Physics 114 & 111 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physics 110(3) 111 transfers with 108 & 110 114 transfers with 115 Physics 114 & 115 Students will be exemped from Physics 233 (2) Physics 115(3) Physics 110/120 (3) TRANSFER GUIDE 185 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B . C . University of Victoria Physics 200 Physics * (3) Transfers with 210 Transfers with 210 Physics 201 Physics 221* (3) Transfers with 211 Transfers with 211 Physics 200 & 210 These courses transfer separately. Physics 213(2) Physics 217(1.5) Physics 201 & 211 These courses transfer separately. Physics 215(2) Physics 216(1.5)' Physics 210 Physics* (1) Transfers with 200 or 211 Transfers with 200 Physics 211 Physics' (1) Transfers with 201 or 210 Transfers with 201 Physics 210 & 211 Physics 235' (2) Physics 239(1) Transfers with 200 & 201 Physics 220 Physics' (3) Transfers with 221 Physics 120 (1.5) Physics 221 Physics 211'(3) Transfers with 220 Physics 220 (1.5) Physics 220 & 221 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Physics 216(2), Physics (1) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. ' Students who have completed Physics 200, 201, 210, 211, 220, 221 at Capilano College will be prepared to enter third year Physics courses at SFU. ' Contact Department re: Physics 214 waiver Political Studies 100 Political Science (100 level) (3) Political Science (1.5) Political Studies 101 Political Science 210(3) Political Science 240 (1.5) Political Science 202 (1.5) Political Studies 102 Political Science 231 (3) Political Science 220 (1.5) Political Science 210(1.5) Political Studies 104 Political Science 221 (3) Political Science 200 (1.5) Political Science (200 Level)(1.5) Political Studies 201 Political Science 241 (3) Political Science (1.5) Political Science (200 Level)(1.5) Political Studies 202 Political Science (3)(Can.) Political Science (1.5) Political Studies 203 Political Science (3) Internat'l. Relations Political Science (1.5) Political Science 240 (1.5) Political Studies 201 & 203 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Political Science 260 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Political Studies 206 Political Science 211 (3) Political Science 280 (1.5) Political Science (200 Level)(1.5) Political Studies 207 Political Science 210(3) Political Science 240 (1.5) To be determined. Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)' PM1100 & 200 PM1101 & 201 Political Science (100 Level)(1.5) Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)' PM1102 & 202 ... Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)* PM1103 & 203 ... Music 172 or 182 (2)* Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)' PM1104 & 204 Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)* PM1105 & 205 ... Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100level)(2)' PM1106 & 206 ... Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)* PM1107 & 207 Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)' PM1108 & 208 Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)* Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)' PM1109 & 209 ... PM1110 & 210 ... PM1111 &211 PM1112 & 212 ... PM1113 & 213 PM1114 & 214 PM1115 & 215 ... PM1116 & 216 TRANSFER 186 GUIDE Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)* Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music (100Level)(2) Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music (100 Level)(2) Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)* Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)* Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music 140 or (100Level)(2)* Music 172 or 182 (2)* Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)* University of B.C. University of Victoria PM1117 & 217 Music 172 or 182 (2)* Music 140 or (100 Level)(2)* PM1118 & 218 Music 172 or 182 (2)* Music 140 or (100 Lev el)(2)* PM1119 & 219 Music 172 or 182 (2)' Music (100 Level)(2) PM1120 & 220 Music 107 (3)* Music 105 or (100 Level)*' PM1150 & 250 Music 171 or 181 (2)' PM1151 & 251 Music 171 or 181 (2)* PM1152 & 252 Music 171 or 181 (2)* PM1153 & 253 Music 171 oe 181 (2)* PM1154 & 254 Music 171 or 181 (2)' PM1155 & 255 Music 171 or 181 (2)* PM1156 & 256 Music 171 or 181 (2)' PM1157 & 257 Music 171 or 181 (2)' PM1158 & 258 Music 171 or 181 (2)' PM1159 & 259 Music 171 or 181 (2)' ... PM1160 & 260 Music 171 or 181 (2)' ... PM1161 & 261 Music 171 or 181 (2)* ... PM1162 & 262 Music 171 or 181 (2)' ... PM1163 & 263 Music 171 or 181 (2)* PM1164 & 264 Music 171 or 181 (2)* PM1165 & 265 Music 171 or 181 (2)* PM1166 & 266 Music 171 or 181 (2)* PM1167 & 267 Music 171 or 181 (2)' PM1168 & 268 Music 171 or 181 (2)* PM1169 & 269 Music 171 or 181 (2)' PMI 300 & 400 Music 272 or 282 (2)* Music 240 or(200Level)(2)' PMI 301 & 401 Music 272 or 282(2)' Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 302 & 402 Music 272 or 282(2)* Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)' PMI 303 & 403 Music 272 or 282 (2)' Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 304 & 404 Music 272 or 282 (2)* Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)' PMI 305 & 405 Music 272 or 282 (2)* Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 306 & 406 Music 272 or 282 (2)* Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 307 & 407 Music 272 or 282 (2)* Muaic 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 308 & 408 Music 272 or 282 (2)' Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 309 & 409 Music 272 or 282 (2)* Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 310 & 410 Music 272 or 282 (2)* Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 311 &411 Music 272 or 282 (2)' Music (200 Level) (2) PMI 312 & 412 Music 272 or 282 (2)' Music (200 Level) (2) Music 272 or 282 (2)* Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 314 & 414 Music 272 or 282 (2)* Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 315 & 415 Music 272 or 282 (2)' Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)' PMI 316 & 416 Music 272 or 282 (2)* Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 317 & 417 Music 272 or 282 (2)' Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)* PMI 318 & 418 Music 272 or 282 (2)' Music 240 or (200 Level)(2)' PMI 319 & 419 Music 272 or 282 (2)* Music (200 Level) (2) Capilano College PMI 313 & 413 Simon Fraser University ... ... ... TRANSFER GUIDE 187 Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B.C. University of Victoria PMI 320 & 420 Music 207 (3)' Music 205 or (200 Level)(2)** PMI 350 & 450 Music 271 or 281 (2)' PMI 351 & 451 Music 271 or 281 (21)* PMI 352 & 452 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 353 4453 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 354 & 454 Music 271 or 281 (2)' PMI 355 & 455 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 356 & 357 Music 271 or 281 *2)* PMI 357 & 457 Music 271 or 281 (2)' PMI 358 & 458 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 359 & 459 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 360 & 460 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 361 &461 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 362 & 462 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 363 & 463 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 364 & 464 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 365 & 465 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 366 & 466 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 367 & 467 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 368 & 468 Music 271 or 281 (2)* PMI 369 & 469 Music 271 or 281 (2)* 'Credit to be confirmed by examination for B.Music. * As determined by the Admissions and Auditioning Committee. ** To be determined after submission of scores and tapes. Psychology 100 Psychology (3) Psychology (1.5) Psychology (100 Level)(1.5) Psychology 101 Psychology (3) Psychology (1.5) Psychology (100 Level) (1.5) Psychology 100 & 101 Psychology 101 (3), Psychology (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 & 200 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology 100 & 201 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. Sse individual numbers. Psychology 100 & 204 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 (3) Psychology 100 & 205 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology 100 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology 200 Psychology 360 (3) Psychology (1.5)(precludes credit for Psychology 308) Psychology (200 Level)(1.5) Psychology 201 Psychology (3) Psychology (1.5)(precludes credit for Psychology 308) Psychology (200 Level)(1.5) Psychology 204 Psychology 351 (3) Psychology (1.5)(precludes credit for Psychology 301) Psychology (100 Level)(1.5) Psychology 205 Psychology 357 (3) Psychology (1.5) Psychology (200 Level)(1.5) Psychology 206 Psychology 355 (3) Psychology (1.5) Psychology (200 Level)(1.5) Psychology 220 Psychology 370 (3) Psychology' (1.5) Psychology (200 Level)(1.5) Psychology 222 Psychology 340 (3) Psychology* (1.5) Psychology (200 Level)(1.5) TRANSFER 188 GUIDE Capilano College Simon Fraser University University of B.C. University of Victoria Psychology 220 & 222 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Psychology 206*(3) Psychology 220 (3) 'Credit for Capilano Psychology 220 and/or 222 precludes credit for UBC Psychology 300 and/or 305 respectively. NOTE: Maximum advance credit permitted in Psychology is 9 units. Recreation 130 & 131 Kinesiology 143 (3) Recreation 160 Kinesiology 143 (3) Recreation 280 Kinesiology (3) Recreation 281 Kinesiology (3) Recreation 280 & 281 Kinesiology 343 (3) Kinesiology (3) Sociology 100 Sociology 101 Physical Education 103 (1.5) Physical Education (100 level) (1.5) S.A. 150 (3) Sociology (1.5) Sociology 100 (1.5) S.A. 250 (3) Sociology (1.5) Sociology 210 (1.5) Sociology 100 & 101 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Sociology 200 (3)(1st or 2nd year) These courses transfer separately. Sociology 200 S.A. 100(3) Sociology (1.5) Sociology 203 (1.5) Sociology 201 S.A. (3) Sociology (1.5) Sociology (200 Level) 1.5 Sociology 200 & 201 These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Sociology 210 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Sociology 210 S.A. 260 (3) Sociology (1.5) Sociology (200 Level)(1.5) Sociology 211 S.A. 280 (3) Sociology (1.5)(2nd year) Sociology (200 Level)(1.5) Sociology 222 S.A. (3) Sociology (1.5) Sociology (100 Level)(1.5) Sociology 223 Communications 230 (3) Sociology (1,5)(2nd year) Sociology (100 Level)(1.5) For further information on Sociology see Note #1 (page 173) Spanish 100 & 101 Spanish'(3) Spanish 100(3) Spanish 100 (3) Spanish 200 & 201 Spanish'(3) Spanish 200 (3) Spanish 260 (3) 'For information on the transferability of any one of the following Spanish courses see Note #3 (page 174) Thai 100 Thai 101 G.E. Thai 100 (3) G.E. 101 (3) Taken together Asian Languages 300 (3) PACI (100 level) (1.5) PACI (100 level) (1.5) Theatre 100 Theatre (Studio) Theatre (1.5) Theatre (100 Level)(1.5) Theatre 101 Theatre (Studio) Theatre (1.5) Theatre (100 Level)(1.5) Theatre 100 & 101 Fine & Performing Arts 151 (3) Theatre 160(3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Theatre 120 Theatre History (3) Theatre (1.5) Transfers with 121 Theatre 121 Theatre History (3) Theatre (1.5) Transfers with 120 Theatre 120 & 121 Fine & Performing Arts 150 (3) and Theatre History (3) Theatre 120 (3) Theatre 100 (3) Theatre 200 Assessed on individual basis Theatre (1.5) Theatre (200 Level)(1.5) Theatre 201 Assessed on individual basis Theatre (1.5) Theatre (200 Level)(1.5) TRANSFER GUIDE 189 Capilano College Simon Fraser University Women's Studies 100 Women's Studies 100 (3) Women's Studies 101 Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 104 Women's Studies (200 level) (3) Women's Studies 105 Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 106 Women's Studies (200 level) (3) Women's Studies 107 Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 110 Women's Studies 203 (3) Women's Studies 112 Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 121 Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 122 University of B.C. University of Victoria Women's Studies 200 B (1.5) Arts (1.5) English (100 Level)(1.5) Psychology (1.5) precludes credit for Psychology 320 Women's Studies (100 Level)(1.5) Women's Studies 200 (3) Anthropology (1.5)(1st or 2nd year) Women's Studies 200 A (1.5) Women's Studies 122 & Anthropology 120 S.A. 170(3), S A (3) or S.A. 170 (3), Women's Studies 200 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Anthropology 100 (3) Women's Studies 122 & Anthropology 121 S.A. 170 (3), S.A. (3) or S.A. 170(3), Women's Studies 200 (3) These courses transfer separately. See individual numbers. Anthropology 100 (3) Women's Studies 150 Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 151 Women's Studies (3) Women's Studies 192 Theatre (Studio)(2) Women's Studies 220 Women's Studies (200 level) (3) History (1.5) History (200 Level)(1.5) TRANSFER GUIDE 190 Index c A ACADEMIC POLICIES: Grades 11 Transcripts 11 Diplomas and Certificates 12 ACADEMIC SCHEDULE 4 ACADEMIC STUDIES/UNIVERSITY TRANSFER 35 For Individual subjects see C o u r s e Descriptions ACHIEVEMENT R E S O U R C E CENTRE: Lynnmour, Sechelt, S q u a m i s h 14 Credit/Non-Credit C o u r s e s 29,172 ADDING C O U R S E S 8 ADDRESSES & PHONE NUMBERS OF CAMPUSES 1 ADMINISTRATION Inside Back C o v e r ADMISSION: W h o is Eligible 5 Application Procedure 5 International Students 5 Howe S o u n d & Sunshine C o a s t 6 Dates - Career & Vocational 5 ADMISSIONS ADVISING 14 ADULT BASIC EDUCATION/ FOUNDATIONS 30 ADVISING C E N T R E & HOTLINE 14 A L T E R N A T I V E C A R E E R T R A I N I N G ....33 APPEAL OF GRADES 11 APPLIED INFORMATION TECH 82 AQUACULTURE 87 ART PROGRAMS: General Information 89 Studio Art Program 90 Clay & Textile Arts 95 Crafts Instructor Training 98 Graphic Design a n d Illustration 99 Foundations of Visual Communications 99 ASIA PACIFIC M A N A G E M E N T CO-OP 170 ATHLETICS 15 ATTENDANCE 10 AUDIT S T A T U S 10 A W A R D S - S e e Financial Aid B BOOKSTORE B.C. S T U D E N T A S S I S T A N C E BURSARIES BUSINESS MANAGEMENT PROGRAMS: General Information Administrative Management Financial Management Marketing Management Computer S y s t e m s Mgt International Business Accelerated Programs Part-Time Evening Certificate Programs RIA, C G A , C A Transfer 15 21 22 104 105 106 106 107 107 108 109 110 CAFETERIAS 16 C A L E N D A R F O R 1990/91 4 CANADIAN STUDIES SPECIALTY 37 C A N A S E A N INTERNATIONAL PROJECT 17 " C A P C O R N E R " - S e e Student Store CAREER RESOURCE CENTRE 16 CAREER/VOCATIONAL PROGRAMS: General Information 81 CERTIFICATE AND DIPLOMA REQUIREMENTS 12 CHALLENGING COURSES 10 CHANGE OF NAME OR ADDRESS 7 CHANGING REGISTRATION STATUS . 8 CHEATING & PLAGIARISM 13 COLLEGE BOARD & A D M I N I S T R A T I O N ...Inside Back C o v e r COLLEGE FOUNDATION 21 COMMUNICATIONS 120 COMPUTER SYSTEM MISUSE 13 CONTRACT EDUCATION 172 COPYRIGHT POLICY 13 CORRESPONDENCE COURSES - S e e Distance Education COUNSELLING 15 COURSE CHALLENGE PROCEDURE 10 C O U R S E D E S C R I P T I O N C O D E ... 35, 81 COURSE DESCRIPTIONS: A.R.C 29 Adult Basic Education 30 Anthropology 39 Applied Information Technology 82 Aquaculture 87 Art 89 Art History 40 A s i a Pacific Management C o - o p 170 Biology 42 Business Management 104 Chemistry 45 Commerce 47 Communications 120 Computing S c i e n c e 48 Dialogue C a n a d a - see French Economics 50 English 51 English as a S e c o n d Language 34 French 54 Geography 56 Geology 58 German 58 History 59 Japanese 60 Labour Studies 61 Legal Assistant 130 Legal Secretary 157 Mathematics 63 Media Resources 134 Medical Office Assistant 160 Merchandising Management 138 Music , 141 Music Therapy 145 Office Technology Philosophy Physics Political Studies Psychology Recreation Sociology Spanish Thai Theatre Tourism Management W o m e n ' s Studies W o r d Processing COURSE OVERLOAD C O U R S E VERIFICATION CREDIT FREE C O U R S E S - See Extension Programs & Services 152 67 70 71 73 162 74 76 77 77 167 80 155 7 8 D D E A N ' S LIST DIPLOMA AND CERTIFICATE REQUIREMENTS DISABLED STUDENT SERVICES DISTANCE EDUCATION O p e n Learning A g e n c y Knowledge Network DROPPING COURSES 27 12 16 16 16 8 E E A R L Y C H I L D H O O D E D U C A T I O N ....122 E . C . E . Post B a s i c Program 123 ENGLISH A S A S E C O N D LANGUAGE 34 ENGLISH ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS English Diagnostic Test 36 For International Students 5 English Proficiency 8 EXAMINATION W E E K 10 EXEMPTION STANDING 81 EXTENSION P R O G R A M S AND SERVICES: G e n e r a l Information 172 Community Music S c h o o l 172 F e e s Policy 9 Contract Education 172 Co-sponsorship of Activities 172 F F A C U L T Y - Refer to specific Programs and C o u r s e A r e a s FEES Deadlines for Payment 8 Conditions of Registration 8 Non-Registration 9 F e e Waivers for Seniors 9 Refunds 9 F e e s Policy, Extension Programs 9 Student Activity F e e s 8, 20 F I R S T AID A N D H E A L T H 16 FITNESS CENTRE 16 FOOD SERVICE WORKER PROGRAM 127 INDEX FOOD SERVICES FOUNDATIONS OF VISUAL C O M M U N I C A T I O N S - S e e Art 16 G G E N E R A L C O U R S E I N F O R M A T I O N .. GRADES G R A D E POINT A V E R A G E GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS 10 11 11 11 H HANDICAPPED STUDENT SERVICES - S e e Disabled Student S e r v i c e s HEALTH AND HUMAN S E R V I C E S PROGRAMS Long Term C a r e Aide 126 F o o d Service Workers 127 Working with the Mentally Fragile ... 127 H E A L T H S E R V I C E S & F I R S T AID 16 HIGH S C H O O L E Q U I V A L E N C Y - See Adult Basic Education H O L I D A Y S IN 1990/91 4 H O W E S O U N D C E N T R E - See Squamish Campus H U M A N I T I E S DIVISION 35 I "I" G R A D E S IDENTIFICATION C A R D INSTRUCTIONAL S E R V I C E S INTERNATIONAL EDUCATION Application for Admission General Information International Student Liaison International E x c h a n g e s International Projects A s i a Pacific Management C o - o p 11 6 14 5 17 17 17 17 170 J J O B P L A C E M E N T - S e e Student Employment INDEX 192 MATH LEARNING C E N T R E MEDIA R E S O U R C E S P R O G R A M MEDICAL OFFICE ASSISTANT PROGRAM MERCHANDISING MANAGEMENT M E R I T LIST MUSIC P R O G R A M S : General Information Commercial Music Bachelor of Music Transfer Music Therapy 14 134 138 25 120 120 122 123 N N A T U R A L S C I E N C E S DIVISION NEWSPAPER, STUDENT NON-CREDIT P R O G R A M S 35 19 172 0 OFFICE ADMINISTRATION: General Information 152 Office Technology Program 152 Accelerated Office Training 154 Information Processing 155 Legal Secretarial Program 157 Medical Office Assistant 160 OUTDOOR RECREATION MANAGEMENT General Information 162 Outdoor Recreation M a n a g e m e n t . . 162 Wilderness Leadership 163 OVERLOAD OF C O U R S E S 7 P PARKING PLAGIARISM & CHEATING PREPARATORY PROGRAMS PRIORITY S E Q U E N C E F O R REGISTRATION 19 13 28 6 R L LABOUR STUDIES P R O G R A M LANDSCAPE HORTICULTURE PROGRAM LEARNING ASSISTANCE - See Achievement R e s o u r c e Centre LEGAL ASSISTANT P R O G R A M LEGAL SECRETARY PROGRAM LIBRARY Lynnmour, Sechelt, S q u a m i s h L O A N S - S e e Financial Aid LONG TERM CARE LOST AND FOUND LYNNMOUR CAMPUS: Address & Phone M 61 128 114 135 18 126 19 1 RECORDS, STUDENT REFUND OF FEES REGISTRATION: How & When to Register Dates Changing Registration Status REPEATING A C O U R S E 13 9 7 7 8 11 s SCHOLARSHIPS SCHOLASTIC AWARDS SCIENCE: GENERAL INFORMATION SECHELT CAMPUS ADDRESS & PHONE NUMBER SELF STUDY C O U R S E S S E N I O R CITIZEN F E E W A I V E R S SERVICES SEXUAL HARASSMENT 24 22 37 1 28 9 14 13 S O C I A L S C I E N C E S DIVISION 35 SPECIAL NEEDS SERVICES 14 SPECIAL PROGRAMS 170 S P O R T S - S e e Athletics SQUAMISH CAMPUS A D D R E S S & PHONE NUMBER 1 S T U D E N T E M P L O Y M E N T C E N T R E ... 19 S T U D E N T IDENTIFICATION C A R D 6 STUDENT LOANS 21 STUDENT NEWSPAPER 19 STUDENT NUMBER 6 STUDENT RECORDS 13 STUDENT SERVICES 14 STUDENT STORE 20 STUDENT SOCIETY 20 S U N S H I N E C O A S T - S e e Sechelt T THAI TOURISM MANAGEMENT PROGRAM TOWING TRANSCRIPTS T R A N S F E R GUIDE TRANSER TO AND FROM O T H E R INSTITUTIONS: Academic Career TUITION - S e e F e e s 77 167 19 11 173 35 81 u UNIVERSITY T R A N S F E R / A C A D E M I C PROGRAMS 35 UNIVERSITY T R A N F E R GUIDE 173 V VISITORS 10 w WAIT LISTS 8 W E L C O M E T O C A P I L A N O C O L L E G E ...3 WILDERNESS LEADERSHIP - See Outdoor Recreation WITHDRAWING F R O M A C O U R S E 8 WOMEN'S STUDIES SPECIALTY 37 W O R D P R O C E S S I N G - S e e Office Administration Programs WRITING C E N T R E 20 Governance and Administration Capilano College Board The Board of the College, established in conformity with the College and Institute Act, consists of eleven members appointed by the Minister of Advanced Education and Job Training. These members serve as trustees of the College. The Board is responsible for governing the College, and in that capacity determines the policy by which the College operates and reviews the performance of the College and its component parts. Traditionally, the Board meets monthly to fulfill its statutory responsibilities and to conduct its general business. Nancy Farley, Chairperson Corey Coyle Graham Crockart Daniel Devlin Allen LaCroix Jack McKeown Robert McMillin Peter Meredith Arthur Tinker Robin Wilson Board Representatives Joy Smith, Staff Union (OTEU Local 378) Dr. Robert Camfield, Faculty Association (CCFA) Plus two representatives named by the Student Society Administration David Brewer, R.C.P.P.; Director of Supplies & Services Randi Duke, B.A., M.A.; Resource Development Officer Steve Gallagher, B. A.; Manager of Computer Support Services Garry Gatley; Director of Personnel Services Franklin C. Gelin, B.A., M.A., Ph.D.; Dean of Academic Studies Beverly Greene, B.I.D.; Director of Public Relations Beverley A. Harnett, B.A. Bus. E c , B.Ed., M.Ed.; Associate Dean, Career/Vocational Programs Geoff Holter, B.A., M.A.; Director of Employee Relations Ken Hughes, Facilities Supervisor Douglas K. Jardine, B.A.Sc. (Hons.) Ph.D.; President Jon L. Jessiman, B.A., LL.B., Dip. Int. Law, LL.M., LL.D., D.Sc. Jur.; Associate Dean, Student and Instructional Services Marie Jessup, C.G.A.; Bursar Greg F. Lee, B.Sc., M.Sc., Ph.D.; Dean, Career/Vocational Programs Janet E.M. Morris, Dip. Management; Administrator, Office of the Deans Alan Ng, B.Sc., C.G.A.; Comptroller John Potts, B.A., M.P.A.; Associate Dean, Career/Vocational Programs Alan P.D. Smith, B.A., M. A.; Director of Planning Robert W. Turner, B.A., B.Ed., M.Ed., Ed.D.; Dean, Student and Instructional Services John Waters, B.A. (Hons.), M.A.; Associate Dean, Academic Studies Frieda Wiebe, B.A. (Hons.), M.L.S., M.B.A.; Head Librarian David Woolley, B.Sc.; Registrar Frequently Called Numbers Admissions Adult Basic Education Achievement Resource Centre (ARC) Advising Centre Hotline Art Department Bookstore Business Management C A N A S E A N Program Counselling Daycare Deans: Academic Career/Vocational Instructional Services Early Childhood Education Extension Programs Financial Aid Humanities 984-4913 984-4971 984-4945 984-4990 984-4911 984-4972 984-4960 984-1706 984-4968 984-4950 984-4921 984-4924 984-4922 984-4947 984-4901 984-4966 984-4957 International Office international Student Liaison Library Maintenance Media Resources Music Department Natural Sciences Nurse Office Administration Outdoor Recreation Personnel President Public Relations Purchasing Registration Social Sciences Student Employment Student Society Switchboard / Reception 984-4975 984-4968 984-4944 984-4963 984-4940 984-4951 984-4955 984-4964 984-4959 984-4947 984-4929 984-4925 984-4903 984-4904 984-4913 984-4953 984-4965 984-4969 986-1911 Capilano College 2055 Purcell Way North Vancouver British Columbia V7J 3H5 Phone 986-1911